To  delete a parts order from the Create or Edit Parts Order page: Click the Delete button. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm, or click the  No  button to close the window without confirming. To delete a parts order, the order must be in "New" or "Open" status.

Activate/Deactivate Tracing Page Overview Purpose Use the Activate/Deactivate Tracing page to activate tracing and change the logging level. Description The content area of the Activate/Deactivate Tracing page displays the following sections: Logger Name - Enter the name of the logger. Different logger names are defined by the support team. Logger Level -  Change the logging level if a different type of logging is desired. Each logger name has a default level assigned to it. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Activate/Deactivate Tracing page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Activate or Deactivate Tracing Change the Logging Level Page Preview

DBS  only allows you to SUBMIT your financial statements for processing. If you need to make changes to your financial statement, make them in your DMS and transmit the corrected statement to DBS  for submission. Submit a Financial Statement for Processing Note : If DBS receives multiple statements from the DMS, and a statement has not yet been submitted for processing, only the most recent statement will have the "Click here to Submit" option available. To submit a financial statement for processing: Select the financial statement you want to submit. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Click here to Submit menu option. Note : DBS submits the financial statement to the corporate financial management system and displays a processing message. Once transmitted (this takes approximately 30 seconds), the submission status displayed in the Status column changes to "Submitted". Note : The last status for the monthly statement should ALWAYS be "Accepted" or "Accepted with warning". Note : See the Step by Step tab in full help for additional information about the submission statuses. After you submit a financial statement for processing, be sure to review the status of your submission to ensure that the financial statement has been accepted by the corporate financial management system. Click the Refresh button to view the updated financial statement status.

Create Notification Page Overview The Notifications function is currently disabled per Nissan request. You can create and edit notifications, but they will not be sent unless the functionality is restored. Purpose Use the Create Notification page to create a new notification or edit an existing notification. Description The content area of the Create Notification page displays the following sections: Settings - Contains the Settings drop-down menu so you can select the type of notification which is email, SMS or both Recipients - Allows you to select who should receive the notification Header Information  - Contains the information that is required and common for both emails and SMS notifications. It includes the title, date to send, time to send, and required approval check box. Email Content - Contains information that is specific to email notifications. This area only appears if you select email as the type of notification. SMS Content - Contains information specific to SMS notifications. This area only appears if you select SMS as the type of notification. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Create Notification page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Create or Edit a Notification Select Internal User by Hierarchy Select Internal User by Geography Select Dealer User by Hierarchy Select Dealer User by Geography Select Dealer User by Input a Dealer Create or Edit a Notification Select Internal User by Hierarchy Select Internal User by Geography Select Dealer User by Hierarchy Select Dealer User by Geography Select Dealer User by Input a Dealer   Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Create Notification page. Create or Edit a Notification Workflow Page Preview

Note : See the Step by Step tab in full help for additional information on unwind processing rules,  results, and schedule. To unwind a vehicle sale: Select a vehicle. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the  Unwind RDR menu option. Note : You can only unwind RDRs with a status of "Retailed" or "Unwind Refused". From the confirmation window, click Unwind . Note : If the RDR was submitted more than 90 days ago, contact your regional office DOM or NNA to unwind the vehicle. From the drop-down list, select a reason for the unwind request. Click Unwind . Note : The Status column on the RDR History page displays the current status of the RDR during processing; DBS updates the status again after processing is complete. Note : If DBS rejects the unwind request, you can view the reason in the Unwind Reason/Date column for the selected vehicle. You cannot unwind a vehicle on the same day an RDR is submitted for that vehicle. If the RDR date is greater than 90 days, you must contact NNA before the vehicle can be unwound. After an RDR is submitted, the RDR History Status shows "Unwind Pending" The next day, if the host accepted the Unwind, the following occurs: - RDR History Status shows "Unwound" - The unwind reason displays in the Unwind Reason/Date column - VIN is returned to vehicle inventory - Location Status shows "Dealer Inventory" The next day, if the host rejected the Unwind, the following occurs: - RDR History Status shows "Retailed" - RDR Unwind Reason/Date field shows a rejection message - No change to vehicle inventory You cannot unwind a vehicle on month end. Unwinds submitted on month end will be processed on the next day.

View Overview Information   Manage Host Report Page Overview Perform Tasks About the Manage Host Report Page Add a New Host Report on the Manage Host Report Page Edit a Host Report on the Manage Host Report Page Filter the Manage Host Report Page Perform Common DBS Tasks

To  view the DBS  system requirements: Scroll to the bottom of the Home screen or any DBS application screen. Click the  Support  link. Review the System Requirements section to learn about the minimum hardware and software configuration required to run DBS .

To  access the Edit Standard Operation Group page: Select a code. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Edit Code  option. Note : The Edit Standard Operation Group page opens.

Parts Return Summary Page Overview Purpose Use the Parts Return Summary page to quickly review, approve, or reject parts returns in one convenient location. The Parts Return Summary is available only to PDC users. Description The content area of the Parts Return Summary page displays the following sections: Summary Graph  - The summary graph section displays a chart with information about the number of parts returns in each status. You can click any of the status columns in the graph to quickly filter the summary display below.  Filter - The filter section allows you to apply filter criteria to reduce the amount of data displayed on the page. Summary - The summary section allows you to view the detailed parts return information and take action on those returns which have been submitted. You may view the full return detail by clicking the return number hyperlink, or use the Action icon to approve or reject a return. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the xx page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Approve a Parts Return on the Parts Return Summary Page Approve All Returns on the Parts Return Summary Page Export Information on the Parts Return Summary Page Filter the Parts Return Summary Page Reject a Parts Return on the Parts Return Summary Page Reject all Returns on the Parts Return Summary Page Search for Information on the Parts Return Summary Page View Parts Return Details from the Parts Return Summary Page View the Parts Return Summary Graph Page Preview

This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. To complete the Regions section of a study: Select each region which should be included in the study, and then use the center buttons as necessary to customize the Selected Regions list. Note : The repair orders included in a study with a region selection are determined by the dealer location where the vehicle is serviced. When you have selected all desired regions, click the Save button.

To filter the Campaign Report page: Note : This page is available to internal users only. To quickly limit the results of the display to vehicles at a specific dealership, in the Dealer field, type the dealer number, or click the Search icon to search by dealer name. Note : If you make additional selections from the hierarchy drop-down lists, your dealer name/number search will only produce results if the dealership falls within the selected hierarchy. From the Affiliate , Division , Region , Area ,   and District  drop-down lists, select the desired information to limit the search results by hierarchy. By default, the Campaign Report page displays information for new vehicles. If desired, from the Vehicle Type drop-down list, select the "Used" vehicle type to display campaign information for used vehicles. To limit the search results to a specific campaign, in the Campaign ID field, type the unique campaign identifier. To limit the search results to display only those vehicles which should not be sold until the campaign repairs are complete, select "Yes" from the Stop Sale drop-down list. To limit the search results to display only those vehicles involved in campaigns where the campaign parts are restricted, select "Yes" from the Parts Restriction drop-down list. Click the Search icon. If more than one page of results displays, the navigation section of the page displays page numbers and arrows you can use to navigate from page to page, and the Go to Page field, where you can type the page number you want to view. Click the Go button to view the page number entered in the Go to Page field.

Note : Complete the Finance section for lease sales only. To  complete the Finance section of an RDR: From the Finance Type drop-down list, select "Lease". In the  Term(months) field, type the number of months in the lease. In the Payment Amount field, type the monthly payment amount in dollars and cents. In the Financing Source field, type the name of the bank or financial institution which provided the lease financing. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. A  will display for any missing or incorrect data. Correct all errors before submitting the RDR. Note : When ready, click the Submit button to submit the RDR. Click here for more information.

To open a study to view the results: As desired, use the Filter By section to filter the list of studies to make it easier to locate the study you want to view. In the ID column, click the desired study ID link. Note : The One Study Result page opens that contains information about the study. Click here for more information.  

To  print a warranty claim summary: Click the Print button. Note : DBS displays the File Download window. Click the Open button to open the file now, or click the Save button to save the file to your computer. Note : If you select Open, the Warranty Claim Summary Report opens in a PDF file. Use the Printer icon available in the toolbar and proceed as you normally would to print a file.

System Error Page Overview Purpose Use the System Error page to supply information necessary for error resolution to the Dealer Business System (DBS)  help desk. Description The content area of the System Error page displays the following sections: Steps to Reproduce the issue - Use the text area provided to document the steps that you were performing in the system just before you received the error message.When you click Submit, the information you provided is automatically forwarded to the application support teams for resolution. Stack Trace - Use the Show Stack Trace section to provide information to the DBS Help desk about the system error. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the System Error page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Report System Errors Show the Stack Trace Page Preview

My Profile Page Overview Purpose Use the My Profile page to change your personal settings for language, time zone, date format, and cell phone information. Description The content area of the My Profile page displays the following sections: Navigation Pane - Lists all sections on the page. In this pane, you can select a section and move to it immediately. You can also collapse and expand all sections. User Information  - Appears at the top of the page and contains the personal settings that you can change. Permission Information - Displays permission information as read-only fields that you can view to determine what you have access to in DBS . Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the My Profile page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Manage My Profile Manage My Profile Page Preview

change graphic to menu not landing page Office Introduction Description The Office application within the Dealer Business System (DBS)  provides access for dealer users to view the submission status of their financial statements, link to the Alpha Omega Financial Statement System, and print the Financial Statement Status page. The Help menu, which appears on the left-hand side of your screen, provides access to more information about the Office application. For overviews of the Office application pages and the tasks you can perform on each of them, click  Pages .   For interactive workflows of tasks performed in the Office application, click Workflows . For instructions on how to perform tasks in the Office application, click Tasks . For information on how to view and generate reports, click Reports .  Click here for information on how to use the Office menu.

View Warranty Claim Page Overview Purpose Use the View Warranty Claim page to view decisions made on a warranty claim. On this page, you can also add a new claim line to a warranty claim and access the National Service History (NSH) page. Note : You can access the View Warranty Claim page from the View Claim option in the Action menu on the Manage Warranty Claim page. The View Claim option is available only for claims that are in Submitted, Suspended-Region, Suspended-National, Denied, Approved, or Approved-Adjusted status. This option is not available for claims that are in New, Open, Error, Warning, Suspended-Dealer, or Rejected status. For these claims, you can open them in Edit mode. Description The content area of the View Warranty Claim page displays the following sections: Quick Jump menu -  Appears on the left-hand side of the page. The Quick Jump menu allows you to jump from section to section without scrolling. Summary -  Displays warranty claim data and the claims summary data such as claim status, VIN, odometer, Repair Order (RO) number, and so on. Also displays the total claim amount that was requested, determined, and adjusted. The requested, determined, and adjusted fields display only after a warranty claim has been processed. You cannot edit the information in these fields. Claims Detail Data -  Displays sections of detailed data for the warranty claim, parts, operations, expenses, comments, customer, claim activity, and history. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the View Warranty Claim page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Print Warranty Claim View Dealer Claim Administration Limits View NSH View Repair Order Print Warranty Claim View NSH View Repair Order   Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the View Warranty Claim page. View Warranty Claim Workflow Page Preview

To view a Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) from the Service Dashboard, from the Service tab, select EDS: Service Dashboard : On the applicable row, move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the TSB option. Note : The TSB Detail window opens. View the list of TSBs. To view a specific TSB, click the desired link. Note : The View TSB PDF File window opens. To close the View TSB PDF File window, click the Close button. To close the TSB Detail window, click the Close button. If an option is not available, that option is not displayed.

View Overview Information Office Landing Page Overview Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks View Alerts View Announcements and Other News

To export warranty claims information: Select the desired radio button to list the corresponding warranty claims. Select the date range and/or filter to refine the list of claims further. Click the  Export button. Select Excel ® . From the File Download window, save the file to your local drive. You can filter, sort, and print the data if you export the warranty claims summary information to Microsoft ®  Excel ® .

To re-run the translation process for standard operation codes: Click the Re-Run button. Note: The Re-Run Confirmation window opens. Click the  Re-Run button to re-run the translation, or click the Cancel button to close without re-running the translation. Note : For Repair Orders (ROs) up to 180 days old, the system re-translates all RO lines that are flagged for re-run or that have an unknown operation code. The system updates the re-translated RO lines in the National Service History (NSH) RO table with a standard operation code and the re-translation date. Note : The system automatically flags lines for re-run when codes are modified or deleted. You can flag an RO line for re-run on the Create or Edit Standard Operation Code page.   Use Report Writer to create a report of the NSH RO Table to review the re-translation results.

Note : This task applies to internal users only. To view the  Automatic Stock Replenishment (ASR) Return Performance summary: To filter the list, from the Return Year drop-down list, select the year. From the Region drop-down list, select a region. From the  District drop-down list, select a district. In the  Dealer Number  field, type a number. Note : To search for a dealer, click the Lookup icon. Click the Search icon. Note : The list is updated to match your selections. View the ASR Return Performance summary.

To  view the position summary: Show the section, if collapsed. Note : To show a section, click the + icon in the section header. Use the function tree to expand or collapse the nodes, as desired. Note : To expand all items in the section, click the expand all link. Note : The active permissions contain a check mark. To return to the Position Summary page, click the Cancel button.

Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for copying, transferring, or deleting all of a user's report definitions in Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow

Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for copying, transferring, or deleting all of a user's report definitions in Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow

Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for copying, transferring, or deleting all of a user's report definitions in Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow

Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for copying, transferring, or deleting all of a user's report definitions in Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow

Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for copying, transferring, or deleting all of a user's report definitions in Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow

MRW: Internal user To  access the Custom Search Group page to add, delete, or edit a custom group: Click the  Compare Group icon. Note : The application displays the Custom Search Group page.

Report Writer Generate Page Overview (Dealer User) Purpose Use the Report Writer Generate page to generate reports. Description The content area of the Report Writer Generate page displays the following sections: Dealers  - Allows you to select a dealer (Dealer users only) Search by -  Allows you to search for records that match your criteria (Dealer users only) Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Report Writer Generate page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Generate a Report (Dealer Users) Generate a Report (Dealer Users) Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Generate Report page. Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview

Report Writer Generate Page Overview (Dealer User) Purpose Use the Report Writer Generate page to generate reports. Description The content area of the Report Writer Generate page displays the following sections: Dealers  - Allows you to select a dealer (Dealer users only) Search by -  Allows you to search for records that match your criteria (Dealer users only) Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Report Writer Generate page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Generate a Report (Dealer Users) Generate a Report (Dealer Users) Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Generate Report page. Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview

Report Writer Generate Page Overview (Dealer User) Purpose Use the Report Writer Generate page to generate reports. Description The content area of the Report Writer Generate page displays the following sections: Dealers  - Allows you to select a dealer (Dealer users only) Search by -  Allows you to search for records that match your criteria (Dealer users only) Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Report Writer Generate page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Generate a Report (Dealer Users) Generate a Report (Dealer Users) Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Generate Report page. Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview

Report Writer Generate Page Overview (Dealer User) Purpose Use the Report Writer Generate page to generate reports. Description The content area of the Report Writer Generate page displays the following sections: Dealers  - Allows you to select a dealer (Dealer users only) Search by -  Allows you to search for records that match your criteria (Dealer users only) Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Report Writer Generate page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Generate a Report (Dealer Users) Generate a Report (Dealer Users) Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Generate Report page. Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview

Report Writer Generate Page Overview (Dealer User) Purpose Use the Report Writer Generate page to generate reports. Description The content area of the Report Writer Generate page displays the following sections: Dealers  - Allows you to select a dealer (Dealer users only) Search by -  Allows you to search for records that match your criteria (Dealer users only) Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Report Writer Generate page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Generate a Report (Dealer Users) Generate a Report (Dealer Users) Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Generate Report page. Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview

To add a link for the current page to your My Links list: Move your cursor over the  My Links link. Click the Add This Page  link. Click the  Yes button to add the link to your My Links list, or click the  No button to close the message without adding the link. Links you add from "Create", "Edit" or "View" pages will point to the relevant summary page for the task. For example, if you try to add a link to the Modify User page, the resulting link actually points to the User Summary page.

To  view privacy information: Scroll to the bottom of the Home screen or any DBS application screen. Click the Privacy Policy link. Review the privacy information. Note : Additional Nissan privacy information can be found here .

Custom Search Group Page Overview Note: The Custom Search Group Page applies to internal users only. Purpose Use the Custom Search Group page to add, edit, or delete a custom group when viewing parts metrics. You can also view, add, or remove dealers in a custom group. Description The content area of the Custom Search Group page displays the following sections: Text Entry Fields  - Allow you to type a custom group name or a dealer code + Button  - Allows you to add a custom group name Existing Search Groups - Allows you to view, edit, or delete existing search groups, if applicable, through the use of an action menu Add Button  - Allows you to add a dealer based on a dealer code you specify Available and Selected Dealer Lists -  Show available and selected dealers  >> and << Buttons - Allow you to move dealers from one list to another Dealer Name or Dealer Code Links - Allow you to view the list of dealers by name only or by dealer code and name Available Dealer Name Index - Allows you to view the list of dealers based on the first letter of the dealer's name You can perform the following tasks on the Custom Search Group page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Add a Custom Search Group Delete a Custom Search Group Edit a Custom Search Group View a Custom Search Group   Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Custom Search Group page. Manage Custom Search Group Workflow Page Preview

Privacy Policy Page Overview Purpose Use the Privacy Policy page to learn how Nissan values and protects the private information contained within the Dealer Business System (DBS) .  Description The content area of the Privacy Policy page displays the following sections: Privacy Policy Information - The Privacy Policy Information section displays information about the commitment Nissan has made to protect the private information contained within DBS .  Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Privacy Policy page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. View Privacy Information View Privacy Information Page Preview

64786A2F-9D27-4DBA-8F44-5C03B186614E\Retailed with Open Campaign Report Reference Guide v2n.pdf

To change a dealer operation code: Select the row for the code you want to change. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the  Edit Code  option. Note : DBS places the Dealer Op Code Type and Standard Op Code/Description columns for the row into edit mode. From the  Dealer Op Code Type drop-down menu, select the desired option. From the  Standard Op Code/Description drop-down menu, select the desired option. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the row you just modified. From the Action menu, select the Save Code option. Note : DBS places a "Y" in the Re-Run Flag column indicating you can re-run the translation process to update DBS with the information you changed.

View Overview Information   Express Entry Warranty Claim Page Overview Add a New Claim Line on an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Claim Information Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Summary Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Parts Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Operations Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Expenses Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Comments Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Customer Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim View the Claim Activity Section of a Claim View the Claim History Section of a Claim Create an Express Entry Warranty Claim Delete a Warranty Claim Use the Quick Jump Menu View a Repair Order from the Express Entry Warranty Claim Page View National Service History from the Express Entry Warranty Claim Page Add a New Claim Line on an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Claim Information Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Summary Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Parts Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Operations Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Expenses Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Comments Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Customer Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim View the Claim Activity Section of a Claim View the Claim History Section of a Claim Create an Express Entry Warranty Claim Delete a Warranty Claim Use the Quick Jump Menu View a Repair Order from the Express Entry Warranty Claim Page View National Service History from the Express Entry Warranty Claim Page

Set Up User Permissions Quick Reference Guide The Set Up User Permissions Quick Reference Guide provide instructions for DBS  dealer administrators on setting up user permissions for your dealership. Click here to access the Set Up User Permissions Quick Reference Guide.

Set Up User Permissions Quick Reference Guide The Set Up User Permissions Quick Reference Guide provide instructions for DBS  dealer administrators on setting up user permissions for your dealership. Click here to access the Set Up User Permissions Quick Reference Guide.

To complete the Study Type section of a study: By default, all studies are of the "General" study type. If desired, select an alternate study type. Note : "Hold" studies are those studies in which Product Engineering wants the dealer to cease all repair activities and hold the vehicle until an engineer can contact the dealer to discuss the issue. Matches to "Hold" studies alert the dealer and engineers via the Service Dashboard. Note : "Informational" studies are used by Product Engineering to relay repair information to the dealer. This can include specific TSBs that may address a repair incident and/or specific instructions that Product Engineering wants to relay to the technician. Matches to "Informational" studies alert the dealer via the Service Dashboard. In the Dealer Message field, type a message that will be displayed to a dealer when a vehicle matches the study criteria. Note : The Dealer Message field is required for "Hold" and "Informational" studies and is optional for "General" studies. Click the Save button.

To change the due date for a single dealer parts return: In the Dealer List section, select the row for the dealer you want to change. Note : The Return Schedule List section on the right updates to display the return schedule for the selected dealer. In the Return Schedule List section, move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for parts return schedule you want to change. From the Action menu, select the Change Return Due Da te option. In the Change Return Due Date field, use the calendar to select the new parts return due date. Note : The parts return due date is the date by which a dealer is expected to have submitted the scheduled parts return. Click Save .

Campaign Visibility in Vehicle Inventory Quick Reference Guide The Campaign Visibility in Vehicle Inventory Quick Reference Guide provides instructions for how to filter your vehicle inventory to display vehicles with campaign information and display the campaign details for a selected vehicle.  Click here to download the Campaign Visibility in Vehicle Inventory Quick Reference Guide.

Campaign Visibility in Vehicle Inventory Quick Reference Guide The Campaign Visibility in Vehicle Inventory Quick Reference Guide provides instructions for how to filter your vehicle inventory to display vehicles with campaign information and display the campaign details for a selected vehicle.  Click here to download the Campaign Visibility in Vehicle Inventory Quick Reference Guide.

Campaign Visibility in Vehicle Inventory Quick Reference Guide The Campaign Visibility in Vehicle Inventory Quick Reference Guide provides instructions for how to filter your vehicle inventory to display vehicles with campaign information and display the campaign details for a selected vehicle.  Click here to download the Campaign Visibility in Vehicle Inventory Quick Reference Guide.

View Parts Order Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing a submitted parts order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View Parts Order Workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow

This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. To complete the VIN Range section of a study: In the Start field, type the last six digits of the VIN for the first vehicle in the VIN range. In the End field, type the last six digits of the VIN for the last vehicle in the VIN range. Click the Save button.

View Dealer Information or Permissions Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing dealer information or permissions. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View Dealer Information or Permissions Workflow. Edit Dealer Information Workflow Edit Dealer Permissions Workflow (NNA Only)

To view vehicle inventory: View the list of vehicles. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. If multiple pages exist,  click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow to navigate from page to page. To view a specific page, in the Go to Page field, type a page number, and then click the Go button. If a vehicle has a note, a red "*" appears beside the stock number. Move your cursor over the exterior color code or the interior color code to view a description of the color. The default sort order for this page is: Model Line (ascending), Model Year (ascending), and then Days in Stock (descending).

Create or Edit Announcement Page Overview Purpose Use the Create or Edit Announcement page to create or edit regional and national announcements. Description The content area of the Create or Edit Announcement page displays the following sections: Announcement Details - Allows you to type and format the announcement text and determine the announcement priority and dates Settings - Allows you to determine the page where the announcement will display, level of distribution, and display language for the announcement Image Upload - Allows you to upload two images to display with the announcement if it will appear in the center announcement display area Recipients - Allows you to select the internal and dealer users who will be able to view the announcement Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Create or Edit Announcement page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Create or Edit an Announcement Select Recipients Create or Edit an Announcement Select Recipients   Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Create or Edit Announcement page. Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow Page Preview

Note : The adjustment reason entries appear in a drop-down list that is displayed to authorized users when they adjust the accrual amount of a parts return. The instructions below provide the steps required to add a new adjustment reason. To view the steps for editing or deleting an adjustment reason, click the Step by Step tab in full help. To add an accrual amount adjustment reason: At the bottom of the Manage Part Return Schedule page, click the  Adjustment Reason Maintenance button. Note : The Adjustment Reason window appears. In the blank field at the top of the window, type the adjustment reason name. Click the Add icon.

To  access the Copy User Permissions page: Select the user whose permissions you want to copy. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Copy Permissions  option. Note : The Copy User Permissions page appears.

Study Dashboard Workflow Note: The Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing Early Detection System (EDS) studies that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the  Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow View One Study Result Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow

replaced graphic To create, modify, or replicate a report definition: Complete the Report Definition section of the Report page. Click here for more information. Note : You must complete the Report Definition section when creating a report. This is the only required section. If needed, complete each of the following optional sections on the Report page. Complete the Selection Criteria section. Click here for more information. Complete the Sort Criteria section. Click here for more information. Complete the Total/Sum Criteria section. Click here for more information. Complete the Printing Criteria section. Click here for more information. Click the  Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Click the Save and Generate button to save your changes and view the report. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Note : The report is added to the user's reports list. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.

replaced graphic To create, modify, or replicate a report definition: Complete the Report Definition section of the Report page. Click here for more information. Note : You must complete the Report Definition section when creating a report. This is the only required section. If needed, complete each of the following optional sections on the Report page. Complete the Selection Criteria section. Click here for more information. Complete the Sort Criteria section. Click here for more information. Complete the Total/Sum Criteria section. Click here for more information. Complete the Printing Criteria section. Click here for more information. Click the  Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Click the Save and Generate button to save your changes and view the report. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Note : The report is added to the user's reports list. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.

replaced graphic To create, modify, or replicate a report definition: Complete the Report Definition section of the Report page. Click here for more information. Note : You must complete the Report Definition section when creating a report. This is the only required section. If needed, complete each of the following optional sections on the Report page. Complete the Selection Criteria section. Click here for more information. Complete the Sort Criteria section. Click here for more information. Complete the Total/Sum Criteria section. Click here for more information. Complete the Printing Criteria section. Click here for more information. Click the  Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Click the Save and Generate button to save your changes and view the report. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Note : The report is added to the user's reports list. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.

replaced graphic To create, modify, or replicate a report definition: Complete the Report Definition section of the Report page. Click here for more information. Note : You must complete the Report Definition section when creating a report. This is the only required section. If needed, complete each of the following optional sections on the Report page. Complete the Selection Criteria section. Click here for more information. Complete the Sort Criteria section. Click here for more information. Complete the Total/Sum Criteria section. Click here for more information. Complete the Printing Criteria section. Click here for more information. Click the  Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Click the Save and Generate button to save your changes and view the report. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Note : The report is added to the user's reports list. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.

replaced graphic To create, modify, or replicate a report definition: Complete the Report Definition section of the Report page. Click here for more information. Note : You must complete the Report Definition section when creating a report. This is the only required section. If needed, complete each of the following optional sections on the Report page. Complete the Selection Criteria section. Click here for more information. Complete the Sort Criteria section. Click here for more information. Complete the Total/Sum Criteria section. Click here for more information. Complete the Printing Criteria section. Click here for more information. Click the  Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Click the Save and Generate button to save your changes and view the report. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Note : The report is added to the user's reports list. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.

To  view the parts order: Review the list of parts in the order. To sort the displayed information, click a column title. To close the page, click the Close button.

Emulate a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number Page Overview Purpose The emulate a dealer function allows internal users to view the dealer-level information available to a dealership or individual user as that user would see it if they were logged into DBS . Authorized internal users will experience a view-only experience of what the user sees in order to assist in troubleshooting issues with permissions or DBS  functions. The Emulate a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page allows the authorized corporate user to select the dealer or individual they wish to emulate. Description The content area of the Emulate a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page displays the following section: Choose one of the three available options below  - Allows you to search for a dealer based on the hierarchy (affiliate, division, region, area, district, and dealer), dealer number, or dealer user. DBS Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Search a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Emulate a Dealership or User Emulate a Dealership or User Page Preview

View RFC Detail Page Overview Purpose Use the View RFC Detail page to view RFC detail including carrier information and RFC part details. You can view RFC Detail from the View RFC Detail page. You must first search for and locate the desired RFC claim that you want to view. Use the Action menu to open the View RFC Detail page. Description The content area of the View RFC Detail page displays the following sections: View RFC Header  - Contains general information for the selected RFC claim, such as RFC number, parts invoice number, and carrier information View RFC Detail  - Contains line item detail for each part on the selected RFC claim, including part number; requested, received, accepted, and shipped quantities, line amount, reason code, and reject code, if applicable View RFC Header  - Contains general information for the selected RFC claim, such as RFC number, confirmed date, and status View RFC Detail  - Contains line item detail for each part on the selected RFC claim, including part number, quantity requested, quantity authorized, line amount, and reason code Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the View RFC Detail page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. View Detail from View RFC Detail Page View Detail from View RFC Detail Page Workflow One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the View RFC Detail page. View Request for Credit Workflow Page Preview

To  view the transactions status : Search for transactions. Click here for information on searching for transactions. View the transactions that meet the selected criteria. Note : You may need to scroll to the right for more information. To sort the displayed information, click a column title. If you wish to see detailed information on a transaction, click the Detail link. Note : You may need to scroll to the right to see the Detail column. Note : DBS displays the editing page for the selected transaction where you can change the transaction related information.

To  edit the name of a link in My Links: Move your cursor over the My Links link. Click the Edit  icon for the link you want to edit. Type a nickname for the link in the field provided. Press the Enter key on your keyboard to accept the change, or click the Cancel icon to close the window without editing the link.

To  remove publisher authorization: Show the Publishing section, if hidden. Click the Remove Authorizations button.  Note : A confirmation message appears. Note : If the user is not currently an authorized publisher, the Remove Authorization button does not appear. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Note : The application clears all publication options for the user.

View Overview Information   Search Results Page Overview Perform Tasks Perform an Advanced Search Perform Common  DBS  Tasks View Search Results Perform an Advanced Search Perform Common DBS Tasks View Search Results

Note : This task applies to internal users only. To  look up a dealer from the ASR Return Performance page: At the end of the Dealer Number field, click the Lookup icon. Note : The Dealer Lookup page appears. In the fields provided, type full or partial information, then press the Enter key. Note : You must include an asterisk (*) when typing partial information. Note : The application displays a list of matching dealers. Note : To clear your entries, click the Clear Fields button. Select the radio button for the desired dealer. Click the Select button. Note : To cancel the lookup, click the Cancel button and close the dialog. Note : The application displays the dealer number in the field.

Parts Metrics Page Overview Note : The Parts Metrics page applies to internal users only. Access the Parts Metrics page by clicking the Parts Metrics link on the Parts menu. Purpose Use the Parts Metrics page to request part metrics for a given time period and organization. Metrics help the NNA Parts Division and Regional FOMs assess the performance of  dealers' part departments and include inventory, receipts,  sales, inventory movement, and general.   Description The content area of the Parts Metrics page displays the following sections: Report Selection Criteria  - Allows you to specify general criteria, such as reporting period, view, type, custom group, and dealer Metric List - Allows you to select the desired metric: inventory (default), receipts, sales, inventory movement, or general Summary  - Displays the part metric information based on your selections  Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Parts Metrics page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Export Parts Metrics Information Look Up a Dealer from the Parts Metrics Page Open the Custom Search Group Dialog to Add, Delete, or Edit a Custom Group Request Parts Metrics View Parts Metrics Export Parts Metrics Information Look Up a Dealer from the Parts Metrics Page Open the Custom Search Group Dialog to Add, Delete, or Edit a Custom Group Request Parts Metrics View Parts Metrics Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Parts Metrics page. View Parts Metrics Workflow Page Preview

Inventory Search Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for searching and viewing inventory for a particular vehicle model with specified features and options. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Search Vehicle Inventory workflow. Manage Vehicle Inventory Workflow

11443D1C-D332-4C29-8F65-E47364E47797\DCS - SUBMIT Financial Statements v1.3.pdf

View Overview Information   View IASR Page Overview Perform Tasks Create IASR Transaction Filter the View IASR Page  Look up a Dealer from the View IASR Page Perform Common DBS Tasks Recover an IASR Transaction View IASR Summary

MRW: NNA internal users only (Countermeasure Service Parts Procurement group) View Overview Information   Campaign Part Management Page Overview Manage Campaign Part Management Workflow Perform Tasks Add a Campaign Part Access Reports Delete a Campaign Part Export Campaign Part Information Filter Campaign Part Management Summary Look Up a Part Perform Common DBS Tasks View Campaign Part Management Summary

To  monitor the host socket listener: Click the Monitor Host Socket Listener button. Review the information that displays in the Monitor Host Socket Listener section.

Note : The Submit Financial Statements page displays the distinct action taken on each financial statement. By default, the Submit Financial Statements page displays all actions taken on financial statements sorted by date/time and period, with the most recent financial statement appearing first. To view the submission status of your financial statements: If desired, click the Refresh button to update the information in the Financial Statements section. View the list of financial statements and the corresponding submission status. Note : See the Step by Step tab in full help for additional detail about the submission statuses. To view warning or error messages for a financial statement, click the View Processing Results link.

To copy an alert: Select an alert. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Copy option. Note :   A confirmation message appears. Click the Copy button to copy your selection, or click the Cancel button to close without copying. The default status of a copied alert is "Needs Approval".

Note : The menu tabs and menu options you see are determined by your user profile. If you need access to a tab or page that is not part of your profile, please contact your system administrator. Dealer users can view the system administrators for their account by accessing their profile. Click the My Profile link at the top of any DBS  page to view your profile. To use the menu tabs: Move your cursor over the applicable tab to display a menu. Note : The Home tab does not display a menu. Move your cursor over the menu option you want to access. Note :   When you move your cursor over a menu option, three icons appear for that option. The single window icon opens the content in a new tab in the current browser. The double window icon opens the selected content in a new tab and in a new browser. The star icon adds the link to your My Links list. Click the menu option or applicable icon to open the desired page or application. The menu tabs and menu options you see are determined by your user profile. If you need access to a tab or page that is not part of your profile, please contact your system administrator. Dealer users can view the system administrators for their account by accessing their profile. Click the My Profile link at the top of any DBS  page to view your profile.

To create an advanced inventory filter: Click the Advanced Filter icon. From the first drop-down list, select a filter criteria. From the second drop-down list, select a filter option. If a field appears, type a filter value. Click the Plus sign to add the criteria to the filter list. Note : Add additional search criteria as desired. Click the Search button to apply the filter.

To  deactivate or reactivate a user: Select the desired user. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select either the  Deactivate User  or  Reactivate User  option. Note : If the user is active, the Deactivate User option appears. If the user is inactive, the Reactivate User option appears.

To manage my profile: To change your cell phone number, type your cell phone number. To change your cell phone carrier, select a different carrier. Note : When you select a different carrier, a message displays. Review the message and to accept text messages, click the  I Accept SMS Messages  button or to not accept, click the Do Not Send SMS Messages button. Note: Internal users may have multiple Business Hierarchy sections under User Information to enter multiple cell phone numbers and SMS carriers. To change your language, select a different language. To change your date format, select a different date format. To change your time zone, select a different time zone. Note : The remaining fields are read-only fields. Permission information indicates the applications you can access.  Click the  Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm and save, or click the  No  button to close the window without saving.   Internal users may have additional Business Hierarchy sections to enter information for multiple cell phones. Internal users also have an additional section under Permission Information for Publishing that dealers users will not see on their My Profile page. There are many read-only fields on the My Profile page. You can view the information entered in the read-only fields, but you cannot change the information.

To edit a PNC (Part Number Code): Select the PNC. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. Note : The selected PNC becomes editable. Type or look up the PNC. Note: To learn how to look up a PNC, click here . Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Save option, or select the Cancel option to preserve the PNC without changes.

To edit a PNC (Part Number Code): Select the PNC. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. Note : The selected PNC becomes editable. Type or look up the PNC. Note: To learn how to look up a PNC, click here . Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Save option, or select the Cancel option to preserve the PNC without changes.

To look up a part from the Create Parts Order or Edit Parts Order page: At the end of the Part Number field, click the Lookup icon. Note : The Part Lookup page appears. In the fields provided, type full or partial information. Note : You must include an asterisk (*) when typing partial information. Click the  Search  icon. Note : DBS displays a list of records matching the search criteria in the Parts section.  Select the part. Note : DBS displays part detail in the Part Detail section. To determine if the part is superseded, scroll down in the Part Detail section. Note : If a "Y" appears in the Supersession Flag field, the part is superseded.  Note : The new part number appears in the New Part field above the Supersession Flag field. If the part is superseded, copy the value in the New Part field, paste it into the Part Number field, and repeat steps 3-6. To select the part, click the Select button. Note : To cancel the lookup, click the  Cancel button.

To  add a Host report to the Favorites list: Select the report in the Reports list. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Add to favorites option. Note : The name of the report appears on the Favorites list. Repeat steps 1-3 until all desired reports are added to the Favorites list. The greatest benefit of adding reports to your Favorites list is that you only have to search for them once, then use the Print Overnight Reports button in the Favorites section to quickly print all of your morning Host reports. Use the Filter and Search options to locate Host reports quickly and easily. Internal users can have favorite reports, but they must be the same favorites for all dealerships the user may access. Internal users cannot have a separate list of favorite reports for each dealer.

To  add a Host report to the Favorites list: Select the report in the Reports list. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Add to favorites option. Note : The name of the report appears on the Favorites list. Repeat steps 1-3 until all desired reports are added to the Favorites list. The greatest benefit of adding reports to your Favorites list is that you only have to search for them once, then use the Print Overnight Reports button in the Favorites section to quickly print all of your morning Host reports. Use the Filter and Search options to locate Host reports quickly and easily. Internal users can have favorite reports, but they must be the same favorites for all dealerships the user may access. Internal users cannot have a separate list of favorite reports for each dealer.

To  add a Host report to the Favorites list: Select the report in the Reports list. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Add to favorites option. Note : The name of the report appears on the Favorites list. Repeat steps 1-3 until all desired reports are added to the Favorites list. The greatest benefit of adding reports to your Favorites list is that you only have to search for them once, then use the Print Overnight Reports button in the Favorites section to quickly print all of your morning Host reports. Use the Filter and Search options to locate Host reports quickly and easily. Internal users can have favorite reports, but they must be the same favorites for all dealerships the user may access. Internal users cannot have a separate list of favorite reports for each dealer.

To  add a Host report to the Favorites list: Select the report in the Reports list. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Add to favorites option. Note : The name of the report appears on the Favorites list. Repeat steps 1-3 until all desired reports are added to the Favorites list. The greatest benefit of adding reports to your Favorites list is that you only have to search for them once, then use the Print Overnight Reports button in the Favorites section to quickly print all of your morning Host reports. Use the Filter and Search options to locate Host reports quickly and easily. Internal users can have favorite reports, but they must be the same favorites for all dealerships the user may access. Internal users cannot have a separate list of favorite reports for each dealer.

To  add a Host report to the Favorites list: Select the report in the Reports list. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Add to favorites option. Note : The name of the report appears on the Favorites list. Repeat steps 1-3 until all desired reports are added to the Favorites list. The greatest benefit of adding reports to your Favorites list is that you only have to search for them once, then use the Print Overnight Reports button in the Favorites section to quickly print all of your morning Host reports. Use the Filter and Search options to locate Host reports quickly and easily. Internal users can have favorite reports, but they must be the same favorites for all dealerships the user may access. Internal users cannot have a separate list of favorite reports for each dealer.

Before you add a new claim line, you must save the current claim information or the information you have entered will be lost. To add a new claim line on an express entry warranty claim: Click the New Claim Line button. Note : DBS adds a new claim line to the claim and clears the information displayed in the Claim Information, Parts, Operations, and Expenses sections. Continue adding the required claim information, and then click the Save button to save the claim line. Note : To validate the information in the claim, click the Validate button. To submit a claim with no errors, click the Submit button. You can save a warranty claim with warnings and error messages, and update the claim at a later time.

To view claim activity for a warranty claim: Click a column title to sort information in the column. Click an RO   link to view the corresponding repair order (RO) associated with the claim. Note : You cannot view an RO created by another dealer. Note : One RO can have multiple warranty claims associated with it. Note : One RO job line can have only one warranty claim associated with it. As applicable, move your mouse pointer over a code in the PFP/PO column to read the corresponding description. Note : The PFP/PO column displays the Primary Failed Part code or Primary Operation code associated with the claim line.  You can view claim activity on any of the following pages: Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and View Warranty Claim.

To view claim activity for a warranty claim: Click a column title to sort information in the column. Click an RO   link to view the corresponding repair order (RO) associated with the claim. Note : You cannot view an RO created by another dealer. Note : One RO can have multiple warranty claims associated with it. Note : One RO job line can have only one warranty claim associated with it. As applicable, move your mouse pointer over a code in the PFP/PO column to read the corresponding description. Note : The PFP/PO column displays the Primary Failed Part code or Primary Operation code associated with the claim line.  You can view claim activity on any of the following pages: Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and View Warranty Claim.

To view claim activity for a warranty claim: Click a column title to sort information in the column. Click an RO   link to view the corresponding repair order (RO) associated with the claim. Note : You cannot view an RO created by another dealer. Note : One RO can have multiple warranty claims associated with it. Note : One RO job line can have only one warranty claim associated with it. As applicable, move your mouse pointer over a code in the PFP/PO column to read the corresponding description. Note : The PFP/PO column displays the Primary Failed Part code or Primary Operation code associated with the claim line.  You can view claim activity on any of the following pages: Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and View Warranty Claim.

To export the Campaign Master Table data: Filter or sort the table data as desired, and then click the Export button. Select the "Excel" option. Follow your browser-specific instructions to open or save the file.

To search for parts aggregate metrics data: From the Period drop-down list, select the desired search period. Note : Available periods are added to the list after each month end. If desired, use the Division , Region , Area , District , and Dealer drop-down lists to set search criteria to limit the search results. Click the Search icon. Note : The search results area displays the data for the selected period and search criteria. You may need to scroll to view all of the available metrics data.

To sort the links in My Links: Move your cursor over the My Links link. Click a link row and drag it to the desired order in your My Links list.

To  search for a dealer by hierarchy: Select the Choose dealer by Hierarchy option. From the drop-down lists, select the desired values. Click the Search icon at the lower-right of the page.

To filter hold status summary information: At the bottom of the Early Detection System pane, click the Hold Status Summary link. From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter of your choice. Note : A second field appears beside the Filter By field. In the second field, type or select an additional filter criterion. From the Hold Type drop-down list, select the desired option. Click the Search icon.

To view vehicle details from the RDR History page: Select the vehicle for which you want to view the vehicle detail. Move your cursor over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View Vehicle Detail menu option. Note : The vehicle detail opens in a new window. To print the vehicle detail, click the Print button. Note : A PDF file of the vehicle detail displays. Click the Print icon to print the detail. To email the vehicle detail, click the Email button. In the Receiver and CC fields, type the email address for each person who should receive a copy of the vehicle detail. Click the Send button. Click the Close button to return to the RDR History page.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To  access the Modify Report page: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the  Action menu, select the  Edit option. Note : The Modify Report page appears.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To  access the Modify Report page: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the  Action menu, select the  Edit option. Note : The Modify Report page appears.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To  access the Modify Report page: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the  Action menu, select the  Edit option. Note : The Modify Report page appears.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To  access the Modify Report page: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the  Action menu, select the  Edit option. Note : The Modify Report page appears.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To  access the Modify Report page: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the  Action menu, select the  Edit option. Note : The Modify Report page appears.

Note : You can view a repair order from the Alerts section or from the Open ROs section. To view a repair order (RO) from the RO Work in Process page: In the Repair Order column, click the hyperlink for the RO you wish to view. Note : The Repair Order Information window appears. To print the RO detail, click the Print button. To close the RO detail and return to the RO Work in Process page, click the Close button.

Authorized PDC users have the ability to approve submitted parts returns for dealerships within their PDC permissions. To approve a parts return, the return must be in "Submitted" status. Approving the parts return cannot be undone. To approve a submitted parts return: Select the parts return you want to approve. Note : The parts return must be in "Submitted" status. Move your cursor over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Approve Return menu option. Note : The Approve Part Return dialog box appears. In the PDC Return Due Date field, use the calendar to select the date by which parts must be returned to the PDC. Note : The return due date must be a weekday at least one day past the current date. Note : Holidays are excluded from the return due date calendar.  Click the Yes button to confirm the approval, or click the No button to close the dialog box without approving the return.

View Overview Information   View RFC Detail Page Overview View Request for Credit Status Workflow Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks View Detail from View RFC Detail Page Perform Common DBS Tasks View Detail from View RFC Detail Page

Request Full Parts Master Page Overview Purpose Use the Request Full Parts Master page to request a full parts master file. You may request a full parts master file once a day. Access the Request Full Parts Master page by clicking the Request Full Parts Master link from the Parts menu. Description The content area of the Request Full Parts Master page displays the following sections: Dealer -  Shows your dealer name and number Print Button - Allows you to print the request Time Stamp -  Shows the date and time of your current request Last Request Date -  Shows the date and time of your last request OK and Cancel Buttons -  Allows you to confirm or cancel the request Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Request Full Parts Master page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Request a Full Parts Master Request a Full Parts Master Page Preview

Manage Dealer Operation Code Page Overview Purpose Use the Manage Dealer Operation Code page to update dealer operation codes and re-run the translation process. Description The content area of the Manage Dealer Operation Code page displays the following sections: Filter by -  Allows you to filter records that match your criteria Note: This section also contains the Export and Re-Run buttons Summary -  Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks from or on the Manage Dealer Operation Code page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Change a Dealer Operation Code Export the Dealer Operation Code Summary Filter the Dealer Operation Code Summary Re-Run Translation Process - Dealer Operation Code View the Dealer Operation Code Summary Change a Dealer Operation Code Export the Dealer Operation Code Summary Filter the Dealer Operation Code Summary Re-Run Translation Process - Dealer Operation Code View the Dealer Operation Code Summary   Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Manage Dealer Operation Code page. Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Page Preview

To  browse the site map: Expand the map hierarchy to display the application page names or external links. To open the desired page, click the hyperlinked page name. The Site Map is a central location where users can access multiple screens from a single location in the DBS application. Use it as an alternate way to access the pages and application links.

To  view the user summary: Review the list of users. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. Note : The default sort order is last name in ascending order. To show active and inactive users, click the Show Active / Inactive Users button. Note : The default view shows active users only. To retrieve a list of users added or updated in NNAnet, click the Retrieve New User button. If multiple pages exist, do one of the following to navigate from page to page: Click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow. - OR - In the Go to Page field, type a page number, and then click the Go button.

Batch RDR Page Overview Purpose The Batch RDR page allows dealers and corporate users to submit one, multiple, or all RDRs at one time.  Description The content area of the Batch RDR page displays the following sections: RDR Summary List - Displays a list of all open RDRs which have not yet been submitted. Submit button  - Allows you to submit the selected RDRs for processing. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Batch RDR page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Submit an RDR Batch Page Preview

To  complete the Parts section of the claim. In the Part No./Part Cat. field, type the part number or a three-digit part category code. If you don't know the part number, click the  Lookup icon to perform a search. Click here for instructions on how to search for a part number. Note : After you enter the part number, the description automatically appears in the Description column. Note : Use the part category code if you have a locally purchased part, such as a windshield wiper. In the Req Qty field, type the quantity requested for the repair part. In the Req Amt field, type the monetary amount requested for the part. If necessary, in the Coverage 1 Code field, update the coverage code. Note : The coverage code is automatically populated based on information entered in the Claim Information section. If the coverage amount is split between or among coverage types, complete the Coverage 2 Amt and Coverage 3 Amt fields as appropriate. Note : The payment amounts split among the Coverage Amt fields must be equal to the requested amount in the Req Amt field. If you entered line type "PP" in the Claim Information section, in the PFP (Primary Failed Part) field, you must enter a part number. Note : If you select the PFP checkbox, the PFP field will be auto-populated. If the primary failed part is a battery, alternator, or starter replacement parts, complete the TestCode field. Note : The test code is the same as the GR8 code and consists of nine digits. As appropriate, click the Plus Sign to add additional parts. To update the claim total to reflect the parts information entered, in the Summary section at the top of the page, click the Refresh Claim Total link. To save the information, click the Save button at the bottom-right of the page. Note : Click  here for instructions to complete the Operations section. Errors and warning messages are displayed in the Alerts area  at the bottom of the Parts section.

To  complete the Parts section of the claim. In the Part No./Part Cat. field, type the part number or a three-digit part category code. If you don't know the part number, click the  Lookup icon to perform a search. Click here for instructions on how to search for a part number. Note : After you enter the part number, the description automatically appears in the Description column. Note : Use the part category code if you have a locally purchased part, such as a windshield wiper. In the Req Qty field, type the quantity requested for the repair part. In the Req Amt field, type the monetary amount requested for the part. If necessary, in the Coverage 1 Code field, update the coverage code. Note : The coverage code is automatically populated based on information entered in the Claim Information section. If the coverage amount is split between or among coverage types, complete the Coverage 2 Amt and Coverage 3 Amt fields as appropriate. Note : The payment amounts split among the Coverage Amt fields must be equal to the requested amount in the Req Amt field. If you entered line type "PP" in the Claim Information section, in the PFP (Primary Failed Part) field, you must enter a part number. Note : If you select the PFP checkbox, the PFP field will be auto-populated. If the primary failed part is a battery, alternator, or starter replacement parts, complete the TestCode field. Note : The test code is the same as the GR8 code and consists of nine digits. As appropriate, click the Plus Sign to add additional parts. To update the claim total to reflect the parts information entered, in the Summary section at the top of the page, click the Refresh Claim Total link. To save the information, click the Save button at the bottom-right of the page. Note : Click  here for instructions to complete the Operations section. Errors and warning messages are displayed in the Alerts area  at the bottom of the Parts section.

The Notifications function is currently disabled per Nissan request. You can create and edit notifications, but they will not be sent unless the functionality is restored. To  filter the notification summary list: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. If a text-entry field appears, type a filter value and then click the Search button. If a drop-down list appears, select an option from the list. Note : The page refreshes to display only those notifications that match your selection. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options and clear the search criteria, click the  Clear  icon.

View Overview Information Manage Vehicle Inventory Workflow Report or Edit the Sale of a Vehicle (RDR) Workflow Sales Landing Page Overview Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow View RDR History Workflow View Vehicle Inventory Workflow Manage Vehicle Inventory Workflow Sales Landing Page Overview Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow View RDR History Workflow View Vehicle Inventory Workflow Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks View Alerts View Announcements and Other News View the Sales Quick Look Chart Perform Common DBS Tasks View Alerts View Announcements and Other News View the Sales Quick Look Chart

The updated user experience allows users to more quickly accomplish tasks in  DBS . Pages will migrate to the new user experience over several months, and announcements will be made as new pages are made available. To use the new features of DBS  on the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report page: By default, the Summary section displays all results for the dealership. If desired, select a filter from the Filter section, then click the check box to accept the usage agreement. Finally, click the Search  button to view the filtered results. A new drop-down list of pages allows you to quickly navigate directly to the page you need when more than one page is available. Filter content using drop-downs and text entry fields. Note : Click here for more information on how to search for information using the advanced filter features of the new user experience. Click and drag a column header to a new location, then drop it in place to customize the summary area display. Click and drag the line between columns to change the column width. You no longer have to migrate from the summary page to a secondary page to edit items.  Click the Edit icon for a line item to edit the information displayed. Note : Click here for more information on how to edit information on the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report Page.

View Overview Information   Copy User Permissions Page Overview Edit User Permissions Workflow Perform Tasks Copy User Permissions Perform Common  DBS Tasks Copy User Permissions Perform Common  DBS Tasks

RDR a Vehicle Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for retail delivery reporting (RDR) or editing the sale of a vehicle. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Report or Edit the Sale of a Vehicle workflow. Manage Vehicle Inventory Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow View RDR History Workflow

View Request for Credit Status Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing Request for Credit (RFC) status.

To delete a part number code (PNC): Select a PNC. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option.

To delete a part number code (PNC): Select a PNC. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option.

To create a custom VIN Campaign report by keying in VINs: Click the Key In VIN# button. In the VIN fields provided, enter up to 30 unique VIN numbers. Click the Add All button. Click the Check Open Campaign button. Note : When you check for open campaigns, ONLY those vehicles with an open campaign are displayed in the Campaign Report list. Export the Campaign Report to sort or filter the data in Microsoft ®  Excel ® .

Manage Campaign Parts Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing campaign parts. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Campaign Parts Workflow. View Service Campaign Order Workflow Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow

Request for Credit (RFC) Status Page Overview Purpose Use the Request for Credit (RFC) Status page to view RFC status or print RFC reports. A dealer can request credit if there is a problem related to a parts shipment, such as a shortage, overage, or damage. Access the Request for Credit (RFC) Status page by clicking the Request for Credit (RFC) Status link from the Parts menu. Description The content area of the Request for Credit (RFC) Status page displays the following sections: Filter By - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Page Navigation - Allows you to navigate from page to page, if multiple pages exist Request for Credit Summary  - Displays general information for all records on the page , such as RFC number, RFC entered date, status, parts invoice #, RFC invoice #, reference #, carrier code, and PDC code Request for Credit Detail  -  Displays specific information for a selected record , including requested, authorized, and accepted quantities, reason code, and reject code, if applicable Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Request for Credit (RFC) Status page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Access Reports Filter Request for Credit (RFC) Status Summary Open the View RFC Detail Page Print RFC Detail View Request for Credit (RFC) Status Summary and Detail Access Reports Filter Request for Credit (RFC) Status Summary Open the View RFC Detail Page Print RFC Detail View Request for Credit (RFC) Status Summary and Detail Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Request for Credit (RFC) Status page. View Request for Credit Status Workflow Page Preview

Note : This task applies to internal users only. To export ASR Return Performance information: Click the  Export button. Select the output format. Save the file to your local drive. You can filter or sort the data in Microsoft ® Excel ®  if you export the file in the Microsoft ® Excel ® or CSV (comma separated value) format.

To add a part to an order: Type the part number or perform a part look up. Note : Click here for information on how to look up a part. Type the quantity. To override the backorder flag setting from the header for this line item, make a selection from the Back Order drop-down list. To override the cross ship flag setting from the header for this line item, make a selection from the  Cross Ship  drop-down list. Type the customer's name, if applicable. Note : The Free drop-down list appears for SOL - Solicited Stock Orders only. Note : For all order types, if a customer name is entered, in order to have the name print on the shipping label that is affixed to the ordered part, the system will send the name in the Bin field for orders submitted from DBS to the host. In the Bin field, type the bin location for the part. Click the Add button to add the line to the part order. Note : Click the Clear button to clear the entries. Click the Save button. Note : If errors exist, a warning message may appear. Click Yes to save the order with errors or click No to cancel. Note : To prevent this message from appearing in the future, click the No prompt again checkbox. You can only add a part to a parts order in "New" or "Open" status.

At the very least, you must select a return year and click the Search icon to filter the Manage Part Return Schedule page. You may select additional options from the Region, Area, District, and Dealer drop-down lists to limit the results displayed. To filter the Manage Part Return Schedule page: From the Return Year drop-down list, select the desired year. Note : Information is available for the current return year, future return year, and a minimum of twenty-four previous months. The number of previous months can be increased by the System Administrator on the Maintain Purge Rules page. From the Region drop-down list, select the desired region. From the Area drop-down list, select the desired area. From the District drop-down list, select the desired district. From the Dealer drop-down list, select the desired dealer. Click the Search icon to view the list of dealers that meet the selected criteria. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options and clear the search criteria, click the Clear icon.

How to Submit a Financial Statement Quick Reference Guide The How to Submit a Financial Statement Quick Reference Guide provides instructions for office users on how to submit financial statements and review financial statement submission status. Click here to access the How to Submit a Financial Statement Quick Reference Guide.

How to Submit a Financial Statement Quick Reference Guide The How to Submit a Financial Statement Quick Reference Guide provides instructions for office users on how to submit financial statements and review financial statement submission status. Click here to access the How to Submit a Financial Statement Quick Reference Guide.

To  access the Edit Announcement page: Select the item you wish to edit. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. Select the Edit menu option. Note : You can only edit announcements with a status of "Needs Approval." Note : The Edit Announcement page displays so you can edit the announcement.

View Overview Information Alerts Page Overview Create or Edit an Alert Workflow Perform Tasks Change the Status of an Alert Copy an Alert Delete an Alert Filter the Alerts Summary Open the Create Alerts Page Open the Edit Alerts Page Perform Common DBS Tasks View Alerts Summary View or Print Alert Detail Change the Status of an Alert Copy an Alert Delete an Alert Filter the Alerts Summary Open the Create Alerts Page Open the Edit Alerts Page Perform Common DBS Tasks View Alerts Summary View or Print Alert Detail

To filter the Service Dashboard: To filter by service technician, from the First Technician and Second Technician drop-down lists, select one or more service technicians. Note : Filter selections apply to the Alerts and Open ROs sections. Note : You can filter by service technician, by service advisor, or both. To filter by service advisor, from the Service Advisor drop-down list, select a service advisor. To filter by any other filter criteria, from the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. If a text-entry field appears, type a filter value and then click the Search icon. If a drop-down list appears, select an option from the list. Note : The Service Dashboard updates based on the criteria you have selected. Note : To remove the filter(s), click the Clear icon.

Copyright Page Overview Purpose Use the Copyright page to review the policies related to the copyright, trademarks, and images of the Dealer Business System (DBS)  application. Description The content area of the Copyright page displays information about the use of slogans, content, and images within DBS . Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Copyright page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. View Copyright and Trademark Information   View Copyright and Trademark Information Page Preview

To  view the dealer summary: Review the list of dealers. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. If multiple pages exist, do one of the following to navigate from page to page: Click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow. - OR - In the Go to Page field, type a page number, and then click the Go button.

Create or Edit Standard Operation Group Page Overview - Internal Users Purpose Use the Create or Edit Standard Operation Group page to create or modify a standard operation group. Description The content area of the Create or Edit Standard Operation Group page displays the following sections: Standard Operation Group -  Allows you to provide a name and description for a standard operation group, set the duration of the group, and indicate if the translation process needs to be re-run Key Words -  Allows you to add, edit, or delete key words to be associated with the standard operation group PNC -  Allows you to add, edit, or delete part number codes (PNCs) to be associated with the standard operation group Standard Operation Code -  Allows you to add, edit, or delete a standard operation code to the group and assign the code to a standard operation category Tasks You can perform the following tasks from or on the Create or Edit Standard Operation Group page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Create or Edit Standard Operation Group Add a Key Word Add a PNC Add a Standard Operation Code Delete a Key Word Delete a PNC Delete Standard Operation Code Assignment Edit a Key Word Edit a PNC Edit a Standard Operation Code Assignment Look Up a PNC from the Standard Operation Group Page   Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Create or Edit Standard Operation Group page. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Page Preview

To change the Infiniti roll over rate: Click the Change Infiniti Roll Over Rate button. In the New Roll Over Rate field, type the new roll over rate. Click the Save button.

To view NSH (National Service History) information from the Service Dashboard: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon in the applicable row. From the Action menu, select the  NSH option. Note : The National Service History page opens. View the NSH for the vehicle. Note : To expand a panel, click the Plus Sign (+)  beside the name of the panel. To collapse a panel, click the Minus Sign (-) . Note :  To print the NSH, click the Print button. To close, click the Close button. If an option is not available, that option is not displayed.

Inventory Search Page Overview Purpose Use the Inventory Search page to search your dealership's inventory, another dealership's inventory, or a group of dealerships that you have defined using the parameters available on the Inventory Search page. (Internal users - select a dealership using either the dealership number or name.) You first search the inventory based on model year, model, model description, and search radius and can further filter the inventory search based on color and options.  DBS allows you to view, print, and email a summary document called the window sticker or vehicle pricing sticker that shows content, options, color, vehicle details and related data for a specific vehicle. Description The content area of the Inventory Search page displays the following: Filter - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Sort by  - Allows you to sort the displayed information Results  -  Allows you to view the search result details Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Inventory Search page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Access OMS to Trade a Vehicle from Inventory Search Access OMS to View OMS Vehicle Detail from Inventory Search Manage Vehicle Notes from Inventory Search Print Vehicle Detail from Inventory Search Search Inventory Set Custom Search Group Set the Distance Search Range View, Print, or Email Window Sticker from Inventory Search View Vehicle Detail from Inventory Search Manage Vehicle Notes from Inventory Search Print Vehicle Detail from Inventory Search Search Inventory Set Custom Search Group Set the Distance Search Range View, Print, or Email Window Sticker from Inventory Search View Vehicle Detail from Inventory Search Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Inventory Search page: Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow Page Preview

Copy or Transfer Report Page Overview Purpose Use the Copy Report, Copy All Report(s), Transfer Report, and Transfer All Report(s) pages to select users to receive report definitions when you copy or transfer a report definition in Report Writer. Description The content area of the Copy Report, Copy All Report(s), Transfer Report, and Transfer All Report(s) pages displays the following sections: List of Target Users  - Displays the names of users Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Copy Report, Copy All Report(s), Transfer Report, and Transfer All Report(s) pages. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Select a User to Receive Report Definitions Select a User to Receive Report Definitions   Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the List of Users page. Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create or Modify a Report Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview

Copy or Transfer Report Page Overview Purpose Use the Copy Report, Copy All Report(s), Transfer Report, and Transfer All Report(s) pages to select users to receive report definitions when you copy or transfer a report definition in Report Writer. Description The content area of the Copy Report, Copy All Report(s), Transfer Report, and Transfer All Report(s) pages displays the following sections: List of Target Users  - Displays the names of users Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Copy Report, Copy All Report(s), Transfer Report, and Transfer All Report(s) pages. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Select a User to Receive Report Definitions Select a User to Receive Report Definitions   Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the List of Users page. Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create or Modify a Report Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview

Copy or Transfer Report Page Overview Purpose Use the Copy Report, Copy All Report(s), Transfer Report, and Transfer All Report(s) pages to select users to receive report definitions when you copy or transfer a report definition in Report Writer. Description The content area of the Copy Report, Copy All Report(s), Transfer Report, and Transfer All Report(s) pages displays the following sections: List of Target Users  - Displays the names of users Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Copy Report, Copy All Report(s), Transfer Report, and Transfer All Report(s) pages. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Select a User to Receive Report Definitions Select a User to Receive Report Definitions   Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the List of Users page. Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create or Modify a Report Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview

Copy or Transfer Report Page Overview Purpose Use the Copy Report, Copy All Report(s), Transfer Report, and Transfer All Report(s) pages to select users to receive report definitions when you copy or transfer a report definition in Report Writer. Description The content area of the Copy Report, Copy All Report(s), Transfer Report, and Transfer All Report(s) pages displays the following sections: List of Target Users  - Displays the names of users Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Copy Report, Copy All Report(s), Transfer Report, and Transfer All Report(s) pages. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Select a User to Receive Report Definitions Select a User to Receive Report Definitions   Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the List of Users page. Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create or Modify a Report Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview

Copy or Transfer Report Page Overview Purpose Use the Copy Report, Copy All Report(s), Transfer Report, and Transfer All Report(s) pages to select users to receive report definitions when you copy or transfer a report definition in Report Writer. Description The content area of the Copy Report, Copy All Report(s), Transfer Report, and Transfer All Report(s) pages displays the following sections: List of Target Users  - Displays the names of users Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Copy Report, Copy All Report(s), Transfer Report, and Transfer All Report(s) pages. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Select a User to Receive Report Definitions Select a User to Receive Report Definitions   Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the List of Users page. Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create or Modify a Report Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview

View Overview Information Report Writer Page Overview Change User, Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Perform Tasks Change a Report Definition to Public or Private Change User in Report Writer Copy a Report Definition Copy All of a User's Report Definitions Delete a Report Definition Delete All of a User's Report Definitions Filter Report Writer List of Reports Open the Create Report Page Open the Modify Report Page Open the Replicate Report Page Open the View Report Page Perform Common DBS Tasks Schedule / Generate a Report Transfer a Report Definition Transfer All of a User's Report Definitions View the Dealer's List of Reports (Internal Users Only) View a Report Definition View the Reports List Change a Report Definition to Public or Private Change User in Report Writer Copy a Report Definition Copy All of a User's Report Definitions Delete a Report Definition Delete All of a User's Report Definitions Filter Report Writer List of Reports Open the Create Report Page Open the Modify Report Page Open the Replicate Report Page Open the View Report Page Perform Common DBS Tasks Schedule / Generate a Report Transfer a Report Definition Transfer All of a User's Report Definitions View the Dealer's List of Reports (Internal Users Only) View a Report Definition View the Reports List

To view NSH (National Service History) from the View Warranty Claim page: At the bottom of the page, click the NSH button. Note : The National Service History window opens. Click Print to print the NSH report, or click  Close to return to the previous screen.   You can view the NSH information regardless of the status of a claim.

The parts return preview window displays a list of packed and unpacked parts. To preview a parts return: Click the  Preview button. Note : The Preview window opens. Click the  Cancel button to close the preview window and return to the parts return.

View Overview Information   Request for Credit (RFC) Status Page Overview View Request for Credit Status Workflow Perform Tasks Access Reports Filter Request for Credit (RFC) Status Summary Open the View RFC Detail Page Perform Common DBS Tasks Print RFC Detail View Request for Credit (RFC) Status Summary and Detail Access Reports Filter Request for Credit (RFC) Status Summary Open the View RFC Detail Page Perform Common DBS Tasks Print RFC Detail View Request for Credit (RFC) Status Summary and Detail

Create Parts Order Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for requesting a full parts master file.

To look up a part from the Parts Order Management page when filtering by part number: At the end of the Part Number field, click the Lookup icon. Note : The Part Lookup page appears. In the fields provided, type full or partial information. Note : You must include an asterisk (*) when typing partial information. Note : To remove search criteria, click the  Clear  icon. Click the  Search  icon. Note : DBS displays a list of records matching the search criteria in the Parts section.  Select the part. Note : DBS displays part detail in the Part Detail section. To determine if the part is superseded, scroll down in the Part Detail section. Note : If a "Y" appears in the Supersession Flag field, the part is superseded.  Note : The new part number appears in the New Part field above the Supersession Flag field. If the part is superseded, copy the value in the New Part field, paste it into the Part Number field, and repeat steps 3-6. To select the part, click the Select button. Note : To cancel the lookup, click the Cancel button.

View Overview Information   Study Dashboard Page Overview Define or Modify a Study Workflow Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View One Study Result Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow Perform Tasks Delete a Study Export Study Dashboard Information Filter the Study Dashboard Open a Study to View Results Open Hold Study Result Page Open the Create Study Page to Create a Study Open the Create Study Page to Modify a Study Perform Common DBS Tasks Print Study Criteria Print Study Results Restart a Study Suspend a Study View the Study Dashboard Delete a Study Export Study Dashboard Information Filter the Study Dashboard Open a Study to View Results Open Hold Study Result Page Open the Create Study Page to Create a Study Open the Create Study Page to Modify a Study Perform Common DBS Tasks Print Study Criteria Print Study Results Restart a Study Suspend a Study View the Study Dashboard

View Overview Information   Support Page Overview Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks View DBS System Requirements Perform Common DBS Tasks View DBS System Requirements

Serviced with Open Campaign Report Page Overview Purpose Just like it sounds, the Serviced with Open Campaign Report page allows corporate users to view the details and status of vehicles which were sold with an open campaign. Description The content area of the Serviced with Open Campaign Report page displays the following sections: Filter/Search -   Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria . Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Serviced with Open Campaign Report page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Export the Serviced with Open Campaign Report Page Filter the Serviced with Open Campaign Report Page Page Preview

View Automatic Stock Replenishment Return Performance Workflow Note: This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing Automatic Stock Replenishment (ASR) returns performance.

To  access the Create Standard Operation Category page: Click the Create button. Note : The Create Standard Operation Category page opens.

View Overview Information   Monitor Interface Page Overview Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks Search for and Monitor Transactions on the Monitor Interface Page Perform Common DBS Tasks Search for and Monitor Transactions on the Monitor Interface Page

Note : This task applies to internal users only. To configure  DSP  STAR Web services: From the DSP List drop-down list, select a vendor. Check the boxes to select the applications and the STAR web services that a DSP vendor is allowed to access. Click the Save button. Note : If you click the Save button, a confirmation widow appears. Click the  Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving.

View Position Permissions Page Overview Note: The Position Permissions page applies to internal users only. Purpose Use the View Position Permissions page to view permissions for a selected position. Description The content area of the View Position Permissions page displays the following sections: Quick Jump menu  - Appears on the left-hand side of the page. The Quick Jump menu allows you to show one section at a time, or show or hide the default view for all sections. Permission Function Tree - By default, the function tree expands two sections: Menu and User Information. The function tree also includes a Host Report section and a Report Writer section. Use the + and - icons to show or hide a section. Use the expand all | collapse all features to expand or collapse a section. Cancel button - Returns you to the Position Summary page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the View Position Permissions page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Use the Quick Jump Menu View Position Permissions Use the Quick Jump Menu View Position Permissions   Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflow are performed on the View Position Permissions page. View Position Permissions Workflow Page Preview

To export hold status summary information: Click the  Export button and select Excel . Note : The File Download window opens. Click the Save button and proceed as you normally would to save the file to your local drive. You can filter, sort, and print the data if you export the information to Microsoft ®  Excel ® .

To view vehicle detail or dealer trade in OMS  from the Inventory Search page: Perform an inventory search. Click here for more information. Click the OMS Vehicle Detail link for the desired vehicle. Note : This link opens an external application. Follow the procedures within that application to complete this task.

To add a part number code (PNC) to a standard operation group: Type or look up the PNC. Note : To learn how to look up a PNC, click here .  Click the Add icon. Note : Each PNC must be unique. If a PNC already exists for a group, DBS displays a red icon to indicate the PNC is a duplicate. 

To add a part number code (PNC) to a standard operation group: Type or look up the PNC. Note : To learn how to look up a PNC, click here .  Click the Add icon. Note : Each PNC must be unique. If a PNC already exists for a group, DBS displays a red icon to indicate the PNC is a duplicate. 

Create or Edit Alerts Page Overview Purpose Use the Create Alerts page to create a new alert or the Edit Alerts page to edit an existing alert. Description The content area of the Create Alerts page or Edit Alerts page displays the following sections: Settings - Allows you to determine the page where the alert will display and the display language for the alert Recipients - Allows you to select the internal and dealer users who will be able to view the alert Alert Details - Allows you to type the alert title, content, and the date and time for it to display  Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Create Alerts page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Create or Edit an Alert Select Recipients Create or Edit an Alert Select Recipients   Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Create Announcements page. Create or Edit an Alert Workflow Page Preview

Standard Operation Category Page Overview - Internal User Purpose Use the Standard Operation Category page to view and manage standard operation categories. Description The content area of the Standard Operation Category page displays the following sections: Search by -  Allows you to search for records that match your criteria Note: The New button to open the Create Standard Operation Category page is also located in this section. Summary -  Displays general information for all records on the page Detail -  Displays specific information for a selected record Tasks You can perform the following tasks from or on the Standard Operation Category page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks . Delete a Standard Operation Category Open the Create Standard Operation Category Page Open the Edit Standard Operation Category Page Search the Standard Operation Category Summary View the Standard Operation Category Summary and Detail Delete a Standard Operation Category Open the Create Standard Operation Category Page Open the Edit Standard Operation Category Page Search the Standard Operation Category Summary View the Standard Operation Category Summary and Detail   Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Standard Operation Category page. Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Page Preview

Note : Click the Step by Step button to view additional information for this topic. To use full help: The DBS  help system is organized to match the navigation structure of DBS . Click a navigation tab to display the content for that function. Note : The DBS  help system allows you to view information for all pages, tasks, and functions, even though you may not have permissions to access these functions in DBS . The navigation buttons allow you to quickly move around in the help system and print the help content. Note : Because the help content is constantly changing as the system changes, we strongly recommend that you do not print help content pages. Instead, use the context-help from any DBS  application page to quickly re-visit a task. The Search feature of DBS  help allows you to perform a text search of the help content. Click here for more information on structuring your search to provide the best results. After you click a navigation tab, the Table of Contents area on the left side of the window updates to show the content specific to that tab. Click the plus sign for any area to display a list of tasks and overview content. Click a task title in the Table of Contents to display the help content in the content area. The Content Area of the help, as you would expect, changes with each click you make to display the content specific to your choices. The Keywords function allows you to search for information in the help system using a keyword. Click here for more information on searching using keywords.

View Overview Information   Edit Position Permissions Page Overview Edit Position Permissions Workflow Perform Tasks Grant or Remove Access to a Host Report Grant or Remove Access to a Page, Action, Custom Field, or Website Grant or Remove Access to a Report Writer View Grant or Remove Full Access to a Menu and Its Contents Perform Common  DBS Tasks Use the Quick Jump Menu View Position Permissions Grant or Remove Access to a Host Report Grant or Remove Access to a Page, Action, Custom Field, or Website Grant or Remove Access to a Report Writer View Grant or Remove Full Access to a Menu and Its Contents Perform Common  DBS Tasks Use the Quick Jump Menu View Position Permissions

To export information fron the Parts Return Summary page: If desired, click one of the columns in the summary graph or filter the information to reduce the amount of information displayed. Click the  Export to Excel  button. Follow your browser-specific instructions to open, save, or print the file.

About Vehicle Inventory: What You Need to Know Vehicle trades are done using OMS and the results are immediately reflected in OMS, but inventory updates into DBS only occur every 30 minutes. If you have completed a vehicle trade in OMS, this vehicle may not display in your vehicle inventory for up to 30 minutes. Check your vehicle inventory for open campaigns to ensure repairs are performed before retail sale. Vehicles with campaigns are color-coded for quick visibility. Note : Use the "Open Campaign" option in the Filter By drop-down list to view all vehicles in your inventory with open campaigns, or click the Reports button and select the Campaign Report menu option to print a list of vehicles in your inventory with open campaigns. If the text for a vehicle row is in bold red, then it has an open campaign. Move your cursor over the text in the Serial field to view the campaign(s) for the vehicle. If the text for a vehicle row is in bold black, then a repair order has been completed for this vehicle and the campaign repairs have been completed, but the warranty claim is waiting for payment. All vehicles with normal text have no campaign, or have one or more completed campaigns that have been paid by NNA. A red asterisk to the left of a stock umber indicates that a vehicle has a note attached. You can view the note content by moving your cursor over the asterisk. Note : Click here for additional information on managing vehicle notes. An "H" (meaning "hidden") displays next to those vehicles that have the "Do not show this vehicle in Locator Search results or allow any Trade activity" selected in OMS. These vehicles will also be hidden from any Inventory Search results in DBS if another dealer views your inventory. Move your mouse over the fields on the Vehicle Inventory page to get additional data: Serial - displays the model code or any open campaigns. Note : Click the serial number to view the Vehicle Inventory Detail page for the vehicle. Status - displays the date and time when the vehicle status was updated. Ext - displays the vehicle's exterior color. Int - displays the vehicle's interior color. Click the MSRP link to view, print, or email the window sticker. Note : Click here for additional information viewing, printing, and emailing the window sticker from the Vehicle Inventory page.

To  complete the Buyer section of a used vehicle RDR: From the Title drop-down list, select a title. Enter or update the customer name, address, and contact information. Note : If you select "Commercial Account" from the Title drop-down list, you must enter the company name and details instead of the customer details.  Note : Type all 9s in the Daytime or Evening field if the customer does not have a phone. In the Email field, type the customer email address. Note : Type three asterisks (*) if the customer does not have an email address. Complete the Driver section of the RDR. Click  here  for more information.

To search for an internal user by name: If necessary, select the Internal User radio button. In the First Name field, enter the first (given) name of the user. In the Last Name field, enter the last (family) name of the user. Click the Search icon.

DBS Training Instructions Quick Reference Guide The DBS Training Instructions Quick Reference Guide provides instructions for new DBS  users on how to use the DBS  help system in lieu of training to become more familiar with the capabilities and functions of DBS . Click here to view the DBS Training Instructions Quick Reference Guide.

To generate a report: Click the plus sign beside each level to display the next lower level until you reach the level needed. Click the checkbox beside each region, city, or dealer you wish to include in the report. Click the Schedule button. Note : Click the Cancel button to cancel without saving. From the Email Notification of Report Completion options, select "Yes" if you would like to receive an email notification when the report is generated, or "No" if you do not want to receive an email notification. Note: If you selected "Yes", either check the checkbox next to your email address, or type additional addresses in the blank field and check the checkbox next to the field. Note : You can add multiple addresses by separating them with a semi-colon. Note : An email will not be sent unless the checkbox next to the email field is selected. From the File Type options, select one or more file types. From the Schedule Report to options, select when you want the report to run. Note : If you select "Run At", you must select a start date and time for the report to generate. Note : If you select "Recurrence", you must select the date, time, and recurrence for the report to generate. Click Schedule .

To generate a report: Click the plus sign beside each level to display the next lower level until you reach the level needed. Click the checkbox beside each region, city, or dealer you wish to include in the report. Click the Schedule button. Note : Click the Cancel button to cancel without saving. From the Email Notification of Report Completion options, select "Yes" if you would like to receive an email notification when the report is generated, or "No" if you do not want to receive an email notification. Note: If you selected "Yes", either check the checkbox next to your email address, or type additional addresses in the blank field and check the checkbox next to the field. Note : You can add multiple addresses by separating them with a semi-colon. Note : An email will not be sent unless the checkbox next to the email field is selected. From the File Type options, select one or more file types. From the Schedule Report to options, select when you want the report to run. Note : If you select "Run At", you must select a start date and time for the report to generate. Note : If you select "Recurrence", you must select the date, time, and recurrence for the report to generate. Click Schedule .

To generate a report: Click the plus sign beside each level to display the next lower level until you reach the level needed. Click the checkbox beside each region, city, or dealer you wish to include in the report. Click the Schedule button. Note : Click the Cancel button to cancel without saving. From the Email Notification of Report Completion options, select "Yes" if you would like to receive an email notification when the report is generated, or "No" if you do not want to receive an email notification. Note: If you selected "Yes", either check the checkbox next to your email address, or type additional addresses in the blank field and check the checkbox next to the field. Note : You can add multiple addresses by separating them with a semi-colon. Note : An email will not be sent unless the checkbox next to the email field is selected. From the File Type options, select one or more file types. From the Schedule Report to options, select when you want the report to run. Note : If you select "Run At", you must select a start date and time for the report to generate. Note : If you select "Recurrence", you must select the date, time, and recurrence for the report to generate. Click Schedule .

To generate a report: Click the plus sign beside each level to display the next lower level until you reach the level needed. Click the checkbox beside each region, city, or dealer you wish to include in the report. Click the Schedule button. Note : Click the Cancel button to cancel without saving. From the Email Notification of Report Completion options, select "Yes" if you would like to receive an email notification when the report is generated, or "No" if you do not want to receive an email notification. Note: If you selected "Yes", either check the checkbox next to your email address, or type additional addresses in the blank field and check the checkbox next to the field. Note : You can add multiple addresses by separating them with a semi-colon. Note : An email will not be sent unless the checkbox next to the email field is selected. From the File Type options, select one or more file types. From the Schedule Report to options, select when you want the report to run. Note : If you select "Run At", you must select a start date and time for the report to generate. Note : If you select "Recurrence", you must select the date, time, and recurrence for the report to generate. Click Schedule .

To generate a report: Click the plus sign beside each level to display the next lower level until you reach the level needed. Click the checkbox beside each region, city, or dealer you wish to include in the report. Click the Schedule button. Note : Click the Cancel button to cancel without saving. From the Email Notification of Report Completion options, select "Yes" if you would like to receive an email notification when the report is generated, or "No" if you do not want to receive an email notification. Note: If you selected "Yes", either check the checkbox next to your email address, or type additional addresses in the blank field and check the checkbox next to the field. Note : You can add multiple addresses by separating them with a semi-colon. Note : An email will not be sent unless the checkbox next to the email field is selected. From the File Type options, select one or more file types. From the Schedule Report to options, select when you want the report to run. Note : If you select "Run At", you must select a start date and time for the report to generate. Note : If you select "Recurrence", you must select the date, time, and recurrence for the report to generate. Click Schedule .

Edit Dealer Information Workflow   Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for editing dealer information. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Dealer Information Workflow. View Dealer Information or Permissions Workflow

To submit a new or open parts order from the Parts Order Management page: Select the parts order. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Submit option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to submit the parts order for approval or fulfillment, or click the No button to close the confirmation message without submitting the parts order. Note : If the parts order contains errors, a warning message appears. Note : If the parts order contains warnings, click the Yes button to submit the parts order, or click the No button to close the confirmation message without submitting the parts order. A parts order must contain header information and at least one detail line before you can submit it. To submit a parts order, the order must be in "New" or "Open" status. If errors exists on the parts order, you must resolve the errors before you can submit the order successfully. You can submit a parts order with warning messages. For VOR and TOS orders, you cannot submit an order that contains more than 40 detail lines. If duplicate orders exist, and one has already been submitted, you must change the dealer reference number for any of the unsubmitted duplicates. After submission, the status of the parts order shows "Submitted" and the order status date reflects the current date.

To select a dealer: From the Dealer drop-down list, select a dealer. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Only those dealerships you have access rights to will display in the dealer list. If you have access to only one dealership, you will not see the Dealer drop-down list.

To access OMS  to view OMS vehicle detail: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the OMS Vehicle Detail option. Note : The OMS Vehicle Detail option is only available to users who have access to the OMS application. If you have OMS access, click the OMS Vehicle Detail option to open the external OMS application. Follow the procedures within the OMS application to complete the view OMS vehicle detail task.

Note: This task applies to internal users only. To  export the position permissions currently in the system: Click the  Export button. Note : The Download dialog appears. Follow your browser-specific instructions to open, save, or print the file. Note : The file opens in Microsoft Excel.

To re-run the translation process for a dealer operation code: Click the Re-Run button. In the Re-Run Confirmation window, click the  Re-Run button. Note : A message indicates the translation process is running, then a second message appears stating the translation process has completed successfully. Click the Close button to close the Re-Run Confirmation window. Note:  The system updates the re-translated repair order (RO) lines in the National Service History (NSH) RO table with a standard operation code and the re-translation date. Use Report Writer to create a report of the National Service History (NSH) RO table to review the re-translation results.

To add a standard operation code: In the Standard Op Code Section, type an operation code. Note : The standard operation codes are determined by information in the Warranty Flat Rate schedule. Select a category. Note : The categories available are determined by information entered on the Standard Operation Categories page. Click the Add  button to add the code or click the Clear Fields icon to clear the code and then add a different one.

To add a standard operation code: In the Standard Op Code Section, type an operation code. Note : The standard operation codes are determined by information in the Warranty Flat Rate schedule. Select a category. Note : The categories available are determined by information entered on the Standard Operation Categories page. Click the Add  button to add the code or click the Clear Fields icon to clear the code and then add a different one.

Create or Modify a Study Workflow Note : The Create or Modify a Study Workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for defining or modifying a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the  Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Define or Modify a Study Workflow. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View One Study Result Workflow

To  submit a parts order from the Create Parts Order or Edit Parts Order page: Click the  Submit button. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm the submission, or the No button to cancel the submission. If errors exists on the parts order, you must resolve the errors before you can submit the order successfully. You can submit a parts order with warning messages. For VOR and TOS orders, you cannot submit an order that contains more than 40 detail lines.

Note : Click here for instructions on creating a TOS (Transient Owner Service) part order. To create or edit a parts order: From the Order Type drop-down list, select the order type. In the  Dealer Order Reference #  field, type a unique reference number to identify the parts order. Note : If the reference number is a duplicate number,  Fred  automatically generates a suffix and highlights the suffix in the Parts Order Detail section. After you type a unique Dealer Order Reference #,  Fred  clears the suffix.  To ship the order to your alternate shipping point (ASP), in the  ASP Number  field, type your ASP number or click the  Lookup  icon to select the ASP. Note : The ASP number may also be referred to as the wholesale code or ship to code.  If you selected "SOL - Solicited Order" or "SVC - Service Campaign Order" from the Order Type drop-down list, complete the additional required fields. From the Ship Priority , Cross Ship Priority , Backorder Flag , and Cross Ship Flag drop-down lists, modify the default selections, if desired. In the Shipping Instructions field, type the shipping instructions for the parts order, if desired. Complete the Parts Order Detail section: Click here for instructions on how to add a part. Click here for instructions on how to delete a part. Click here for instructions on how to look up a part. Click  here  for instructions on how to modify a detail line. Use the appropriate button to save, submit, delete, or cancel the parts order. For VOR parts orders, you cannot have more than 40 part detail lines in a single order. For STK parts orders, you cannot have more than 999 part detail lines in a single order. For fastest processing, correct all errors before submitting a part order. 

View Overview Information   Campaign Report Page Overview Perform Tasks Export Campaign Report Information Filter the Campaign Report Page Perform Common DBS Tasks Search for Information by Campaign ID

To  print full ASR data: Click the + or - icon to show or hide parts for which you want to include or exclude in your print request. Click the Print button. Note : The File Download dialog box appears. Click the Open or Save button, or click the Cancel button to close without opening or saving. Note : Continue with the procedures for viewing or printing PDF files as applicable for your location.

Users should always log out of the system when they are finished or have completed their daily tasks and functions. It is also necessary to ensure security of user and Infiniti information. To log out of the Dealer Business System (DBS) : Click the Log Out link. Note : The DBS  application closes and the Dealer Portal / NNAnet.com  page appears.

Administration Landing Page Overview Purpose Use the Administration landing page to view alerts, Quick Look information about key metrics, announcements, and other news related to the administration function. Description The content area of the Administration landing page displays the following sections: Alerts - As applicable, alert messages appear at the top of the page. These messages typically provide information that is system-critical. Announcements -  As applicable, high-priority messages appear in the Regional or National Announcements section.  When the message is no longer considered a high priority, the text automatically moves to the Other News section. Other News -  This section displays messages that have a lower priority than messages in the Announcements section. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Administration landing page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. View Alerts View Alerts Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Administration Landing page. Configure DSP STAR Web Services Workflow Create or Edit an Alert Workflow Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow Create or Edit a Calendar Event Workflow Create or Edit a Notification Workflow Search for Transactions Workflow Set Up or Edit Dealer Permissions Workflow Set Up or Edit Position Permissions Workflow Set Up or Edit User Permissions Workflow View Dealer Information or Permissions Workflow View Position Permissions Workflow View User Permissions Workflow Page Preview

View Overview Information   One Study Result Page Overview Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View One Study Result Workflow Perform Tasks Open One Dealer's Study Results Perform Common DBS Tasks View NSH for a Vehicle in a Study View One Study Result View Repair Order Open One Dealer's Study Results Perform Common DBS Tasks View NSH for a Vehicle in a Study View One Study Result View Repair Order

Note : Internal users who want to view campaign information for other dealerships should use the Campaign Report page, available from the Sales menu. To view the dealer campaign report: Click the Reports button. Select the Campaign Report menu option. Use the page navigation buttons or the Go to Page field to navigate within the Campaign Report window. If desired, click the Print button to print the report information. If desired, click the Export button and follow your browser-specific instructions to download a Microsoft ®  Excel ® spreadsheet of the report information. Click the Cancel button to close the Campaign Report window and return to the Vehicle Inventory page.

View Overview Information   Create Study Page Overview Create or Modify a Study Workflow Perform Tasks Create or Modify a Study Perform Common DBS Tasks Create or Modify a Study Perform Common DBS Tasks

To view a dealer's Study results: From the Filter By drop-down list, select "Dealer". In the text box, type the appropriate dealer number. Click the Search icon. Note : The Result section lists the results for the selected dealer.

To view Retail Delivery Reporting (RDR) history summary and detail: Review the list of RDRs. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. To select an RDR, click anywhere in the row that contains the RDR, or click the Action icon for the desired RDR. To view the vehicle detail, from the Action menu select the View Vehicle Detail option, or click the hyperlinked VIN number. . Note : The Vehicle Inventory Detail report opens in a separate window. Click the Close button to return to the RDR History page. To show detail or hide detail, select an RDR and then click the  Show Detail  or Hide Detail link. Note : The RDR Information pane appears.

Retailed Vehicle with Open Campaign Report Quick Reference Guide The Retailed Vehicle with Open Campaign Report quick reference guide provides instructions for using the new Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report page to access, export, and print a list of vehicles that have open Takata, service, and safety campaigns. Click here to view the PDF file. Note : Use of the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report page is limited to authorized dealer and corporate users only. This page may NOT be used for any marketing purpose, and the information contained therein is strictly confidential.

Retailed Vehicle with Open Campaign Report Quick Reference Guide The Retailed Vehicle with Open Campaign Report quick reference guide provides instructions for using the new Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report page to access, export, and print a list of vehicles that have open Takata, service, and safety campaigns. Click here to view the PDF file. Note : Use of the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report page is limited to authorized dealer and corporate users only. This page may NOT be used for any marketing purpose, and the information contained therein is strictly confidential.

Returns and Accrual Information Page Overview Purpose Use the Returns and Accrual Information page to review and print parts return and parts return accrual information. Access the Returns and Accrual Information page by clicking the Parts Return Management link from the Parts menu, and then clicking the Return and Accrual Info button. Description The content area of the Returns and Accrual Information page displays the following sections: Accrual Earnings  - Displays your current quarter accrual information and the projected accrual for the next financial quarter Warning and Information Key - Displays information about any warning or informational icons that may be displayed in the Accrual Earnings or Returns and Accruals Details sections. Returns and Accruals Details - Displays information about the parts returns and accruals by month for the current calendar year. Information displayed includes the return period and due date, accrual earned as of the due date, monthly allowance, amount of accrual used/unused, amount forfeited, roll over amount, adjustments, and return status. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Parts Return Management page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Print the Returns and Accrual Information Page View Returns and Accrual Information Page Preview

To request a full parts master: To print the request before submitting the request, click the Print button, specify your printer options, and then click the applicable button to print. Click OK to submit the request or Cancel to cancel the request. Note : The system displays the following message "Your request has been successfully submitted." You may only request one full parts master file per day.

Showing packed parts removes all unpacked lines from the return. If you remove the unpacked lines in error, click the Cancel button to return to the Parts Return Management page. To show packed parts and complete the parts return pack: Click the Show Packed button. Note : The Complete Pack Confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to remove the unpacked parts from the parts return. Click the Save button to save the return, or click the Cancel button to close the return without saving. Showing packed parts removes all unpacked lines from the return. If you complete the parts return pack in error, click the Cancel button to return to the Parts Return Management page.

To view the standard operation codes summary and detail: View the list of codes. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. To select a code, click anywhere in the row that contains the code. To show detail, select a code and click the Show Standard Operation Code Detail link near the bottom of the window. Note :  To hide detail, click the Hide Standard Operation Code Detail link.

To  access OMS to locate a vehicle: Click the OMS LOCATE button. Note : The locate option is available only to users who have access to the OMS application. If you do not have access to OMS, the OMS LOCATE button is not active. If the OMS LOCATE button is active, you can click the OMS LOCATE button to open the external (non- DBS ) OMS application. Follow the procedures within the OMS application to complete the locate task.

Use the Contact Us page (available from the footer) to perform this task. Note : The footer is a short menu that appears at the bottom of every page in the DBS application. To  contact the DBS Help Desk by email: Click the email link. Note : A new message opens in your preferred email client. Type the subject and message details, then send the message. Note : Follow the instructions for your email client software to send the message.

To complete the Notifications section of a study: Select the name of each individual who should receive the notifications from the Available Personnel list, and then click the center buttons as necessary to customize the Selected Personnel list.  Note : The Available Personnel list displays all users who have permissions to create studies. Contact your System Administrator for assistance in modifying a user's permissions. When you have selected all desired recipients, click the Save button. Click the Details tab in full help to view additional information on configuring notification recipients.

Create Parts Order Page Overview Purpose Use the Create Parts Order page to order parts to replenish inventory stock or fulfill a specific customer need. You may create and submit multiple orders on a daily basis. To create a parts order access the Parts Order Management link from the Parts menu. Description The content area of the Create Parts Order page displays the following sections: Create Parts Order header - Allows you to view or specify general information about a parts order including order status, order type, dealer order reference #, shipping instructions, and backorder or cross ship preferences Parts Order Detail  - Allows you to add parts, delete parts, modify a line item, including line item back order and cross ship preferences, and designate free parts (solicited orders only) Buttons - Allows you to save, submit, delete or cancel a parts order Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Create Parts Order page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Add a Part to an Order Create or Edit a Parts Order Create a Transient Owner Service Parts Order Delete a Part from an Order Delete a Parts Order Look Up a Part Submit a Parts Order View the Parts List Add a Part to an Order Create or Edit a Parts Order Delete a Part from an Order Delete a Parts Order Look Up a Part Modify a Detail Line on an Order Submit a Parts Order View the Parts List Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Create Parts Order page. Create Parts Order Workflow Page Preview

View Dealer Information Page Overview Purpose Use the View Dealer Information page to view information about a dealership. Description The content area of the View Dealer Information page displays the following sections: Quick Jump - Appears on the left-hand side of the page. The Quick Jump menu allows you to jump from section to section without scrolling. Dealer Information -   Allows you to view dealer, vehicle, service, parts, finance, DBS /DMS, and other information about a dealership Cancel button - Returns you to the Dealer Summary page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Dealer Information page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. View Dealer Information View Dealer Information   Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Dealer Information page. View Dealer Information or Permissions Workflow Page Preview

The Notifications function is currently disabled per Nissan request. You can create and edit notifications, but they will not be sent unless the functionality is restored. To delete a notification: Select a notification. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Delete  option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to delete, or click the No button to close without deleting the notification.

To access the RDR Vehicle page from Vehicle Inventory: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the  RDR Vehicle option. Note : The RDR Vehicle page appears. If the vehicle is part of a Stop Sale campaign, a message appears indicating that the vehicle repairs must be completed before delivery. Click the OK button to acknowledge the message. Have the vehicle repaired, and then complete the RDR.

MRW: NNA internal users only (Countermeasure Service Parts Procurement group) Campaign Part Management Page Overview Note : The Campaign Part Management page applies to internal users only. Access the Campaign Parts Management page by clicking the Campaign Parts Management link on the Parts menu.  Purpose Use the Campaign Part Management page to add or delete campaign parts on the Campaign Parts list in the Dealer Business System (DBS) . Description The content area of the Campaign Part Management page displays the following sections: Filter by  - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Page Navigation - Allows you to navigate from page to page, if multiple pages exist Campaign Part Summary  -  Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Campaign Part Management page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Add a Campaign Part Access Reports Delete a Campaign Part Export Campaign Part Information Filter Campaign Part Management Summary Look Up a Part View Campaign Part Management Summary   Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Campaign Part Management page. Manage Campaign Parts Workflow Page Preview

To  approve an SVC order from the View SVC Order page: Click the Approve button. Note : A confirmation message appears. If you modified the order quantity, type a reason. Click the  Yes  button to confirm, or click the  No  button to close the window without confirming. SVC orders pending approval already contain parts that are on the Campaign Parts list, as validated by the system during order submission. You can only approve an SVC order in "New" status. You cannot approve an SVC order that contains errors.

Edit Dealer Information Page Overview Purpose Use the Edit Dealer Information page to edit information about a dealership. Description The content area of the Edit Dealer Information page displays the following sections: Dealer Information -   Allows you to edit the Internet Sales Manager's name, language code, and time zone code for a dealer Save and Cancel buttons - Allows you to submit or cancel requested changes . Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Edit Dealer Information page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Edit Dealer Information Edit Dealer Information   Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Edit Dealer Information page. Edit Dealer Information Workflow Page Preview

Note : The cancellation reason entries appear in a drop-down list that is displayed to authorized users when they request cancellation of a parts return. The instructions below provide the steps required to add a new parts return cancellation reason. To view the steps for editing or deleting a cancellation reason, click the Step by Step tab in full help. To add a parts return cancellation reason: At the bottom of the Manage Part Return Schedule page, click the Cancellation Reason Maintenance button. Note : The Cancellation Reason window appears. In the blank field at the top of the window, type the cancellation reason name. Click the Add icon.

To  look up a dealer from the View IASR page: At the end of the Dealer# field, click the Lookup icon. Note : The Dealer Lookup page appears. In the fields provided, type full or partial information, then press the Enter key. Note : You must include an asterisk (*) when typing partial information. Note : The application displays a list of matching dealers. Note : To clear your entries, click the Clear Fields icon. Select the radio button for the desired dealer. Click the Select button. Note : To cancel the lookup, click the Cancel button and close the dialog. Note : The application displays the dealer number in the field.

To view, print, or email the Window Sticker: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the  Window Sticker  option. Note : The window sticker opens. View the window sticker. To  print the window sticker, click the Print icon. To  email the window sticker, click the  Email button located at the bottom of the page. Note : A window opens for you to address the email. Type the recipient's email address in the Receiver Address field and type a subject in the Subject field. Click the  Send button. To close the window sticker, click the Cancel button. NCI refers to the Window Sticker as the Vehicle Pricing Sticker. You must have Adobe ® Reader ® (.pdf) installed on your computer to view the window sticker.

To view a list of unpacked parts: Click the Retrieve Unpack Parts button. Note :The Retrieve Unpack Parts window opens. To filter the list of unpacked parts, in the Filter By field, type the part number you want to view and then click the Search icon. To move a part to the list of packed parts, select the check box next to the part number, and then click the Move button.

Dealers may request cancellation of Host-generated ASR returns for the current return period if they are in "New" or "Open" status. To request cancellation of a parts return from the Edit Parts Return page: Click the Request Cancellation button. Click the Yes button to confirm the cancellation.

To access the RDR Detail Report page from the RDR History page: Select a vehicle. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the Print Detail  menu option. Note : The RDR Detail Report page opens in a separate window..

Note : This task is performed by internal users only. To activate or deactivate tracing: Type the logger name. From the Logging Level drop-down list, select the appropriate option from the list below. Debug - Logs information when failure or success of significant steps occurs in processing Info - Logs application life-cycle events such as application startup, initialization and shutdown Error - Logs the cause stack when an exception occurs Fatal - Logs the event that causes an unexpected termination of the application such as failure to connect to the host Click the  Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note: A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm and save, or click the  No  button to close the window without saving.

To view the calendar events summary and detail: Review the list of calendar events. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. If multiple pages exist, do one of the following to navigate from page to page: Click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow. - OR - In the Go to Page field, type a page number, and click the Go button.

To filter the Serviced with Open Campaign Report page: From the Affiliate drop-down list, select whether you wish to view data from Nissan North America or Nissan Canada. Note : The Division drop-down list updates automatically based on the affiliate selected. From the Region drop-down list, select the region you wish to review. From the Area drop-down list, select the area you wish to review. From the District drop-down list, select the district you wish to review. If desired, enter information to further narrow the details displayed by dealer, VIN, model code, model line, or model year. In the Campaign ID field, type the unique campaign identification number you wish to review. To view a list of current campaigns, review the Campaign Master Table page. If desired, in the RO Close Date from and to fields, use the calendars to select a date range to limit the results displayed. When you have finished entering your search and filter criteria, click the Search icon. Note : The Vehicle Campaign List section updates to display only those records found which match the criteria you entered.

Sales Landing Page Overview Purpose Use the Sales landing page to view alerts, announcements, and other news related to sales. You can also get a quick look at closed deals, booked deals, net RDRs, and rejected RDRs. Use the Sales landing page to view alerts, announcements, and other news related to sales. You can also get a quick look at closed deals and booked deals. Description The content area of the Sales landing page displays the following sections: Alerts -  As applicable, alert messages appear at the top of the page. These messages typically provide information that is system-critical. Announcements -   As applicable, high-priority messages appear in the Regional or National Announcements section.  When the message is no longer considered a high priority, the text automatically moves to the Other News section. Other News -  This section displays messages that have a lower priority than messages in the Announcements section. Quick Look - Displays a graph of current, month-to-date, and year-to-date closed deals, booked deals, and RDRs. Rejected RDRs - Displays a list of rejected RDRs. Note : If you are a dealer user, the Quick Look and Rejected RDR information is for your dealership only. If you belong to a dealer group, the information is for the dealership you selected from the Dealer drop-down. If you are an internal user, the information is for all Nissan dealers. Alerts -  As applicable, alert messages appear at the top of the page. These messages typically provide information that is system-critical. Announcements -   As applicable, high-priority messages appear in the Regional or National Announcements section.  When the message is no longer considered a high priority, the text automatically moves to the Other News section. Other News -  This section displays messages that have a lower priority than messages in the Announcements section. Quick Look - Displays a graph of current, month-to-month date, and year-to-date closed deals and broken deals. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Sales landing page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. View Alerts View Announcements and Other News View, Print, or Email Window Sticker View Vehicle Inventory Summary and Detail View Alerts View Announcements and Other News View, Print, or Email Window Sticker View Vehicle Inventory Summary and Detail Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Sales landing page. Manage Vehicle Inventory Workflow Report or Edit the Sale of a Vehicle (RDR) Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow View RDR History Workflow View Vehicle Inventory Workflow Manage Vehicle Inventory Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow View Vehicle Inventory Workflow Page Preview

To  copy all of a user's report definitions:  Click the  General Action button. From the  General Action menu, select the  Copy All Report(s)  option. Note : The Copy All Report(s) page appears where you can select a user to receive the report definition. Click here for more information. Dealer users may copy all of their own report definitions to another authorized user at their dealership. Dealer administrators and internal users can copy all of a user's report definitions to another authorized user.

To  copy all of a user's report definitions:  Click the  General Action button. From the  General Action menu, select the  Copy All Report(s)  option. Note : The Copy All Report(s) page appears where you can select a user to receive the report definition. Click here for more information. Dealer users may copy all of their own report definitions to another authorized user at their dealership. Dealer administrators and internal users can copy all of a user's report definitions to another authorized user.

To  copy all of a user's report definitions:  Click the  General Action button. From the  General Action menu, select the  Copy All Report(s)  option. Note : The Copy All Report(s) page appears where you can select a user to receive the report definition. Click here for more information. Dealer users may copy all of their own report definitions to another authorized user at their dealership. Dealer administrators and internal users can copy all of a user's report definitions to another authorized user.

To  copy all of a user's report definitions:  Click the  General Action button. From the  General Action menu, select the  Copy All Report(s)  option. Note : The Copy All Report(s) page appears where you can select a user to receive the report definition. Click here for more information. Dealer users may copy all of their own report definitions to another authorized user at their dealership. Dealer administrators and internal users can copy all of a user's report definitions to another authorized user.

To  copy all of a user's report definitions:  Click the  General Action button. From the  General Action menu, select the  Copy All Report(s)  option. Note : The Copy All Report(s) page appears where you can select a user to receive the report definition. Click here for more information. Dealer users may copy all of their own report definitions to another authorized user at their dealership. Dealer administrators and internal users can copy all of a user's report definitions to another authorized user.

NNA internal users only To filter the Campaign Part Management summary: Select a filter option. If a text-entry field appears, type a filter value (or perform a part lookup). - OR - If a drop-down list appears, select an option from the list. Note: Depending on your selection, additional filter options may display to narrow the results further. Note: Depending on your selection, the system may automatically filter the list and refresh the display. Click the Search button, as needed. View the parts that meet the selected criteria. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the  Clear  icon.

Completion of the Driver section of the RDR is optional, but assists Nissan in providing services and information to vehicle owners. To  complete the Driver section of an RDR: If the driver address is the same as the customer address, select the Driver address is the same as Customer address checkbox to automatically populate information in the Driver section with the details entered in the Customer section. Note : Although the data is copied from the Customer section, you may make changes as desired. Use this feature to quickly enter the address information, then change the name, phone, and email information to match the driver's data. From the Title drop-down list, select a title. Enter or update the co-buyer name, address, and contact information. Note : Type all 9s in the Daytime or Evening field if the buyer does not have a phone. In the Email field, type the co-buyer email address. Note : Type three asterisks (*) if the co-buyer does not have an email address. Click the  Save  button to save your changes, or click the  Cancel  button to close without saving. A   will display for any missing or incorrect data. Correct all errors before submitting the RDR. Note : If you are ready to submit the RDR, click here for more information.

View Customer Pay Reimbursement Analysis Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for customer pay reimbursement analysis.

To  open the Edit User Permissions page: Select the user. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Edit Permissions  option. Note : The Edit Permissions page appears.

View Overview Information   View National Service History Page Overview View National Service History Workflow Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks Review National Service History Details Search for a New VIN from the View NSH Page Use the View NSH Quick Jump Menu

To  complete the operations information for a claim on the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page: In the Operation Code field, type the six-character operation code that specifies the type of repair performed. Note : If you don't know the code, perform an operation code lookup. Note : DBS displays the operation code description. In the Req Hrs (Requested Hours)    field, type the flat rate time for the operation code. Note : Flat rate time is the amount of time the dealer is allowed to perform a specific operation. In the Req Amt  (Requested amount) field, type the requested monetary labor amount. Click the Add icon. Note : DBS populates the Coverage 1 Code and Amt fields. By default, the Coverage 1 Code is the coverage code you selected in the Claim Information section, and the Coverage 1 Amt is the amount you requested in the Requested Amount field. You can edit these fields as needed. To update the total amount of the claim, in the upper-right of the Summary section, click the Refresh Claim Total link. T he Sub (Sublet) field displays a default value of  "N". A value of "Y" indicates this operation or labor was outsourced to a third party. The DTC (Diagnostic Test Code) field indicates if you need to provide the DTC code. You can also click in the DTC field at any time to set a DTC code regardless of the operations code you entered. The PO (Primary Operation) checkbox indicates that the selected operation is set as the primary operation. If you selected the line type "PO" in the Claim Information section, you must select at least one operation as a primary operation.

To  complete the operations information for a claim on the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page: In the Operation Code field, type the six-character operation code that specifies the type of repair performed. Note : If you don't know the code, perform an operation code lookup. Note : DBS displays the operation code description. In the Req Hrs (Requested Hours)    field, type the flat rate time for the operation code. Note : Flat rate time is the amount of time the dealer is allowed to perform a specific operation. In the Req Amt  (Requested amount) field, type the requested monetary labor amount. Click the Add icon. Note : DBS populates the Coverage 1 Code and Amt fields. By default, the Coverage 1 Code is the coverage code you selected in the Claim Information section, and the Coverage 1 Amt is the amount you requested in the Requested Amount field. You can edit these fields as needed. To update the total amount of the claim, in the upper-right of the Summary section, click the Refresh Claim Total link. T he Sub (Sublet) field displays a default value of  "N". A value of "Y" indicates this operation or labor was outsourced to a third party. The DTC (Diagnostic Test Code) field indicates if you need to provide the DTC code. You can also click in the DTC field at any time to set a DTC code regardless of the operations code you entered. The PO (Primary Operation) checkbox indicates that the selected operation is set as the primary operation. If you selected the line type "PO" in the Claim Information section, you must select at least one operation as a primary operation.

To view study alert information from the Service Dashboard: In the Alerts section, move your mouse pointer over the Action icon on the applicable row. From the Action menu, select the  Detail option. Note : The Alert window opens. Select the study alert you want to view. Note : DBS indicates if the vehicle has already been put on hold. When you are finished viewing the alert detail, click the Close button. If an option is not available, that option is not displayed. The study alerts are color-coded. Alerts concerning Vehicle Hold Studies or Vehicle Hold Studies combined with Informational Studies are highlighted in red. Alerts concerning Informational-only Studies or Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) with keywords that match the Repair Order are highlighted in yellow.

To view a rejected RDR from the Sales landing page: Note : To access the Sales landing page, click the Sales menu tab. In the Rejected RDRs section, select a rejected RDR. Scroll to the bottom of the Rejected RDRs section and use the horizontal scroll bar to view the rejection reason. If desired, click the VIN for the selected RDR to open the RDR Vehicle page. Rejected RDRs can also be reviewed from the Vehicle Inventory page. Select the rejected RDR, then click the Action icon. Select the RDR Vehicle menu option to display the RDR Vehicle page. A rejection message displays at the top of the page.

Authorized help desk and administrative users will have the ability to emulate a user or dealership to assist in resolving issues in DBS . Emulation provides a read-only view of a dealer's or user's permissions and data. To emulate a user or dealership: Click the Start Emulation button on the Home page. Select one of the three options to select a dealership or user to emulate. Note : See the Step by Step tab in full help for additional details. Complete the steps necessary to select a user or dealership. Click the Emulate button. Note : The system displays a processing message while permissions and data are emulated. When processing is complete, the DBS  header shows the dealership or user you are emulating and the Stop Emulation button is activated. Use the menu tabs and system pages to resolve the issue. When you have completed your emulation session, click the Stop Emulation button to reset the system to your own permissions and data.

Change graphic to show magnifying glass and broom icons. Standard Operation Codes Page Overview - Internal User Purpose Use the Standard Operation Codes page to view and manage standard operation codes. Description The content area of the Standard Operation Codes page displays the following sections: Search by -  Allows you to search for records that match your criteria Note: The New, Export, and Run buttons are also located in this section. Summary -  Displays general information for all records on the page Detail -  Displays specific information for a selected record Tasks You can perform the following tasks from or on the Standard Operation Codes page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks . Delete a Standard Operation Code Export the Standard Operation Codes Summary Filter the Standard Operation Codes Summary Open the Create Standard Operation Group Page Open the Edit Standard Operation Group Page Re-Run Translation Process Restart a Standard Operation Code Suspend a Standard Operation Code View the Standard Operation Code Summary and Detail Delete a Standard Operation Code Export the Standard Operation Codes Summary Filter the Standard Operation Codes Summary Open the Create Standard Operation Group Page Open the Edit Standard Operation Group Page Re-Run Translation Process Restart a Standard Operation Code Suspend a Standard Operation Code View the Standard Operation Code Summary and Detail   Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Standard Operation Codes page. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow Page Preview

View Position Permissions Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing position permissions. Related Workflows The following workflow may have one or more tasks in common with the View Position Permissions Workflow. Edit Position Permissions Workflow

MRW: Internal user only. Done from the parts metrics page. To delete a custom search group: Select the custom group to be deleted. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Note : The custom group no longer appears in the custom group list.

Authorized PDC users have the ability to reject submitted parts returns for dealerships within their PDC permissions. To reject a parts return, the return must be in "Submitted" status. Rejecting the parts return sets the parts return status to "Open" so that dealers can make changes. To reject a submitted parts return: Select the parts return you want to reject. Note : The parts return must be in "Submitted" status. Move your cursor over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the  Reject Return menu option. Note : The Reject Part Return dialog box appears. Click the Yes button to confirm the rejection, or click the No button to close the dialog box without rejecting the return.

Office Landing Page Overview Purpose From the Office landing Page, you can access alerts, announcements, and other news related to the Office application. Depending on your system permissions, you can also click the any of the other tabs on the menu bar to access the corresponding applications within DBS . Description The content area of the Office landing page displays the following sections: Alerts -  As applicable, alert messages appear at the top of the page. These messages typically provide information that is system-critical. Announcements -   As applicable, high-priority messages appear in the Regional or National Announcements section.  When the message is no longer considered a high priority, the text automatically moves to the Other News section. Other News -   This section displays messages that have a lower priority than messages in the Announcements section. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Office landing page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. View Alerts View Announcements and Other News Page Preview

To view the Service Dashboard: View the list of alerts or open repair orders (ROs). Note : The Service Dashboard refreshes each time a dealer opens a new RO or modifies an existing RO. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title.  The study alerts are color-coded. Alerts concerning vehicle hold studies or vehicle hold studies  combined with  informational studies are highlighted in red. Alerts concerning Informational-only studies or Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) with keywords that match the repair order are highlighted in yellow.

To use the Service menu: Move your mouse pointer over the  Service tab to display the Service menu. Move your mouse pointer over the menu option you want to access. Note:  When you move your mouse pointer over a menu option, three icons appear for that option. The single-window icon opens the content in a new tab in the current browser. The double-window icon opens the selected content in a new tab and in a new browser. The star icon adds the link to your My Links list. Click the menu option or applicable icon to open the desired page or application. Internal Links Manage Warranty Claim Customer Pay Reimbursement Quick Entry Warranty Claim Early Detection Systems: Service Dashboard Early Detection Systems: Study Dashboard Manage Dealer Operation Code Standard Operation Category Standard Operation Codes National Service History Reports Report Writer Host Reports External Links Note : External links open external applications. Follow the procedures within the applications to complete tasks. What you see on the Service page menu is determined by your user ID and how your user profile is created. Your user profile indicates what functional areas and applications you need to access. Only those areas to which you have access appear on the Service page menu.

To  modify a detail line on a return: Select the detail line you want to modify. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. To change the part number, type a valid part number or perform a part lookup. Note : Click here for more information on how to look up a part. To change the return quantity, type a valid quantity. Type a valid bin location. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Save option. Click the Save button. To modify a detail line on a parts return, the return must be in "New" or "Open" status.

To view the detail of an error message on the Monitor Vehicle Inventory page: In the Error Data column for the selected record, click the View Detail link. Review the detail information for the error, and then click the Close link.

To delete a standard operation code: Select a code. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Click the Delete button to delete, or click the Cancel button to close without deleting. Note :The system removes the mapped field to the standard operation code. The system also flags the applicable repair order (RO) lines for re-run of translation. Note: After deleting a code, you should re-run the translation process to update the ROs in the National Service History RO table. Click here for more information.

Field, Button, and Link Descriptions Field Descriptions The DBS includes the following items. The item descriptions are grouped into tables by type, such as field, button, and so on. Field Description Filter by The type of filter to apply to the results. Selecting a filter activates secondary criteria. Language (unlabeled) The language in which to display the page. Odometer The odometer reading of the vehicle at the most current inventory event. The odometer reading is reported in miles (MI) for sites in the United States or kilometers (KM) for sites in Canada. Field Description Filter by A list of filters to apply to the search results. Selecting a filter activates secondary criteria. DIS The days a vehicle is in stock (current date minus the invoice date). Ext Color Code The code for the exterior color of a vehicle. Int Color Code The code for the interior color of a vehicle. Location Status The status of the location for a vehicle.  Model Code The model code for a vehicle. Model code is six alphanumeric characters. Example: T2RG50 for a 2.5 Altima Coupe M6. Note : Model code is always used in conjunction with the Option Group. Model Line Model line, also known as series code, is one alpha character. Example: T for Altima. MSRP The manufacturer's suggested retail price of a vehicle. Sales Status The status of the sale. Valid statuses include Null, Investment Proposal, Deal Opened, Deal Booked, Deal Closed, Deal Canceled, RDR Open, RDR Submitted, RDR Rejected, and Sold. Note : A Canceled deal overrides all other statuses. An RDR, regardless of status, overrides any Deal status. A rejected RDR overrides any status except Sold.  Stock # A unique identifier used by a dealer or retailer for a vehicle. Trim Level The English translation of the model code. Wholesale Date The odometer reading of the vehicle at the most current inventory event. The odometer reading is reported in miles (MI) for sites in the United States or kilometers (KM) for sites in Canada. Button Description Print Prints the summary information in a pre-formatted style that doesn't include header and footer information. Button Description Cancel Cancels the update process and discards all changes that have been made since the data was last saved. Submit Submits the request for approval and closes the XX page. Button Description Clear Cancels the current filters. Print Prints the vehicle summary information. Export Exports the vehicle summary information. Reports Lists the available report options. Link Description More Opens a window to display an entire announcement. Link Description Back to top Returns to the top of the current page. Close Closes the XX page and opens the XXX page. Link Description Locate Opens the OMS Vehicle Locator application. Show Detail or Hide Detail Shows or hides the Detail pane for a selected vehicle. Action Menu Item Description Edit Notes Opens the XX page so you can create, modify, or delete vehicle notes. Action Menu Item Description Change Configuration Opens the Configuration Inventory Search page so you can specify a distance search range and create or modify a custom dealer group. Edit Notes Opens the Notes page so you can create, modify, or delete vehicle notes. Place Vehicle in Demo Service Opens a window so you can type an in-service date for a vehicle to be placed in demo service. Print Vehicle Detail Displays the vehicle detail in a preview page so you can print the information. RDR Vehicle Opens the Retail Delivery Report Summary page so you can report the sale of a vehicle. Vehicle Search Opens the Inventory Search page so you can search the dealer inventory.  View Content Pricing Sheet Displays the Content Pricing Sheet or Vehicle Pricing Sticker for a selected vehicle (PDF format) so you can view, print, or email the sheet or sticker. View Incentives Opens the Vehicle Incentives page so you can view available incentives for a specific vehicle.  Action Menu Item Description Change Configuration Opens the Configuration Inventory Search page so you can specify a distance search range and create or modify a custom dealer group. Edit Notes Opens the Notes page so you can create, modify, or delete vehicle notes. Place Vehicle in Demo Service Opens a window so you can type an in-service date for a vehicle to be placed in demo service. Print Vehicle Detail Displays the vehicle detail in a preview page so you can print the information. Vehicle Search Opens the Inventory Search page so you can search the dealer inventory.  View Content Pricing Sheet Displays the Content Pricing Sheet or Vehicle Pricing Sticker for a selected vehicle (PDF format) so you can view, print, or email the sheet or sticker. View Incentives Opens the Vehicle Incentives page so you can view available incentives for a specific vehicle.  The Sales menu includes the following links for sales: Link Description Vehicle Inventory Opens the Vehicle Inventory page within DBS or Closes the Sales Menu page and opens the Inventory Management page to allow the user to manage inventory Inventory Search Closes the Sales page and opens the Inventory Management page to allow the user to manage inventory. Link Description Vehicle Inventory Opens the Vehicle Inventory page within DBS or Closes the Sales Menu page and opens the Inventory Management page to allow the user to manage inventory Inventory Search Closes the Sales page and opens the Inventory Management page to allow the user to manage inventory Field Descriptions The Inventory Search page includes the following items: Field Description Colors The colors available for the selected model. Location Status The status of the available models. Model Year The model year used to sort the results. Options & Packages The options and packages available for the selected model. Search Radius  The search radius and customer dealer group configured for the dealership. Select Model The vehicle models for which you want to search. Note: Models that are not available will be dimmed. Sort by The value by which the results are to be sorted. Trim Level The trim level for which you want to search. Button Description Add Adds the specified value. Cancel Cancels the last action and returns to the previous page. CV or DV Toggles the results view between Customer View (CV) and Dealer View (DV). Content Pricing Sheet Opens the vehicle's content pricing sheet in a separate window so you can view, print, and email the content pricing sheet. Notes Opens the Edit Note page so you can create, modify, or delete notes. Save Saves the last action and returns to the previous page. Search Settings  Opens the Configure Inventory Search page so you can set the distance search range and custom search group. >> (Add) Adds the selected value. << (Remove) Removes the selected value. Link Description OMS Vehicle Detail Opens the OMS application in a separate window.

To  access the copyright from any DBS  application page: Click the  Copyright link.

To  complete the Report Definition section: Type the report name. Type the report title. Select an application. Select a report category. Select a view. Select the fields for the report. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Available Fields list, click the Move All button. To adjust the position of a column in the report, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons. To add a count of records to the report, select the Check here to count records checkbox. Select the criteria operators for each field you want to filter. Click here for instructions to select criteria operators.

To  complete the Report Definition section: Type the report name. Type the report title. Select an application. Select a report category. Select a view. Select the fields for the report. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Available Fields list, click the Move All button. To adjust the position of a column in the report, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons. To add a count of records to the report, select the Check here to count records checkbox. Select the criteria operators for each field you want to filter. Click here for instructions to select criteria operators.

To  complete the Report Definition section: Type the report name. Type the report title. Select an application. Select a report category. Select a view. Select the fields for the report. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Available Fields list, click the Move All button. To adjust the position of a column in the report, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons. To add a count of records to the report, select the Check here to count records checkbox. Select the criteria operators for each field you want to filter. Click here for instructions to select criteria operators.

To  complete the Report Definition section: Type the report name. Type the report title. Select an application. Select a report category. Select a view. Select the fields for the report. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Available Fields list, click the Move All button. To adjust the position of a column in the report, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons. To add a count of records to the report, select the Check here to count records checkbox. Select the criteria operators for each field you want to filter. Click here for instructions to select criteria operators.

To  complete the Report Definition section: Type the report name. Type the report title. Select an application. Select a report category. Select a view. Select the fields for the report. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Available Fields list, click the Move All button. To adjust the position of a column in the report, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons. To add a count of records to the report, select the Check here to count records checkbox. Select the criteria operators for each field you want to filter. Click here for instructions to select criteria operators.

View Warranty Claims Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing warranty claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the (Insert workflow title) Workflow. Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow Manage Warranty Claims Workflow

Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.

Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.

Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.

Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.

Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.

To access the Modify Study page: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the study you want to modify. From the Action menu, select the  Edit Study  option. Modify the study. Click here for more information.

This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. To complete the Engine Code section of a study: In the Engine Prefix field, type the engine prefix. For example, if the engine code is QR25, the engine prefix is QR, and the engine series is 25. In the Engine Series field, type the engine series. In the Start Series field, type the ten character VIN number that begins the series range, if desired. Note : If you enter a VIN number series start, you must also enter a series end. In the End Series field, type the ten character VIN number that ends the series range. Click the Save button.

View Overview Information   Calendar Events Page Overview Create or Edit a Calendar Event Workflow Perform Tasks Change the Status of an Event Copy an Event Delete an Event Filter the Calendar Events Summary Open the Create Calendar Event Page Open the Edit Calendar Event Page Perform Common  DBS Tasks View or Print Calendar Event Detail View the Calendar Events Summary Change the Status of an Event Copy an Event Delete an Event Filter the Calendar Events Summary Open the Create Calendar Event Page Open the Edit Calendar Event Page Perform Common  DBS Tasks View or Print Calendar Event Detail View the Calendar Events Summary

Create or Edit Standard Operation Category Page Overview - Internal Users Purpose Use the Create or Edit Standard Operation Category page to create or edit a standard operation category. Description The content area of the Create or Edit Standard Operation Category page displays the following sections: Create/Edit Standard Operation Category - Allows you to provide a name and description for a standard operation category Key Words - Allows you to add or modify key words associated with a standard operation category Tasks You can perform the following tasks from or on the Create or Edit Standard Operation Category page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Add a Key Word Create or Edit a Standard Operation Category Delete a Key Word Delete a Standard Operation Category Edit a Key Word Open the Create Standard Operation Category Page Open the Edit Standard Operation Category Page Search the Standard Operation Category Summary View the Standard Operation Category Summary and Detail Add a Key Word Create or Edit a Standard Operation Category Delete a Key Word Delete a Standard Operation Category Edit a Key Word Open the Create Standard Operation Category Page Open the Edit Standard Operation Category Page Search the Standard Operation Category Summary View the Standard Operation Category Summary and Detail   Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Create or Edit Standard Operation Category page. Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Page Preview

You can manually report the sale of a vehicle sale of a vehicle for which a dealer trade has been performed in OMS that has not yet been listed in your DBS inventory by using the Quick Entry RDR page. To RDR a vehicle not in your inventory using Quick Entry RDR: From the Filter By drop-down list, select "VIN". In the Filter By data entry field, enter the full VIN number. Click the Search icon to search for the vehicle. A message appears that states that the vehicle is not in your inventory. Click the Yes button to continue the RDR for this VIN. Complete each section of the RDR. Complete the Vehicle section of the RDR. Click here for more information. Complete the Customer section of the RDR. Click here for more information. Complete the Driver section of the RDR. Click here for more information. Complete the Finance section of the RDR. Click here for more information. To print the RDR confirmation after submission, select the Automatically print RDR confirmation after submission? checkbox in the top right corner. Click the Save button. Note : When you click Save, DBS validates that the information in the RDR record is complete. If necessary, correct any errors and then click the Save button again. Click the Submit button to submit an RDR without errors. Note : The Submit button is only active for saved RDR records without errors. Note : The system will check the NNA Host to validate that the vehicle is in your OMS inventory. If the vehicle was successfully traded via OMS you will receive a message that the RDR was successful.

Help This Help page contains information about using  Dealer Business System (DBS)  Help. There are several ways to find the information that you need. Use the following features to navigate  DBS Help. Icon Description ( Page Help ) On a DBS application page, opens a drop-down list offering access to context-sensitive help and to full help. Internet Explorer users can also press the F10 key to open the context-sensitive help.  ( Help ) On a page within full help, displays this Help page.  ( Home ) Displays the "Welcome to the Dealer Business System (DBS) " introduction page.  ( Back )  ( Forward ) Returns to the previously viewed Help topic. Progresses to the next page within your viewing history.   ( Print Page ) Prints a copy of a displayed Help topic. Note : You may need to adjust your printer settings for optimal display of the printed help content.   ( Search ) Searches DBS  full help to find topics that include the searched item. Type a word, phrase, or acronym in the Search  field and click the  Search icon. Topics highlight all occurrences of the searched item.   ( Keywords ) Displays the Help index. Click a letter to view a list of keywords, phrases, or acronyms beginning with that letter. Click an item from the list to display a list of topics that include the indexed item.  ( Explorer ) Displays the table of contents.   ( Open all )    ( Close all ) Opens a list of topics displayed in the left-hand pane. Closes a list of topics displayed in the left-hand pane. DBS  Help contains the following menu tabs. Click a tab to view a list of related topics in the left-hand pane. Select a topic from the list to display its content in the right-hand pane. Menu Description Home Provides general information about  DBS , including overviews of the application pages accessed by all users and task instructions for customizing DBS , help and support, and navigation features. Sales Provides information about the vehicle sales application within DBS , including overviews of the application pages in Sales, workflows, task instructions, and information about viewing reports. Service Provides information about the service application within DBS , including overviews of the application pages in Service, workflows, task instructions, and information about viewing reports. Parts Provides information about the parts application within DBS , including overviews of the application pages in Parts, workflows, task instructions, and information about viewing reports. Office Provides information about the business office application within DBS , including overviews of the application pages in Office, workflows, task instructions, and descriptions information about viewing reports. Administration Provides information about the overall DBS application, including instructions for system administration and for maintaining user and dealership information, and information about viewing reports.

Replaced graphic; listed the separate sections in the description Create, Modify, or Replicate Report Page Overview Purpose Use the Create Report, Modify Report, or Replicate Report pages to create, modify, and replicate personalized report definitions in Report Writer to meet your specific needs. Description The content area of the Create Report, Modify Report, or Replicate Report pages display the following sections: Quick Jump Menu - Appears on the left-hand side of the page. The Quick Jump menu allows you to jump from section to section without scrolling. Report Definition - Identifies the report, application area, view, and report category; and lists available fields to include in the report Selection Criteria - Allows you to select criteria operators for each field in the report Sort Criteria - Allows you to select fields to be sorted Total/Sum Criteria - Allows you to select the fields to be totaled Printing Criteria - Allows you to adjust column width Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Create Report, Modify Report, or Replicate Report pages. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Select the Fields for a Report Select the Criteria Operators Select the Report Fields to be Sorted Select the Report Fields to be Totaled Adjust the Report Column Widths View a Report Definition Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Select the Fields for a Report Select the Criteria Operators Select the Report Fields to be Sorted Select the Report Fields to be Totaled Adjust the Report Column Widths View a Report Definition Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Report Definition page. Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Page Preview

Replaced graphic; listed the separate sections in the description Create, Modify, or Replicate Report Page Overview Purpose Use the Create Report, Modify Report, or Replicate Report pages to create, modify, and replicate personalized report definitions in Report Writer to meet your specific needs. Description The content area of the Create Report, Modify Report, or Replicate Report pages display the following sections: Quick Jump Menu - Appears on the left-hand side of the page. The Quick Jump menu allows you to jump from section to section without scrolling. Report Definition - Identifies the report, application area, view, and report category; and lists available fields to include in the report Selection Criteria - Allows you to select criteria operators for each field in the report Sort Criteria - Allows you to select fields to be sorted Total/Sum Criteria - Allows you to select the fields to be totaled Printing Criteria - Allows you to adjust column width Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Create Report, Modify Report, or Replicate Report pages. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Select the Fields for a Report Select the Criteria Operators Select the Report Fields to be Sorted Select the Report Fields to be Totaled Adjust the Report Column Widths View a Report Definition Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Select the Fields for a Report Select the Criteria Operators Select the Report Fields to be Sorted Select the Report Fields to be Totaled Adjust the Report Column Widths View a Report Definition Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Report Definition page. Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Page Preview

Replaced graphic; listed the separate sections in the description Create, Modify, or Replicate Report Page Overview Purpose Use the Create Report, Modify Report, or Replicate Report pages to create, modify, and replicate personalized report definitions in Report Writer to meet your specific needs. Description The content area of the Create Report, Modify Report, or Replicate Report pages display the following sections: Quick Jump Menu - Appears on the left-hand side of the page. The Quick Jump menu allows you to jump from section to section without scrolling. Report Definition - Identifies the report, application area, view, and report category; and lists available fields to include in the report Selection Criteria - Allows you to select criteria operators for each field in the report Sort Criteria - Allows you to select fields to be sorted Total/Sum Criteria - Allows you to select the fields to be totaled Printing Criteria - Allows you to adjust column width Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Create Report, Modify Report, or Replicate Report pages. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Select the Fields for a Report Select the Criteria Operators Select the Report Fields to be Sorted Select the Report Fields to be Totaled Adjust the Report Column Widths View a Report Definition Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Select the Fields for a Report Select the Criteria Operators Select the Report Fields to be Sorted Select the Report Fields to be Totaled Adjust the Report Column Widths View a Report Definition Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Report Definition page. Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Page Preview

Replaced graphic; listed the separate sections in the description Create, Modify, or Replicate Report Page Overview Purpose Use the Create Report, Modify Report, or Replicate Report pages to create, modify, and replicate personalized report definitions in Report Writer to meet your specific needs. Description The content area of the Create Report, Modify Report, or Replicate Report pages display the following sections: Quick Jump Menu - Appears on the left-hand side of the page. The Quick Jump menu allows you to jump from section to section without scrolling. Report Definition - Identifies the report, application area, view, and report category; and lists available fields to include in the report Selection Criteria - Allows you to select criteria operators for each field in the report Sort Criteria - Allows you to select fields to be sorted Total/Sum Criteria - Allows you to select the fields to be totaled Printing Criteria - Allows you to adjust column width Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Create Report, Modify Report, or Replicate Report pages. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Select the Fields for a Report Select the Criteria Operators Select the Report Fields to be Sorted Select the Report Fields to be Totaled Adjust the Report Column Widths View a Report Definition Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Select the Fields for a Report Select the Criteria Operators Select the Report Fields to be Sorted Select the Report Fields to be Totaled Adjust the Report Column Widths View a Report Definition Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Report Definition page. Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Page Preview

Replaced graphic; listed the separate sections in the description Create, Modify, or Replicate Report Page Overview Purpose Use the Create Report, Modify Report, or Replicate Report pages to create, modify, and replicate personalized report definitions in Report Writer to meet your specific needs. Description The content area of the Create Report, Modify Report, or Replicate Report pages display the following sections: Quick Jump Menu - Appears on the left-hand side of the page. The Quick Jump menu allows you to jump from section to section without scrolling. Report Definition - Identifies the report, application area, view, and report category; and lists available fields to include in the report Selection Criteria - Allows you to select criteria operators for each field in the report Sort Criteria - Allows you to select fields to be sorted Total/Sum Criteria - Allows you to select the fields to be totaled Printing Criteria - Allows you to adjust column width Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Create Report, Modify Report, or Replicate Report pages. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Select the Fields for a Report Select the Criteria Operators Select the Report Fields to be Sorted Select the Report Fields to be Totaled Adjust the Report Column Widths View a Report Definition Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Select the Fields for a Report Select the Criteria Operators Select the Report Fields to be Sorted Select the Report Fields to be Totaled Adjust the Report Column Widths View a Report Definition Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Report Definition page. Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Page Preview

To edit a claim on the Express Entry Warranty Claim page: Select the claim you want to edit. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the  Action  menu, select  the Edit Claim in Express Entry Screen option.

View Page Overview or Field Definitions Position Summary Page Overview Edit Position Permissions Workflow View Position Permissions Workflow Perform Tasks Export the Position Application Function Spreadsheet Filter Position Summary Open the Edit Position Permissions Page   Open the View Position Permissions Page Perform Common  DBS Tasks View Position Summary Export Position Permissions Currently in the System Filter Position Summary Import Changes to Position Permissions Open the Edit Position Permissions Page Open the View Position Permissions Page Perform Common DBS Tasks View Position Summary  

Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report Page Overview Purpose Authorized dealer and corporate users may use the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report page to view a list of vehicles sold with an open campaign. The information from this page comes from a variety of sources including vehicle repair orders or marketing and campaign mailing lists. Description The content area of the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report page displays the following sections: Filter -  The Filter section allows you to set criteria to reduce or expand the number of results displayed. Agreement -  The Agreement section requires you to acknowledge your acceptance of the guidelines covering use of the data displayed on the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report page. You must accept the agreement statements before you can search for data. Details -  The Details section allows you to customize display of the details which match the filter criteria you entered, and then export the information displayed to Microsoft ®  Excel ® . Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. About the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report Page Edit Information on the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report Page Export Information from the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report Page Search for Information on the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report View NSH for a Vehicle on the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report Page View TSB for a Vehicle on the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report Page Page Preview

Use the Contact Us page (available from the footer) to perform this task. Note : The footer is a short menu that appears at the bottom of every page in the DBS application. To contact the Help Desk by telephone during normal support hours:  Users in the United States should dial 1-855-233-8856. Select a language option: To hear prompts in English, press 1. To hear prompts in Spanish, press 2. To hear prompts in French, press 3. To leave a message after normal support hours, press 4. Normal telephone support hours are: Monday through Friday 6:00 AM CT - 9:00 PM CT Saturday 7:00 AM CT - 6:00 PM CT Sunday and Limited Holidays 7:00 AM - 6:00 PM CT (pager support only)

7/24: Defect: RDR History Screen. Currently, the RDR History page includes the "R2 Report" action. A new action "RDR Detail Report" will replace the R2 Report action and the Print Detail action. COMPLETETED TEXT CHANGES 8/27: Submitted process changes to Becky 8/27: STILL NEED: FUNCTIONALITY - Need to capture new report in English and Spanish, and action menu in Spanish. RDR Detail Report Page Overview Purpose Use the RDR Detail Report page to view RDRs that have recently been submitted to Nissan North America (NNA). Description The content area of the RDR Detail Report page displays the following sections: Summary - Identifies the dealer and displays the RDR status, date, and acknowledgement comments. Vehicle - Displays vehicle information, such as VIN and model code Customer  - Displays customer information, such as name and address. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the RDR Detail Report page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Print Information   Page Preview

To search the National Service History for a new VIN from the View NSH page: In the Full VIN or Last 8 of VIN field, enter either a full VIN number or the last eight characters of a VIN. Click the Search icon. Note : The details section updates to display the information for the new VIN, if found. If no NSH information exists for the VIN, a warning message displays below the VIN entry field. If you need to search information found on another DBS  page for the VIN you want to enter, use the menu tabs for the application area, then select the Open in New Window icon for the page you want to view. Click here for more information about opening a page in a new window.

To  reject an SVC Order from the View SVC Order page: Click the Reject button. Note : A Reject Message dialog appears. Type a reason for the rejection. Note : Dealers can view the rejection reason in the Parts Order Detail section. Click the OK button to confirm the rejection, or click the Cancel button to cancel the rejection. Note : The system cancels the order. SVC orders pending approval contain parts that are on the Campaign Parts list, as validated by the system during order submission. You can only reject an SVC order in "New" status.

To view the dealer operation code summary: View the list of codes. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title.

Note : This task is performed by internal users only. To monitor the environment status: To view information for a different date, select or type a date in the Enter the date to view system information field. Note : By default,  DBS  displays the current status information for DBS  and the network host in the Environment Status section. Click the Search button. The data on the page refreshes at the interval defined within the DBS  configuration.

To use the Sales menu: Move your cursor over the applicable tab to display a menu. Note: The Home tab does not display a menu. Move your cursor over the menu option you want to access. Note:  When you move your cursor over a menu option, three icons appear for that option. The single window icon opens the content in a new tab in the current browser. The double window icon opens the selected content in a new tab and in a new browser. The star icon adds the link to your My Links list. Click the menu option or applicable icon to open the desired page or application. Note : If you click a menu option, instead of clicking an icon, the content opens in the current tab. To view the page overview for each internal menu option on the Sales menu, click the applicable link. Dealer Links Vehicle Inventory   Inventory Search Batch RDR Quick Entry RDR  RDR History OMS Internal Links Vehicle Inventory   Inventory Search Batch RDR Quick Entry RDR Pre-RDR Reporting RDR History Flooring Audit Reports Report Writer Host Reports External Links Note : External links open external applications. Follow the procedures within the applications to complete tasks. What you see on the Sales page menu is determined by your user ID and how your user profile is created. Your user profile indicates what functional areas and applications you need to access. Only those functional areas you need access to will display on the Sales page menu.

To  access the context-sensitive help available for an application page: Move your cursor over the Help link. Click the Context Help link. From the "What do you want to do?" list, click the link for the task you want to perform. To view the extended help for a task, click the Full Help button. Internet Explorer users can access context-sensitive help by pressing the F10 key on their keyboard. The full help system allows you to search for help information and view all help topics for the  Dealer Business System (DBS) . You can also get help for DBS  by clicking the Live Chat button.

To  access the event calendar from any DBS  application page: Click the Event Calendar link.

Event Calendar Page Overview Purpose Use the Event Calendar page to view the events designated for your region, user role, or dealership. Description The content area of the Event Calendar page displays the following sections: Calendar -  Shows the calendar and calendar events for the month or week indicated. Search -  Allows you to specify a start date for the calendar displayed in the content area. Display Toggle -  Allows you to change between weekly view and monthly view. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Event Calendar page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Search for a Specific Date View the Event Calendar Summary and Detail Search for a Specific Date View the Event Calendar Summary and Detail Page Preview

To delete a standard operation code assignment: Select a code. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : The Delete Confirmation window opens. Click the Delete button to delete, or click the Cancel button to close without deleting. Note : The system deletes the operation code assignment from the group.

To create a custom VIN campaign report by file import: Click the Import button. Click the Upload File  button. Note : Carefully follow the guidelines provided to format your Microsoft ®  Excel ®  spreadsheet before import. Failure to follow these guidelines will result in poor results or system error.  Note : To remove the existing file, click the Clear Uploaded File button. Following your browser-specific instructions, navigate to and attach your Microsoft ®  Excel ® spreadsheet. Note : The confirmation message appears. Example: "Campaign.xlsx uploaded successfully". Click the OK button. Click the Check Open Campaign button. Note : When you check for open campaigns, ONLY those vehicles with an open campaign are displayed in the Campaign Report list. Export the Campaign Report to sort or filter the data in Microsoft ®  Excel ® .

To  grant or remove access to a Host Report: Show the Host Report section, if collapsed. Note : To show the Host Report section, click the + icon in the section header. Expand the section(s). Note : To expand all items in the section, click the expand all link in the section header. Select or clear the item(s). Note : When you select or clear a checkbox at a higher hierarchy level, all items under that level are selected or cleared. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm, or click the  No  button to close the window without confirming. The function tree displays permission options in hierarchical order, starting with the menu items at the top and ending with the specific functional items at the bottom.

To  grant or remove access to a Host Report: Show the Host Report section, if collapsed. Note : To show the Host Report section, click the + icon in the section header. Expand the section(s). Note : To expand all items in the section, click the expand all link in the section header. Select or clear the item(s). Note : When you select or clear a checkbox at a higher hierarchy level, all items under that level are selected or cleared. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm, or click the  No  button to close the window without confirming. The function tree displays permission options in hierarchical order, starting with the menu items at the top and ending with the specific functional items at the bottom.

Parts Introduction   Description The Parts application within the Dealer Business System (DBS)  provides applications and integration points to allow dealers to conduct parts-related business with NNA and other dealers. This includes the tools needed to create, edit, and manage parts orders and returns. The Parts application also provides the capability to create service campaign orders, which are submitted to the Countermeasure Service Parts Procurement Group for review and approval. The Parts application also includes the Request for Credit (RFC) application. Note : The items you see in the menu tabs and menu links vary based on your permissions. If you need to request changes to your permissions, please contact your dealership's System Administrator. You can find the System Administrator(s) for you dealership by viewing your profile. For more information, click  here . The Parts menu in DBS  help shows content listed by application page. For ease of use, content is organized by application page following the DBS  menu when possible. When you first begin using DBS  and the DBS  help system, we recommend that you review the help system menu and then view the page overview, workflow, and task information for the tasks you will be performing in DBS .

The Notifications function is currently disabled per Nissan request. You can create and edit notifications, but they will not be sent unless the functionality is restored. To view the notification summary: Review the list of notifications. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. Note: Only those with an arrow next to the column title can be sorted. Note : If multiple pages display, click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow to navigate from page to page.

To view or print the announcement detail: Select the announcement for which you want to view or print detail. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. Select the  View/Print option. Note : The View Details window appears. To print, click the Print button. To close, click the Close button. Use the View/Print option to view the contents and recipients of an announcement.

To  look up a part from the View Full ASR Data page: At the end of the Part Number field, click the Lookup icon. Note : The Part Lookup page appears. In the fields provided, type full or partial information. Note : You must include an asterisk (*) when typing partial information. Note : To remove search criteria, click the  Clear  icon. Click the  Search  icon. Note : DBS displays a list of records matching the search criteria in the Parts section.  Select the desired part. Note : DBS displays part detail in the Part Detail section. To determine if the part is superseded, scroll down in the Part Detail section. Note : If a " Y " appears in the Supersession Flag field, the part is superseded.  Note : The new part number appears in the New Part field above the Supersession Flag field. If the part is superseded, copy the value in the New Part field, paste it into the Part Number field, and repeat steps 3-6. To select the part, click the Select button. Note : To cancel the lookup, click the  Cancel button.

To  edit a parts return: Review any warnings or error messages. Note : To view messages, move your mouse over the warning or error icon(s). Modify parts return information, as needed. Note : Click here for more information on adding a part to a return. Note : Click here for more information on adding multiple parts to a return. Note : Click here for more information on deleting a part from a return. Note : Click here for more information on filtering the parts return detail. Note : Click here  for more information on modifying a detail line item on a return. Note : You must correct all errors before submitting the return. To edit a parts return, the return must be in "New" or "Open" status.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To  copy a report definition: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the  Action menu, select the  Copy option. Note : The Copy Report page appears where you can select a user to receive the report definition. Click here for more information.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To  copy a report definition: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the  Action menu, select the  Copy option. Note : The Copy Report page appears where you can select a user to receive the report definition. Click here for more information.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To  copy a report definition: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the  Action menu, select the  Copy option. Note : The Copy Report page appears where you can select a user to receive the report definition. Click here for more information.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To  copy a report definition: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the  Action menu, select the  Copy option. Note : The Copy Report page appears where you can select a user to receive the report definition. Click here for more information.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To  copy a report definition: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the  Action menu, select the  Copy option. Note : The Copy Report page appears where you can select a user to receive the report definition. Click here for more information.

View Overview Information   Create Parts Order Page Overview Create Parts Order Workflow Perform Tasks Add a Part to an Order Create or Edit a Parts Order Create a Transient Owner Service Parts Order Delete a Part from an Order Delete a Parts Order Look Up a Part Modify a Detail Line on an Order Perform Common DBS Tasks Submit a Parts Order View the Parts List Add a Part to an Order Create or Edit a Parts Order Delete a Part from an Order Delete a Parts Order Look Up a Part Modify a Detail Line on an Order Perform Common DBS Tasks Submit a Parts Order View the Parts List

To  generate a report: If desired, from the Search by drop-down list, select a filter option. Type a secondary filter value, and then press the Enter key. Select a dealer. Click the Schedule button. From the Email Notification of Report Completion options, select Yes if you would like to receive an email notification when the report is generated, or No if you do not want to receive an email notification. If you selected Yes, either select the checkbox next to your email address, or type additional addresses in the blank field and select the checkbox next to the field. Select a file type. Select when you want the report to run. Click Schedule .

To  generate a report: If desired, from the Search by drop-down list, select a filter option. Type a secondary filter value, and then press the Enter key. Select a dealer. Click the Schedule button. From the Email Notification of Report Completion options, select Yes if you would like to receive an email notification when the report is generated, or No if you do not want to receive an email notification. If you selected Yes, either select the checkbox next to your email address, or type additional addresses in the blank field and select the checkbox next to the field. Select a file type. Select when you want the report to run. Click Schedule .

To  generate a report: If desired, from the Search by drop-down list, select a filter option. Type a secondary filter value, and then press the Enter key. Select a dealer. Click the Schedule button. From the Email Notification of Report Completion options, select Yes if you would like to receive an email notification when the report is generated, or No if you do not want to receive an email notification. If you selected Yes, either select the checkbox next to your email address, or type additional addresses in the blank field and select the checkbox next to the field. Select a file type. Select when you want the report to run. Click Schedule .

To  generate a report: If desired, from the Search by drop-down list, select a filter option. Type a secondary filter value, and then press the Enter key. Select a dealer. Click the Schedule button. From the Email Notification of Report Completion options, select Yes if you would like to receive an email notification when the report is generated, or No if you do not want to receive an email notification. If you selected Yes, either select the checkbox next to your email address, or type additional addresses in the blank field and select the checkbox next to the field. Select a file type. Select when you want the report to run. Click Schedule .

To  generate a report: If desired, from the Search by drop-down list, select a filter option. Type a secondary filter value, and then press the Enter key. Select a dealer. Click the Schedule button. From the Email Notification of Report Completion options, select Yes if you would like to receive an email notification when the report is generated, or No if you do not want to receive an email notification. If you selected Yes, either select the checkbox next to your email address, or type additional addresses in the blank field and select the checkbox next to the field. Select a file type. Select when you want the report to run. Click Schedule .

To  look up a part on a repair order: At the end of the  Part Number field, click the Lookup  icon. Note : The Part Lookup page opens. In the fields provided, type full or partial information. Note : To clear your entries, click the Clear icon. Click the Search icon. Note :  DBS displays a list of records matching the search criteria in the Parts section. Select the desired part and then click the Select button. Note : DBS displays the selected part details in the Part Detail section.

To  look up a part on a repair order: At the end of the  Part Number field, click the Lookup  icon. Note : The Part Lookup page opens. In the fields provided, type full or partial information. Note : To clear your entries, click the Clear icon. Click the Search icon. Note :  DBS displays a list of records matching the search criteria in the Parts section. Select the desired part and then click the Select button. Note : DBS displays the selected part details in the Part Detail section.

Perform Tasks Select Dealer Users by Dealer Number Select Dealer Users by Geography Select Dealer Users by Hierarchy Select Dealer Trade User Recipients Select Internal Users by Geography Select Internal Users by Hierarchy

View Overview Information   Edit Dealer Permissions Page Overview Edit Dealer Permissions Workflow Perform Tasks Grant or Remove Access to a Host Report Grant or Remove Access to a Page, Action, Custom Field, or Website Grant or Remove Access to a Report Writer View Grant or Remove Access to a Star Web Service Grant or Remove Full Access to a Menu and Its Contents Perform Common  DBS Tasks Use the Quick Jump Menu View Dealer Permissions Grant or Remove Access to a Host Report Grant or Remove Access to a Page, Action, Custom Field, or Website Grant or Remove Access to a Report Writer View Grant or Remove Access to a Star Web Service Grant or Remove Full Access to a Menu and Its Contents Perform Common  DBS Tasks Use the Quick Jump Menu View Dealer Permissions

To grant or remove access to a Report Writer view: Show the Host Report section, if collapsed. Note : To show the Report Writer section, click the +  icon in the section header. Expand the section(s). Note : To expand all items in the section, click the expand all link in the section header. Select or clear the item(s). Note : When you select or clear a checkbox at a higher hierarchy level, all items under that level are selected or cleared. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm, or click the  No  button to close the window without confirming. The function tree displays permission options in hierarchical order, starting with the menu items at the top and ending with the specific functional items at the bottom.

To grant or remove access to a Report Writer view: Show the Host Report section, if collapsed. Note : To show the Report Writer section, click the +  icon in the section header. Expand the section(s). Note : To expand all items in the section, click the expand all link in the section header. Select or clear the item(s). Note : When you select or clear a checkbox at a higher hierarchy level, all items under that level are selected or cleared. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm, or click the  No  button to close the window without confirming. The function tree displays permission options in hierarchical order, starting with the menu items at the top and ending with the specific functional items at the bottom.

To  access the Contact Us page from any application page: Click the Contact Us link.

To view or print the alert detail: Select the alert for which you want to view or print detail. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. Select the  View/Print option. Note : The View Details window appears. To print, click the Print button. To close, click the Close button. Use the View/Print option to view the contents and recipients of an alert you have created.

To complete the Basic Information section of a study: From the Component Group drop-down list, select the appropriate component for the study. To create a new study based on criteria established in a previous study, in the Study List section, select the name of the study you want to replicate. Note : The Study List section is only available when creating a new study. In the Study Name field, enter a name for the study. In the Description field, type a detailed description of the study. In the Start Date field, use the calendar to select a start date for the study. In the End Date field, use the calendar to select the end date for the study. Note : Studies have a maximum length of six months. Click the Save button.

To remove a repair order (RO) job line from a study: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the RO job line you want to remove. From the Action menu, select the Remove RO Job Line option. Click the Remove button to confirm.

Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks Select an Affiliate

RO Work in Process Page Overview Purpose The RO Work in Process page allows you to view service alerts and open repair orders (ROs) in one, user-friendly interface. DBS automatically updates the RO Work in Process page each time a vehicle alert or RO is created or modified. All entries in the Alerts section match keywords from an EDS study. Note : An EDS study is created by DBS Internal users to track information related to vehicle performance or construction. The main study categories are general, hold, and informational. Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) are part of informational studies. It is very important to look at the Alerts section regularly so you can respond appropriately to service alerts, especially to vehicle holds. Each dealership may have different procedures for responding to vehicle holds. For example, a dealership might respond by telling customers about the issue and then communicating with the Engineering department for items to be addressed. At times, vehicles may also need to be recalled. Description The content area of the RO Work in Process page displays the following sections: Filter -  Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Alerts -  Displays job lines from ROs that have alerts associated with them. Open ROs -  Displays all open repair orders without alerts Color-Coding in Alerts Section Color-coding in the Alerts section is designed to help you quickly identify the type of alert being issued by NNA/NCI, as described in the following table. Matched Study Type Color Highlight Vehicle Hold Only Red Vehicle Hold and Informational Red Informational Only Yellow Linked TSB with matching keywords Yellow Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the RO Work in Process page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Export RO Work in Process Information Filter the RO Work in Process Page Hold Vehicle or Ignore Request Perform Common DBS  Tasks View NSH View Repair Order Information View Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) Page Preview

View Overview Information   Emulate a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number Page Overview Perform Tasks Emulate a Dealership or User Perform Common DBS Tasks Emulate a Dealership or User Perform Common DBS Tasks

View Overview Information   View Position Permissions Page Overview View Positions Permissions Workflow Perform Tasks Perform Common  DBS Tasks Use the Quick Jump Menu View Position Permissions Perform Common  DBS Tasks Use the Quick Jump Menu View Position Permissions

You may need to scroll to the right to view the Action column. You can also drag and drop columns to move the Action, Comment, and Remove Flag columns to a location where they can more easily be maintained. To edit information the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report page: Click the Edit icon for the row you wish to edit. Note : The fields you are allowed to update are activated. If desired, from the Remove Flag drop-down list, select whether or not the flag for this vehicle should be removed. Note : When to remove the flag for the vehicle varies by dealership. You may want to remove the flag when the vehicle has been repaired, or when the customer has scheduled a service appointment. It is recommended that if you change the value of this drop-down list, you should also apply a comment indicating the reason for the change. In the Comment field, supply a brief comment about this record. To save the changes made, click the Save icon. To discard the changes, click the Cancel icon. Note : There is no confirmation message for this action. If you want to change the edited information, simply re-edit the record.

To complete the Operations section of an express entry warranty claim: Note : If you search for a repair order and line number, the information in the Operations section is populated with the repair order information. Add additional information as necessary. From the Sub drop-down list, select "Y" if the labor was outsourced or sublet to a third party. If the labor was not outsourced or sublet to a third party, in the Tech field, type the technician name. In the Op Code field, type the operation code which corresponds to the labor performed on the vehicle. In the Req Hrs field, type the amount of time the dealer is allowed to perform the specific operation for the operation code. In the Req Amt field, type the requested monetary labor amount. If necessary, in the Coverage 1 Code field, update the coverage code. Note : The coverage code is automatically populated based on information entered in the Claim Information section. In the Coverage 1 Amt field, enter the amount covered for the operation. If the coverage amount is split between or among coverage types, complete the Coverage 2 and Coverage 3 fields as appropriate. If the operation code is for labor to perform a diagnostic test, in the DTC column, click the N link to add a diagnostic test code. If the selected operation should be set as the primary operation, select the PO checkbox. As appropriate, click the Plus Sign to add additional operations.

View VOR Inquiry Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing VOR order information. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View VOR Inquiry workflow. Edit Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow View Parts Order Workflow

MRW: 7/23: Need to add Transient Owner Service parts order when function exists in stage for Infiniti release (R3). Edit Parts Order Page Overview Purpose Use the Edit Parts Order page to modify an existing new or open parts order. You can edit a parts order from the Parts Order Management page. You must first search for and locate the desired parts order that you want to edit. Description The content area of the Edit Parts Order page displays the following sections: Edit Parts Order header - Allows you to view and specify general information about a parts order including, but not limited to, order type, dealer order reference #, shipping instructions, and backorder or cross ship preferences Parts Order Detail  - Allows you to add a part, delete a part, edit a line item, including line item back order and cross ship preferences, or designate free parts (solicited orders only) Buttons - Allows you to save, submit, delete or cancel a parts order Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Edit Parts Order page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Add a Part to an Order Create or Edit a Parts Order Delete a Part from an Order Delete a Parts Order Look Up a Part Modify a Detail Line on an Order Submit a Parts Order View ASR Data for a Part on a Parts Order View the Parts List on an Order Add a Part to an Order Create or Edit a Parts Order Delete a Part from an Order Delete a Parts Order Look Up a Part Modify a Detail Line on an Order Submit a Parts Order View the Parts List on an Order Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Edit Parts Order page. Edit Parts Order Workflow Page Preview

To filter the RDR History listing: If necessary, update the vehicle sale type and fleet filter. From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. If a text-entry field appears, type a secondary filter value, and then press the  Enter key.   Note : For name fields, use a comma to separate names or letters. - OR - If date range fields appear, click in the field and use the calendar to select the desired date(s). View the RDRs that meet the selected criteria. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default, click the Clear icon.

View Parts Master Information Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for displaying parts master information. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View Parts Master Information Workflow. Request Full Parts Master Workflow

ASR Return Performance Page Overview Note : The Automatic Stock Replenishment (ASR) Return Performance page applies to internal users only. Purpose Use the ASR Return Performance page to compare the suggested return amounts with the actual return amounts. Description The content area of the ASR Return Performance page displays the following sections: Request Criteria  - Allows you to specify request criteria, including return year, region, district and dealer number ASR Return Performance Summary  - Displays general information for all records on the page , including region, district, dealer, scheduled return date; ASR suggested, actual, and percent amount; and MOQ suggested, actual and percent amount Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the ASR Return Performance page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Access Reports Export ASR Return Performance Information Look Up a Dealer View ASR Return Performance Summary Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflow are performed on the ASR Return Performance page. View Automatic Stock Replenishment Return Performance Workflow Page Preview

To view the parts list on an order: Review the list of parts in the order. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. Note: If multiple pages exist: To view additional records, click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow to navigate from page to page. To view a specific page, in the Go to Page field, type a page number, then click the Go button.

Custom VIN Campaign Report Page Overview Purpose Dealers use the Custom VIN Campaign Report page to view the open campaigns applicable to vehicles in their inventory. The Custom VIN Campaign Report page allows dealers to key in VIN numbers they wish to review or input an Excel spreadsheet with up to 5000 VINs. Description The content area of the Custom VIN Campaign Report page displays the following sections: Filter - The filter section allows you to filter your Campaign Report results by repair status and/or claim status. VIN List - The VIN List section displays information for those vehicles with an associated campaign. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Custom VIN Campaign Report page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Create a Custom VIN Campaign Report by File Import Create a Custom VIN Campaign Report by Keying in VINs Export Custom VIN Campaign Report Page Information Filter the Custom VIN Campaign Report Page Page Preview

View the Service Dashboard Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing the Service Dashboard. You may view study alerts generated regarding vehicles that meet the criteria of informational or hold studies or technical service bulletins. You may also view open repair orders or National Service History.

This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. DBS maintains repair order information for the current model year and five previous model years (ten previous model years for Infiniti), beginning from the 2011 model year for both divisions. If desired, you can select one or more model years to limit the study results. To complete the Model Year section of a study: Select each model year which should be included in the study, and then use the center buttons as necessary to customize the Selected Model Year list. When you have selected all desired model years, click the Save button.

View Overview Information   Quick Entry Used Vehicle Sale Page Overview Perform Tasks Delete an RDR Report or Edit the Sale of a Used Vehicle Complete the Vehicle Section of an RDR Complete the Buyer Section of an RDR Complete the Driver Section of an RDR Complete the Finance Section of an RDR Save or Submit a Used Vehicle RDR Perform Common DBS Tasks

View Overview Information   View Part Master  Information Page Overview View Parts Master Information Workflow Perform Tasks Access Reports Look Up a Part Perform Common DBS Tasks View Part Master Information Access Reports Look Up a Part Perform Common DBS Tasks View Part Master Information

View Overview Information Create or Edit an Alert Page Overview   Create or Edit an Alert Workflow Perform Tasks Create or Edit an Alert Perform Common DBS Tasks Select Dealer Users by Geography Select Dealer Users by Hierarchy Select Dealer Users by Input a Dealer Select Internal Users by Geography Select Internal Users by Hierarchy Create or Edit an Alert Perform Common DBS Tasks Select Dealer Users by Geography Select Dealer Users by Hierarchy Select Dealer Users by Input a Dealer Select Internal Users by Geography Select Internal Users by Hierarchy

To edit the campaign master information for a campaign: Select the campaign for which you want to edit the campaign master information. Move your cursor over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit menu option. From the Repair By drop-down list, select whether the repair is applicable to dealer or dealer and fleet facilities.  From the Stop Sale drop-down list, select whether or not dealers should stop sales of vehicles associated with this campaign until the required repairs have been completed. Note : Dealers will receive a warning if they try to RDR a vehicle with an open Stop Sale campaign. Dealers will then have the opportunity to acknowledge the warning and continue the RDR, or to cancel the RDR.   Move your cursor over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save menu option.

To access one dealer's study results: In the Dealer column, click the appropriate dealer number link. Note : The One Dealer Study Result page opens for the selected dealer.

Welcome to the  Dealer Business System (DBS)  Online Help   Last Updated : August 30, 2018 The DBS  help content is organized by application. Click one of the tabs below or in the header above to view the help content available. What's New in DBS ? Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report (New) Add Host Reports to DBS  (Corporate Users) Search for a New VIN from the View NSH Page View Parts Master Information View Window Stickers for Used Vehicles Parts Return Summary for PDC Users Quick Entry Used Vehicle Sale Automated PDI Payments Host Reports Text/Value Search View Returns and Accrual Information View Parts Return Status (Corporate Users) Manage Parts Return Schedule Page (Corporate Users) - Forfeit Parts Return Period , Configure Adjustment Reasons , Configure Cancellation Reasons , Adjust an Accrual Amount About Manage Warranty Claims: What You Need to Know Emulate a Dealership or User  (Corporate Users) Manage ICV Exceptions (Corporate Users) SVC Part Orders Transferred in a Buy Sell Using the DBS Help System Navigating Full Help Use Context-Sensitive Help Search  DBS  Help Search DBS Help by Keyword Use Workflows in the DBS  Help System Glossary Downloadable Quick Reference Guides Sales Campaign Visibility in Vehicle Inventory How to Access Window Stickers   How to RDR Infiniti Courtesy Vehicles How to RDR and Unwind Vehicles Service Automated PDI Payments Express Entry Warranty Claim Retailed Vehicle with Open Campaign (Takata Campaign)  (New) Parts How to Process an ASR Parts Return SVC Part Orders Transferred in a Buy Sell Office How to Submit a Financial Statement Admin DBS Admin Guide: Set Up User Permissions  (Updated) Reports Host Reports What's New in DBS ? Add Host Reports to DBS  (Corporate Users) Search for a New VIN from the View NSH Page Host Reports Text/Value Search About Manage Warranty Claims: What You Need to Know Emulate a Dealership or User (Corporate Users) Manage ICV Exceptions (Corporate Users) SVC Part Orders Transferred in a Buy Sell Using the DBS Help System Navigating Full Help Use Context-Sensitive Help Search  DBS  Help Search DBS Help by Keyword Use Workflows in the DBS  Help System Glossary Downloadable Quick Reference Guides Sales Campaign Visibility in Vehicle Inventory How to Access Window Stickers   How to RDR Infiniti Courtesy Vehicles How to RDR and Unwind Vehicles Service Express Entry Warranty Claim Parts How to Process an ASR Parts Return SVC Part Orders Transferred in a Buy Sell Office How to Submit a Financial Statement Admin DBS Admin Guide: Set Up User Permissions  (Updated) Reports Host Reports

To  designate dealer administrator and contacts: Select the desired user. Note : It is required that you assign at least two dealer administrators per dealer number. Note : You may designate multiple dealer administrators per dealer number. Select the Sys. Admin checkbox for the desired user. Note : You must scroll to the right to see the checkbox. Select the Prim. Contact or Sec. Contact checkboxes for the desired user. Note : You must designate, at a minimum, a primary contact for a dealer, but designating a secondary contact is optional. Click the  Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm, or click the  No  button to close the window without confirming. Internal users must search by dealer before opening the User Summary.

MRW: Internal user only To view parts metrics: To  change the metric, from the drop-down list, select a new metric. Note : Inventory is the default metric. Other available metrics include receipts, sales, inventory movement, and general. To change the metric criteria, select different values from the available drop-down lists and click the View button. Standard View - Allows you to view metrics as actual values, such as quantities and dollar amounts, for a specific dealer. Comparative View - Allows you to view metrics as a calculated percent for a specific dealer as compared to district, region, and national.

A user can only access DBS if they have an active NNAnet profile, been granted access to the DBS link in NNAnet, and they have been granted access to DBS on the User Summary page in DBS . Note : Only a system administrator for the dealership or an authorized internal user can perform this task. To grant or remove access to DBS : Select the checkbox in the DBS Access column to grant a user access to DBS , or clear the checkbox to remove a user's DBS access. Note : Removing a user's access only impacts their DBS access and does not in any way impact their NNAnet access. Click the Save button. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. To quickly view a list of new users added to the dealership by the daily NNAnet feed, click the Retrieve New User button.

To create an announcement: Select the page where the announcement will display from the Page drop-down list. Select the display language for the announcement from the Language drop-down list. If the item does not require approval, clear the Require Approval? checkbox. In the Title field, type a title for the announcement or notification. Select a start date for the announcement. Type a start time for the announcement. Select an expiration date for the announcement. Select the announcement priority. Type the text of the message in the space provided and format as desired. Note : To insert a hyperlink within your announcement text, use the following format: [LINK URL|LINK DISPLAY NAME], for example: Please visit the [http://www.nissanusa.com|Nissan USA] Web site. To upload an image for the announcement, click the Choose Image button. Note : The recommended image size is 375 pixels in width by 200 pixels in height. Note : To remove the uploaded image file, click the  Clear Uploaded Image  button. Click the Preview  link to view the announcement, if desired. Note : To view the full announcement text, click the More link. Note : To close the announcement preview window, click the Close link. Select recipients for the announcement. Note : Click here for more information on selecting recipients. Click the  Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm, or click the  No  button to close the window without confirming. Click the Preview link at any time to see the announcement as it will appear to users. Click the Close button to close the preview window and return to the Create Announcements page. Time in  Fred  is written in the 24-hour notation, where HH (00 to 23) is the number of full hours that have passed since midnight. The recommended image size is 375 pixels wide by 200 pixels tall. All images must be of the .gif, .jpg, or .png file format.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To delete all of a user's report definitions: Click the General Action icon. From the General Action menu, select the Delete All Reports  option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm and save, or click the  No  button to close the window without saving. Dealer users may delete all of their own report definitions. Dealer administrators and internal users can delete all of a user's report definitions.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To delete all of a user's report definitions: Click the General Action icon. From the General Action menu, select the Delete All Reports  option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm and save, or click the  No  button to close the window without saving. Dealer users may delete all of their own report definitions. Dealer administrators and internal users can delete all of a user's report definitions.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To delete all of a user's report definitions: Click the General Action icon. From the General Action menu, select the Delete All Reports  option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm and save, or click the  No  button to close the window without saving. Dealer users may delete all of their own report definitions. Dealer administrators and internal users can delete all of a user's report definitions.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To delete all of a user's report definitions: Click the General Action icon. From the General Action menu, select the Delete All Reports  option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm and save, or click the  No  button to close the window without saving. Dealer users may delete all of their own report definitions. Dealer administrators and internal users can delete all of a user's report definitions.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To delete all of a user's report definitions: Click the General Action icon. From the General Action menu, select the Delete All Reports  option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm and save, or click the  No  button to close the window without saving. Dealer users may delete all of their own report definitions. Dealer administrators and internal users can delete all of a user's report definitions.

To export information from the View Parts Return Status page: If desired, filter or sort the information displayed on the page to reduce the amount of data to export. At the bottom of the page, click the Export button. Click the Excel export option. Follow your browser-specific instructions to print or save the Excel file.

The steps for editing a key word are the same for standard operation categories and standard operation codes. To edit a key word: Select the key word. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. Type the correction. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Save option.

The steps for editing a key word are the same for standard operation categories and standard operation codes. To edit a key word: Select the key word. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. Type the correction. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Save option.

The steps for editing a key word are the same for standard operation categories and standard operation codes. To edit a key word: Select the key word. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. Type the correction. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Save option.

To  view announcements and other news: Open the Home page or the landing page for the functional area for which you want to view announcements and other news. Note : The highest-priority announcements appear in the Regional Announcements or National Announcements section. Note : To view each of the highest-priority announcements in a primary viewing area, click one of the small navigation boxes in the upper right corner of the section, if available. The navigation box that corresponds to the displayed announcement is shaded red. To view another announcement, click a white navigation box. To view the complete text for an announcement, click the More link. To view the complete text for other news, click the title which is a blue link. Note :  The complete text of the announcement or other news item opens in a new window. To print the text, click the Print button. To close, click the Close button.

To  access the User Summary to search for a user: Select the dealer. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Search User option. Note : The User Summary page appears.

To manage vehicle notes: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the  Add Notes option or the Edit Notes option, as appropriate. Note : The Notes window appears. View the existing notes, type a new note, or edit an existing note created at your dealership. Note : Anyone can view system generated notes. Notes created by users at your dealership are only visible to other users at your dealership. You cannot view notes created at other dealerships. Note : You cannot edit system generated notes. Note : To delete a note, highlight the text and press the Delete key on your keyboard. Click the OK button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm your choice, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. If a vehicle is pre-sold, or if an investment proposal, F&I deal, or RDR is available for the vehicle, the identification of the item, date, and customer address and phone number are automatically added to the note. You cannot edit system generated information. If a vehicle has a note, a purple "*" appears beside the stock number. On the Vehicle Inventory page, to take a quick look at an existing note for a vehicle, hover your mouse over the note indicator (the purple *). The note displays in a pop-up window.

Note : If you selected a vehicle that has a status of "Deal Booked" or "Deal Open", the RDR Vehicle screen displays with the data fields pre-populated with the information from your DMS. Note : Any field that displays a   circle indicates the information is required and will need to be completed or corrected before submitting an RDR. Note : By selecting the Automatically print an RDR confirmation after submission? check box (located on the upper right of the Summary section), the system will automatically send an RDR Confirmation Detail Report to your printer. To report or edit the sale of a vehicle: Complete or edit each section of the RDR. Complete the Vehicle section of the RDR. Click here for more information. Complete the Customer section of the RDR. Click here for more information. If the sale is a vehicle lease, complete the Finance section of the RDR. Click here for more information. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the  Cancel button to close without saving. Note : If the RDR contains errors, an error message displays. Click the Yes button to save the RDR with errors, or click the No button to close the error message and return to the RDR page. To  print the RDR confirmation after submission, select the Automatically print RDR confirmation after submission? checkbox. Submit the RDR. Click here for more information. To delete the RDR, click the Delete button.

To  create a Transient Owner Service (TOS) parts order:  Select the "TOS - Transient Owner Service Order" option. Type a unique reference number. Type the name of the person or location where the part should be shipped. Type the name of the city where the part should be shipped. Type the street address where the part should be shipped. From the Ship Priority , Cross Ship Priority , Backorder Flag , and Cross Ship Flag drop-down lists, modify the default selections, if desired. Note : The information in these lists is automatically populated based on the order type. Note : Changes made in the Parts Order Detail section may override this setting. Type the ZIP code where the part should be shipped. Type shipping instructions, if desired. Complete the Parts Order Detail section: Note : Click here for instructions on how to add a part. Note : Click here for instructions on how to delete a part. Note : Click here for instructions on how to look up a part. Note : Click  here  for instructions on how to modify a detail line. Use the appropriate button save, submit, delete, or cancel the parts order. For fastest processing, correct all errors before submitting a part order.

Edit/Create Warranty Claim Page Overview Purpose Use the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page to modify or create vehicle and repair order (RO) information in a warranty claim. From this page, you can also cancel, validate, or submit a warranty claim. Description The content area of the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page displays the following sections: Quick Jump menu -  Appears on the left-hand side of the page. The Quick Jump menu allows you to jump from section to section without scrolling. The number next to the section name is the number of warnings or errors in that section. Summary -  Displays warranty claim data and claims summary data, such as the RO number, VIN, odometer, and requested claim amount. Also displays the determined and adjusted amounts if the warranty claim has been processed. Claims detail data -  Displays sections of detailed data on the warranty claim, parts, operations, expenses, comments, customer, claim activity, and history. Alerts -  Displays error or warning messages at the bottom of the claim detail data sections. Action buttons -  Buttons such as RO, NSH, New Claim Line, Close, Save, Validate, and Submit appear on the bottom of the page. Tasks You can perform the following tasks from or on the Edit/Create Warranty Claims page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. About Warranty Claims: What You Need to Know Add New Claim Line from Edit/Create Warranty Claim Page   Delete a Warranty Claim from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim Page Edit Warranty Claim Complete the Claim Information Section Complete the Comments Section of a Claim Complete the Customer Section of a Claim Complete the Expenses Section of a Claim Complete the Operations Section of a Claim Complete the Parts Section of a Claim Complete the Summary Section of a Claim View the Claim Activity Section of a Claim View the History Section of a Claim Look Up a Part Look Up an Op Code   Print Warranty Claim Submit Warranty Claim Use the Quick Jump Menu Validate Warranty Claim View Dealer Claim Administration Limits View NSH View Repair Order About Warranty Claims: What You Need to Know Add New Claim Line from Edit/Create Warranty Claim Page   Delete a Warranty Claim from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim Page Edit Warranty Claim Complete the Claim Information Section Complete the Comments Section of a Claim Complete the Customer Section of a Claim Complete the Expenses Section of a Claim Complete the Operations Section of a Claim Complete the Parts Section of a Claim Complete the Summary Section of a Claim View the Claim Activity Section of a Claim View the History Section of a Claim Look Up a Part Look Up an Op Code   Print Warranty Claim Submit Warranty Claim Use the Quick Jump Menu Validate Warranty Claim View NSH View Repair Order   Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page.  Edit or Create a Warranty Claim Workflow Page Preview

To  access the View Parts Order page to view detail: Select the parts order you want to view. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the View Order  option. Note : The View Parts Order page appears. The View option is available for all orders except those with a status of "New" or "Open." For orders with a status of "New" or "Open," select the Edit option to see the parts order detail. -OR- In the Dealer Ref # column, click the hyperlink for the parts order you want to view.

To  access the View Parts Order page to view detail: Select the parts order you want to view. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the View Order  option. Note : The View Parts Order page appears. The View option is available for all orders except those with a status of "New" or "Open." For orders with a status of "New" or "Open," select the Edit option to see the parts order detail. -OR- In the Dealer Ref # column, click the hyperlink for the parts order you want to view.

To select recipients by internal user for geography option: Click the Internal Users button. Select the  Choose recipients by Geography option. Click the Next button to continue. Select an affiliate. Select a division. Note : The default setting for affiliate and division is "ALL." Select the states/provinces. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the  CTRL  key while selecting items. Click the Copy (>>) or Copy All (>>I ) button to move the selection(s) to the Selected Fields box. Note: To remove a selection from the Selected Fields box, select the option and click the Remove (<<) button. Click the Next button to continue, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. Select the user type. Click the Next button to continue, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. Select the positions. Click the Copy (>>) or Copy All (>>I) button to move the selection(s) to the Selected Fields box. Note: To remove a selection from the Selected Fields box, select the option and click the Remove (<<) button. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the  Back button to return to the previous window. To view your recipient selections after you select them, use the View/Print option in the Action menu.

When a corporate user wishes to complete dealer activities on DBS pages, they will need to select a dealer from the Search a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page. To search for a dealer by number when you know the dealer number: Select the Choose dealer by Number option. In the Please enter dealer number field, type the dealer number. Click the Search  icon at the lower-right of the page. To search for a dealer when you do not know the dealer number: Select the Choose dealer by Number option. Beside the Please enter dealer number field, click the Lookup icon. In the fields provided, type full or partial information, and then press the Enter key. Select the option button for the desired dealer. Click the Select button. Note : DBS displays the dealer number in the Please enter dealer number field. Click the Search  icon at the lower-right of the page. To clear your search criteria in the Dealer Lookup window, click the Clear icon. To cancel the search in the Dealer Lookup window, click the Cancel button.

Quick Entry Used Vehicle Sale Page Overview Purpose Use the Quick Entry Used Vehicle Sale page to create, edit, submit, or delete an RDR (sale) record for a used vehicle. The Quick Entry Used Vehicle Sale page differs from the standard RDR quick entry page in that it allows you to quickly select a used vehicle from your inventory by stock number or serial number, complete the sale information, and then submit the RDR. Once the RDR is submitted, you remain on the Quick Entry Used Vehicle Sale page so you can RDR another used vehicle, if desired. Description The content area of the Quick Entry Used Vehicle Sale page displays the following sections: Summary - Display the status of the RDR Vehicle - Displays information about the vehicle Buyer  - Displays information about the customer Driver - Displays information about the primary driver Finance - Displays information about the financing arrangements for the purchase You can perform the following tasks on the Quick Entry Used Vehicle Sale page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Delete an RDR Report or Edit the Sale of a Used Vehicle Complete the Vehicle Section of an RDR Complete the Buyer Section of an RDR Complete the Driver Section of an RDR Complete the Finance Section of an RDR Save or Submit a Used Vehicle RDR Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Quick Entry Used Vehicle Sale page. Report the Sale of a Vehicle Workflow Page Preview

This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. To complete the Dealers section of a study: If desired, in the Location section, select a radio button to filter the Available Dealers list by dealer location. To include active franchise dealers in the Available Dealers list, click the Show All Active Dealers toggle button. The list updates to include commercial and fleet dealers. To limit the display to franchise dealerships only, click the Show Active Franchise Dealers  toggle button. To search for a specific dealers to include, type the dealer number in the field provided, and then click the Search icon. Select each dealer you want to add to or remove from the Selected Dealers list and then click the center buttons as necessary to add or remove the dealer. To view dealerships by dealer name, click one of the Available Dealer Name Index links to update the Available Dealers list. When you have selected all desired dealers, click the Save button.

To manage vehicle notes from the Inventory Search page: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the Add Notes or Edit Notes option. Note :Anyone can view system-generated notes. Notes created by users at your dealership are only visible to other users at your dealership. Type a new note, or edit an existing note created at your dealership. Note : To delete a note, highlight the text and press the Delete key on your keyboard. Click the  OK button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Note : On the Inventory Search page, to take a quick look at an existing note for a vehicle, hover your mouse over the note indicator (the purple *). The note displays in a pop-up window.

Transaction Status Page Overview Purpose Use the Transaction Status page to view the status of transactions. You can use the search criteria on the Transaction Status page to filter the desired transaction related information. You can also access and change the transaction related information by accessing the appropriate application for that transaction. Description The content area of the Transaction Status page displays the following sections: Selection Criteria - Allows you to enter the criteria for searching the transaction logs that will display in the transaction summary area at the bottom of your screen. Transaction Status - Allows you to view the transaction status information for each transaction by application type, transaction type and dealer number based on your input. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Transaction Status page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Search for Transactions on the Transaction Status Page View Transaction Status Search for Transactions on the Transaction Status Page View Transaction Status Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Transaction Status page. Search for Transactions Workflow Page Preview

Note : This task is performed by internal users only. To view the DBS  application status information: Click the View Application Information button. To view the transaction status for an application, select the application for which you want to view status information. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. Select the  Drill Down menu option. Note : The transaction status information for the application you selected appears. 

Edit Parts Order Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for modifying an existing new or open parts order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Parts Order Workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow

To delete a standard operation category: Select a category. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : The Delete Confirmation window opens. Click the Delete button. Note : The category no longer appears in the Standard Operation Category summary.

To complete the Total/Sum Criteria section: Select the fields to be totaled. Note : A total appears at the end of the report and at the defined break. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. To indicate the order in which the columns are to be totaled, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons. If the report requires averages to be calculated for totaled fields, select the Check here to Average your selected fields checkbox. Adjust the columns width for printing, as applicable. Click here for instructions to adjust column width. The Total/Sum criteria is optional. You can leave this section blank when creating a report. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.

To complete the Total/Sum Criteria section: Select the fields to be totaled. Note : A total appears at the end of the report and at the defined break. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. To indicate the order in which the columns are to be totaled, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons. If the report requires averages to be calculated for totaled fields, select the Check here to Average your selected fields checkbox. Adjust the columns width for printing, as applicable. Click here for instructions to adjust column width. The Total/Sum criteria is optional. You can leave this section blank when creating a report. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.

To complete the Total/Sum Criteria section: Select the fields to be totaled. Note : A total appears at the end of the report and at the defined break. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. To indicate the order in which the columns are to be totaled, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons. If the report requires averages to be calculated for totaled fields, select the Check here to Average your selected fields checkbox. Adjust the columns width for printing, as applicable. Click here for instructions to adjust column width. The Total/Sum criteria is optional. You can leave this section blank when creating a report. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.

To complete the Total/Sum Criteria section: Select the fields to be totaled. Note : A total appears at the end of the report and at the defined break. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. To indicate the order in which the columns are to be totaled, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons. If the report requires averages to be calculated for totaled fields, select the Check here to Average your selected fields checkbox. Adjust the columns width for printing, as applicable. Click here for instructions to adjust column width. The Total/Sum criteria is optional. You can leave this section blank when creating a report. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.

To complete the Total/Sum Criteria section: Select the fields to be totaled. Note : A total appears at the end of the report and at the defined break. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. To indicate the order in which the columns are to be totaled, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons. If the report requires averages to be calculated for totaled fields, select the Check here to Average your selected fields checkbox. Adjust the columns width for printing, as applicable. Click here for instructions to adjust column width. The Total/Sum criteria is optional. You can leave this section blank when creating a report. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.

Where available, use a quick filter in the header of the summary (see the Status column for example) section to easily and quickly view specific content. To filter the Parts Return Summary page: If desired, from the Return Period drop-down list, select a return period. Note : By default, the current period is selected as the return period. To limit the summary display by PDC, from the Available PDC List drop-down, select a PDC. Note : Only those PDCs for which you have permissions display in the list. If you need access to another PDC, contact your system administrator. From the Filter By drop-down list, select the primary filter criteria. From the secondary filter criteria list, select the secondary filter criteria. Click the Search icon. Note : The summary list updates to display only those parts returns which match the filter criteria you entered.

To add a new claim line to a repair order (RO): In the Repair Order field, type the RO number for which you want to add a new claim line. In the Line Number field, type the appropriate RO line number. Click the Search icon. At the bottom of the page, click the New Claim Line button.   You can add a new claim line to an RO regardless of the status of a claim.

To edit a standard operation code assignment: Select the standard operation code. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. Note : The selected standard operation code becomes editable. In the Standard Op Code field, type the correct code. From the Category drop-down list, select the correct category. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Save option.

Express Entry Warranty Claim Page Overview Purpose Use the Express Entry Warranty Claim page to quickly create a warranty claim. It is important for users to note that the Express Entry Warranty Claim page does not have the full level of validation supplied by the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page. Only experienced users should use the Express Entry Warranty Claim page. Description The content area of the Express Entry Warranty Claim page displays the following sections: Quick Jump menu -  Appears on the left-hand side of the page. The quick jump menu allows you to jump from section to section without scrolling. The number next to the section name is the number of warnings or errors in that section. Summary -  Displays warranty claim data and claims summary data, such as the RO number, VIN, odometer, and requested claim amount. Also displays the determined and adjusted amounts if the warranty claim has been processed. Claims detail data -  Displays sections of detailed data on the warranty claim, parts, operations, expenses, comments, customer, claim activity, and service history. Alerts -  Displays error or warning messages at the bottom of the claim detail data sections. Action buttons -  Buttons such as RO, NSH, New Claim Line, Close, Save, Validate, and Submit appear at the bottom of the page. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Express Entry Warranty Claim page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Add a New Claim Line on an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Claim Information Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Summary Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Parts Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Operations Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Expenses Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Comments Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Customer Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim View the Claim Activity Section of a Claim View the Claim History Section of a Claim Create an Express Entry Warranty Claim Delete a Warranty Claim Use the Quick Jump Menu View a Repair Order from the Express Entry Warranty Claim Page View National Service History from the Express Entry Warranty Claim Page Add a New Claim Line on an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Claim Information Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Summary Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Parts Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Operations Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Expenses Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Comments Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Customer Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim View the Claim Activity Section of a Claim View the Claim History Section of a Claim Create an Express Entry Warranty Claim Delete a Warranty Claim Use the Quick Jump Menu View a Repair Order from the Express Entry Warranty Claim Page View National Service History from the Express Entry Warranty Claim Page Page Preview

To  modify the SVC order quantity: Select the part you want to modify. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. Type a valid quantity. Note : Quantity must be a multiple of the unit pack. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Save option. To modify an SVC order, the order must be in "New" or "Open" status.

To open the Study Dashboard page: View the list of studies. Note : The default view for the Study Dashboard shows a list of all studies.  Note : Active studies are highlighted in green. Hold studies are highlighted in yellow. Suspended studies are highlighted in red. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. If multiple pages exist, click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow to navigate from page to page. To view a specific page, in the Go to Page field, type a page number, and then click the Go button.

View Overview Information   Create or Edit a Calendar Event Page Overview    Create or Edit a Calendar Event Workflow Perform Tasks Create or Edit a Calendar Event Perform Common  DBS Tasks Create or Edit a Calendar Event Perform Common  DBS Tasks

To view the Campaign Part Management summary: Review the list of parts. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. If multiple pages exist: To view additional records, click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow to navigate from page to page. To view a specific page, in the Go to Page field, type a page number, then click the Go button.

3/9/2015: Per Werner, this is an HP internal page that does not require EPSS support. To re-run a system event: Select the event you would like to re-run. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the ReRun  option. Note : There is no warning or confirmation message for this task.

To select recipients by internal user for hierarchy option: Click the Internal User button. Select the Choose recipients by Hierarchy option. Click the Next button to continue. Select a hierarchy by clicking on the box before the hierarchy. Note : To expand the hierarchy to select specific options, click the plus sign. Note: To de-select a hierarchy, click the box to remove the check mark. Click the Next button to continue, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. Select a user type. Click the Next button to continue, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. Select the positions. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the  CTRL  key while selecting items. Click the Copy (>>) or Copy All (>>I) button to move the selection(s) to the Selected Fields list. Note: To remove a selection from the Selected Fields list, select the option and click the Remove (<<) button. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the  Back button to return to the previous window. To view your recipient selections after you select them, use the View/Print option in the Action menu.

To  select filter criteria and view the customer pay reimbursement analysis results: To include parts markup data in the analysis, select the Parts Markup checkbox. To include labor rate data in the analysis, select the Labor Rate checkbox. Note : You must select either this checkbox or the Parts Markup checkbox or both in order to run the analysis In the Maximum RO's Analyze field, type the number of repair orders (ROs) you want to include in the analysis. Note: The default number is 100, and this is also the maximum number allowed. In the Date Period section, complete both date fields. In the  Select Dealer  field, type the dealer number for which you want to conduct the analysis. Click the  Lookup icon. Select the option button for the dealer. Click the Select button. Click the Analyze button. View the Parts Markup and Labor Rate analysis results.

To request parts metrics: Select a value from the available drop-down lists. Note : DBS displays all available reporting periods in the Period drop-down list, starting with the most recent, which is always the current month minus one. If parts metrics do not exist for a period, DBS does not display that period in the drop-down list. Note : Click here for information on how to add a custom search group. Note : Click here for information on how to look up a dealer. Click the View button. Note : The system displays the parts metrics for inventory, which is the default. Other available metrics include receipts, sales, inventory movement, and general. To  change the metric, from the drop-down list, select a metric. Parts metrics data available for your viewing depends on your security level. Standard View - Allows you to view metrics as actual values, such as quantities and dollar amounts, for a specific dealer. Comparative View - Allows you to view metrics as a calculated percent for a specific dealer as compared to district, region, and national.

Manage ICV Exceptions Page Overview Purpose Authorized Infiniti corporate users use the Manage ICV Exceptions page to maintain data about Infiniti courtesy vehicle exceptions and base eligibility.  This allows Infiniti to project the number of loaner or courtesy vehicles the dealership may have in dealer inventory at any given time. Description The content area of the Manage ICV Exceptions  page displays the following sections: ICV Exception Entry - The entry area is used to create a new ICV exception. Page Navigation Bar - Allows you to navigate from page to page, if multiple pages exist Summary  - Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Manage ICV Exceptions page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Add an ICV Exception Edit or Disable an ICV Exception Page Preview

To submit all claims from the Manage Warranty Claim page: Filter the Warranty Claims list as desired. Select the  Sub. (Submit) checkbox for each claim you want to submit, or to submit all claims in the list, select the checkbox beside the column header. Click the  Submit All button. Click  DBS Yes button. Note : DBS sends the claims to the batch-submit queue and submits the claims in the background. As desired, you can continue to perform additional tasks on the Manage Warranty Claim page.

To access OMS  to trade a vehicle: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the OMS Dealer Trade option. Note : The OMS Dealer Trade option is only available to users who have access to the OMS application. If you have OMS access, click the OMS Dealer Trade option to open the external OMS application. Follow the procedures within the OMS application to complete the dealer trade task.

View Overview Information   Manage Warranty Claim Page Overview   Manage Warranty Claim Workflow Perform Tasks About Manage Warranty Claims: What You Need to Know Access the Create Warranty Claim Page Access the Edit Warranty Claim Page Batch Validate Claims from the Manage Warranty Claim Page Delete a Warranty Claim Display the Warranty Claims Graph Display Warning or Error Messages Edit a Claim on the Express Entry Page Edit a Claim on the Quick Entry Page Export Warranty Claims List Filter Warranty Claims List   Resubmit Warranty Claim   Submit a Warranty Claim View Amounts Paid on an Approved Warranty Claim View DCAL View Repair Order View Warranty Claim View Warranty Claims Summary About Manage Warranty Claims: What You Need to Know Access the Create Warranty Claim Page Access the Edit Warranty Claim Page Batch Validate Claims from the Manage Warranty Claim Page Delete Warranty Claim Display the Warranty Claims Graph Display Warning or Error Messages Edit a Claim on the Express Entry Page Edit a Claim on the Quick Entry Page Export Warranty Claims List Filter Warranty Claims List  Resubmit Warranty Claim  Submit a Warranty Claim View Amounts Paid on an Approved Warranty Claim View Repair Order View Warranty Claim View Warranty Claims Summary

To  set the distance search range: Click the Customize icon to open the Configure Inventory Search page. Select the distance search range from the available options. Type your search group name in the Search Group Name field and click the + option. Click the  Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : Your saved distance search range setting displays as a drop-down menu option in the Search Radius field. The option to change the search radius is available only after you have performed an inventory search .

To save submit a used vehicle RDR: Complete or edit the Vehicle , Buyer , Driver , and Finance sections of the RDR. Click the Save button to save and validate the RDR. Note : If errors exist, a  icon will display. Correct the errors and click the Save button again. Click the Submit button to submit the RDR. When you submit an RDR, the VIN is added to the RDR History page. A retailed vehicle will be removed from inventory with the next inventory update. These updates occur every 30 minutes, so you may have to wait a maximum of 30 minutes for your inventory to refresh and display accurate counts.

View Overview Information Host Reports Page Overview View a Host Report Workflow Perform Tasks Add a Host Report to the Favorites List Filter and Search for a Host Report Perform Common DBS Tasks Print a Host Report Print Overnight Reports Remove a Host Report from the Favorites List View a Host Report Add a Host Report to the Favorites List Filter and Search for a Host Report Perform Common DBS Tasks Print a Host Report Print Overnight Reports Remove a Host Report from the Favorites List View a Host Report

To filter the warranty claims list: Select the desired radio button to list "All" warranty claims or those with a particular status only. Note : The default status is "Not Submitted." From the  Date Range  drop-down list, select the warranty status date for which to display the claims. Note : The period you select will be the default period for which claims are displayed, until you change your selection. Note : To view the warranty claims for a date range, select the "Custom" option. If you selected the "Custom" option in the step above, two new Date Range fields appear. In the Date Range fields, enter the date range or use the calendar to select the date range for which you want to view the warranty claims. Click the Search icon. From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. As applicable, select or type secondary filter options. Note : If a text-entry field appears, type a filter value and then click the Search icon. If a drop-down list appears, select an option from the list. To reset the filter criteria to the default options and clear the search criteria, click the Clear icon. To sort the warranty claims by a specific field, click the column header. View the claims information that meets the selected criteria. Note : You may need to scroll to the right to view the complete results.

Glossary of Terms Click the letters below to access corresponding terms and descriptions. Note: If a letter does not have any corresponding terms, that section is blank. A - B - C - D - E - F - G - H - I - J - K - L - M - N - O - P - Q - R - S - T - U - V - W - X - Y - Z Return to top X Term or Acronym Description XML Extended Markup language I Term or Acronym Description ID Identification IFS Infiniti Financial Services InfinitiNet Proprietary Legacy Integrated DCS/DMS, used by Infiniti US Dealers, created in 1989 INTAG Infiniti Nissan Technical Assistance Guide Internal Users NNA and NCI corporate users IP Intellectual Property IPI Infiniti Purchase Index IR Issue Resolution IRC Investment Return Cost IS Information System ISI Infiniti Service Index H Term or Acronym Description Hide Vehicle Access OMS to hide a vehicle. Hiding a vehicle makes it invisible to other dealers. You can view your hidden inventory on the Vehicle Inventory page. From the Filter by drop-down list, select the "Hidden Units" option, then select "Hidden" from the secondary filter list. HOD Host on Demand HQ Headquarters N Term or Acronym Description NA  Not Applicable NCI  Nissan Canada, Inc. NCS No Cost Sale NDARP Nissan Dealer Advertising Reimbursement Program NDSN Nissan Decision Support System Nissan Edge Nissan Award in regard to service NissanNet  Legacy DCS , used by Nissan US Dealers, created in 1975  NESNA Nissan Extended Services, North America - NESNA provides extended service and warranty coverage for Nissan vehicles. NENSA offers the following extended service plans: Security+Plus ® extended protection plan with coverage up to 8 years and 120,000 miles Prepaid Maintenance Plans featuring basic or factory scheduled maintenance for new or pre-owned vehicles QualityGuard+Plus® extended protection plan for non-Nissan new and pre-owned vehicles with coverage up to 7 years and 100,000 miles NMC Nissan Motor Corp. NML  Nissan Motor Limited NMAC  Nissan Motor Acceptance Corporation NMPS Nissan Motor Parts System NNA  Nissan North America NOTOR Nissan One to One Rewards - the Nissan One to One Rewards program offers Nissan owners points for each dollar spent on service visits. Points earned can be spent for future services such as oil changes, wiper blade replacement, or tune-ups. NPI Nissan Purchase Index NREDI Nissan Retail Environmental Design Initiative NRP Nissan Revival Plan NSH National Service History NSI National Service Index Y Term or Acronym Description Yellow ! Icon The yellow ! icon in  DBS  indicates a record or field with a warning.   Records with a warning may still be submitted or processed. You will most often encounter a warning icon when data entered is outside of accepted parameters.  For example : on a warranty claim page, you may encounter a warning icon when a duplicate repair order has been found. G Term or Acronym Description G&A General & Administration GSG Global Style Guide GUI Graphical User Interface P Term or Acronym Description P&A Parts and Accessories Parts Distribution Center In order to quickly provide the parts needed for service repairs and campaigns, Nissan maintains several parts distribution centers (PDC). Each PDC warehouse contains a wide variety of parts available to dealers for quick shipping and installation. Shipping from a regional PDC greatly reduces the time it takes for parts to arrive at the dealership for installation. For example : A dealer located in Dallas, Texas needs a part that they don't have in stock. They place a parts order, and the part is shipped, if available, from the regional PDC located in Irving, Texas.  Parts Master The Parts Master replaces the Dealer Confidential Parts Price List CD-ROM with a convenient online parts pricing and information system. PDC See Parts Distribution Center PDI See Pre-Delivery Inspection PFP Primary Failed Part - The primary failed part is the part which caused a repair to be needed. PIAP Port Installed Accessory Program Pick Ticket The pick ticket is printed for each part that a dealer orders. The warehouse workers pull the part from their location and place this label on the box. This has PDC Part Location Order # Invoice # Order Type Dealer being shipped to Carrier Information PMA Primary Market Area PO Primary Operation Pop-Ups / Multiple Windows Although you can't have more than one instance of DBS  running at once, you can have more than one DBS  application window open at a time. From the menu tabs, click the New Window icon for the page you want to open in a new window. Portrait Orientation See Orientation Postal Code In Canada, the six-character postal code details the Forward Sortation Area (FSA) and local delivery unit assigned to a location. The first three characters make up the FSA, and detail the province and major sorting area. The last three characters detail the specific local delivery unit information. For Example : Postal code N8Y 2M9 describes a local delivery intended for the province of Ontario, major sorting area in Windsor, and local delivery for the Walker Rd delivery unit. Pre-Delivery Inspection The pre-delivery inspection (PDI) is the last chance to make a GREAT first impression. The PDI is performed before a car is delivered to a customer, and may include such things such as making sure all accessories are correctly installed and included with the vehicle, topping off all fluids, making sure there are no blemishes or scratches in the paint, removing any final protective film, and ensuring that all systems operate correctly. For any questions about PDI including dealer payments, please call the PDI help desk at 615-725-0588. Pre-RDR Preview Retail Delivery Report PWO Project Work Order PV Planned/planning Volume PUC Performance, Utilization and Capacity Matrix T Term or Acronym Description TDC Total Distribution Cost Technical Service Bulletin A technical service bulletin (TSB) provides information or procedures for service campaigns, recalls, or other repairs that may be applicable to a vehicle. Technician In DBS , a technician is an employee assigned to complete a service repair for a vehicle. The list of technicians in  DBS  is populated with certified individuals as enrolled in Nissan Virtual Academy. A user's Virtual Academy or LMS ID is populated in NNAnet when they register as a user in Nissan Virtual Academy. This information is required to populate the list of technicians on the warranty claim pages and the list of sales consultants and F&I managers on the RDR pages. Note : In order to successfully populate the lists in DBS , the user's EID and LMS ID must match and the user must have the appropriate certifications in Virtual Academy. If a user name is missing from the list of technicians, sales consultants, or F&I managers, contact the DBS  help desk for assistance. TEDS Training and Education Development System Time Zone Individual users can edit their preferred time zone by updating their user profile. Click here for information on how to update your user profile. Click here for information on how to update your user profile. Authorized administrative users can update the default time zone for a dealership by updating the dealer information. Click here for information on how to update dealer information Click here for information on how to update dealer information TOE Total Ownership Experience TOS Transient Owner Service Total Ownership System (Infiniti) TSB See Technical Service Bulletin J Term or Acronym Description J Coded Part A J-coded part is an obsolete part which cannot be returned. A Term or Acronym Description ACCY Acronym Description ACL Access Control List AD Active Directory (Microsoft) ADP Dealer Service Provider AFF Application Foundation Framework AGP Average Gross Profit API Application Program Interface ASL Automatic Stocking Level - for sites where ASR (Automatic Stock Replenishment) is implemented, the automatic stocking level is the quantity of a part that is automatically replenished. ASM Assistant Sales Manager ASP In a parts order, the Alternative Shipping Point is an address where parts should be shipped that is not the dealer's address. Example : A dealer may place an order for factory parts that will be installed by a third party vendor. The parts order may request shipping to the vendor instead of the dealer's location. In this case, the vendor's address would be the alternative shipping point. ASR Automatic Stock Replenishment Asterisk Asterisks appear in several places in  DBS , and can have several meanings: When there are a mix of required and optional fields on an application, an asterisk denotes a required field. On the Vehicle Inventory and Inventory Search pages, an asterisk next to the vehicle stock number indicates that there are notes available for the vehicle.  When searching in DBS , use an asterisk when typing partial information to perform a wildcard search. When completing the Customer section of an RDR, type three asterisks to indicate that the customer does not have an email address. M Term or Acronym Description Manual Order Quantity The Manual Order Quantity refers to parts that were ordered to meet specific customer needs that are not part of the automatic stock replenishment program. Example : A customer's vehicle requires replacement of the driver's seat after many miles on the road. The seat assembly and parts required are ordered (or returned) manually because they are not automatically available. MCA Marketing Contact Audit MOQ See Manual Order Quantity MT Mid Tier L Term or Acronym Description Landscape Orientation See Orientation. LAS Lead Administration System LCV Light Commercial Vehicle. An LCV is typically a pickup truck, van, or SUV used for commercial purposes. LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDM Logical Data Model LMS A user's LMS ID is populated in NNAnet when they register as a user in Nissan Virtual Academy. This information is required to populate the list of technicians on the warranty claim pages and the list of sales consultants and F&I managers on the RDR pages. Note : In order to successfully populate the lists in DBS , the user's EID and LMS ID must match and the user must have the appropriate certifications in Virtual Academy. If a user name is missing from the list of technicians, sales consultants, or F&I managers, contact the DBS  help desk for assistance. LOE Level of Efforts (in hours) LTG Labor Time Guide K Term or Acronym Description Keyboard Shortcuts On the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and Express Entry Warranty claim, you can use the keyboard shortcuts outlined below to move from section to section in a warranty claim. Ctrl+1: Summary Section Ctrl+2: Claim Information Section Ctrl+3: Parts Section Ctrl+4: Operations Section Ctrl+5: Expenses Section Ctrl+6: Comments Section Ctrl+7: Customer Section KPI Key Performance Indicator U Term or Acronym Description UAT User Acceptance Testing UHD User Help Desk UI User Interface User Name To update a DBS  user's name, work phone number, email address, or other profile information, contact the help desk. All changes feed to DBS  in an overnight batch and are available the following day. DBS  users may add a mobile phone number to their profile by clicking the My Profile name link at the top of the DBS  window. UIO Units in Operation UT Unit Testing F Term or Acronym Description F&I Finance and Insurance F1 Fixed Right the First Time FAC Facility Usage FIPS Federal Information Processing Standard. The FIPS code is a three-digit number that identifies the county of a residence when a zip code covers multiple counties and/or a two-digit state code that identifies the state of a residence when a zip code crosses state boundary lines. In DBS , the FIPS code is used to determine the incentives for which a vehicle might be eligible. For example: Zip code 75146 is used for residences in Dallas, Texas and Ellis, Texas. Both areas carry the FIPS code 48, which uniquely identifies the state of Texas; while residences in Dallas County have the county FIPS code 113, and those in Ellis County carry the FIPS code 139. Flat Rate Manual The flat rate manual lists Nissan-approved operation codes and flat rate times used for determining labor costs for repairs or service performed on a vehicle. The flat rate manual also includes the corresponding symptom and diagnosis codes that are used when creating a repair order for service. FS Financial Statement FSM Financial Service Manager FTP File Transfer Protocol FYTD Fiscal Year to Date B Term or Acronym Description BA Business Analyst Basic Stocking Level For sites with Automatic Stock Replenishment (ASR), the basic stocking level (BSL) is the minimum level of goods necessary for ASR. For example: The BSL for a dealership might include 50 oil filters. This would be the base level that is maintained through the ASR process. If the dealership uses 25 filters to fill repair orders, their next ASR parts order would replenish their supply with 25 new filters. BM Business Management BSL See Basic Stocking Level. BTG Balance to Go Return to top Z W Term or Acronym Description WAN Wide Area Network Warning Icon The yellow ! icon in  DBS  indicates a record or field with a warning.   Records with a warning may still be submitted or processed. You will most often encounter a warning icon when data entered is outside of accepted parameters.  For example : on a warranty claim page, you may encounter a warning icon when a duplicate repair order has been found. Warranty Claims Help Desk For additional assistance with warranty information (including pre-authorization), contact the Warranty Claims Help Desk: Nissan 1-800-258-7008 opt 7 Infiniti 1-800-933-3712 opt 7 NCI 1-866-297-1734 Web to Host The Web to Host application is used to access the Nissan Host (mainframe). If you experience any issues with the Web to Host application, please contact the DBS  Help Desk. WIN Workforce Integration at Nissan WO Work Order WWL Worldwide Logistical WYSIWYG What You See Is What You Get Q Term or Acronym Description QAS Quality Assurance Support Quick Keys On the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and Express Entry Warranty claim, you can use the keyboard shortcuts outlined below to move from section to section in a warranty claim. Ctrl+1: Summary Section Ctrl+2: Claim Information Section Ctrl+3: Parts Section Ctrl+4: Operations Section Ctrl+5: Expenses Section Ctrl+6: Comments Section Ctrl+7: Customer Section S Term or Acronym Description Sales Satisfaction Index The Sales Satisfaction Index (SSI) provides an analysis of the vehicle purchase experience from the customer's perspective. The study measures the ability of dealerships to manage the end-to-end sales process from vehicle selection to price negotiation, financing, and finally to delivery. The SSI is designed to provide dealers with information on how to improve customer satisfaction and retention. Security+Plus Nissan Security+Plus is an extended coverage service contract available for new and pre-owned Nissan vehicles. Service Comm If your DBS  permissions include access to Service Comm, a link for the application will appear on the Service tab menu. If you need access to Service Comm but your DBS  Service menu does not include this link, contact your System Administrator. SIR Service Information Resource SIT See Stock-in-Transit SIT System Integration Testing SLS Cert. Sales Certification SMS Short Message Service - better known as text messaging, an SMS service provides a limited character messaging service. SOA Service-oriented Architecture SPE Sales Penetration Effectiveness SRV Cert. Service Certification SSI See Sales Satisfaction Index SSO Single Sign On STAR Standards for Technology in Automotive Retail Stock in Transit The Stock in Transit (SIT) filter on the Inventory Search and Vehicle Inventory pages allows dealers to view stock which has been added to the dealer's inventory but is currently being shipped to the dealership. Stop the Press Order A Stop the Press Order (STP) takes place when a part is not available to fulfill a parts order and one is taken from the assembly line. Regional personnel are involved in fulfilling STP orders as needed. STP See Stop the Press Order SVC Service Campaign SWR Southwest Region V Term or Acronym Description VADA Value Added DBS Application Vehicle Processing Center The Vehicle Processing Centers (VPC) are where vehicles get accessorized and prepped for dealer delivery. VPCs are located at our ports of entry if coming in from abroad and at our plants in the case of Smyrna, Canton and Aguascalientes. VI Visual Identity VIMS Vehicle Incentive Management System VIN Vehicle Identification Number VOR Vehicle Off Road VPC See Vehicle Processing Center VPP Vehicle Purchase Program VSC Vehicle Service Contract E Term or Acronym Description EAI Enterprise Application Integration eDAB e Dealer Advisory Board EDS Early Detection System EDW Enterprise Data Warehouse ELMR Electronic Lease Management & Returns EPRP Enterprise Performance Reporting Portal ERD Entity Relationship Diagram Error Icon The red X icon in  DBS  indicates a record or field with an error.   The red X is most commonly encountered when there is a required field that has not been completed. ETA Estimated Time of Arrival ETL Extract, Transform & Load R Term or Acronym Description R&R Reynolds & Reynolds (DSP) RAGP Regional Average Gross Profit RDR See Retail Delivery Report Recall Bulletin See Technical Service Bulletin Red X The red X icon in  DBS  indicates a record or field with an error.   The red X is most commonly encountered when there is a required field that has not been completed. REL Facility Relations Repair Order A repair order (RO) is a request for service on a vehicle. Each repair order in DBS  may have one or more line items. For example : A customer may request service to replace the brakes, perform an oil change, and provide new windshield wipers. Each of these would be entered as a separate line item on the repair order. Request for Credit A request for credit (RFC) occurs when parts received at the dealership are not as expected. For example : a dealer ordered one part to complete a repair order, but received three of the part. Retail Delivery Report A Retail Delivery Report (RDR), is an online report submitted through DBS  which informs Nissan of a vehicle sale or lease. Please see the Sales tab in this help system for additional information. RFC See Request for Credit RFD Request for Decision RFS Request for Service RIM Retail Inventory Management RO See Repair Order RPI Retail Performance Initiative RPSM Regional Parts and Service Manager RSE Retail Sales Effectiveness/Efficiency RSOM Regional Sales Operations Manager RTC Real Time Communication (banner-online ads) RTL Units Retail Units RVP Regional Vice President C Term or Acronym Description C&I Contest & Incentives CA Consumer Affairs CDB Customer Database CDM Conceptual Data Model CFT Cross-Functional Team CMS Content Management System COTS Commercial Off-The-Shelf CP Customer Pay CPIA Claims Processing Information Analysis CPO Certified Pre-Owned CPO (for OMS) Current Production Order CR Change Requests CRM Customer Relationship Management CSC Customer Service Care CSI Customer Service Index CSR Certificate Signing Process CSSO Customer Single Sign-on CSV Comma-Separated Value. A CSV file stores table data as an unformatted text file with a comma between each value. When creating a report with a large amount of data, you may want to use the CSV file type - since it strips all formatting and simplifies the data, it is easier to generate the data for export than an Excel or PDF file. If you open a CSV file in Excel, it correctly interprets the data as a table. Opening a CSV file in Word displays the comma-separated text, which can then be converted to a table or manipulated as desired. In the example below, the first image displays a formatted Excel spreadsheet. The second image displays the comma-separated results when opened in Word or other text editing program. The third image shows the CSV file opened in Excel.     CTP Change to Production CYTD Calendar Year-to-Date    O Term or Acronym Description OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer OFS Owner First System (Nissan) OMS NNA's Vehicle Order Management System Op Code Operation Code. See Operation Code. Operation Code A six-character code which uniquely identifies an operation performed as part of a repair. Orientation Portrait orientation refers to printing or screen display that most resembles a portrait image, where the image is taller than it is wide (as shown in the picture of the Mona Lisa). Landscape orientation, as demonstrated by the image of the painting by Claude Monet, displays contents printed where the document or image is wider than it is tall. OTB Out Of The Box D Term or Acronym Description Damaged Part If a dealer receives a damaged part from the PDC, they should submit a refund request on the Request for Credit Entry - Part Claims page. From the Parts menu, in the NissanNet section, click the RFC_Parts Claim link. Note : Instructions for completing the Request for Credit Entry - Part Claims page are not covered in DBS help since that page is part of NissanNet. Please call the NissanNet help desk if you need assistance. DAS Distribution and Auto Service, Inc. D2DR Dealer to Dealer Referral DBA Doing Business As DBS Dealer Business System DCAL Dealer Claim Administration Limits DCR Dealer Claims Review DCS The Dealer Communication System (DCS) is now referred to as the Dealer Business System (DBS) Dealer Firm Order A Dealer Firm order is a vehicle that has been allocated to and accepted by a dealership. Dealer Soft Order A Dealer Soft order occurs when Nissan allocates a vehicle to a dealership, but the dealership has not yet agreed to accept the vehicle. If the dealership agrees to the allocation, the order is converted to a Dealer Firm order. DH Data Hub DI Dealer Internal DMA Designated Market Area DMS Dealer Management System DOM Dealer Operations Manager DP Dealer Portal DP Dealer Principal DPSM Dealer Parts and Service Manager DPSM Dealer Parts and Sales Manager DR See Dealer Firm Order DS See Dealer Soft Order DSP Dealer Service Provider DSS Dealer Service Specialist DTC Diagnostic Test Code Return to top Return to top Return to top Return to top Return to top H Term or Acronym Description Hide Vehicle Access OMS to hide a vehicle. Hiding a vehicle makes it invisible to other dealers. You can view your hidden inventory on the Vehicle Inventory page. From the Filter by drop-down list, select the "Hidden Units" option, then select "Hidden" from the secondary filter list. HOD Host on Demand HQ Headquarters Z Return to top B Term or Acronym Description BA Business Analyst Basic Stocking Level For sites with Automatic Stock Replenishment (ASR), the basic stocking level (BSL) is the minimum level of goods necessary for ASR. For example: The BSL for a dealership might include 50 oil filters. This would be the base level that is maintained through the ASR process. If the dealership uses 25 filters to fill repair orders, their next ASR parts order would replenish their supply with 25 new filters. BM Business Management BSL See Basic Stocking Level. BTG Balance to Go C Term or Acronym Description C&I Contest & Incentives CA Consumer Affairs CDB Customer Database CDM Conceptual Data Model CFT Cross-Functional Team CMS Content Management System COTS Commercial Off-The-Shelf CP Customer Pay CPIA Claims Processing Information Analysis CPO Certified Pre-Owned CPO (for OMS) Current Production Order CR Change Requests CRM Customer Relationship Management CSC Customer Service Care CSI Customer Service Index CSR Certificate Signing Process CSSO Customer Single Sign-on CSV Comma-Separated Value. A CSV file stores table data as an unformatted text file with a comma between each value. When creating a report with a large amount of data, you may want to use the CSV file type - since it strips all formatting and simplifies the data, it is easier to generate the data for export than an Excel or PDF file. If you open a CSV file in Excel, it correctly interprets the data as a table. Opening a CSV file in Word displays the comma-separated text, which can then be converted to a table or manipulated as desired. In the example below, the first image displays a formatted Excel spreadsheet. The second image displays the comma-separated results when opened in Word or other text editing program. The third image shows the CSV file opened in Excel.     CTP Change to Production CYTD Calendar Year-to-Date    D Term or Acronym Description Damaged Part If a dealer receives a damaged part from the PDC, they should submit a refund request on the Request for Credit Entry - Part Claims page. From the Parts menu, in the NissanNet section, click the RFC_Parts Claim link. Note : Instructions for completing the Request for Credit Entry - Part Claims page are not covered in DBS help since that page is part of NissanNet. Please call the NissanNet help desk if you need assistance. DAS Distribution and Auto Service, Inc. D2DR Dealer to Dealer Referral DBA Doing Business As DBS Dealer Business System DCAL Dealer Claim Administration Limits DCR Dealer Claims Review DCS The Dealer Communication System (DCS) is now referred to as the Dealer Business System (DBS) Dealer Firm Order A Dealer Firm order is a vehicle that has been allocated to and accepted by a dealership. Dealer Soft Order A Dealer Soft order occurs when Nissan allocates a vehicle to a dealership, but the dealership has not yet agreed to accept the vehicle. If the dealership agrees to the allocation, the order is converted to a Dealer Firm order. DH Data Hub DI Dealer Internal DMA Designated Market Area DMS Dealer Management System DOM Dealer Operations Manager DP Dealer Portal DP Dealer Principal DPSM Dealer Parts and Service Manager DPSM Dealer Parts and Sales Manager DR See Dealer Firm Order DS See Dealer Soft Order DSP Dealer Service Provider DSS Dealer Service Specialist DTC Diagnostic Test Code E Term or Acronym Description EAI Enterprise Application Integration eDAB e Dealer Advisory Board EDS Early Detection System EDW Enterprise Data Warehouse ELMR Electronic Lease Management & Returns EPRP Enterprise Performance Reporting Portal ERD Entity Relationship Diagram Error Icon The red X icon in  DBS  indicates a record or field with an error.   The red X is most commonly encountered when there is a required field that has not been completed. ETA Estimated Time of Arrival ETL Extract, Transform & Load G Term or Acronym Description G&A General & Administration GSG Global Style Guide GUI Graphical User Interface A Term or Acronym Description ACCY Acronym Description ACL Access Control List AD Active Directory (Microsoft) ADP Dealer Service Provider AFF Application Foundation Framework AGP Average Gross Profit API Application Program Interface ASL Automatic Stocking Level - for sites where ASR (Automatic Stock Replenishment) is implemented, the automatic stocking level is the quantity of a part that is automatically replenished. ASM Assistant Sales Manager ASP In a parts order, the Alternative Shipping Point is an address where parts should be shipped that is not the dealer's address. Example : A dealer may place an order for factory parts that will be installed by a third party vendor. The parts order may request shipping to the vendor instead of the dealer's location. In this case, the vendor's address would be the alternative shipping point. ASR Automatic Stock Replenishment Asterisk Asterisks appear in several places in  DBS , and can have several meanings: When there are a mix of required and optional fields on an application, an asterisk denotes a required field. On the Vehicle Inventory and Inventory Search pages, an asterisk next to the vehicle stock number indicates that there are notes available for the vehicle.  When searching in DBS , use an asterisk when typing partial information to perform a wildcard search. When completing the Customer section of an RDR, type three asterisks to indicate that the customer does not have an email address. I Term or Acronym Description ID Identification IFS Infiniti Financial Services InfinitiNet Proprietary Legacy Integrated DCS/DMS, used by Infiniti US Dealers, created in 1989 INTAG Infiniti Nissan Technical Assistance Guide Internal Users NNA and NCI corporate users IP Intellectual Property IPI Infiniti Purchase Index IR Issue Resolution IRC Investment Return Cost IS Information System ISI Infiniti Service Index J Term or Acronym Description J Coded Part A J-coded part is an obsolete part which cannot be returned. K Term or Acronym Description Keyboard Shortcuts On the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and Express Entry Warranty claim, you can use the keyboard shortcuts outlined below to move from section to section in a warranty claim. Ctrl+1: Summary Section Ctrl+2: Claim Information Section Ctrl+3: Parts Section Ctrl+4: Operations Section Ctrl+5: Expenses Section Ctrl+6: Comments Section Ctrl+7: Customer Section KPI Key Performance Indicator L Term or Acronym Description Landscape Orientation See Orientation. LAS Lead Administration System LCV Light Commercial Vehicle. An LCV is typically a pickup truck, van, or SUV used for commercial purposes. LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDM Logical Data Model LMS A user's LMS ID is populated in NNAnet when they register as a user in Nissan Virtual Academy. This information is required to populate the list of technicians on the warranty claim pages and the list of sales consultants and F&I managers on the RDR pages. Note : In order to successfully populate the lists in DBS , the user's EID and LMS ID must match and the user must have the appropriate certifications in Virtual Academy. If a user name is missing from the list of technicians, sales consultants, or F&I managers, contact the DBS  help desk for assistance. LOE Level of Efforts (in hours) LTG Labor Time Guide X Term or Acronym Description XML Extended Markup language F Term or Acronym Description F&I Finance and Insurance F1 Fixed Right the First Time FAC Facility Usage FIPS Federal Information Processing Standard. The FIPS code is a three-digit number that identifies the county of a residence when a zip code covers multiple counties and/or a two-digit state code that identifies the state of a residence when a zip code crosses state boundary lines. In DBS , the FIPS code is used to determine the incentives for which a vehicle might be eligible. For example: Zip code 75146 is used for residences in Dallas, Texas and Ellis, Texas. Both areas carry the FIPS code 48, which uniquely identifies the state of Texas; while residences in Dallas County have the county FIPS code 113, and those in Ellis County carry the FIPS code 139. Flat Rate Manual The flat rate manual lists Nissan-approved operation codes and flat rate times used for determining labor costs for repairs or service performed on a vehicle. The flat rate manual also includes the corresponding symptom and diagnosis codes that are used when creating a repair order for service. FS Financial Statement FSM Financial Service Manager FTP File Transfer Protocol FYTD Fiscal Year to Date Y Term or Acronym Description Yellow ! Icon The yellow ! icon in  DBS  indicates a record or field with a warning.   Records with a warning may still be submitted or processed. You will most often encounter a warning icon when data entered is outside of accepted parameters.  For example : on a warranty claim page, you may encounter a warning icon when a duplicate repair order has been found. M Term or Acronym Description Manual Order Quantity The Manual Order Quantity refers to parts that were ordered to meet specific customer needs that are not part of the automatic stock replenishment program. Example : A customer's vehicle requires replacement of the driver's seat after many miles on the road. The seat assembly and parts required are ordered (or returned) manually because they are not automatically available. MCA Marketing Contact Audit MOQ See Manual Order Quantity MT Mid Tier W Term or Acronym Description WAN Wide Area Network Warning Icon The yellow ! icon in  DBS  indicates a record or field with a warning.   Records with a warning may still be submitted or processed. You will most often encounter a warning icon when data entered is outside of accepted parameters.  For example : on a warranty claim page, you may encounter a warning icon when a duplicate repair order has been found. Warranty Claims Help Desk For additional assistance with warranty information (including pre-authorization), contact the Warranty Claims Help Desk: Nissan 1-800-258-7008 opt 7 Infiniti 1-800-933-3712 opt 7 NCI 1-866-297-1734 Web to Host The Web to Host application is used to access the Nissan Host (mainframe). If you experience any issues with the Web to Host application, please contact the DBS  Help Desk. WIN Workforce Integration at Nissan WO Work Order WWL Worldwide Logistical WYSIWYG What You See Is What You Get V Term or Acronym Description VADA Value Added DBS Application Vehicle Processing Center The Vehicle Processing Centers (VPC) are where vehicles get accessorized and prepped for dealer delivery. VPCs are located at our ports of entry if coming in from abroad and at our plants in the case of Smyrna, Canton and Aguascalientes. VI Visual Identity VIMS Vehicle Incentive Management System VIN Vehicle Identification Number VOR Vehicle Off Road VPC See Vehicle Processing Center VPP Vehicle Purchase Program VSC Vehicle Service Contract U Term or Acronym Description UAT User Acceptance Testing UHD User Help Desk UI User Interface User Name To update a DBS  user's name, work phone number, email address, or other profile information, contact the help desk. All changes feed to DBS  in an overnight batch and are available the following day. DBS  users may add a mobile phone number to their profile by clicking the My Profile name link at the top of the DBS  window. UIO Units in Operation UT Unit Testing T Term or Acronym Description TDC Total Distribution Cost Technical Service Bulletin A technical service bulletin (TSB) provides information or procedures for service campaigns, recalls, or other repairs that may be applicable to a vehicle. Technician In DBS , a technician is an employee assigned to complete a service repair for a vehicle. The list of technicians in  DBS  is populated with certified individuals as enrolled in Nissan Virtual Academy. A user's Virtual Academy or LMS ID is populated in NNAnet when they register as a user in Nissan Virtual Academy. This information is required to populate the list of technicians on the warranty claim pages and the list of sales consultants and F&I managers on the RDR pages. Note : In order to successfully populate the lists in DBS , the user's EID and LMS ID must match and the user must have the appropriate certifications in Virtual Academy. If a user name is missing from the list of technicians, sales consultants, or F&I managers, contact the DBS  help desk for assistance. TEDS Training and Education Development System Time Zone Individual users can edit their preferred time zone by updating their user profile. Click here for information on how to update your user profile. Click here for information on how to update your user profile. Authorized administrative users can update the default time zone for a dealership by updating the dealer information. Click here for information on how to update dealer information Click here for information on how to update dealer information TOE Total Ownership Experience TOS Transient Owner Service Total Ownership System (Infiniti) TSB See Technical Service Bulletin S Term or Acronym Description Sales Satisfaction Index The Sales Satisfaction Index (SSI) provides an analysis of the vehicle purchase experience from the customer's perspective. The study measures the ability of dealerships to manage the end-to-end sales process from vehicle selection to price negotiation, financing, and finally to delivery. The SSI is designed to provide dealers with information on how to improve customer satisfaction and retention. Security+Plus Nissan Security+Plus is an extended coverage service contract available for new and pre-owned Nissan vehicles. Service Comm If your DBS  permissions include access to Service Comm, a link for the application will appear on the Service tab menu. If you need access to Service Comm but your DBS  Service menu does not include this link, contact your System Administrator. SIR Service Information Resource SIT See Stock-in-Transit SIT System Integration Testing SLS Cert. Sales Certification SMS Short Message Service - better known as text messaging, an SMS service provides a limited character messaging service. SOA Service-oriented Architecture SPE Sales Penetration Effectiveness SRV Cert. Service Certification SSI See Sales Satisfaction Index SSO Single Sign On STAR Standards for Technology in Automotive Retail Stock in Transit The Stock in Transit (SIT) filter on the Inventory Search and Vehicle Inventory pages allows dealers to view stock which has been added to the dealer's inventory but is currently being shipped to the dealership. Stop the Press Order A Stop the Press Order (STP) takes place when a part is not available to fulfill a parts order and one is taken from the assembly line. Regional personnel are involved in fulfilling STP orders as needed. STP See Stop the Press Order SVC Service Campaign SWR Southwest Region R Term or Acronym Description R&R Reynolds & Reynolds (DSP) RAGP Regional Average Gross Profit RDR See Retail Delivery Report Recall Bulletin See Technical Service Bulletin Red X The red X icon in  DBS  indicates a record or field with an error.   The red X is most commonly encountered when there is a required field that has not been completed. REL Facility Relations Repair Order A repair order (RO) is a request for service on a vehicle. Each repair order in DBS  may have one or more line items. For example : A customer may request service to replace the brakes, perform an oil change, and provide new windshield wipers. Each of these would be entered as a separate line item on the repair order. Request for Credit A request for credit (RFC) occurs when parts received at the dealership are not as expected. For example : a dealer ordered one part to complete a repair order, but received three of the part. Retail Delivery Report A Retail Delivery Report (RDR), is an online report submitted through DBS  which informs Nissan of a vehicle sale or lease. Please see the Sales tab in this help system for additional information. RFC See Request for Credit RFD Request for Decision RFS Request for Service RIM Retail Inventory Management RO See Repair Order RPI Retail Performance Initiative RPSM Regional Parts and Service Manager RSE Retail Sales Effectiveness/Efficiency RSOM Regional Sales Operations Manager RTC Real Time Communication (banner-online ads) RTL Units Retail Units RVP Regional Vice President Q Term or Acronym Description QAS Quality Assurance Support Quick Keys On the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and Express Entry Warranty claim, you can use the keyboard shortcuts outlined below to move from section to section in a warranty claim. Ctrl+1: Summary Section Ctrl+2: Claim Information Section Ctrl+3: Parts Section Ctrl+4: Operations Section Ctrl+5: Expenses Section Ctrl+6: Comments Section Ctrl+7: Customer Section P Term or Acronym Description P&A Parts and Accessories Parts Distribution Center In order to quickly provide the parts needed for service repairs and campaigns, Nissan maintains several parts distribution centers (PDC). Each PDC warehouse contains a wide variety of parts available to dealers for quick shipping and installation. Shipping from a regional PDC greatly reduces the time it takes for parts to arrive at the dealership for installation. For example : A dealer located in Dallas, Texas needs a part that they don't have in stock. They place a parts order, and the part is shipped, if available, from the regional PDC located in Irving, Texas.  Parts Master The Parts Master replaces the Dealer Confidential Parts Price List CD-ROM with a convenient online parts pricing and information system. PDC See Parts Distribution Center PDI See Pre-Delivery Inspection PFP Primary Failed Part - The primary failed part is the part which caused a repair to be needed. PIAP Port Installed Accessory Program Pick Ticket The pick ticket is printed for each part that a dealer orders. The warehouse workers pull the part from their location and place this label on the box. This has PDC Part Location Order # Invoice # Order Type Dealer being shipped to Carrier Information PMA Primary Market Area PO Primary Operation Pop-Ups / Multiple Windows Although you can't have more than one instance of DBS  running at once, you can have more than one DBS  application window open at a time. From the menu tabs, click the New Window icon for the page you want to open in a new window. Portrait Orientation See Orientation Postal Code In Canada, the six-character postal code details the Forward Sortation Area (FSA) and local delivery unit assigned to a location. The first three characters make up the FSA, and detail the province and major sorting area. The last three characters detail the specific local delivery unit information. For Example : Postal code N8Y 2M9 describes a local delivery intended for the province of Ontario, major sorting area in Windsor, and local delivery for the Walker Rd delivery unit. Pre-Delivery Inspection The pre-delivery inspection (PDI) is the last chance to make a GREAT first impression. The PDI is performed before a car is delivered to a customer, and may include such things such as making sure all accessories are correctly installed and included with the vehicle, topping off all fluids, making sure there are no blemishes or scratches in the paint, removing any final protective film, and ensuring that all systems operate correctly. For any questions about PDI including dealer payments, please call the PDI help desk at 615-725-0588. Pre-RDR Preview Retail Delivery Report PWO Project Work Order PV Planned/planning Volume PUC Performance, Utilization and Capacity Matrix O Term or Acronym Description OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer OFS Owner First System (Nissan) OMS NNA's Vehicle Order Management System Op Code Operation Code. See Operation Code. Operation Code A six-character code which uniquely identifies an operation performed as part of a repair. Orientation Portrait orientation refers to printing or screen display that most resembles a portrait image, where the image is taller than it is wide (as shown in the picture of the Mona Lisa). Landscape orientation, as demonstrated by the image of the painting by Claude Monet, displays contents printed where the document or image is wider than it is tall. OTB Out Of The Box N Term or Acronym Description NA  Not Applicable NCI  Nissan Canada, Inc. NCS No Cost Sale NDARP Nissan Dealer Advertising Reimbursement Program NDSN Nissan Decision Support System Nissan Edge Nissan Award in regard to service NissanNet  Legacy DCS , used by Nissan US Dealers, created in 1975  NESNA Nissan Extended Services, North America - NESNA provides extended service and warranty coverage for Nissan vehicles. NENSA offers the following extended service plans: Security+Plus ® extended protection plan with coverage up to 8 years and 120,000 miles Prepaid Maintenance Plans featuring basic or factory scheduled maintenance for new or pre-owned vehicles QualityGuard+Plus® extended protection plan for non-Nissan new and pre-owned vehicles with coverage up to 7 years and 100,000 miles NMC Nissan Motor Corp. NML  Nissan Motor Limited NMAC  Nissan Motor Acceptance Corporation NMPS Nissan Motor Parts System NNA  Nissan North America NOTOR Nissan One to One Rewards - the Nissan One to One Rewards program offers Nissan owners points for each dollar spent on service visits. Points earned can be spent for future services such as oil changes, wiper blade replacement, or tune-ups. NPI Nissan Purchase Index NREDI Nissan Retail Environmental Design Initiative NRP Nissan Revival Plan NSH National Service History NSI National Service Index Return to top N Term or Acronym Description NA  Not Applicable NCI  Nissan Canada, Inc. NCS No Cost Sale NDARP Nissan Dealer Advertising Reimbursement Program NDSN Nissan Decision Support System Nissan Edge Nissan Award in regard to service NissanNet  Legacy DCS , used by Nissan US Dealers, created in 1975  NESNA Nissan Extended Services, North America - NESNA provides extended service and warranty coverage for Nissan vehicles. NENSA offers the following extended service plans: Security+Plus ® extended protection plan with coverage up to 8 years and 120,000 miles Prepaid Maintenance Plans featuring basic or factory scheduled maintenance for new or pre-owned vehicles QualityGuard+Plus® extended protection plan for non-Nissan new and pre-owned vehicles with coverage up to 7 years and 100,000 miles NMC Nissan Motor Corp. NML  Nissan Motor Limited NMAC  Nissan Motor Acceptance Corporation NMPS Nissan Motor Parts System NNA  Nissan North America NOTOR Nissan One to One Rewards - the Nissan One to One Rewards program offers Nissan owners points for each dollar spent on service visits. Points earned can be spent for future services such as oil changes, wiper blade replacement, or tune-ups. NPI Nissan Purchase Index NREDI Nissan Retail Environmental Design Initiative NRP Nissan Revival Plan NSH National Service History NSI National Service Index Return to top B Term or Acronym Description BA Business Analyst Basic Stocking Level For sites with Automatic Stock Replenishment (ASR), the basic stocking level (BSL) is the minimum level of goods necessary for ASR. For example: The BSL for a dealership might include 50 oil filters. This would be the base level that is maintained through the ASR process. If the dealership uses 25 filters to fill repair orders, their next ASR parts order would replenish their supply with 25 new filters. BM Business Management BSL See Basic Stocking Level. BTG Balance to Go C Term or Acronym Description C&I Contest & Incentives CA Consumer Affairs CDB Customer Database CDM Conceptual Data Model CFT Cross-Functional Team CMS Content Management System COTS Commercial Off-The-Shelf CP Customer Pay CPIA Claims Processing Information Analysis CPO Certified Pre-Owned CPO (for OMS) Current Production Order CR Change Requests CRM Customer Relationship Management CSC Customer Service Care CSI Customer Service Index CSR Certificate Signing Process CSSO Customer Single Sign-on CSV Comma-Separated Value. A CSV file stores table data as an unformatted text file with a comma between each value. When creating a report with a large amount of data, you may want to use the CSV file type - since it strips all formatting and simplifies the data, it is easier to generate the data for export than an Excel or PDF file. If you open a CSV file in Excel, it correctly interprets the data as a table. Opening a CSV file in Word displays the comma-separated text, which can then be converted to a table or manipulated as desired. In the example below, the first image displays a formatted Excel spreadsheet. The second image displays the comma-separated results when opened in Word or other text editing program. The third image shows the CSV file opened in Excel.     CTP Change to Production CYTD Calendar Year-to-Date    D Term or Acronym Description Damaged Part If a dealer receives a damaged part from the PDC, they should submit a refund request on the Request for Credit Entry - Part Claims page. From the Parts menu, in the NissanNet section, click the RFC_Parts Claim link. Note : Instructions for completing the Request for Credit Entry - Part Claims page are not covered in DBS help since that page is part of NissanNet. Please call the NissanNet help desk if you need assistance. DAS Distribution and Auto Service, Inc. D2DR Dealer to Dealer Referral DBA Doing Business As DBS Dealer Business System DCAL Dealer Claim Administration Limits DCR Dealer Claims Review DCS The Dealer Communication System (DCS) is now referred to as the Dealer Business System (DBS) Dealer Firm Order A Dealer Firm order is a vehicle that has been allocated to and accepted by a dealership. Dealer Soft Order A Dealer Soft order occurs when Nissan allocates a vehicle to a dealership, but the dealership has not yet agreed to accept the vehicle. If the dealership agrees to the allocation, the order is converted to a Dealer Firm order. DH Data Hub DI Dealer Internal DMA Designated Market Area DMS Dealer Management System DOM Dealer Operations Manager DP Dealer Portal DP Dealer Principal DPSM Dealer Parts and Service Manager DPSM Dealer Parts and Sales Manager DR See Dealer Firm Order DS See Dealer Soft Order DSP Dealer Service Provider DSS Dealer Service Specialist DTC Diagnostic Test Code E Term or Acronym Description EAI Enterprise Application Integration eDAB e Dealer Advisory Board EDS Early Detection System EDW Enterprise Data Warehouse ELMR Electronic Lease Management & Returns EPRP Enterprise Performance Reporting Portal ERD Entity Relationship Diagram Error Icon The red X icon in  DBS  indicates a record or field with an error.   The red X is most commonly encountered when there is a required field that has not been completed. ETA Estimated Time of Arrival ETL Extract, Transform & Load F Term or Acronym Description F&I Finance and Insurance F1 Fixed Right the First Time FAC Facility Usage FIPS Federal Information Processing Standard. The FIPS code is a three-digit number that identifies the county of a residence when a zip code covers multiple counties and/or a two-digit state code that identifies the state of a residence when a zip code crosses state boundary lines. In DBS , the FIPS code is used to determine the incentives for which a vehicle might be eligible. For example: Zip code 75146 is used for residences in Dallas, Texas and Ellis, Texas. Both areas carry the FIPS code 48, which uniquely identifies the state of Texas; while residences in Dallas County have the county FIPS code 113, and those in Ellis County carry the FIPS code 139. Flat Rate Manual The flat rate manual lists Nissan-approved operation codes and flat rate times used for determining labor costs for repairs or service performed on a vehicle. The flat rate manual also includes the corresponding symptom and diagnosis codes that are used when creating a repair order for service. FS Financial Statement FSM Financial Service Manager FTP File Transfer Protocol FYTD Fiscal Year to Date G Term or Acronym Description G&A General & Administration GSG Global Style Guide GUI Graphical User Interface H Term or Acronym Description Hide Vehicle Access OMS to hide a vehicle. Hiding a vehicle makes it invisible to other dealers. You can view your hidden inventory on the Vehicle Inventory page. From the Filter by drop-down list, select the "Hidden Units" option, then select "Hidden" from the secondary filter list. HOD Host on Demand HQ Headquarters I Term or Acronym Description ID Identification IFS Infiniti Financial Services InfinitiNet Proprietary Legacy Integrated DCS/DMS, used by Infiniti US Dealers, created in 1989 INTAG Infiniti Nissan Technical Assistance Guide Internal Users NNA and NCI corporate users IP Intellectual Property IPI Infiniti Purchase Index IR Issue Resolution IRC Investment Return Cost IS Information System ISI Infiniti Service Index J Term or Acronym Description J Coded Part A J-coded part is an obsolete part which cannot be returned. K Term or Acronym Description Keyboard Shortcuts On the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and Express Entry Warranty claim, you can use the keyboard shortcuts outlined below to move from section to section in a warranty claim. Ctrl+1: Summary Section Ctrl+2: Claim Information Section Ctrl+3: Parts Section Ctrl+4: Operations Section Ctrl+5: Expenses Section Ctrl+6: Comments Section Ctrl+7: Customer Section KPI Key Performance Indicator A Term or Acronym Description ACCY Acronym Description ACL Access Control List AD Active Directory (Microsoft) ADP Dealer Service Provider AFF Application Foundation Framework AGP Average Gross Profit API Application Program Interface ASL Automatic Stocking Level - for sites where ASR (Automatic Stock Replenishment) is implemented, the automatic stocking level is the quantity of a part that is automatically replenished. ASM Assistant Sales Manager ASP In a parts order, the Alternative Shipping Point is an address where parts should be shipped that is not the dealer's address. Example : A dealer may place an order for factory parts that will be installed by a third party vendor. The parts order may request shipping to the vendor instead of the dealer's location. In this case, the vendor's address would be the alternative shipping point. ASR Automatic Stock Replenishment Asterisk Asterisks appear in several places in  DBS , and can have several meanings: When there are a mix of required and optional fields on an application, an asterisk denotes a required field. On the Vehicle Inventory and Inventory Search pages, an asterisk next to the vehicle stock number indicates that there are notes available for the vehicle.  When searching in DBS , use an asterisk when typing partial information to perform a wildcard search. When completing the Customer section of an RDR, type three asterisks to indicate that the customer does not have an email address. M Term or Acronym Description Manual Order Quantity The Manual Order Quantity refers to parts that were ordered to meet specific customer needs that are not part of the automatic stock replenishment program. Example : A customer's vehicle requires replacement of the driver's seat after many miles on the road. The seat assembly and parts required are ordered (or returned) manually because they are not automatically available. MCA Marketing Contact Audit MOQ See Manual Order Quantity MT Mid Tier Z O Term or Acronym Description OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer OFS Owner First System (Nissan) OMS NNA's Vehicle Order Management System Op Code Operation Code. See Operation Code. Operation Code A six-character code which uniquely identifies an operation performed as part of a repair. Orientation Portrait orientation refers to printing or screen display that most resembles a portrait image, where the image is taller than it is wide (as shown in the picture of the Mona Lisa). Landscape orientation, as demonstrated by the image of the painting by Claude Monet, displays contents printed where the document or image is wider than it is tall. OTB Out Of The Box P Term or Acronym Description P&A Parts and Accessories Parts Distribution Center In order to quickly provide the parts needed for service repairs and campaigns, Nissan maintains several parts distribution centers (PDC). Each PDC warehouse contains a wide variety of parts available to dealers for quick shipping and installation. Shipping from a regional PDC greatly reduces the time it takes for parts to arrive at the dealership for installation. For example : A dealer located in Dallas, Texas needs a part that they don't have in stock. They place a parts order, and the part is shipped, if available, from the regional PDC located in Irving, Texas.  Parts Master The Parts Master replaces the Dealer Confidential Parts Price List CD-ROM with a convenient online parts pricing and information system. PDC See Parts Distribution Center PDI See Pre-Delivery Inspection PFP Primary Failed Part - The primary failed part is the part which caused a repair to be needed. PIAP Port Installed Accessory Program Pick Ticket The pick ticket is printed for each part that a dealer orders. The warehouse workers pull the part from their location and place this label on the box. This has PDC Part Location Order # Invoice # Order Type Dealer being shipped to Carrier Information PMA Primary Market Area PO Primary Operation Pop-Ups / Multiple Windows Although you can't have more than one instance of DBS  running at once, you can have more than one DBS  application window open at a time. From the menu tabs, click the New Window icon for the page you want to open in a new window. Portrait Orientation See Orientation Postal Code In Canada, the six-character postal code details the Forward Sortation Area (FSA) and local delivery unit assigned to a location. The first three characters make up the FSA, and detail the province and major sorting area. The last three characters detail the specific local delivery unit information. For Example : Postal code N8Y 2M9 describes a local delivery intended for the province of Ontario, major sorting area in Windsor, and local delivery for the Walker Rd delivery unit. Pre-Delivery Inspection The pre-delivery inspection (PDI) is the last chance to make a GREAT first impression. The PDI is performed before a car is delivered to a customer, and may include such things such as making sure all accessories are correctly installed and included with the vehicle, topping off all fluids, making sure there are no blemishes or scratches in the paint, removing any final protective film, and ensuring that all systems operate correctly. For any questions about PDI including dealer payments, please call the PDI help desk at 615-725-0588. Pre-RDR Preview Retail Delivery Report PWO Project Work Order PV Planned/planning Volume PUC Performance, Utilization and Capacity Matrix Q Term or Acronym Description QAS Quality Assurance Support Quick Keys On the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and Express Entry Warranty claim, you can use the keyboard shortcuts outlined below to move from section to section in a warranty claim. Ctrl+1: Summary Section Ctrl+2: Claim Information Section Ctrl+3: Parts Section Ctrl+4: Operations Section Ctrl+5: Expenses Section Ctrl+6: Comments Section Ctrl+7: Customer Section R Term or Acronym Description R&R Reynolds & Reynolds (DSP) RAGP Regional Average Gross Profit RDR See Retail Delivery Report Recall Bulletin See Technical Service Bulletin Red X The red X icon in  DBS  indicates a record or field with an error.   The red X is most commonly encountered when there is a required field that has not been completed. REL Facility Relations Repair Order A repair order (RO) is a request for service on a vehicle. Each repair order in DBS  may have one or more line items. For example : A customer may request service to replace the brakes, perform an oil change, and provide new windshield wipers. Each of these would be entered as a separate line item on the repair order. Request for Credit A request for credit (RFC) occurs when parts received at the dealership are not as expected. For example : a dealer ordered one part to complete a repair order, but received three of the part. Retail Delivery Report A Retail Delivery Report (RDR), is an online report submitted through DBS  which informs Nissan of a vehicle sale or lease. Please see the Sales tab in this help system for additional information. RFC See Request for Credit RFD Request for Decision RFS Request for Service RIM Retail Inventory Management RO See Repair Order RPI Retail Performance Initiative RPSM Regional Parts and Service Manager RSE Retail Sales Effectiveness/Efficiency RSOM Regional Sales Operations Manager RTC Real Time Communication (banner-online ads) RTL Units Retail Units RVP Regional Vice President S Term or Acronym Description Sales Satisfaction Index The Sales Satisfaction Index (SSI) provides an analysis of the vehicle purchase experience from the customer's perspective. The study measures the ability of dealerships to manage the end-to-end sales process from vehicle selection to price negotiation, financing, and finally to delivery. The SSI is designed to provide dealers with information on how to improve customer satisfaction and retention. Security+Plus Nissan Security+Plus is an extended coverage service contract available for new and pre-owned Nissan vehicles. Service Comm If your DBS  permissions include access to Service Comm, a link for the application will appear on the Service tab menu. If you need access to Service Comm but your DBS  Service menu does not include this link, contact your System Administrator. SIR Service Information Resource SIT See Stock-in-Transit SIT System Integration Testing SLS Cert. Sales Certification SMS Short Message Service - better known as text messaging, an SMS service provides a limited character messaging service. SOA Service-oriented Architecture SPE Sales Penetration Effectiveness SRV Cert. Service Certification SSI See Sales Satisfaction Index SSO Single Sign On STAR Standards for Technology in Automotive Retail Stock in Transit The Stock in Transit (SIT) filter on the Inventory Search and Vehicle Inventory pages allows dealers to view stock which has been added to the dealer's inventory but is currently being shipped to the dealership. Stop the Press Order A Stop the Press Order (STP) takes place when a part is not available to fulfill a parts order and one is taken from the assembly line. Regional personnel are involved in fulfilling STP orders as needed. STP See Stop the Press Order SVC Service Campaign SWR Southwest Region T Term or Acronym Description TDC Total Distribution Cost Technical Service Bulletin A technical service bulletin (TSB) provides information or procedures for service campaigns, recalls, or other repairs that may be applicable to a vehicle. Technician In DBS , a technician is an employee assigned to complete a service repair for a vehicle. The list of technicians in  DBS  is populated with certified individuals as enrolled in Nissan Virtual Academy. A user's Virtual Academy or LMS ID is populated in NNAnet when they register as a user in Nissan Virtual Academy. This information is required to populate the list of technicians on the warranty claim pages and the list of sales consultants and F&I managers on the RDR pages. Note : In order to successfully populate the lists in DBS , the user's EID and LMS ID must match and the user must have the appropriate certifications in Virtual Academy. If a user name is missing from the list of technicians, sales consultants, or F&I managers, contact the DBS  help desk for assistance. TEDS Training and Education Development System Time Zone Individual users can edit their preferred time zone by updating their user profile. Click here for information on how to update your user profile. Click here for information on how to update your user profile. Authorized administrative users can update the default time zone for a dealership by updating the dealer information. Click here for information on how to update dealer information Click here for information on how to update dealer information TOE Total Ownership Experience TOS Transient Owner Service Total Ownership System (Infiniti) TSB See Technical Service Bulletin U Term or Acronym Description UAT User Acceptance Testing UHD User Help Desk UI User Interface User Name To update a DBS  user's name, work phone number, email address, or other profile information, contact the help desk. All changes feed to DBS  in an overnight batch and are available the following day. DBS  users may add a mobile phone number to their profile by clicking the My Profile name link at the top of the DBS  window. UIO Units in Operation UT Unit Testing V Term or Acronym Description VADA Value Added DBS Application Vehicle Processing Center The Vehicle Processing Centers (VPC) are where vehicles get accessorized and prepped for dealer delivery. VPCs are located at our ports of entry if coming in from abroad and at our plants in the case of Smyrna, Canton and Aguascalientes. VI Visual Identity VIMS Vehicle Incentive Management System VIN Vehicle Identification Number VOR Vehicle Off Road VPC See Vehicle Processing Center VPP Vehicle Purchase Program VSC Vehicle Service Contract W Term or Acronym Description WAN Wide Area Network Warning Icon The yellow ! icon in  DBS  indicates a record or field with a warning.   Records with a warning may still be submitted or processed. You will most often encounter a warning icon when data entered is outside of accepted parameters.  For example : on a warranty claim page, you may encounter a warning icon when a duplicate repair order has been found. Warranty Claims Help Desk For additional assistance with warranty information (including pre-authorization), contact the Warranty Claims Help Desk: Nissan 1-800-258-7008 opt 7 Infiniti 1-800-933-3712 opt 7 NCI 1-866-297-1734 Web to Host The Web to Host application is used to access the Nissan Host (mainframe). If you experience any issues with the Web to Host application, please contact the DBS  Help Desk. WIN Workforce Integration at Nissan WO Work Order WWL Worldwide Logistical WYSIWYG What You See Is What You Get X Term or Acronym Description XML Extended Markup language Y Term or Acronym Description Yellow ! Icon The yellow ! icon in  DBS  indicates a record or field with a warning.   Records with a warning may still be submitted or processed. You will most often encounter a warning icon when data entered is outside of accepted parameters.  For example : on a warranty claim page, you may encounter a warning icon when a duplicate repair order has been found. L Term or Acronym Description Landscape Orientation See Orientation. LAS Lead Administration System LCV Light Commercial Vehicle. An LCV is typically a pickup truck, van, or SUV used for commercial purposes. LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDM Logical Data Model LMS A user's LMS ID is populated in NNAnet when they register as a user in Nissan Virtual Academy. This information is required to populate the list of technicians on the warranty claim pages and the list of sales consultants and F&I managers on the RDR pages. Note : In order to successfully populate the lists in DBS , the user's EID and LMS ID must match and the user must have the appropriate certifications in Virtual Academy. If a user name is missing from the list of technicians, sales consultants, or F&I managers, contact the DBS  help desk for assistance. LOE Level of Efforts (in hours) LTG Labor Time Guide

View Overview Information Announcements Page Overview Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow Perform Tasks Change the Status of an Announcement Copy an Announcement Delete an Announcement Filter the Announcements Summary Open the Create Announcement Page Open the Edit Announcement Page Perform Common DBS Tasks View Announcements Summary View or Print Announcement Detail Change the Status of an Announcement Copy an Announcement Delete an Announcement Filter the Announcements Summary Open the Create Announcement Page Open the Edit Announcement Page Perform Common DBS Tasks View Announcements Summary View or Print Announcement Detail

View Overview Information   Manage Invalid Postal Codes Page Overview Perform Tasks Confirm Validated Temporary Postal Codes Fix an Invalid Postal Code Perform Common DBS Tasks Update a Not Yet Valid Postal Code

E2ED2A32-78C9-4AD9-8F51-91ED7B9DF49C\Express Entry Warranty Claim User Guide Infiniti v3.pdf

To suspend a standard operation code: Select a standard operation code. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Suspend option. Click the Suspend button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Note : The suspended standard operation code displays in red on the Standard Operation Code Summary to indicate the code is no longer active. The Suspend option in the Action menu changes to Restart. Note : The system stops processing new repair orders (ROs) for the suspended code.

To access the Edit Warranty Claim page: Select the warranty claim you want to open. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit claim  option.

In the Dealer List section, select the row for you want to change. Note : The Return Schedule List section on the right updates to display the return schedule for the selected dealer. In the Return Schedule List section, move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for parts return schedule you want to change. Note : If necessary, scroll to the right to view the Return Schedule List section, and scroll down in the Return Schedule List section if the schedule you want to modify is not displayed. From the Action menu, select the Adjust Accrual Amount option. In the New Adjust Accrual Amount fields, type one or more accrual adjustment amounts. Note : Format the accrual adjustment amount as shown in the image below. DBS accepts up to five digits, followed by a period and then an additional two digits. From the Adjustment Reason drop-down lists, select and adjustment reason for each accrual adjustment amount entered. Note : Authorized users can maintain the adjustment reasons displayed in the drop-down list. Click here for additional information. Click Save .

View Overview Information   Service Dashboard Page Overview  View the Service Dashboard Workflow Perform Tasks Filter the Service Dashboard Hold Vehicle or Ignore Request Perform Common DBS Tasks View NSH from the Service Dashboard View Repair Order Information View Study Alert Detail View Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) View the Service Dashboard Filter the Service Dashboard Hold Vehicle or Ignore Request Perform Common DBS Tasks View NSH from the Service Dashboard View Repair Order Information View Study Alert Detail View Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) View the Service Dashboard

MRW: 7/23: Need to add Transient Owner Service parts order when function exists in stage for Infiniti release (R3). View Overview Information   Edit Parts Order Page Overview Modify Parts Order Workflow Perform Tasks Add a Part to an Order Delete a Part from an Order Delete a Parts Order Look Up a Part Modify a Detail Line on an Order Perform Common DBS Tasks Submit a Parts Order View ASR Data for a Part on a Parts Order View the Parts List on an Order Add a Part to an Order Delete a Part from an Order Delete a Parts Order Look Up a Part Modify a Detail Line on an Order Perform Common DBS Tasks Submit a Parts Order View the Parts List on an Order

878E166F-AFBA-46F0-B61A-B26CF602563D\How to Process an ASR Parts Return in Infinitinet DCS v2.pdf

View Overview Information   View SVC Order Page Overview View Service Campaign Order Workflow Perform Tasks Modify SVC Order Quantity Approve an SVC Order Perform Common DBS Tasks Reject an SVC Order

How to Process an ASR Parts Return Quick Reference Guide The How to Process an ASR Parts Return Quick Reference Guide provides information for dealer users on how to create, edit, and submit an ASR parts return, and mark parts as "packed". Click here to download the How to Process an ASR Parts Return Quick Reference Guide.

How to Process an ASR Parts Return Quick Reference Guide The How to Process an ASR Parts Return Quick Reference Guide provides information for dealer users on how to create, edit, and submit an ASR parts return, and mark parts as "packed". Click here to download the How to Process an ASR Parts Return Quick Reference Guide.

To  view user permissions: Show the section, of collapsed. Note : To show a section, click the + icon in the section header. Use the function tree to expand or collapse the nodes, as desired. Note : To expand all items in the section, click the expand all link in the section header Note : The active permissions contain a check. To return to the User Summary page, click the Cancel button.

To  filter the Request For Credit (RFC) Status summary: Select a filter option. If a text-entry field appears, type a filter value. - OR - If a drop-down list appears, select an option from the list. - OR - If a calendar tool appears, click in the field, and then use the calendar to select the desired date. Note : Depending on your selection, additional filter options may display to narrow the results further. Note : Depending on your selection, the system may automatically filter the list and refresh the display. Click the Search button, as needed. View the RFC claims that meet the selected criteria. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the  Clear  icon.

Only graphic change - update to include broom and glass icons To transfer all of a user's report definitions:  Click the  General Action button, and then select the Transfer All Report(s) option. Note : The Transfer All Report(s) page appears. Select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Rename window appears. Type a new report name. Click the OK button to save your changes. If you transfer a report definition, control of the definition is given to the target user. Dealer users may transfer all of their own report definitions to another authorized user at their dealership. Dealer administrators and internal users can transfer all of a user's report definitions to another authorized user.

Only graphic change - update to include broom and glass icons To transfer all of a user's report definitions:  Click the  General Action button, and then select the Transfer All Report(s) option. Note : The Transfer All Report(s) page appears. Select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Rename window appears. Type a new report name. Click the OK button to save your changes. If you transfer a report definition, control of the definition is given to the target user. Dealer users may transfer all of their own report definitions to another authorized user at their dealership. Dealer administrators and internal users can transfer all of a user's report definitions to another authorized user.

Only graphic change - update to include broom and glass icons To transfer all of a user's report definitions:  Click the  General Action button, and then select the Transfer All Report(s) option. Note : The Transfer All Report(s) page appears. Select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Rename window appears. Type a new report name. Click the OK button to save your changes. If you transfer a report definition, control of the definition is given to the target user. Dealer users may transfer all of their own report definitions to another authorized user at their dealership. Dealer administrators and internal users can transfer all of a user's report definitions to another authorized user.

Only graphic change - update to include broom and glass icons To transfer all of a user's report definitions:  Click the  General Action button, and then select the Transfer All Report(s) option. Note : The Transfer All Report(s) page appears. Select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Rename window appears. Type a new report name. Click the OK button to save your changes. If you transfer a report definition, control of the definition is given to the target user. Dealer users may transfer all of their own report definitions to another authorized user at their dealership. Dealer administrators and internal users can transfer all of a user's report definitions to another authorized user.

Only graphic change - update to include broom and glass icons To transfer all of a user's report definitions:  Click the  General Action button, and then select the Transfer All Report(s) option. Note : The Transfer All Report(s) page appears. Select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Rename window appears. Type a new report name. Click the OK button to save your changes. If you transfer a report definition, control of the definition is given to the target user. Dealer users may transfer all of their own report definitions to another authorized user at their dealership. Dealer administrators and internal users can transfer all of a user's report definitions to another authorized user.

Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow

To  create an IASR transaction: Click the Create button. In the Dealer # field, type a dealer number or use the Lookup icon to look up a dealer. In the Trans Close Start field, type a date or use the calendar to select the start date of the transaction. In the Trans Close End field, type a date or use the calendar to select the end date of the transaction. Click the Create button.

Calendar Events Page Overview Purpose Use the Calendar Events page to maintain events. From the Calendar Events page you can copy, delete, or change the status of an event, or open the Create Event page to create or modify an event. Description The content area of the Calendar Events page displays the following sections: Filter By - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Summary - Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Calendar Events page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. About the Calendar Events Page Access the Create Calendar Event Page Access the Edit Calendar Event Page Change the Status of an Event      Copy an Event Delete an Event Filter the Calendar Events Summary View or Print Calendar Event Detail Change the Status of an Event Copy an Event Delete an Event Filter the Calendar Events Summary Open the Create Calendar Event Page Open the Edit Calendar Event Page View or Print Calendar Event Detail View the Calendar Events Summary   Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Calendar Events page. Create or Edit a Calendar Event Workflow Page Preview

Complete the Co-Buyer section when financial or legal liability for the vehicle is vested in more than one person. For example: A father co-signs a loan for his daughter. To  complete the optional Co-Buyer section of an RDR: From the Title drop-down list, select a title. Enter or update the co-buyer name, address, and contact information. Note : Type all 9s in the Daytime or Evening field if the buyer does not have a phone. In the Email field, type the co-buyer email address. Note : Type three asterisks (*) if the co-buyer does not have an email address. Click the  Save  button to save your changes, or click the  Cancel  button to close without saving. A   will display for any missing or incorrect data. Correct all errors before submitting the RDR. Note : f you are ready to submit the RDR, click here for more information.

View Overview Information   Parts Locator Page Overview Perform Tasks Locate a Part Look Up a Part from the Parts Locator Page Perform Common DBS Tasks

Note : This task applies only to internal users who have permissions for both the Nissan and Infiniti business hierarchies. Changing the brand changes the business hierarchy, and may result in a change of user permissions. To change the brand: From the  Change Brand drop-down list, select the desired brand. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Continue button to change the brand.

To reject multiple SVC (service campaign) orders: Select the check box next to each campaign order you want to reject. Click the Reject Selected button. In the rejection message area, type the reason why you are rejecting these campaign orders. Click the Yes button to cancel the selected orders. Note : To close the message and return to the SVC Order Management page, click the No button.

To create or modify a study: Complete or edit the Basic Information section for the study. Complete or edit the  Study Type section. Complete or edit the Dealer Data section. As applicable, complete or edit additional sections for the study. Click the Save button. Click the Close button. Use the links in the Early Detection System pane on the left side of the page to jump to specific sections. You can save the study after completing any section.

To create or edit a standard operation category:  In the Standard Op Category field, type or edit the name of the category. In the Standard Op Category Description field, type or edit the description of the category. In the Key Words field, type a key word. Click the Add icon, or click the Clear Fields icon to clear the field without adding the key word to the category. Edit or delete any existing key words, as needed. When all changes are made to the category, click the Save button.

To access OMS  to view OMS vehicle detail: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the OMS Vehicle Detail option. Note : The OMS Vehicle Detail option is only available to users who have access to the OMS application. If you have OMS access, click the OMS Vehicle Detail option to open the external OMS application. Follow the procedures within the OMS application to complete the view OMS vehicle detail task.

View Service Campaign Order Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, approving, or rejecting a Service Campaign (SVC) order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View Service Campaign Order Workflow. Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow Manage Campaign Parts Workflow

To add comments to an SVC (service campaign) order: Select the SVC order to which you want to add comments. Move your cursor over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Create Comments option. In the area provided, type your desired comments. Click the Save button to save your comments. Note : To close the Create Comments window without saving your comments, click the Cancel button.

To print RDR detail: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. Note : RDR Detail is only available for vehicles with a status of "Retailed". From the Action menu, select the Print RDR Detail option. Note : The RDR Detail Report opens in a separate window. View the report. To print the report, click the Print button and follow the prompts as you normally do to print a file. Note : To close the window without printing, click the Close button. Inventory updates occur every 30 minutes. Vehicles with a status of "Retailed" status will be moved to the RDR History screen.

To print RDR detail: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. Note : RDR Detail is only available for vehicles with a status of "Retailed". From the Action menu, select the Print RDR Detail option. Note : The RDR Detail Report opens in a separate window. View the report. To print the report, click the Print button and follow the prompts as you normally do to print a file. Note : To close the window without printing, click the Close button. Inventory updates occur every 30 minutes. Vehicles with a status of "Retailed" status will be moved to the RDR History screen.

You can add a new claim line to a repair order from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page, Quick Entry Warranty Claim page, Express Entry Warranty Claim page, or View Warranty Claim page. To add a new claim line to a repair order:  At the bottom of the page, click the New Claim Line button. In the Line Number field, type the appropriate RO line number. Complete the following sections of the claim. Click the links below for instructions on how to complete/view these sections. Claim Information Parts Operations Expenses Comments Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : You can save a warranty claim with warnings and error messages. Note : DBS updates the claim status when you save the claim. You can add a new claim line to an RO regardless of the status of a claim. You can add a new claim line to an RO regardless of the status of a claim.

To  recover an IASR transaction: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Recover option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes button to recover the IASR transaction.

View Overview Information   Monitor Interface Page Overview Perform Tasks Perform Common  DBS Tasks Search for and Monitor Transactions on the Monitor Interface Page

To view detail from the View RFC Detail page: Review the list of parts for the selected RFC claim. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. To  view a description of the reason code or reject code, move your mouse pointer over the code. To return to the Request For Credit (RFC) Status page, click the Close button.

This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. DBS maintains repair order information for the vehicle models available during the current model year and five previous model years (ten previous model years for Infiniti), beginning from the 2011 model year for both divisions. If desired, you can select one or more models to limit the study results. To complete the Model/Series section of a study: Select each model/series which should be included in the study, and then use the center buttons as necessary to customize the Selected Model/Series list. When you have selected all desired model years, click the Save button.

RDR Vehicle Page Overview Purpose Use the RDR Vehicle page to create, edit, submit, or delete the sale of a vehicle. Description The content area of the RDR Vehicle page displays the following sections: Summary - Displays the status of the RDR Vehicle - Displays information about the vehicle Buyer  - Displays information about the person buying the vehicle Co-Buyer - Displays information about another individual such as a spouse or parent who may be legally or financially responsible for purchasing the vehicle in addition to buyer. Driver - Displays information about the primary driver of the vehicle. Legal Owner - In cases where a co-buyer or driver are listed, the legal owner section displays information about the registered owner of the vehicle (the person who retains the vehicle title). Finance - Displays information about the method of financing the vehicle Note : Complete the Finance section for lease sales only You can perform the following tasks on the RDR Vehicle page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks About RDR: What You Need to Know Access OMS to View Vehicle Detail Access the RDR Vehicle Page from Vehicle Inventory Delete an RDR Report or Edit the Sale of a Vehicle Complete the Vehicle Section of an RDR Complete the Buyer Section of an RDR Complete the Co-Buyer Section of an RDR Complete the Driver Section of an RDR Complete the Legal Owner Section of an RDR Complete the Finance Section of an RDR Submit an RDR Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Retail Delivery Reporting page. Report the Sale of a Vehicle Workflow

DEA0F29C-F860-4120-B35A-4A5B9C183F94\DCS RDR ICV Quick Reference Guide Infiniti v2.pdf

To access the Inventory Search page from the Vehicle Inventory page: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the Vehicle Search option. Note : The Inventory Search page appears. You can also open the Inventory Search page from the Sales menu.

10/22/2015: Title changed due to qc 10846 - NNA Infiniti can no longer create parts returns. To  look up a part from the Edit Parts Return page: At the end of the Part Number field, click the Lookup icon. In the fields provided, type full or partial information. Click the  Search  icon. Select the desired part. To determine if the part is superseded, scroll down in the Part Detail section. If the part is superseded, copy the value in the New Part field, paste it into the Part Number field, and repeat steps 3-5. To select the part, click the Select button. When searching for partial information, use an asterisk to perform a wildcard search. If a "Y" appears in the Supersession Flag field, you must search for and select a different part.

View Overview Information   Sold with Open Campaign Page Overview Perform Tasks Export the Sold with Open Campaign Report Page Filter Information on the Sold with Open Campaign Report Page Perform Common DBS Tasks

To view campaign information for a vehicle: If desired, to view only those vehicles with campaign inventory, from the Filter By drop-down list, select the "Open Campaign" option. Vehicles with open campaigns that have not yet been repaired appear as bold red text. Move your cursor over the serial number hyperlink to view the campaign information associated with the vehicle. Vehicles with open campaigns that have been repaired appear as bold black text.

Edit Parts Return Workflow  Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for modifying a parts return. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Parts Return Workflow. Create Parts Return Workflow Manage Parts Return Workflow

To display the warranty claims graph: Review the warranty claims graph. To minimize the warranty claims graph, click the  Minus Sign ( - ) at the top-left of the graph. To expand the display, click the Plus Sign ( +) . The radio button under each bar in the graph identifies the category by claim status and displays the number of claims in that category. Click the desired radio button to filter the summary display to show only those claims with the selected status. To view additional details about a claim status, move your mouse pointer over the bar for that claim status. Note : The additional details include the number of claims, total dollar amount of claims, and average dollar amount per claim for the selected status type.

To  edit a detail line on an order: Select the detail line you want to modify. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. To change the part number, type a valid part number or perform a part look up.   Note : Click here for more information on how to look up a part. To change the order quantity, type a valid quantity. To override the back order header setting for this part, select the "Yes" option. To override the cross ship header setting this part, select the "Yes" option. Enter the customer name, as needed. To change the bin location for this part, type the location. Select the detail line again. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Save option. Click the Save button. To modify a parts order, the order must be in "New" or "Open" status.

Developer Notes for Fields Buttons and Links topic: Populate the tables below with the descriptions we receive from the application team. If the content is the same for both brands, use the tables below and delete the Nissan and Infiniti-specific tables. If content differs, copy the tables and paste into the Nissan and Infiniti tables, and then delete the original tables.Create or use variables for any description used on one or more pages. Do not repeat the name of the item at the beginning of the description. For example, for a Submit button, don't start the description with "The Submit button submits...," but start with "Submits..." instead. Include formatting where appropriate (such as use MM/DD/YYYY format for a date field). Within each table, list the entries in alphabetical order. Delete any tables that aren't needed. For example, if an application page doesn't have any links, delete the table of links.

Replaced graphic Host Reports Page Overview Purpose Use the Host Reports page to search for and view reports generated within the Nissan North America (NNA) Host environment. Use the Host Reports page to search for and view reports generated within the Nissan Canada (NCI) Host environment. Description The content area of the Host Reports page displays the following sections: Favorites - Contains a list of reports you have identified as favorites for quick access  Filters - Enables you to define the criteria to filter and search for reports Generation - Enables you to view and print host reports. The Favorites and Reports areas each have their own generation area. Reports - Contains a list of all reports that meet the search criteria Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Host Reports page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. About Host Reports: What You Need to Know Add a Host Report to the Favorites List Filter and Search for a Host Report Print a Host Report Print Overnight Reports Remove a Host Report from the Favorites List View a Host Report About Host Reports: What You Need to Know Add a Host Report to the Favorites List Filter and Search for a Host Report Print a Host Report Print Overnight Reports Remove a Host Report from the Favorites List View a Host Report Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Host Reports page. View a Host Report Workflow Page Preview

Replaced graphic Host Reports Page Overview Purpose Use the Host Reports page to search for and view reports generated within the Nissan North America (NNA) Host environment. Use the Host Reports page to search for and view reports generated within the Nissan Canada (NCI) Host environment. Description The content area of the Host Reports page displays the following sections: Favorites - Contains a list of reports you have identified as favorites for quick access  Filters - Enables you to define the criteria to filter and search for reports Generation - Enables you to view and print host reports. The Favorites and Reports areas each have their own generation area. Reports - Contains a list of all reports that meet the search criteria Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Host Reports page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. About Host Reports: What You Need to Know Add a Host Report to the Favorites List Filter and Search for a Host Report Print a Host Report Print Overnight Reports Remove a Host Report from the Favorites List View a Host Report About Host Reports: What You Need to Know Add a Host Report to the Favorites List Filter and Search for a Host Report Print a Host Report Print Overnight Reports Remove a Host Report from the Favorites List View a Host Report Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Host Reports page. View a Host Report Workflow Page Preview

Replaced graphic Host Reports Page Overview Purpose Use the Host Reports page to search for and view reports generated within the Nissan North America (NNA) Host environment. Use the Host Reports page to search for and view reports generated within the Nissan Canada (NCI) Host environment. Description The content area of the Host Reports page displays the following sections: Favorites - Contains a list of reports you have identified as favorites for quick access  Filters - Enables you to define the criteria to filter and search for reports Generation - Enables you to view and print host reports. The Favorites and Reports areas each have their own generation area. Reports - Contains a list of all reports that meet the search criteria Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Host Reports page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. About Host Reports: What You Need to Know Add a Host Report to the Favorites List Filter and Search for a Host Report Print a Host Report Print Overnight Reports Remove a Host Report from the Favorites List View a Host Report About Host Reports: What You Need to Know Add a Host Report to the Favorites List Filter and Search for a Host Report Print a Host Report Print Overnight Reports Remove a Host Report from the Favorites List View a Host Report Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Host Reports page. View a Host Report Workflow Page Preview

Replaced graphic Host Reports Page Overview Purpose Use the Host Reports page to search for and view reports generated within the Nissan North America (NNA) Host environment. Use the Host Reports page to search for and view reports generated within the Nissan Canada (NCI) Host environment. Description The content area of the Host Reports page displays the following sections: Favorites - Contains a list of reports you have identified as favorites for quick access  Filters - Enables you to define the criteria to filter and search for reports Generation - Enables you to view and print host reports. The Favorites and Reports areas each have their own generation area. Reports - Contains a list of all reports that meet the search criteria Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Host Reports page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. About Host Reports: What You Need to Know Add a Host Report to the Favorites List Filter and Search for a Host Report Print a Host Report Print Overnight Reports Remove a Host Report from the Favorites List View a Host Report About Host Reports: What You Need to Know Add a Host Report to the Favorites List Filter and Search for a Host Report Print a Host Report Print Overnight Reports Remove a Host Report from the Favorites List View a Host Report Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Host Reports page. View a Host Report Workflow Page Preview

Replaced graphic Host Reports Page Overview Purpose Use the Host Reports page to search for and view reports generated within the Nissan North America (NNA) Host environment. Use the Host Reports page to search for and view reports generated within the Nissan Canada (NCI) Host environment. Description The content area of the Host Reports page displays the following sections: Favorites - Contains a list of reports you have identified as favorites for quick access  Filters - Enables you to define the criteria to filter and search for reports Generation - Enables you to view and print host reports. The Favorites and Reports areas each have their own generation area. Reports - Contains a list of all reports that meet the search criteria Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Host Reports page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. About Host Reports: What You Need to Know Add a Host Report to the Favorites List Filter and Search for a Host Report Print a Host Report Print Overnight Reports Remove a Host Report from the Favorites List View a Host Report About Host Reports: What You Need to Know Add a Host Report to the Favorites List Filter and Search for a Host Report Print a Host Report Print Overnight Reports Remove a Host Report from the Favorites List View a Host Report Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Host Reports page. View a Host Report Workflow Page Preview

To  print parts return detail: Select the parts return. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Print Detail option. Note : The File Download dialog appears. Click the Open  button. Note : A PDF file opens. From the toolbar, click the Printer icon to print the report.

Manage Part Return Schedule Page Overview Purpose Use the Manage Part Return Schedule page to view and update the date by which parts on a return must be returned. NNA internal users may update the parts return by date for one or more dealers, view the accrual adjustment history for a dealer, change a parts return rollover rate Description The content area of the Manage Part Return Schedule page displays the following sections: Filter -  Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Dealer List -  Lists the dealers and their current parts return by date. Return Schedule -  Lists the prior and currently scheduled returns for the selected dealer and return year. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Manage Part Return Schedule page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Adjust the Accrual Amount for a Parts Return Change the Due Date for a Single Parts Return Change the Infiniti Rollover Rate Change the Parts Return Schedule for Multiple Dealers Filter the Manage Part Return Schedule Page Manage Parts Return Cancellation Reasons Manage Parts Return Schedule Adjustment Reasons View the Accrual Adjustment History for a Dealer Page Preview

To  export Parts Order Management information: Click the Export button. Select the Microsoft ®  Excel ®  output format. Note : The File Download dialog appears. Click the Save button and save the file to your local drive. If you filter the page before exporting, only those records that meet the filter criteria export. You can filter, sort, and print the data if you export the information to Microsoft ®  Excel ® .

Quick Entry RDR Page Overview Purpose Use the Quick Entry RDR page to create, edit, submit, or delete an RDR (sale) record for a vehicle. The Quick Entry RDR page differs from the standard RDR entry page in that it allows you to quickly select a vehicle from your inventory by stock number or serial number, complete the sale information, and then submit the RDR. Once the RDR is submitted, you remain on the Quick Entry RDR page so you can RDR another vehicle, if desired. You can also RDR a vehicle that is not yet in your inventory due to a dealer trade performed in OMS (as inventory updates only occur every 30 minutes). Description The content area of the Quick Entry RDR Vehicle page displays the following sections:: Filter By - Provides filter criteria to search for a vehicle Summary - Display the status of the RDR Vehicle - Displays information about the vehicle Customer - Displays information about the customer You can perform the following tasks on the Quick Entry RDR page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Delete an RDR Complete the Vehicle Section of an RDR Complete the Customer Section of an RDR Complete the Finance Section of an RDR Submit an RDR RDR a Vehicle Using Quick Entry RDR RDR a Vehicle Not in Your Inventory Using Quick Entry RDR Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Retail Delivery Reporting page. Report the Sale of a Vehicle Workflow

Parts Return Management Page Overview Purpose Use the Parts Return Management page to view and manage parts returns in the Dealer Business System (DBS) . Access the Parts Return Management Page by clicking the Parts Return Management link from the Parts menu. Description The content area of the Parts Return Management page displays the following sections: Filter by  - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Parts Return header  - Displays the parts return schedule due date, annual return allowance amount, and remaining accessory amount Page Navigation - Allows you to navigate from page to page, if multiple pages exist Summary list - Displays general information for all returns on the page, and any error or warning flags, if applicable Parts Return Detail - Displays specific information for a selected record Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Parts Return Management page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Access the Returns and Accrual Information Page Change Warning Message Configuration (Internal Users Only) Approve a Submitted Parts Return (Internal Users Only) Delete a Parts Return Export Parts Return Management Information Filter Parts Return Management Summary Open a Submitted Parts Return Open the Edit Parts Return Page Preview a Parts Return Print Parts Return Detail Reject a Submitted Parts Return (Internal Users Only) Request Cancellation a Parts Return Submit a Parts Return View Parts Return Management Summary and Detail Access Reports Delete a Parts Return Export Parts Return Management Information Filter Parts Return Management Summary Open a Submitted Parts Return Open the Edit Parts Return Page Perform Common DBS Tasks Print Parts Return Detail Submit a Parts Return View Parts Return Management Summary and Detail Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Parts Return Management page. Manage Parts Return Workflow Page Preview

To add multiple parts to a return: Click the Add Multi button. In the Part Number field, type a part number. If necessary, in the Return Quantity field, update the quantity of the part entered which will be returned. Note : By default, the return quantity is one part (or one unit of parts, if applicable). Select the Pack checkbox for each part which has already been packed for return. Click the Add All button. Note : DBS adds the parts to the parts return and displays error or warning messages as necessary.

One Dealer Study Result Page Overview Purpose Use the One Dealer Study Result page to view all repair orders (ROs) and vehicle information related to a selected dealer's studies. Note : This page is available to internal users only. Description The content area of the One Dealer Study Result page displays the following sections: Component Navigation -  Allows you to select the type of study by component group to display Filter By -  Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria. This section also includes the dealer's address and phone number. Hold Status -  Allows you to narrow your results by either "Confirmed" or "Requested" vehicle hold status. Results -  Allows you to view the results of the selected criteria Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the One Dealer Study Result page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Export Dealer Study Results Information Filter Dealer Study Results Release a Vehicle from Dealer Hold Remove a Repair Order Job Line from a Study View Dealer Study Results View NSH for a Vehicle in a Study View Repair Order for Vehicle in a Study Export Dealer Study Results Information Filter Dealer Study Results Release a Vehicle from Dealer Hold Remove a Repair Order Job Line from a Study View Dealer Study Results View NSH for a Vehicle in a Study View Repair Order for Vehicle in a Study Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the One Dealer Study Result page. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow Page Preview

Notifications Page Overview The Notifications function is currently disabled per Nissan request. You can create and edit notifications, but they will not be sent unless the functionality is restored. Purpose Use the Notifications page to review the list of notifications you have the authority to act upon based on your user profile and security settings. The list of notifications you see includes those you created and any notifications created by those for which you have surrogate authority. Notifications are email or text messages. Description The content area of the Notifications page displays the following sections: Filter By - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Summary   -  Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Notifications page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Change the Status of a Notification Copy a Notification Delete a Notification Filter the Notification Summary Open the Create Notification Page Open the Edit Notification Page Resend a Notification View or Print Notification Detail View Notification Summary Change the Status of a Notification Copy a Notification Delete a Notification Filter the Notifications Summary Open the Create Notification Page Open the Edit Notification Page Resend a Notification View or Print Notification Detail View Notifications Summary   Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Notifications page. Create or Edit a Notification Workflow Page Preview

To  access the privacy policy from any DBS  application page: Click the Privacy Policy link.

To access the Create Warranty Claim page: Click the  New button. Note : The Edit/Create Warranty Claim page opens. Complete each section of the warranty claim. Click the links below for instructions on how to complete/view these sections: Summary Claim Information Parts Operations Expenses Comments Customer Claim Activity  (View Only) Claim History  (View Only) Click the Save button to save your changes. Note : You can save a warranty claim with warnings and error messages, and update the claim at a later time. Click the Validate button to validate As desired, click the Submit button to submit the claim.

To view repair order (RO) information for a vehicle in a study: In the RO column, click the repair order number link. Note : You may have to scroll to the right to view the RO column. View the RO details. Note : To print the RO, click the Print button. To close, click the Close button. In DBS , you can view repair order (RO) information in multiple ways.

To edit a summary page display configuration: Select the page definition you want to edit. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Edit option. Note : The definition is now editable. If desired, from the Available Fields list, select one or more field titles, and then click the Move button.  If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If desired, in the Sortable Fields list, select one or more field titles, and then click the Move button.  If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If necessary, select a sorting rule for each field. Click the  Save button. Click Close .

To edit a summary page display configuration: Select the page definition you want to edit. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Edit option. Note : The definition is now editable. If desired, from the Available Fields list, select one or more field titles, and then click the Move button.  If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If desired, in the Sortable Fields list, select one or more field titles, and then click the Move button.  If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If necessary, select a sorting rule for each field. Click the  Save button. Click Close .

To edit a summary page display configuration: Select the page definition you want to edit. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Edit option. Note : The definition is now editable. If desired, from the Available Fields list, select one or more field titles, and then click the Move button.  If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If desired, in the Sortable Fields list, select one or more field titles, and then click the Move button.  If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If necessary, select a sorting rule for each field. Click the  Save button. Click Close .

To edit a summary page display configuration: Select the page definition you want to edit. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Edit option. Note : The definition is now editable. If desired, from the Available Fields list, select one or more field titles, and then click the Move button.  If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If desired, in the Sortable Fields list, select one or more field titles, and then click the Move button.  If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If necessary, select a sorting rule for each field. Click the  Save button. Click Close .

To edit a summary page display configuration: Select the page definition you want to edit. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Edit option. Note : The definition is now editable. If desired, from the Available Fields list, select one or more field titles, and then click the Move button.  If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If desired, in the Sortable Fields list, select one or more field titles, and then click the Move button.  If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If necessary, select a sorting rule for each field. Click the  Save button. Click Close .

To edit a summary page display configuration: Select the page definition you want to edit. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Edit option. Note : The definition is now editable. If desired, from the Available Fields list, select one or more field titles, and then click the Move button.  If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If desired, in the Sortable Fields list, select one or more field titles, and then click the Move button.  If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If necessary, select a sorting rule for each field. Click the  Save button. Click Close .

To edit a summary page display configuration: Select the page definition you want to edit. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Edit option. Note : The definition is now editable. If desired, from the Available Fields list, select one or more field titles, and then click the Move button.  If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If desired, in the Sortable Fields list, select one or more field titles, and then click the Move button.  If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If necessary, select a sorting rule for each field. Click the  Save button. Click Close .

View Overview Information   Activate/Deactivate Page Overview Perform Tasks Activate or Deactivate Tracing Change the Logging Level Perform Common DBS Tasks Activate or Deactivate Tracing Change the Logging Level Perform Common DBS Tasks

View Parts Return Page Overview Purpose Use the View Parts Return page to view a submitted parts return, that is, a parts return that is not in "Open" or "New" status. You can view a parts return from the Parts Return Management page. You must first search for and locate the desired parts return that you want to view. Use the Action menu to open the View Parts Return page. Description The content area of the View Parts Return page displays the following sections: View Parts Return header - Contains general information about the parts return, including the type of return and the dealer return reference number Parts Return Detail  - Contains specific information about the parts in the return, such as part number, returned quantity, part description Close Button - Allows you to close the page Note : Depending on the type of return, you may see different fields and information. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the View Parts Return page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. View a Submitted Parts Return View a Submitted Parts Return Page Preview

To  add a campaign part: In the Part Number field, enter the part number. Note : If you do not know the part number, click the  Part# Lookup button. Click here for more information on how to look up a part. Click the Add button. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm.

View Overview Information   Campaign Master Table Page Overview Perform Tasks Edit the Campaign Master Information for a Campaign Export Campaign Master Table Information Perform Common DBS Tasks Search for Campaign Master Table Information

View Parts Metrics Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing parts metrics. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View Parts Metrics Workflow. Manage Custom Search Group Workflow

View Overview Information Submit Financial Statements Page Overview View Financial Statements Status Workflow Perform Tasks View Processing Results Perform Common DBS Tasks Submit Financial Statement for Processing View Financial Statements Submission Status View Submission Status on the Business Management Website

To search for a customer or vehicle: In the Customer Search panel, type or select the desired search criteria. Note : Use one of the following combinations for the search criteria: Last 8 characters of the VIN or Full VIN number. Phone number (home, work, or cellular) Note : All cars associated with the phone number appear in the search results. Email address To execute the search, press the Enter key on your keyboard or click the Search icon. Note : The search results appear to the right of the Customer Search panel. Click the desired VIN link to see details about the vehicle. Note : Details for the corresponding vehicle appear in the same page in a series of NSH panels, replacing the prior list of search results. To remove the search criteria from the Customer Search panel, click the Clear icon.

View IASR Page Overview (Internal user only) Purpose Use the View IASR page to determine if a dealer's IASR file was not generated or sent successfully. From this page you can also manually recover an IASR transaction.  Description The content area of the View IASR page displays the following sections: Filter by - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Page navigation bar  - Allows you to navigate from page to page, if multiple pages exist   View IASR summary  - Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the xx page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Create IASR Transaction Filter the View IASR Page View IASR Summary Page Preview

The Notifications function is currently disabled per Nissan request. You can create and edit notifications, but they will not be sent unless the functionality is restored. To create or edit a notification: Select a notification method from the Notification Method drop-down list. Note : After you select a notification method, the appropriate fields appear on the page. If the item does not require approval, clear the Require Approval? checkbox. Enter header information for your email or SMS notification in the Title , Scheduled Date , and Scheduled Time fields. For email notifications, type a subject. In the text area, type the content for either your email or SMS notification. To attach a document to an email notification, click the Choose Attachments button. Note : To remove attached documents from an email, click the  Clear Uploaded Attachments  button. Select recipients for the announcement. Note : Click here for more information on selecting recipients. Click the  Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm, or click the  No  button to close the window without confirming. You can attach a maximum of 3 documents to an email message. The file format of an attachment must be one of the following: Microsoft ® Word ®  (.doc), Microsoft ® Excel ®  (.xls), or Adobe ® Reader ® (.pdf). For SMS notifications, a counter displays that indicates the number of remaining characters that you can enter in the text field. There is no character limit for text in email messages. SMS notifications are commonly called text messages that are sent and received from mobile devices. Notifications cannot contain videos, images, or audio.

To view a repair order from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page: At the bottom of the page, click the  RO button. Note : The Repair Order Information window opens. Click the  Print button to print the RO, or click the  Close button to return to the previous screen.  

Edit Position Permissions Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for editing position permissions. Related Workflows The following workflow may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Position Permissions Workflow. View Position Permissions Workflow

View Overview Information Home Page Overview Perform Tasks Emulate a Dealership or User Perform Common  DBS Tasks View Alerts View Announcements and Other News Perform Tasks Emulate a Dealership or User Perform Common  DBS Tasks View Alerts View Announcements and Other News

Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for copying, transferring, or deleting a report definition in Report Writer. The diagram also illustrates the workflow for changing a report definition to public or private. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow

Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for copying, transferring, or deleting a report definition in Report Writer. The diagram also illustrates the workflow for changing a report definition to public or private. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow

Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for copying, transferring, or deleting a report definition in Report Writer. The diagram also illustrates the workflow for changing a report definition to public or private. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow

Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for copying, transferring, or deleting a report definition in Report Writer. The diagram also illustrates the workflow for changing a report definition to public or private. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow

Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for copying, transferring, or deleting a report definition in Report Writer. The diagram also illustrates the workflow for changing a report definition to public or private. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow

Maintain Purge Rules Page Overview Purpose Use the Maintain Purge Rules page to change the number of days or months to keep data before removing it from the  Dealer Business System (DBS) . Description The content area of the Maintain Purge Rules page displays the following sections: Description - Provides an explanation of the page and allows you to save changes Data to Purge - Displays each data type and allows you to enter the number of days, or in some cases months, to keep each data type before removing it from DBS Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Configure Purge Rules page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Maintain Purge Rules Maintain Purge Rules Page Preview

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To  access the Generate Report page: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the  Action menu, select the  Schedule option. Note : The Generating page appears.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To  access the Generate Report page: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the  Action menu, select the  Schedule option. Note : The Generating page appears.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To  access the Generate Report page: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the  Action menu, select the  Schedule option. Note : The Generating page appears.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To  access the Generate Report page: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the  Action menu, select the  Schedule option. Note : The Generating page appears.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To  access the Generate Report page: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the  Action menu, select the  Schedule option. Note : The Generating page appears.

To  contact the DBS  help desk by live chat: Click the DBS  Live Chat button. If you are inquiring about a previous case, type the ticket number in the space provided. Type your question in the text box. Click the Send button to send your message, or click the  Reset button to close the DBS  Live Chat window without sending your message. Note : A customer service representative will respond to your inquiry as soon as possible. Do not close the chat window until your conversation is complete. Click the Close button when your conversation is complete.

Submit Financial Statements Page Overview Purpose You can use the Submit Financial Statements page to view the submission status of a dealer's financial statements, link to the corporate financial management system, and print the Financial Statement Status page. Description The content area of the Financial Statements page displays the following sections: Page Navigation Bar - Allows you to navigate from page to page, if multiple pages exist Financial Statements - Allows you to view the submission status of the dealer's financial statements. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Submit Financial Statements page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Submit Financial Statement for Processing View Financial Statements Submission Status View Processing Results View Submission Status on the Business Management Website   Workflows On the Submit Financial Statements page, you can perform one or more tasks in the following workflows. View Financial Statement Status Workflow Page Preview

To export campaign report information: Note : If you filter the page to display a sub-set of the available data, only those records in the Vehicle Campaign List are exported. Click the Export button. Follow your browser-specific instructions to open or save the campaignReport.xlsx file.

To export information from the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report page: If desired, select filter criteria to limit the results displayed. Click the checkbox to accept the usage agreement, then click the Search button to display those results which match the filter criteria you selected. Search for specific information, sort or filter the results, apply row edits, or re-arrange the order of the columns as desired. Click the Excel icon to export the displayed information in Microsoft ®  Excel ®  format. Follow your browser-specific instructions to open, save, or print the Excel file.

To change the status of an alert: Select an alert. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Change Status  option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Save button to confirm, or click the  Cancel button to close the window without confirming. If the alert status is "Approved", changing the status updates the alert status to "Needs Approval." If the alert status is "Needs Approval", changing the status updates the alert status to "Approved." An alert will not display until it is in an approved status AND the scheduled time has passed. You cannot change the status of a published communication item. You must delete the item if you want to remove it from display.

View Overview Information   Create or Edit Standard Operation Category Page Overview  Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Perform Tasks Add a Key Word Create or Edit a Standard Operation Category Delete a Key Word Delete a Standard Operation Category Edit a Key Word Open the Create Standard Operation Category Page Open the Edit Standard Operation Category Page Perform Common DBS Tasks Search the Standard Operation Category Summary View the Standard Operation Category Summary and Detail Add a Key Word Create or Edit a Standard Operation Category Delete a Key Word Delete a Standard Operation Category Edit a Key Word Open the Create Standard Operation Category Page Open the Edit Standard Operation Category Page Perform Common DBS Tasks Search the Standard Operation Category Summary View the Standard Operation Category Summary and Detail

To change the text display size: Click one of the  AAA buttons. For the smallest text size, click the small A button. For the medium (default) text size, click the middle A button. For the largest text size, click the large A button. Text is only resized in the area below the AAA buttons. The  DBS banner across the top and the menus are not resized.  Increasing the font size may cause the text to display outside the viewing area. If that happens, horizontal and vertical scroll bars display so you can scroll to view the text.

To complete the Summary section of a claim on either the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page or Quick Entry Warranty Claim page: Either enter information in the following fields or verify the data populated by DBS : Repair Order , Line Number , and VIN . If you are entering the information, you must complete the VIN field first. For the Line Number field, make sure you enter either a one-digit or two-digit line number. Note : These fields are automatically filled in by DBS after you use the Search section to look up the repair order (RO) and line number for the claim. In the Odometer field, type the odometer reading if the number was not automatically filled in from the RO. Note : This can be in miles or kilometers, based on the country in which the vehicle is licensed. Note: If you enter an odometer reading that is less than the previous odometer reading, DBS displays an Odometer Confirmation window. You can either keep the number you entered or type a new number. The Claim Total is initially populated with data from the RO. As you add data to the page, you can manually refresh this total at any time by clicking the Refresh Claim Total link. To save the information, click the Save button. If you are creating a new warranty claim, all fields except the VIN field are dimmed and unavailable. There is a one-to many relationship between a repair order and warranty claims. That is, one RO can have multiple warranty claims.

To complete the Summary section of a claim on either the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page or Quick Entry Warranty Claim page: Either enter information in the following fields or verify the data populated by DBS : Repair Order , Line Number , and VIN . If you are entering the information, you must complete the VIN field first. For the Line Number field, make sure you enter either a one-digit or two-digit line number. Note : These fields are automatically filled in by DBS after you use the Search section to look up the repair order (RO) and line number for the claim. In the Odometer field, type the odometer reading if the number was not automatically filled in from the RO. Note : This can be in miles or kilometers, based on the country in which the vehicle is licensed. Note: If you enter an odometer reading that is less than the previous odometer reading, DBS displays an Odometer Confirmation window. You can either keep the number you entered or type a new number. The Claim Total is initially populated with data from the RO. As you add data to the page, you can manually refresh this total at any time by clicking the Refresh Claim Total link. To save the information, click the Save button. If you are creating a new warranty claim, all fields except the VIN field are dimmed and unavailable. There is a one-to many relationship between a repair order and warranty claims. That is, one RO can have multiple warranty claims.

View Overview Information Parts Return Summary Page Overview Perform Tasks Approve a Parts Return on the Parts Return Summary Page Approve All Returns on the Parts Return Summary Page Export Information on the Parts Return Summary Page Filter the Parts Return Summary Page Perform Common DBS Tasks Reject a Parts Return on the Parts Return Summary Page Reject all Returns on the Parts Return Summary Page Search for Information on the Parts Return Summary Page View Parts Return Details from the Parts Return Summary Page View the Parts Return Summary Graph

Quick Entry Warranty Claim Page Overview Purpose Use the Quick Entry Warranty Claim page to edit or create repair order (RO) information in a warranty claim. The page is designed for you to be able to work on one RO after another without needing to start from the Manage Warranty Claim page. From this Quick Entry Warranty Claim page, you can also validate or submit a warranty claim, including the ability to validate claims in batches through the Batch Validate button. The batch validation process runs in the background so you can continue to edit or create RO information. This saves time and improves efficiency. Description The content area of the Quick Entry Warranty Claim page displays the following sections: Search -  Allows you to search for an RO by the repair order number and line number. Quick Jump Menu -  The Quick Jump menu allows you to jump from section to section without scrolling. The number next to the section name is the number of warnings or errors in that section. Summary -  Displays warranty claim data and claims summary data, such as the RO number, VIN, odometer, and requested claim amounts. Also displays the determined and adjusted amounts if the warranty claim has been processed. Claims Detail Data -  Displays sections of detailed data on the warranty claim, parts, operations, expenses, comments, customer, claim activity, and history. Alerts -  Displays error or warning messages at the bottom of the claim detail data sections. Action Buttons -  Buttons at the lower-right of the screen, including: RO, NSH, New Claim Line, Delete, Close, Save, Validate, Batch Validate and Submit. Tasks You can perform the following tasks from or on the Quick Entry Warranty Claim page. All of these tasks except Batch Validate have the same functionality as the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Batch Validate Complete the Summary Section of a Claim Complete the Claim Information Section Complete the Parts Section of a Claim Look Up Part Complete the Operations Section of a Claim Look Up Op Code   Complete the Expenses Section of a Claim Complete the Comments Section of a Claim Complete the Customer Section of a Claim View the Claim Activity Section of a Claim View the History Section of a Claim Print Warranty Claim Submit Warranty Claim Use the Quick Jump Menu Validate Warranty Claim View Dealer Claim Administration Limits View NSH View Repair Order Batch Validate Complete the Summary Section of a Claim Complete the Claim Information Section Complete the Parts Section of a Claim Look Up Part Complete the Operations Section of a Claim Look Up Op Code   Complete the Expenses Section of a Claim Complete the Comments Section of a Claim Complete the Customer Section of a Claim View the Claim Activity Section of a Claim View the History Section of a Claim Print Warranty Claim Submit Warranty Claim Use the Quick Jump Menu Validate Warranty Claim View NSH View Repair Order   Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Quick Entry Warranty Claim page.  Edit or Create a Warranty Claim Workflow Page Preview

To view the National Service History (NSH) for a vehicle on the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report page: In the VIN column, click the VIN number hyperlink. Note : NSH details are not available for all vehicles. The NSH details display in a new window. Close the window when you have finished reviewing the content.

View Overview Information   Site Map Search Results Page Overview Perform Tasks Open an Application Page Perform Common DBS Tasks Open an Application Page Perform Common DBS Tasks

Service Introduction   Description The Service application in DBS  provides dealers and corporate users the ability to submit claims for reimbursable warranty work, track open and completed repair orders, view vehicles with open campaigns, and review the status of customer pay reimbursements. The Service application also allows users to view the complete repair history for a vehicle and view technical service information for vehicles being serviced. Note : The items you see in the menu tabs and menu links vary based on your permissions. If you need to request changes to your permissions, please contact your dealership's System Administrator. You can find the System Administrator(s) for you dealership by viewing your profile. For more information, click  here . The Service menu in DBS  help shows content listed by application page. For ease of use, content is organized by application page following the DBS  menu when possible. When you first begin using DBS  and the DBS  help system, we recommend that you review the help system menu and then view the page overview, workflow, and task information for the tasks you will be performing in DBS .

View Overview Information   Edit User Permissions Page Overview Edit User Permissions Workflow Perform Tasks Grant or Remove Access to a Host Report Grant or Remove Access to a Page, Action, Custom Field, or Website Grant or Remove Access to a Report Writer View Grant or Remove Full Access to a Menu and Its Contents Grant Publisher Authorization  (internal user only) Perform Common  DBS Tasks Remove Publisher Authorization View User Permissions Grant or Remove Access to a Host Report Grant or Remove Access to a Page, Action, Custom Field, or Website Grant or Remove Access to a Report Writer View Grant or Remove Full Access to a Menu and Its Contents Grant Publisher Authorization (internal user only) Perform Common  DBS Tasks Remove Publisher Authorization View User Permissions

To  access the View SVC Order page: Select an SVC order. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  View SVC Order  option. Note : The View SVC Order page appears.

To  access reports: Move your mouse pointer over any functional area tab to open the menu. - Or - Click the Reports button on any summary page. Note : You must have permissions to view host reports or use Report Writer.Contact your system administrator to request changes to your permissions if required. To  open Report Writer to view custom defined reports, click the Report Writer link. Note : The Report Writer page appears. Click here for more information.  To  open the Host Reports page, click the Host Reports link. Note : The Host Reports page appears. Click here for more information.

To  access reports: Move your mouse pointer over any functional area tab to open the menu. - Or - Click the Reports button on any summary page. Note : You must have permissions to view host reports or use Report Writer.Contact your system administrator to request changes to your permissions if required. To  open Report Writer to view custom defined reports, click the Report Writer link. Note : The Report Writer page appears. Click here for more information.  To  open the Host Reports page, click the Host Reports link. Note : The Host Reports page appears. Click here for more information.

To  access reports: Move your mouse pointer over any functional area tab to open the menu. - Or - Click the Reports button on any summary page. Note : You must have permissions to view host reports or use Report Writer.Contact your system administrator to request changes to your permissions if required. To  open Report Writer to view custom defined reports, click the Report Writer link. Note : The Report Writer page appears. Click here for more information.  To  open the Host Reports page, click the Host Reports link. Note : The Host Reports page appears. Click here for more information.

To  access reports: Move your mouse pointer over any functional area tab to open the menu. - Or - Click the Reports button on any summary page. Note : You must have permissions to view host reports or use Report Writer.Contact your system administrator to request changes to your permissions if required. To  open Report Writer to view custom defined reports, click the Report Writer link. Note : The Report Writer page appears. Click here for more information.  To  open the Host Reports page, click the Host Reports link. Note : The Host Reports page appears. Click here for more information.

To  access reports: Move your mouse pointer over any functional area tab to open the menu. - Or - Click the Reports button on any summary page. Note : You must have permissions to view host reports or use Report Writer.Contact your system administrator to request changes to your permissions if required. To  open Report Writer to view custom defined reports, click the Report Writer link. Note : The Report Writer page appears. Click here for more information.  To  open the Host Reports page, click the Host Reports link. Note : The Host Reports page appears. Click here for more information.

Report Writer Page Overview Purpose Use the Report Writer page to view a list of your existing custom report definitions, which you can create for your specific needs. The list also includes public report definitions. Using one of the report definitions in your list, you can generate a report.You can also copy, transfer, or modify the definitions in your list or create a new report definition.  Description The content area of the Report Writer page displays the following sections: Filter by  - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria List of Reports  - Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Report Writer page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Change a Report Definition to Public or Private Change User in Report Writer Copy a Report Definition Copy All of a User's Report Definitions Delete a Report Definition Delete All of a User's Report Definitions Filter Report Writer List of Reports Open the Create Report Page Open the Generate Page Open the Modify Report Page Open the Replicate Report Page Open the View Report Page Transfer a Report Definition Transfer All of a User's Report Definitions View the Dealer's List of Reports (Internal Users Only) View a Report Definition View the Reports List Change a Report Definition to Public or Private Change User in Report Writer Copy a Report Definition Copy All of a User's Report Definitions Delete a Report Definition Delete All of a User's Report Definitions Filter Report Writer List of Reports Open the Create Report Page Open the Generate Page Open the Modify Report Page Open the Replicate Report Page Open the View Report Page Transfer a Report Definition Transfer All of a User's Report Definitions View the Dealer's List of Reports (Internal Users Only) View a Report Definition View the Reports List Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Report Writer page. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview

Report Writer Page Overview Purpose Use the Report Writer page to view a list of your existing custom report definitions, which you can create for your specific needs. The list also includes public report definitions. Using one of the report definitions in your list, you can generate a report.You can also copy, transfer, or modify the definitions in your list or create a new report definition.  Description The content area of the Report Writer page displays the following sections: Filter by  - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria List of Reports  - Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Report Writer page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Change a Report Definition to Public or Private Change User in Report Writer Copy a Report Definition Copy All of a User's Report Definitions Delete a Report Definition Delete All of a User's Report Definitions Filter Report Writer List of Reports Open the Create Report Page Open the Generate Page Open the Modify Report Page Open the Replicate Report Page Open the View Report Page Transfer a Report Definition Transfer All of a User's Report Definitions View the Dealer's List of Reports (Internal Users Only) View a Report Definition View the Reports List Change a Report Definition to Public or Private Change User in Report Writer Copy a Report Definition Copy All of a User's Report Definitions Delete a Report Definition Delete All of a User's Report Definitions Filter Report Writer List of Reports Open the Create Report Page Open the Generate Page Open the Modify Report Page Open the Replicate Report Page Open the View Report Page Transfer a Report Definition Transfer All of a User's Report Definitions View the Dealer's List of Reports (Internal Users Only) View a Report Definition View the Reports List Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Report Writer page. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview

Report Writer Page Overview Purpose Use the Report Writer page to view a list of your existing custom report definitions, which you can create for your specific needs. The list also includes public report definitions. Using one of the report definitions in your list, you can generate a report.You can also copy, transfer, or modify the definitions in your list or create a new report definition.  Description The content area of the Report Writer page displays the following sections: Filter by  - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria List of Reports  - Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Report Writer page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Change a Report Definition to Public or Private Change User in Report Writer Copy a Report Definition Copy All of a User's Report Definitions Delete a Report Definition Delete All of a User's Report Definitions Filter Report Writer List of Reports Open the Create Report Page Open the Generate Page Open the Modify Report Page Open the Replicate Report Page Open the View Report Page Transfer a Report Definition Transfer All of a User's Report Definitions View the Dealer's List of Reports (Internal Users Only) View a Report Definition View the Reports List Change a Report Definition to Public or Private Change User in Report Writer Copy a Report Definition Copy All of a User's Report Definitions Delete a Report Definition Delete All of a User's Report Definitions Filter Report Writer List of Reports Open the Create Report Page Open the Generate Page Open the Modify Report Page Open the Replicate Report Page Open the View Report Page Transfer a Report Definition Transfer All of a User's Report Definitions View the Dealer's List of Reports (Internal Users Only) View a Report Definition View the Reports List Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Report Writer page. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview

Report Writer Page Overview Purpose Use the Report Writer page to view a list of your existing custom report definitions, which you can create for your specific needs. The list also includes public report definitions. Using one of the report definitions in your list, you can generate a report.You can also copy, transfer, or modify the definitions in your list or create a new report definition.  Description The content area of the Report Writer page displays the following sections: Filter by  - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria List of Reports  - Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Report Writer page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Change a Report Definition to Public or Private Change User in Report Writer Copy a Report Definition Copy All of a User's Report Definitions Delete a Report Definition Delete All of a User's Report Definitions Filter Report Writer List of Reports Open the Create Report Page Open the Generate Page Open the Modify Report Page Open the Replicate Report Page Open the View Report Page Transfer a Report Definition Transfer All of a User's Report Definitions View the Dealer's List of Reports (Internal Users Only) View a Report Definition View the Reports List Change a Report Definition to Public or Private Change User in Report Writer Copy a Report Definition Copy All of a User's Report Definitions Delete a Report Definition Delete All of a User's Report Definitions Filter Report Writer List of Reports Open the Create Report Page Open the Generate Page Open the Modify Report Page Open the Replicate Report Page Open the View Report Page Transfer a Report Definition Transfer All of a User's Report Definitions View the Dealer's List of Reports (Internal Users Only) View a Report Definition View the Reports List Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Report Writer page. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview

Report Writer Page Overview Purpose Use the Report Writer page to view a list of your existing custom report definitions, which you can create for your specific needs. The list also includes public report definitions. Using one of the report definitions in your list, you can generate a report.You can also copy, transfer, or modify the definitions in your list or create a new report definition.  Description The content area of the Report Writer page displays the following sections: Filter by  - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria List of Reports  - Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Report Writer page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Change a Report Definition to Public or Private Change User in Report Writer Copy a Report Definition Copy All of a User's Report Definitions Delete a Report Definition Delete All of a User's Report Definitions Filter Report Writer List of Reports Open the Create Report Page Open the Generate Page Open the Modify Report Page Open the Replicate Report Page Open the View Report Page Transfer a Report Definition Transfer All of a User's Report Definitions View the Dealer's List of Reports (Internal Users Only) View a Report Definition View the Reports List Change a Report Definition to Public or Private Change User in Report Writer Copy a Report Definition Copy All of a User's Report Definitions Delete a Report Definition Delete All of a User's Report Definitions Filter Report Writer List of Reports Open the Create Report Page Open the Generate Page Open the Modify Report Page Open the Replicate Report Page Open the View Report Page Transfer a Report Definition Transfer All of a User's Report Definitions View the Dealer's List of Reports (Internal Users Only) View a Report Definition View the Reports List Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Report Writer page. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview

To  access the Create Parts Order page: Click the Create New Order button. Note : The Create Parts Order page appears.

To  access the Create Parts Order page: Click the Create New Order button. Note : The Create Parts Order page appears.

To delete an alert: Select an alert. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete  option. Note : A confirmation message displays. Click the  Yes button to confirm the deletion or click the  No button to close the message window without deleting the alert.

To complete the Summary section of a claim: Option 1: Search for a repair order and line number: In the Repair Order field, type the number of the repair order. In the Line Number field, type the line number of the repair order for which you wish to create a claim. Click the Search icon. In the Odometer field, type the odometer reading if the number was not automatically filled in from the RO. Option 2: Complete the Summary section of an express warranty claim: In the VIN field, type the VIN of the vehicle. In the Repair Order field, type the number of the repair order. In the Line Number field, type the line number of the repair order for which you wish to create a claim. In the Odometer field, type the odometer reading. If you search for the repair order, the claim total is initially populated with data. As you add data to the page, you can manually refresh this total at any time by clicking the Refresh Claim Total link.

To open NNAnet (Dealer Portal) from any DBS page: Click the NNAnet link. Note : The Dealer Portal page displays in a new browser window. Opening the Dealer Portal page does not close your DBS session. If you have completed your DBS session, log out of DBS .

To view parts return and accrual information: By default, the Returns and Accrual Information page displays information for the current calendar year. To view information for the previous calendar year, from the Calendar Year drop-down list, select the calendar year.   In the Accrual Earnings section, view the accrual information for the current and future financial quarter. Note : Use the key provided on the right to understand any icons displayed in this section. In the Returns and Accrual Details section, view the details for previous, current, and future return periods in the current calendar year. Full return status and accrual details are provided to assist you in understanding your current accruals balance and return submission status. To return to the Parts Return Management page, click the  Close button at the bottom of the page. The accrual for any parts rejected at the PDC will be added to your next month's accrual.

Keywords in the DBS  help system allow you to view information using a keyword, or index. For example : some users may be used to using the word "punched" to refer to a vehicle that has been sold. In DBS , vehicle sales are recorded as an RDR, or Retail Delivery Report. When you search by keyword and view the "Punched" keyword, you will find all of the topics related to the RDR process. To search DBS  help using keywords: Click the Keywords button at the bottom of the Table of Contents window. Click the letter corresponding to the first letter of the keyword you want to view. Letters in gray indicate that no keywords have been defined that start with that letter. Keywords that begin with the letter you selected appear in a list. Select the keyword you want to view to display the topics associated with the keyword.  Click the hyperlink for the topic you want to view. To close the Keywords panel and display the Table of Contents, click the Explorer button.

To  view the Quick Look chart: Move your cursor over each bar of the chart. Note : The total for closed deals, booked deals, or open RDRs appears for the current day, month to date (MTD), or year to date (YTD).

To submit a parts return from the Edit Parts Return page: Click the Submit button. Click  Yes to submit the parts return or No to cancel. Note : If the parts return contains warnings, DBS displays a warning message. To submit a parts return, the return must be in "Open". You cannot submit a parts return to the host more than five days before the return due date. The accrual for any parts rejected at the PDC will be added to your next month's accrual.

To view ASR data for a part on a parts return: Select the part for which you would like to view ASR data. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View ASR Data menu option. Click the Close button to close the View Full ASR File Data and return to the parts return.

To access the Home page: Click the Home tab. Note : You can also click the Infiniti logo in the upper-left corner to access the Home page.

View Overview Information   VOR Inquiry Page Overview VOR Inquiry Page Overview Perform Tasks Add a Part to the VOR Inquiry List Add Parts to the VOR Inquiry List by Dealer Reference Number Delete a Part from the VOR Inquiry List Inquire on Parts Availability Perform Common DBS Tasks Select Parts to Place on an Order Filter VOR Orders Perform Common DBS Tasks View VOR Order Detail

To  delete a part from the VOR Inquiry list: Select the part you want to delete. Move your cursor over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion, or the No button to cancel the deletion. Note : The system removes the part from the VOR Inquiry list. VOR Inquiry, also referred to as PDC Inquiry, allows you to inquire on part availability at parts distribution centers -- giving you the ability to create cost effective orders. After you perform the inquiry, select the parts to be added to your order.

To delete an event: Select an event. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes button to delete event, or click the  No button to close without deleting the event.

Edit Dealer Permissions Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for editing dealer permissions. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Dealer Permissions Workflow. View Dealer Information or Permissions Workflow

Manage Host Report Page Overview Purpose Use the Manage Host Report page to add Host reports to  DBS  that have already been created in the Host system. Reports added through this page become available to DBS  users on the Host Reports page.  Description The content area of the Manage Host Report page displays the following sections: Report Creation - Use the Report Creation section to add new reports to the Host reports list. Reports List - The Host Reports List section is where you edit existing Host reports.You can also filter, sort, or customize the reports list as needed. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the xx page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. About the Manage Host Report Page Add a New Host Report on the Manage Host Report Page Edit a Host Report on the Manage Host Report Page Filter the Manage Host Report Page Page Preview

graphic replaced To complete the Selection Criteria section: Select a field you want to filter. From the Operator drop-down list, select the operator for the filter. In the Value field, type the value for the filter operator. Select the report fields to be sorted. Click here for instructions to select the report fields to be sorted. Selecting criteria operators is not required. You can leave this section blank when creating reports.

graphic replaced To complete the Selection Criteria section: Select a field you want to filter. From the Operator drop-down list, select the operator for the filter. In the Value field, type the value for the filter operator. Select the report fields to be sorted. Click here for instructions to select the report fields to be sorted. Selecting criteria operators is not required. You can leave this section blank when creating reports.

graphic replaced To complete the Selection Criteria section: Select a field you want to filter. From the Operator drop-down list, select the operator for the filter. In the Value field, type the value for the filter operator. Select the report fields to be sorted. Click here for instructions to select the report fields to be sorted. Selecting criteria operators is not required. You can leave this section blank when creating reports.

graphic replaced To complete the Selection Criteria section: Select a field you want to filter. From the Operator drop-down list, select the operator for the filter. In the Value field, type the value for the filter operator. Select the report fields to be sorted. Click here for instructions to select the report fields to be sorted. Selecting criteria operators is not required. You can leave this section blank when creating reports.

graphic replaced To complete the Selection Criteria section: Select a field you want to filter. From the Operator drop-down list, select the operator for the filter. In the Value field, type the value for the filter operator. Select the report fields to be sorted. Click here for instructions to select the report fields to be sorted. Selecting criteria operators is not required. You can leave this section blank when creating reports.

To view Dealer Claim Administration Limits (DCAL): Click the DCAL  button. Note : An external application opens. Follow the procedures within that application to complete this task. You can also perform this task on the View Warranty Claim page and Edit/Create Warranty Claim page.

To view Dealer Claim Administration Limits (DCAL): Click the DCAL  button. Note : An external application opens. Follow the procedures within that application to complete this task. You can also perform this task on the View Warranty Claim page and Edit/Create Warranty Claim page.

BCCE6284-9DE1-41B4-BF2C-9305B22BFF48\back.htm

The Notifications function is currently disabled per Nissan request. You can create and edit notifications, but they will not be sent unless the functionality is restored. To  access the Edit Notification page: Select a notification. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. Select the  Edit menu option. You cannot edit a notification that has been approved or sent.

To filter the standard operation codes summary list: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. Type or select a secondary filter value. View the codes that meet the selected criteria. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the Clear icon.

To delete a study: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the study you want to delete. From the Action menu, select the  Delete Study option. Click the Delete button to confirm. You cannot delete studies that have a status of "Ended."

To view vehicle detail: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the  View Vehicle Detail option. Note : The Vehicle Inventory Detail window appears. View the vehicle inventory detail. To close the Vehicle Inventory Detail window, click either of the  Close button. Note : To print the contents of the Vehicle Inventory Detail window, click the Print button and follow the prompts. Note : To email the vehicle detail, click the  Email button and follow the prompts.

02BBE659-9E65-4487-B5A2-8822D783B958\How to RDR & Unwind Quick Reference Guide v3.pdf

To submit an RDR: Complete or edit each section of the RDR. Click here for more information. To print the RDR confirmation after submission, select the Automatically print RDR confirmation after submission? checkbox. Click the Submit button to send the RDR to the NNA Host. Note : If errors exist, a  icon will display. Correct the errors and click the Submit button again. Note : When you submit the RDR, a message displays stating that the submission of the RDR to the NNA Host is in process. This may take a few seconds to complete. When DBS  receives acknowledgement from the NNA Host, a response displays in the Summary section, and  DBS  changes the vehicle status to "Retailed" or "RDR Rejected". When you submit an RDR, the VIN is added to the RDR History page. A retailed vehicle will be removed from inventory with the next inventory update. These updates occur every 30 minutes, so you may have to wait a maximum of 30 minutes for your inventory to refresh and display accurate counts.

To  access the VOR Inquiry page to view part availability: Click the VOR Inquiry button. Note : The VOR Inquiry page appears. VOR Inquiry, also referred to as PDC Inquiry, allows you to inquire on part availability at parts distribution centers -- giving you the ability to create cost-effective orders. After you perform the inquiry, select the parts to be added to your order.

To  access the VOR Inquiry page to view part availability: Click the VOR Inquiry button. Note : The VOR Inquiry page appears. VOR Inquiry, also referred to as PDC Inquiry, allows you to inquire on part availability at parts distribution centers -- giving you the ability to create cost-effective orders. After you perform the inquiry, select the parts to be added to your order.

View Overview Information   Standard Operation Codes Page Overview  Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow Perform Tasks Delete a Standard Operation Code Export the Standard Operation Codes Summary Filter the Standard Operation Codes Summary Open the Create Standard Operation Group Page Open the Edit Standard Operation Group Page Perform Common DBS Tasks Re-Run Translation Process Restart a Standard Operation Code Suspend a Standard Operation Code View the Standard Operation Code Summary and Detail Delete a Standard Operation Code Export the Standard Operation Codes Summary Filter the Standard Operation Codes Summary Open the Create Standard Operation Group Page Open the Edit Standard Operation Group Page Perform Common DBS Tasks Re-Run Translation Process Restart a Standard Operation Code Suspend a Standard Operation Code View the Standard Operation Code Summary and Detail

To submit an RDR batch: Select one or more open RDRs from the Batch RDR summary list. Note : To select all open RDRs, select the checkbox in the gray header area. Click the  Batch Submit button. Only RDRs saved without errors appear in the Batch RDR summary list.

Position Summary Page Overview Note: The Position Summary page applies to internal users only.  Purpose Use the Position Summary page to view the list of positions for which you can set permissions. You can also open the pages that allow you to view, set up or edit permissions for a selected position. Description The content area of the Position Summary page displays the following sections: Filter By -  Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Export button  - Allows you to export the position permissions in an Microsoft Excel spreadsheet that are currently in the system Import button - Allows you to import an Microsoft Excel spreadsheet on your computer that contains changes to position permissions Position Summary List - Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Position Summary page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Export Position Permissions Currently in the System Filter Position Summary Import Changes to Position Permissions Open the Edit Position Permissions Page Open the View Position Permissions Page View Position Summary   Export Position Permissions Currently in the System Filter Position Summary Import Changes to Position Permissions Open the Edit Position Permissions Page Open the View Position Permissions Page View Position Summary   Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Position Summary page. Edit Position Permissions Workflow (Internal Users Only) View Position Permissions Workflow (Internal Users Only) Page Preview

National Service History Page Overview Purpose The National Service History (NSH) page allows you to conduct vehicle searches, view NSH data, and print NSH reports. Description The content area of the National Service History page displays the following sections: Customer Search -  Allows you to type a variety of criteria to search for a customer or vehicle. Summary -  Displays a list of search results based on the criteria you entered. Note : From here, you can click the desired VIN link to access further details in a series of NSH sections, replacing the prior list of search results. Tasks You can perform the following tasks from or on the National Service History page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks . Search for a Customer or Vehicle Search for a Customer or Vehicle   Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the National Service History page . View National Service History Workflow Page Preview

The Notifications function is currently disabled per Nissan request. You can create and edit notifications, but they will not be sent unless the functionality is restored. To copy a notification: Select a notification. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Copy option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Copy button to copy your selection, or click the Cancel button to close without copying. The default status of a copied notification is "Needs Approval".

To view a dealer's list of reports: Click the View Dealers button. Note : The Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page appears. Select a dealer by hierarchy or by number. Click here for more information. Note : The selected dealer's list of reports appears. The list contains reports that have a report category of DBS Public or Dealership Public. View the reports on the list. To return to your list of reports, click the Cancel View Dealers button.

To view a dealer's list of reports: Click the View Dealers button. Note : The Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page appears. Select a dealer by hierarchy or by number. Click here for more information. Note : The selected dealer's list of reports appears. The list contains reports that have a report category of DBS Public or Dealership Public. View the reports on the list. To return to your list of reports, click the Cancel View Dealers button.

To view a dealer's list of reports: Click the View Dealers button. Note : The Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page appears. Select a dealer by hierarchy or by number. Click here for more information. Note : The selected dealer's list of reports appears. The list contains reports that have a report category of DBS Public or Dealership Public. View the reports on the list. To return to your list of reports, click the Cancel View Dealers button.

To view a dealer's list of reports: Click the View Dealers button. Note : The Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page appears. Select a dealer by hierarchy or by number. Click here for more information. Note : The selected dealer's list of reports appears. The list contains reports that have a report category of DBS Public or Dealership Public. View the reports on the list. To return to your list of reports, click the Cancel View Dealers button.

To view a dealer's list of reports: Click the View Dealers button. Note : The Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page appears. Select a dealer by hierarchy or by number. Click here for more information. Note : The selected dealer's list of reports appears. The list contains reports that have a report category of DBS Public or Dealership Public. View the reports on the list. To return to your list of reports, click the Cancel View Dealers button.

View Overview Information   View Warranty Claim Page Overview  Field, Button, and Link Definitions Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks Print Warranty Claim View Dealer Claim Administration Limits View NSH View Repair Order Perform Common DBS Tasks Print Warranty Claim View Dealer Claim Administration Limits View NSH View Repair Order

To  view the NCI host availability: Click the View NCI Host Availability button. The host availability information displays in a new window. Click Close to return to the Monitor System page.

SP: Determine whether to link to an existing Use the Quick Jump Menu topic or whether to create a new topic. View National Service History Page Overview Purpose Use the National Service History page to view and print National Service History (NSH) information for a vehicle. Description The content area of the National Service History page displays the following sections: Quick Jump menu - Appears on the left-hand side of the page. The Quick Jump menu allows you to jump from section to section without scrolling. National Service History - Indicates if the selected vehicle has open campaigns, technical service bulletins, service contracts, is under warranty, or has a branded title. This section provides links to other sections as applicable. Vehicle Detail - Provides important information about the selected vehicle, including the VIN (Vehicle Identification Number). Customer - Provides customer information, including the customer's name and location. Vehicle Options - Provides a list of options included with the vehicle, such as floor mats or splash guards. Open Campaign Information - Provides a list of open campaigns that apply to the selected vehicle. Technical Service Bulletin Information - Provides a list of technical service bulletins (TSBs) that apply to the vehicle. Warranty Coverage Information - Indicates the status of warranty coverage for the vehicle. Warranty Extensions/Customer Service Initiative - Indicates any warranty extensions for the vehicle including the warranty type, expiration date and expiration odometer mileage. Warranty Exclusion Information - Indicates any part number codes for which a warranty exclusion has been applied to the vehicle. For example: If a vehicle has a custom paint job, a warranty exclusion may apply for painted surfaces while the remaining vehicle warranties may still apply. Applied Remarks - Displays information about TSBs which have been found to be applicable to the vehicle, including start date and other comments. Service Contracts - Displays service contracts applied to the vehicle and their status. Repair Order Information - Displays repair order (RO) information for the vehicle. Warranty Information - Displays applicable warranty claim information for the vehicle. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the View National Service History page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks . Review National Service History Details Search for a New VIN from the View NSH Page Use the View NSH Quick Jump Menu Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the National Service History page . View National Service History Workflow Page Preview

To view the detailed line items and information for any parts return on the Parts Return Summary page: In the Dealer Ref # column or the Return Number column, clicked the hyperlinked dealer reference number or return number for the parts return you wish to review. Note : The parts return detail displays in a new window.

To view the Parts Order Management summary and detail: Review the list of part orders. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. Select the line for which you want to view detail. If necessary, scroll down to the Parts Order Detail section and click Show Detail . Review the detail for the selected parts order.

To delete a link from your My Links list: Move your cursor over the My Links link. Click the Delete  icon for the link you want to remove. Click the  Yes button to remove the link, or click the  No button to close the message without removing the link.

For information on how to report the sale of a new vehicle using the Quick Entry RDR page, click here. To report or edit the sale of a used vehicle in inventory using the Quick Entry Used Vehicle Sale page: From the Filter By drop-down list, select the attribute by which to search for the vehicle. In the Filter By data entry field, enter the number by which to search for the vehicle. Click the Search icon to search for the vehicle. Complete or edit each section of the RDR. Complete the Vehicle section of the RDR. Click here for more information. Complete the Buyer section of the RDR. Click here for more information Complete the Driver section of the RDR. Click here for more information Complete the Finance section of the RDR. Click here for more information. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : Any field that displays a  circle indicates the information is required and needs to be completed or corrected before submitting the RDR. Note : If the RDR contains errors, an error message displays. Click the Yes button to save the RDR with errors, or click the No button to close the error message and return to the Quick Entry Used Vehicle Sale page. Click the Submit button to submit the RDR.

This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. To complete the Manufacture Date section of a study: In the Start Date field, use the calendar to select the manufacture start date. In the End Date field, use the calendar to select the manufacture end date. Click the Save button.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To change the user in Report Writer: Click the General Action button. From the General Action menu, select the Change User option. Note : The Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page appears. Click here for more information about searching by hierarchy or by number. Note : The Change User Report page appears. From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. To cancel the change of user, click the Cancel Change User button. Note : This task applies to internal users only.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To change the user in Report Writer: Click the General Action button. From the General Action menu, select the Change User option. Note : The Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page appears. Click here for more information about searching by hierarchy or by number. Note : The Change User Report page appears. From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. To cancel the change of user, click the Cancel Change User button. Note : This task applies to internal users only.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To change the user in Report Writer: Click the General Action button. From the General Action menu, select the Change User option. Note : The Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page appears. Click here for more information about searching by hierarchy or by number. Note : The Change User Report page appears. From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. To cancel the change of user, click the Cancel Change User button. Note : This task applies to internal users only.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To change the user in Report Writer: Click the General Action button. From the General Action menu, select the Change User option. Note : The Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page appears. Click here for more information about searching by hierarchy or by number. Note : The Change User Report page appears. From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. To cancel the change of user, click the Cancel Change User button. Note : This task applies to internal users only.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To change the user in Report Writer: Click the General Action button. From the General Action menu, select the Change User option. Note : The Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page appears. Click here for more information about searching by hierarchy or by number. Note : The Change User Report page appears. From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. To cancel the change of user, click the Cancel Change User button. Note : This task applies to internal users only.

To search for campaign information by campaign ID: In the Campaign ID field, type the campaign ID you want to review. Click the Search icon.

To view the Parts Return Management summary and detail: Review the list of parts returns. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. Note : If multiple pages exist, click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow to navigate from page to page. To view a specific page, in the Go to Page field, type a page number, then click the Go button. Select the line for which you want to view detail. If necessary, scroll down to the Parts Return Detail section and click the  Show Detail link. Review the detail for the selected parts return.

This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. Note : The TSB section of a study is only available when the study type is "Informational". To complete the TSB (Technical Service Bulletin) section of a study: To search for a specific TSB, in the field provided, type the TSB ID, and then click the Search icon. Note : Type only the TSB ID (such as "AT13016"). Do not type any additional information or description. Select each TSB you want to add to or remove from the TSBs list and then click the center buttons as necessary to add or remove the bulletins. When you have selected all desired dealers, click the Save button.

View Overview Information   Report Writer Generate Page Overview   Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Perform Tasks Generate a Report (Dealer Users) Perform Common DBS Tasks Generate a Report (Dealer Users) Perform Common DBS Tasks

To delete a warranty claim: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the claim you want to delete. From the Action menu, select the  Delete Claim  option. Note : DBS displays a confirmation window. Note : Claims with a status of Submitted, Suspended to National (Suspended-NAT), Denied, or Approved cannot be deleted. Click the Yes button to confirm deletion. Only claims in New, Open, Error, Warning, Suspended-DLR, or Rejected status can be deleted. You can delete a warranty claim from the Manage Warranty Claims page only.

To look up a part number code (PNC) from the Create Standard Operation Group page: At the end of the PNC field, click the Lookup icon. Note : The Part Name Code Lookup window opens. In the fields provided, type full or partial information. Note : To remove the search criteria, click the Clear icon. Click the Search icon. Note : DBS displays a list of records matching the search criteria.  Select the desired PNC. Click the Select button. Note : To cancel the lookup, click the  Cancel button.

To look up a part number code (PNC) from the Create Standard Operation Group page: At the end of the PNC field, click the Lookup icon. Note : The Part Name Code Lookup window opens. In the fields provided, type full or partial information. Note : To remove the search criteria, click the Clear icon. Click the Search icon. Note : DBS displays a list of records matching the search criteria.  Select the desired PNC. Click the Select button. Note : To cancel the lookup, click the  Cancel button.

Change User in Report Writer Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for changing a user in Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Change User in Report Writer Workflow. Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow

Change User in Report Writer Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for changing a user in Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Change User in Report Writer Workflow. Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow

Change User in Report Writer Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for changing a user in Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Change User in Report Writer Workflow. Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow

Change User in Report Writer Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for changing a user in Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Change User in Report Writer Workflow. Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow

Change User in Report Writer Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for changing a user in Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Change User in Report Writer Workflow. Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow

View National Service History Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing national service history information for a vehicle.

Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or editing standard operation groups and codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow. Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow

View Overview Information   Update Office Location Page Overview Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks

To export One Study results for a dealer: From the Filter By drop-down list, select "Dealer". In the text box, type the applicable dealer number. Click the Search icon. Click the  Export button. Select  Excel . Save the file to your local drive. You can filter, sort, and print the data if you export the information to Microsoft ®  Excel ® .

F52BED9D-BF1F-470B-B8E4-C1390E47E50F\DBS Training Instructions Reference Guide v3.pdf

View Overview Information   Report Writer Generate Page Overview  Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Perform Tasks Generate a Report (Internal Users) Perform Common DBS Tasks Generate a Report (Internal Users) Perform Common DBS Tasks

To approve a single parts return on the Parts Return Summary page: Move your cursor over the Action icon for the parts return you want to approve. From the Action menu, select the Approve Return menu option. Note : The Approve Parts Return dialog box appears. In the PDC Return Due Date field, use the calendar to select the date by which parts must be returned to the PDC. Note : The PDC return due date must be at least one weekday past the current date. Holidays are excluded from the due date calendar. Click the Yes button to confirm the approval, or click the No button to close the dialog box without approving the parts returns.

Manage Warranty Claims Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing warranty claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow

This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. To complete the Transmission Type section of a study: From the Transmission Type drop-down list, select the desired transmission type. Click the Save button.

To  show the stack trace: Click the Show Stack Trace button. Note : The stack trace information displays at the bottom of the page. If desired, click the Return to home page link, or log out of DBS  to end your session. A new feature of DBS  allows you to provide information to the DBS  team on how you received this system error. In the Steps to Reproduce the issue box, type a full description of the steps you were performing when the error occurred, then click the Submit button to send the information to the DBS  team.

To filter the Study Summary list: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. In the second Filter By field, select the desired option or enter the desired filter criteria. Click the Search icon.

To approve all selected parts returns: Select the checkbox for each parts return you want to approve. To select all parts returns in "Submitted" status, select the checkbox in the header. Note : You must have PDC permission for the dealership in order to approve or reject the parts return. Click the Approve All button. In the PDC Return Due Date field, use the calendar to select the date by which parts must be returned to the PDC. Note : The PDC return due date must be at least one weekday past the current date. Holidays are excluded from the due date calendar. Click the Yes button to confirm the approval, or click the No button to close the dialog box without approving the parts returns.

To complete the Customer section of an express entry warranty claim: Note : If you search for a repair order and line number, the information in the Customer section is populated with the repair order information. Add additional information as necessary. From the Owner Type drop-down list, select an owner type. Note : The information required to complete the Customer section varies by owner type. In the Name fields, type the owner or principal driver's first, middle initial, and last name. If applicable, in the Company field, type the name of the customer's company. In the Address fields, type the customer's postal address and electronic mail address. In the Phone fields, type the customer's daytime, evening, and mobile phone numbers and extensions. Note : If you populate one of the phone number types, no additional phone numbers are required. To save a claim with errors or warnings, click the Save button. To validate the information in the claim, click the Validate button. To submit a claim with no errors, click the Submit button.

To access the corporate financial management system: Click the  Financial Statement Submission Status button.  Note : This link opens an external application. Follow the procedures within that application to complete this task.

To print the results for a study: Select the study for which you want to print the study criteria. Click the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Print Study Results menu option. Select the option to save or open the document. Click the OK button.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To  access the Create Report page: Click the Create button. Note : The Create Report page appears.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To  access the Create Report page: Click the Create button. Note : The Create Report page appears.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To  access the Create Report page: Click the Create button. Note : The Create Report page appears.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To  access the Create Report page: Click the Create button. Note : The Create Report page appears.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To  access the Create Report page: Click the Create button. Note : The Create Report page appears.

View Overview Information   User Summary Page Overview View User Permissions Workflow Edit User Permissions Workflow Perform Tasks About the User Summary Page Access the Copy User Permissions Page Access the Edit User Permissions Page Access the View User Permissions Page Deactivate or Reactivate a User Grant or Remove Access to DBS Retrieve a List of New or Updated Users Search for a Dealer User Perform Common DBS Tasks About the User Summary Page Access the Copy User Permissions Page Access the Edit User Permissions Page Access the View User Permissions Page Deactivate or Reactivate a User Grant or Remove Access to DBS Retrieve a List of New or Updated Users Search for a Dealer User Perform Common DBS Tasks

To  access the View Position Permissions page: Select the position. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  View Permissions  option. Note : The View Permissions page appears.

To  filter the dealer summary: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. If a text-entry field appears, type a filter value. - OR - If a drop-down list appears, select an option from the list. Click the  Search  icon. Note : The page refreshes to display only those records that match your selection. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options and clear the search criteria, click the  Clear  icon. View the dealers that meet the selected criteria. To display active and inactive dealers, click the Show Active Dealer and Inactive Dealer button. Note : To display active dealers only, click the Show Active Dealer button.

View Overview Information   Edit Parts Return Page Edit Parts Return Management Workflow Perform Tasks Add a Part to a Return Add Multiple Parts to a Return Delete a Part from a Return Edit a Parts Return Filter Parts Look Up a Part Modify a Detail Line on a Return Perform Common DBS Tasks Preview a Part Return Request Cancellation of a Parts Return Retrieve Unpacked Parts Show Packed Parts Show Selected Parts Submit a Parts Return View ASR Data for a Part on a Parts Return Add a Part to a Return Add Multiple Parts to a Return Delete a Part from a Return Delete a Parts Return Edit a Parts Return Filter Parts Look Up a Part Modify a Detail Line on a Return Perform Common DBS Tasks Submit a Parts Return

To  display the screens and help for the Dealer Business System (DBS)  in another language for the current session:  Click the display language drop-down list. Select the desired language. Note : Click here for the instructions to permanently change the language associated with your user account. Changing the display language impacts the display for the current session only. You must update your user profile to permanently change the display language. If you change the language display, you can also access context-sensitive and full help in the chosen language.

To reject all selected parts returns: Move your cursor over the Action icon for the parts return you wish to reject. From the Action menu, select the Reject Return menu option. Note : The Reject Part Return dialog box appears. To reject the parts return and reset the part return status to "Open", click the Yes button. To close the dialog box without rejecting the  return, click the No button.

How to RDR and Unwind Vehicles Quick Reference Guide The How to RDR and Unwind Vehicles Quick Reference Guide provides information for dealer users on three different methods for submitting a vehicle RDR, instructions for unwinding an RDR and the business rules that govern unwind requests. Click here to download the How to RDR and Unwind Vehicles Quick Reference Guide. .

How to RDR and Unwind Vehicles Quick Reference Guide The How to RDR and Unwind Vehicles Quick Reference Guide provides information for dealer users on three different methods for submitting a vehicle RDR, instructions for unwinding an RDR and the business rules that govern unwind requests. Click here to download the How to RDR and Unwind Vehicles Quick Reference Guide. .

How to RDR and Unwind Vehicles Quick Reference Guide The How to RDR and Unwind Vehicles Quick Reference Guide provides information for dealer users on three different methods for submitting a vehicle RDR, instructions for unwinding an RDR and the business rules that govern unwind requests. Click here to download the How to RDR and Unwind Vehicles Quick Reference Guide. .

To  filter the View IASR page: In the Dealer # field, type a dealer number or use the  Lookup icon to look up a dealer. Note : Click here for information on how to look up a dealer. From the View drop-down list, select a transaction date option. Note : Depending on your selection, additional filter options may display to narrow the results further. From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. Note : Depending on your selection, additional filter options may display to narrow the results further. Click the Search icon, as needed. View the IASR tasks that meet the selected criteria. Note: to reset the filter to the default options, click the Clear icon.

To  view the Request For Credit (RFC) Status summary: Review the list of RFC claims. Note : The claims appear in RFC number sequence in descending order, most recent to oldest. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title.   To view additional pages, click a page number or click the  < or  > icons. To view the name of the carrier or PDC, move your mouse pointer over the carrier code or PDC code.

Clean Cache Page Overview Purpose Use the Clean Cache page to clean or refresh the cache manually. Administrators have the ability to clean the cache using this page. The  Dealer Business System (DBS)  can be set up to automatically clean the cache. Description The content area of the Clean Cache page displays the following sections: Input Cache Path - Enter the path of the cache that you want to clean. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Clean Cache page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Clean the Cache Page Preview

To filter the Custom VIN Campaign Report page: To view only those vehicles which have been repaired, from the Repair Status drop-down list, select the "Repaired" option. To view only those repaired vehicles for which a claim status has been entered, from the Claim Status drop-down list, select the desired option. To view only those vehicles which should not be sold until campaign repairs have been completed, select "Yes" from the Stop Sale drop-down list. To view only those vehicles for which the campaign parts are restricted, select "Yes" from the Parts Restriction drop-down list. Click Search icon to update the results. If desired, click one of the column headers to customize the report display.

The Notifications function is currently disabled per Nissan request. You can create and edit notifications, but they will not be sent unless the functionality is restored. To change the status of a notification: Select a notification. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Change Status  option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm, or click the  No  button to close the window without confirming. If the notification status is "Approved", changing the status updates the notification status to "Needs Approval." If the notification status is "Needs Approval", changing the status updates the notification status to "Approved." A notification is not sent until it is in an approved status AND the scheduled time has passed. You cannot change the status of a published communication item. You must delete the item if you want to remove it from display.

Help This Help page contains information about using  Dealer Business System (DBS)  Help. There are several ways to find the information that you need. Use the following features to navigate  DBS Help. Icon Description ( Page Help ) On a DBS application page, opens a drop-down list offering access to context-sensitive help and to full help. Internet Explorer users can also press the F10 key to open the context-sensitive help.  ( Help ) On a page within full help, displays this Help page.  ( Home ) Displays the "Welcome to the Dealer Business System (DBS) " introduction page.  ( Back )  ( Forward ) Returns to the previously viewed Help topic. Progresses to the next page within your viewing history.   ( Print Page ) Prints a copy of a displayed Help topic. Note : You may need to adjust your printer settings for optimal display of the printed help content.   ( Search ) Searches DBS  full help to find topics that include the searched item. Type a word, phrase, or acronym in the Search  field and click the  Search icon. Topics highlight all occurrences of the searched item.   ( Keywords ) Displays the Help index. Click a letter to view a list of keywords, phrases, or acronyms beginning with that letter. Click an item from the list to display a list of topics that include the indexed item.  ( Explorer ) Displays the table of contents.   ( Open all )    ( Close all ) Opens a list of topics displayed in the left-hand pane. Closes a list of topics displayed in the left-hand pane. DBS  Help contains the following menu tabs. Click a tab to view a list of related topics in the left-hand pane. Select a topic from the list to display its content in the right-hand pane. Menu Description Home Provides general information about  DBS , including overviews of the application pages accessed by all users and task instructions for customizing DBS , help and support, and navigation features. Sales Provides information about the vehicle sales application within DBS , including overviews of the application pages in Sales, workflows, task instructions, and information about viewing reports. Service Provides information about the service application within DBS , including overviews of the application pages in Service, workflows, task instructions, and information about viewing reports. Parts Provides information about the parts application within DBS , including overviews of the application pages in Parts, workflows, task instructions, and information about viewing reports. Office Provides information about the business office application within DBS , including overviews of the application pages in Office, workflows, task instructions, and descriptions information about viewing reports. Administration Provides information about the overall DBS application, including instructions for system administration and for maintaining user and dealership information, and information about viewing reports.

To view a Retail Delivery Report: View each section of the report. Note : Click here for instructions to access the RDR Detail Report.

To delete a key word from a standard operation category or standard operation code: Select the key word. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Delete option. Note: The Delete Confirmation window opens. Click the Delete button.

To delete a key word from a standard operation category or standard operation code: Select the key word. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Delete option. Note: The Delete Confirmation window opens. Click the Delete button.

To delete a key word from a standard operation category or standard operation code: Select the key word. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Delete option. Note: The Delete Confirmation window opens. Click the Delete button.

View Overview Information Dealer Summary Page Overview Edit Dealer Information Workflow Edit Dealer Permissions Workflow View Dealer Information or Permissions Workflow Perform Tasks Filter Dealer Summary Open the Edit Dealer Information Page Open the Edit Dealer Permissions Page Open the User Summary to Search for a User    Open the View Dealer Information Page Open the View Dealer Permissions Page Perform Common  DBS Tasks View Dealer Summary Filter Dealer Summary Open the Edit Dealer Information Page Open the Edit Dealer Permissions Page Open the User Summary to Search for a User   Open the View Dealer Information Page Open the View Dealer Permissions Page Perform Common  DBS Tasks View Dealer Summary

MRW: 1/7/13: New Screen Shot needed (pending) - Search and Clear buttons will most likely be replaced with new icons (reported on issue log). View Part Master Information Page Overview Purpose Use the View Part Master Information page to view or print specific part master information. Access the View Part Master Information page by clicking the View Part Master Information link on the Parts menu. Description The content area of the View Part Master Information page displays the following sections or features: Part Number field -  Allows you to type a specific part number, if known Parts Look Up icon -  Allows you to look up a part number by specifying full or partial information Parts  - Allows you to view part master information for a specific part, including general part information, supersession information, service file information, pricing information, and part dimensions New Part link - Allows you to open and view a new part, if one exists Code descriptions - Display when you move your mouse over specific field labels Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the View Part Master Information page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Access Reports Look Up a Part View Part Master Information Access Reports Look Up a Part View Part Master Information Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflow is performed on the View Part Master Information page. View Part Master Information Workflow Page Preview

SP: Need to link to Print tasks, after the appropriate Print tasks are determined. Also need to link to Quick Jump topic, after determining whether there's a generic topic or whether we need to create one for NSH. If no warranty information is available for the vehicle, DBS  displays a warning message in the upper right corner. Contact the Warranty Help Desk for assistance. To view National Service History details: Click the Plus Sign (+) beside a section title to expand the section. Note : The customer address only displays when viewed by the selling or servicing dealer. Click the Minus Sign ( - ) beside a section title to collapse the section. If there are active links in the top National Service History section, click the links to jump to the corresponding NSH section on the page. Click the Exit button to close the National Service History details and return to the list of NSH search results. If a vehicle does not have any warranty coverage, DBS  displays a message stating "No Nissan Warranty exists for this vehicle. Call the Warranty Call Center" When there is an active campaign, TSB, warranty contract, or service contract, an active link is part of the top National Service History section.

Campaign Report Page Overview Purpose Use the Campaign Report page to view a list of all vehicles impacted by open service campaigns. Description The content area of the Campaign Report page displays the following sections: Filter by - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Page navigation bar - Allows you to navigate from page to page, if multiple pages exist Vehicle Campaign List - Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Campaign Report page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Export Campaign Report Information Filter the Campaign Report Page Search for Information by Campaign ID Page Preview

Customer Pay Reimbursement Page Overview - Internal Users Purpose Use the Customer Pay Reimbursement page to analyze the parts markup and labor rates for a selected dealer. You can use this information to determine what parts markup and labor rates a dealer is charging the customer for repair work. Description The content area of the Customer Pay Reimbursement page displays the following sections: Filter Criteria -  Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria and define what analysis to perform Parts Markup Results -  Allows you to view the results of the Parts Markup analysis Labor Rate Results -  Allows you to view the results of the Labor Rate analysis Tasks You can perform the following tasks from or on the Customer Pay Reimbursement page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Exclude a Job Line Export Customer Pay Results Filter and View Customer Pay Reimbursement Results Print Customer Pay Reimbursement Results View Repair Order Exclude a Job Line Export Customer Pay Results Filter and View Customer Pay Reimbursement Results Print Customer Pay Reimbursement Results View Repair Order Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Customer Pay Reimbursement page. View Customer Pay Reimbursement Workflow Page Preview

To copy an event: Select an event. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Copy option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Copy button to confirm, or click the Cancel button to close the window without copying the event. The status for the copied event is "Requires Approval".

Application Auditing Page Overview Purpose Use the Application Auditing page to view transactions performed in DBS . A transaction is defined as a task performed in DBS that changes data. If a user views data but does not change anything, that is not considered a transaction, and does not display on the Application Auditing page. Except for viewing host reports which is a transaction that does display on this page. Description The content area of the Application Auditing page displays the following sections: Search  -  Allows you to type or select criteria to limit the results displayed in the summary section Summary - Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Application Auditing page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Interpret Application Auditing Information Search Application Audit Information Interpret Application Audit Information Search Application Audit Information Page Preview

To  look up the dealer administrator: Move your cursor over the  Administration tab. Click the User Summary menu option or the desired icon. Note : If you click the menu option the content opens in a new tab. Note : The User Summary appears, which is a list of all users at this dealership. Scroll through the list. The Dealer Administrator for the dealership will have a check in the Sys Admin column. Note : There may be more than one Dealer Admin.

To  look up a dealer from the Parts Metrics page: At the end of the Dealer field, click the Lookup icon. Note : The Dealer Lookup page appears. In the fields provided, type full or partial information, then press the Enter key. Note : You must include an asterisk (*) when typing partial information. Note : The application displays a list of matching dealers. Note : To clear your entries, click the Clear Fields icon. Select the radio button for the desired dealer. Click the Select button. Note : To cancel the lookup, click the Cancel button and close the dialog. Note : The application displays the dealer number in the field.

View Overview Information   Copyright Page Overview Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks View Copyright and Trademark Information Perform Common DBS Tasks View Copyright and Trademark Information

Campaign Master Table Page Overview Purpose Use the Campaign Master Table page to maintain the location source information for a campaign. By default, all campaigns are considered "Dealer" campaigns. Use the Campaign Master Table page to indicate that a campaign is a campaign impacting dealer vehicles only, or a campaign that impacts both dealer and fleet vehicles. Description The content area of the Campaign Master Table page displays the following sections: Search and Filter -  Allows you to search for a specific campaign, or filter the campaign list by your desired criteria. Campaign Master -  Displays the list of current campaigns with their description and effective dates. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Campaign Master Table page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Edit the Campaign Master Information for a Campaign Export Campaign Master Table Information Search for Campaign Master Table Information Page Preview

MRW: NNA dealers only (Infiniti and Nissan) Note : This task applies to internal users only. To cancel a backorder: Select the detail line for the part you want to cancel the backorder. Note : You must select a line item that is on backorder. Click the B/O Cancel button. Note : The Infinitinet Backorder Cancellation Screen appears. Note : Proceed with the cancellation in Infinitinet and then exit Infinitinet. You can cancel backorders for the following types of orders: STK, SOL, TOS (Infiniti only) and VOR.

Vehicle Inventory Page Overview Purpose Use the Vehicle Inventory page to view and manage dealer inventory from a single, searchable, and sortable view, regardless of vehicle status.  Description The content area of the Vehicle Inventory page displays the following sections: Filter - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Note : Buttons to locate a vehicle, export information, or access reports are also located in this section Page Navigation Bar - Allows you to navigate from page to page, if multiple pages exist Summary  - Displays general information for all records on the page Detail  - Displays specific information for a selected record Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Vehicle Inventory page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. About the Vehicle Inventory Page About Vehicle Inventory: What You Need to Know Access OMS to Locate a Vehicle Access OMS to Trade a Vehicle Access OMS to View OMS Vehicle Detail Access the Inventory Search Page from Vehicle Inventory Access the RDR Vehicle Page from Vehicle Inventory Edit Vehicle Stock Number Export Vehicle Inventory Information Filter Vehicle Inventory Filter Vehicle Inventory Using an Advanced Filter Manage Vehicle Notes Print RDR Detail View Campaign Information for a Vehicle in Inventory View the Campaign Report View, Print, or Email Window Sticker View Vehicle Invoice About the Vehicle Inventory Page About Vehicle Inventory: What You Need to Know Access the Inventory Search Page from Vehicle Inventory Edit Vehicle Stock Number Export Vehicle Inventory Information Filter Vehicle Inventory Filter Vehicle Inventory Using an Advanced Inventory Filter Manage Vehicle Notes View Invoice View, Print, or Email Window Sticker Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Vehicle Inventory page. Manage Vehicle Inventory Workflow Report or Edit the Sale of a Vehicle (RDR) Workflow Manage Vehicle Inventory Workflow Page Preview

To  view Copyright information from any DBS application page: Click the Copyright  link. Note : Additional Nissan copyright information can be found here .

View Overview Information   SVC Order Management Page Overview   Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow Perform Tasks Access Reports Add Comments to an SVC Order Add Comments to Multiple SVC Orders Approve an SVC Order Approve Multiple SVC Orders Export SVC Order Management Information Filter the SVC Order Management Summary Open the View SVC Order Page Perform Common DBS Tasks Reject an SVC Order Reject Multiple SVC Orders View SVC Order Management Summary and Detail View SVC Order View Warning or Error Messages

To complete the Expenses section of an express entry warranty claim: Note : If you search for a repair order and line number, the information in the Expenses section is populated with the repair order information. Add additional information as necessary. In the Expense code field, type an expense code. In the Req Amt field, type the requested expense amount. In the Coverage 1 Code field, enter the coverage code. If necessary, in the Coverage 1 Code field, update the coverage code. Note : The coverage code is automatically populated based on information entered in the Claim Information section. If the coverage amount is split between or among coverage types, complete the Coverage 2 and Coverage 3 fields as appropriate. Click the link in the VOR column to enter VOR expense details. Click the link in the Rental column to enter rental expense details. As appropriate, click the Plus Sign to add additional expenses.

To edit the vehicle stock number: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the Edit Stock Number option. Note : The Edit Stock Number window appears. Type the vehicle stock number. Click the OK button to delete, or click the Cancel button to close the message without deleting. DBS interfaces with most dealer management systems (DMS) and automatically updates stock numbers. If your DMS is not certified and does not interface with DBS , you can update the stock number manually in DBS .

To access the Returns and Accrual Information page: Click the Return & Accrual Info. button. Note : The Returns and Accrual Information page appears.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To  access the Replicate Report page: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the  Action menu, select the  Replicate option. Note : The Replicate Report page appears.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To  access the Replicate Report page: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the  Action menu, select the  Replicate option. Note : The Replicate Report page appears.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To  access the Replicate Report page: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the  Action menu, select the  Replicate option. Note : The Replicate Report page appears.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To  access the Replicate Report page: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the  Action menu, select the  Replicate option. Note : The Replicate Report page appears.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To  access the Replicate Report page: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the  Action menu, select the  Replicate option. Note : The Replicate Report page appears.

To  complete the Printing Criteria section: Type the column width for each field name. Note : The column widths are automatically populated. You do not need to change anything in the Printing Criteria section.

To  complete the Printing Criteria section: Type the column width for each field name. Note : The column widths are automatically populated. You do not need to change anything in the Printing Criteria section.

To  complete the Printing Criteria section: Type the column width for each field name. Note : The column widths are automatically populated. You do not need to change anything in the Printing Criteria section.

To  complete the Printing Criteria section: Type the column width for each field name. Note : The column widths are automatically populated. You do not need to change anything in the Printing Criteria section.

To  complete the Printing Criteria section: Type the column width for each field name. Note : The column widths are automatically populated. You do not need to change anything in the Printing Criteria section.

View Overview Information   Maintain Purge Rules Page Overview   Perform Tasks Maintain Purge Rules Perform Common DBS Tasks Maintain Purge Rules Perform Common DBS Tasks

To view the entire help system available for the Dealer Business System (DBS) : Move your cursor over the Help link. Click the Full Help link. Once full help is open, use the navigation tabs at the top to access the content for each DBS application. Once the full help for a DBS application is open, use the table of contents to navigate to a topic of interest. Use the Search  field to find the help topic you want to view. Internet Explorer users can access context-sensitive help by pressing the F10 key on their keyboard. The full help system allows you to search for help information and view all help topics for the  Dealer Business System (DBS) . You can also get help for DBS  by clicking the Live Chat button.

Home Introduction Description The Home page within the Dealer Business System (DBS)  enables you to review alerts, regional and national announcements, and key metrics through the Quick Look feature. The Help menu, which appears on the left-hand side of your screen, provides access to more information about customizing and navigating in DBS . For overviews of the application pages and tasks you can perform within them, click  Pages .   For instructions on how to customize, navigate, and access help in  DBS , click Tasks .

FBECB7CF-B55E-4233-93AC-626C601D6115\Host Reports Quick Reference Guide INFINITI v2.pdf

Note : This task applies to internal users only. There are four ways to search for a dealer user on the User Summary Page - by name, by user ID, by dealer code, or by hierarchy. Each method is described in full on the Step by Step tab in full help. Searching for a user by user ID provides the quickest and most specific results. To search for a dealer user by their user ID: Click the Dealer User radio button. In the User ID field, type the user ID. Note : Although you can search for a partial user ID, it is highly recommended that you enter the full user ID. Click the Search icon. Note : To remove search criteria, click the Clear icon.

To  print customer pay reimbursement analysis results from a PDF file, from the Service menu, select Customer Pay Reimbursement : Click the Print button. Note: The File Download window opens. In the File Download window, click Save and proceed as you normally would to download a PDF file to your computer. From your computer, follow the standard procedure to print the PDF.

Validate claims to determine if they have errors prior to submission to the Host. DBS has incorporated the Host validation rules to insure a high first-time submission rate for dealers. The Batch Validation function is most commonly used when multiple claims are created and saved using the Express Entry Warranty Claim page. To batch validate claims from the Manage Warranty Claim page: Filter the Warranty Claims list as desired. Select the Val. (Validate) checkbox for each claim you want to validate, or to validate all claims in the list, select the checkbox beside the column header. Note : The Val. checkbox is only selectable for those claims without errors that have not been previously validated. Click the Validate All button. Click the Yes button. Note : DBS sends the claims to the batch-validate queue and validates the claims in the background. As desired, you can continue to perform additional tasks on the Manage Warranty Claim page. After validation, you may choose to submit those warranty claims with warning messages and/or those claims without errors.

NNA internal users only To  export Campaign Part Management information: Click the Export button. Select the output format. Save the file to your local drive. If you filter the page before exporting, only those records that meet the filter criteria export. You can filter or sort the data if you export the file in the Microsoft ® Excel ® format.

To  reject an SVC order from the SVC Order Management page: Select the SVC order. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Reject SVC Order  option. Note : A Rejection Message dialog appears. Type a reason for the rejection. Note : Dealers can view the rejection reason in the Parts Order Detail section. Click the  Yes button to confirm the rejection, or click the  No button to cancel the rejection. Note : The system cancels the order. SVC orders pending approval contain parts that are on the Campaign Parts list, as validated by the system during order submission. You can only reject an SVC order in "New" status.

To  export SVC Order Management information: Click the Export button. Select the Microsoft ® Excel ® output format. Save the file to your local drive. If you filter the page before exporting, only those records that meet the filter criteria export. You can filter, sort, and print the data if you export the information to Microsoft ® Excel ® .

Reports saved on the Manage Host Report page cannot be deleted. To add a new Host report on the Manage Host Report page: From the Application drop-down list, select the application for the report. Note : The Application selection you make determines whether or not the report will show up for that application on the Host Reports page. Note : If the report you are adding should appear in the list of available reports for more than one application on the Host Reports page, you should add the new report for each application. In the Name in English field, type the report name in English. In the Report # field, type the Host report number for the report. From the Division drop-down list, select whether the report is applicable to Nissan, Infiniti, or both. Note : If you select "Both", two entries will appear in the reports list; one for Nissan, and the other for Infiniti. In the Name in Fren ch field, type the report name in French. Note : The French report name appears to those users who select "French" as the display language in the DBS  header area. From the Orientation drop-down list to select whether the report should appear in portrait or landscape orientation. Note : For a description of portrait and landscape orientation, please see the Glossary (keyword Orientation). From the Frequency drop-down list, select the frequency at which the report will be generated. In the Name in Spanish field, type report name in Spanish. Note : The Spanish report name appears to those users who select "Spanish" as the display language in the DBS  header area. Click the Add button to add the new report(s) to the reports list. Note : Adding the report(s) to the reports list does not save the created reports, it only adds them to the list. Click the Save button to save the new reports and process any other changes that you have made on the Manage Host Report page since the last Save action, or click the Cancel button to cancel all changes you have made since the last Save action. Note : A confirmation window appears. Click the Yes button to save all of your changes, or click the No button to close the confirmation window and return to the Manage Host Report page where you can make additional changes.

To filter the Parts Return Management summary: Select a filter option. Enter or select a secondary filter option, as required. Note : Depending on your selection, additional filter options may display to narrow the results further. Note : Depending upon your selection, the system may automatically filter the list and refresh the display. Click the Search icon, as needed. View the returns that meet the selected criteria. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the  Clear  icon. Return number is also known as the control number or MFR reference number.

Parts Landing Page Overview Purpose Use the Parts landing page to view alerts, announcements, and other news related to service. You access the Parts Landing page by using the Parts menu. Description The content area of the Parts Landing page displays the following sections: Alerts -  As applicable, alert messages appear at the top of the page. These messages typically provide information that is system-critical. Announcements -  As applicable, high-priority messages appear in the Regional or National Announcements section.  When the message is no longer considered a high priority, the text automatically moves to the Other News section. Other News -  This section displays messages that have a lower priority than messages in the Announcements section. Parts Order - Displays a list of parts orders for your dealership Parts RFC - Displays a list of request for credit applications for your dealership Parts Return - Displays a list of parts returns for your dealership Parts SVC Order - Displays a list of service campaign orders for your dealership Alerts -  As applicable, alert messages appear at the top of the page. These messages typically provide information that is system-critical. Announcements -  As applicable, high-priority messages appear in the Regional or National Announcements section.  When the message is no longer considered a high priority, the text automatically moves to the Other News section. Other News -  This section displays messages that have a lower priority than messages in the Announcements section. Parts Order - Displays a list of parts orders for your dealership Parts RFC - Displays a list of request for credit applications for your dealership Parts Return - Displays a list of parts returns for your dealership Note: If you are a dealer user, the parts information on this page is for your dealership only. If you belong to a dealer group, the information is for the dealership you selected from the Dealer drop-down list. If you are an internal user, the information is for all Nissan dealers. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Parts Landing page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. View Alerts View Announcements and Other News View Alerts View Announcements and Other News Page Preview

Monitor User Status Page Overview Purpose Use the Monitor User Status page to view system usage details for each user at a dealership. Description The content area of the Monitor User Status page displays the following sections: Filter by - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Summary - Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Monitor User Status page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Monitor User Status Page Preview

To  filter the calendar events summary: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. If a text-entry field appears, type a filter value and then click the Search button. If a drop-down list appears, select an option from the list. To include past events, click the Include Past button. Note : To hide past events, click the Hide Past button. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options and clear the search criteria, click the  Clear  icon.

To navigate using a link in My Links: Move your cursor over the My Links link. Click the link for the application page you want to navigate to.

To request cancellation of a parts return: Select the parts return for which you want to request cancellation. Move your cursor over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Request Cancellation menu option. Click the  Yes button to confirm.

To  access the Edit Dealer Information page: Select the dealer. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit Dealer Information option. Note : The Edit Dealer Information page appears.

To create or edit an alert: Select the page where the alert will display from the Page drop-down list.  Select the display language for the alert from the Language drop-down list. If the item does not require approval, clear the Require Approval? checkbox. Type a title for the alert. Note : The alert title is limited to 50 characters. Select a scheduled date for the alert. Type a scheduled time for the alert. Select an expiration date for the alert. Type the content of the alert message in the space provided. Select recipients for the alert. Note : To learn about selecting recipients, click the applicable link. Select internal users by hierarchy Select internal users by geography Select dealer users by hierarchy Select dealer users by geography Select dealers users by dealer number Click the  Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm, or click the  No  button to close the window without confirming. Time in  DBS  is written in the 24-hour notation, where HH (00 to 23) is the number of full hours that have passed since midnight.

To  access the Create Calendar Event page: Click the  Create button.

To add comments to multiple SVC (service campaign) orders: Select the check box next to each campaign order to which you want to add a comment. Click the Create Comments Selected button. In the space provided, type your comments. Click the Save button to save the comments you entered. Note : To close the comments window and return to the SVC Order Management page without saving your comments, click the Cancel button.

View Overview Information   View User Permissions Page Overview View User Permissions Workflow Perform Tasks Perform Common  DBS Tasks Use the Quick Jump Menu View User Permissions Perform Common  DBS Tasks Use the Quick Jump Menu View User Permissions

To export information from the Sold with Open Campaign Report Page: Use the search and filter fields to customize the Vehicle Campaign List. Note : At a minimum, you must select an affiliate, region, area, district, and campaign. Click the Export button. Follow your browser-specific instructions to open or save the Microsoft ®  Excel ®  file.

51B75CD6-FD19-4C43-AE59-00402197C1CD\Parts Return and Accrual Information Quick Reference Guide v1.pdf

Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing and creating standard operation categories. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow

View Overview Information   Inventory Search Page Overview Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow Perform Tasks Access OMS to Trade a Vehicle from Inventory Search Access OMS to View OMS Vehicle Detail from Inventory Search Manage Vehicle Notes from Inventory Search Perform Common DBS Tasks Print Vehicle Detail from Inventory Search Search Inventory Set Custom Search Group Set the Distance Search Range View, Print, or Email Window Sticker from Inventory Search View Vehicle Detail from Inventory Search Manage Vehicle Notes from Inventory Search Perform Common DBS Tasks Print Vehicle Detail from Inventory Search Search Inventory Set Custom Search Group Set the Distance Search Range View, Print, or Email Window Sticker from Inventory Search View Vehicle Detail from Inventory Search

To  edit dealer information: In the Internet Sales Manager Name  field, type the first name and last name of the Internet Sales Manager. From the Language drop-down list, select the desired language. From the Time Zone drop-down list, select the desired time zone. Click the  Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : The Save Confirmation screen appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm, or click the  No  button to close the window without confirming. Each employee's time zone setting on their My Profile page defaults to the time zone setting on the Dealer Information page.

To access OMS  to trade a vehicle: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the OMS Dealer Trade option. Note : The OMS Dealer Trade option is only available to users who have access to the OMS application. If you have OMS access, click the OMS Dealer Trade option to open the external OMS application. Follow the procedures within the OMS application to complete the dealer trade task. Any fields that are dimmed are unavailable.

To  resubmit a warranty claim: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the desired claim. From the Action menu, select Resubmit Claim . Note : The Submit Confirmation window opens.  Click the  Yes button to resubmit the claim. Note : DBS validates, saves and, if error-free, submits the warranty claim for processing. You can only resubmit claims that have been submitted for processing one time, have been returned with either a Rejected or Suspended-Dealer status, and have been edited.

In cases where it may be unclear who the legal owner of the vehicle is, complete the optional Legal Owner section of the RDR. The legal owner is usually the person (or company) to whom the title is registered. For example: Purchasing Agent Katie Dowd leases a Rogue for XYZ Company employee Michael Tokich. In this case, XYZ company is the buyer and legal owner, while Michael Tokich is the driver. To  complete the optional Legal Owner section of an RDR: In the Name field, type the first (given) and last (family) name of the owner, or type the name of the company if the legal owner is a corporation. In the Address fields, type the address where the legal owner can be contacted. In the Phone field, type the phone number where the legal owner can be contacted. Note : Type all 9s in the Phone field if the legal owner does not have a phone. Click the  Save  button to save your changes, or click the  Cancel  button to close without saving. A   will display for any missing or incorrect data. Correct all errors before submitting the RDR. Note : If you are ready to submit the RDR, click here for more information.

To delete an announcement: Select the announcement you want to delete. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes button to confirm the deletion, or click the  No button to close the message window without deleting the announcement.

View Overview Information   Custom VIN Campaign Report Page Overview Perform Tasks Create a Custom VIN Campaign Report by File Import Create a Custom VIN Campaign Report by Keying in VINs Export Custom VIN Campaign Report Page Information Filter the Custom VIN Campaign Report Page Perform Common DBS Tasks

View Overview Information   Transaction Status Page Overview Search for Transactions Workflow Perform Tasks Perform Common  DBS Tasks Search for Transactions on the Transaction Status Page View Transaction Status Perform Common  DBS Tasks Search for Transactions on the Transaction Status Page View Transaction Status

To restart a suspended standard operation code: Select the code. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Restart option. Note : A message appears that asks when the applicable Repair Order (RO) lines are to be translated. Select a date option on which translation is to begin. Click the Restart button to confirm, or click the  Cancel button to close the window without restarting. Note : The system resumes processing ROs for the restarted code.

To print RDR detail from RDR History: Select a vehicle. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Print Detail option. Note : The RDR detail displays in a new browser window. Click the Print button to print the RDR detail.

To view ASR data for a part on a parts order: Select the part for which you would like to view ASR data. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View ASR Data menu option. Click the Close button to close the View Full ASR File Data and return to the parts order.

To export parts aggregate metrics data: If necessary, search for the aggregate metrics you wish to export. Note : Click here to view instructions for how to search for parts aggregate metrics. Click the Export button, and then select the Microsoft ® Excel ® output format. Save or open the file as desired.

View Overview Information   Hold Status Summary Page Overview  Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View One Study Result Workflow Perform Tasks Export Hold Status Summary Information Filter Hold Status Summary Open a Study to View Results Open One Dealer Study Results Release a Vehicle from Dealer Hold View Dealer Study Results View NSH for a Vehicle in a Study View One Study Result View Repair Order for Vehicle in a Study Perform Common DBS Tasks Export Hold Status Summary Information Filter Hold Status Summary Open a Study to View Results Open One Dealer Study Results Release a Vehicle from Dealer Hold View Dealer Study Results View NSH for a Vehicle in a Study View One Study Result View Repair Order for Vehicle in a Study Perform Common DBS Tasks

View Overview Information   Parts Order Management Page Overview Manage Parts Orders Workflows Perform Tasks Access Reports Access the Create Parts Order Page Delete a Parts Order Export Parts Order Management Information Filter Parts Order Management Summary Look Up a Part Open the Edit Parts Order Page to Modify a Parts Order Open the PDC Inquiry Page to View Part Availability Open the View Parts Order Page to View Detail Perform Common DBS Tasks Print Parts Order Detail Submit a Parts Order View Parts Order Management Summary and Detail Access Reports Access the Create Parts Order Page Delete a Parts Order Export Parts Order Management Information Filter Parts Order Management Summary Look Up a Part Open the Edit Parts Order Page to Modify a Parts Order Open the View Parts Order Page to View Detail Open the VOR Inquiry Page to View Part Availability Perform Common DBS Tasks Print Parts Order Detail Submit a Parts Order View Parts Order Management Summary and Detail

To edit an ICV (Infiniti Courtesy Vehicle) exception or base eligibility: Click the line item you want to edit. Click the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. Edit the dealer number, if necessary. Note : If you edit the dealer number, DBS  automatically updates the information in the Dealer Name field. Enter the number of vehicles from the dealership's vehicle inventory that are expected to be used for courtesy vehicle service during the time period entered. Use the calendars provided to select the start and end date for the exception or base eligibility. From the Base Eligibility / Exception drop-down list, select "Base Eligibility" to record an estimate of the number of vehicles which may be needed for courtesy vehicle service, or select "Exception" to record the number of vehicles the dealership has placed into courtesy vehicle service. Select whether or not this ICV exception is active. Move your cursor over the Action icon. From the Action menu, click the Save menu option to confirm the changes you made.

To  view a repair order (RO) for a warranty claim from the Manage Warranty Claims page: Click the RO link for the desired claim. Note : The RO from which the warranty claim is derived opens in a new window. If no repair order information is available, DBS displays a message. Click the Print button to print the RO or click the Close button to return to the Manage Warranty Claim page.

To  access the Edit Parts Return page: Select the parts return you want to edit. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Edit Return  option. Note : The Edit Parts Return page appears. - OR - In the Dealer Ref # column, click the hyperlink for the parts return you want to edit. Note : If the parts return has been submitted, the View Parts Return page displays. To modify a parts return, the return must be in "New" or "Open" status.

To  access the Edit Parts Return page: Select the parts return you want to edit. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Edit Return  option. Note : The Edit Parts Return page appears. - OR - In the Dealer Ref # column, click the hyperlink for the parts return you want to edit. Note : If the parts return has been submitted, the View Parts Return page displays. To modify a parts return, the return must be in "New" or "Open" status.

View Parts Return Status Page Overview Purpose Corporate and authorized PDC users may use the View Parts Return Status page to view the parts return status for those dealerships for which they have permissions. Dealerships displayed on the View Parts Return Status depend on your PDC authorization permissions. Description The content area of the View Parts Return Status page displays the following sections: Filter  - The Filter section allows you to search for and customize the list of dealerships displayed in the Dealer List section. Although you can enter any search or filter criteria desired, only those dealerships that fall within your PDC permissions will appear in the Dealer List section. Dealer List  - The Dealer List section displays the parts return status information for those dealerships within your PDC permissions. By default, this section displays all parts return status information for the current calendar year sorted first by dealer name and then by return due date.  Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the View Parts Return Status page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Export Information from the View Parts Return Status Page Filter the View Parts Return Status Page Page Preview

To select recipients by dealer user for geography option: Click the  Dealer Users button. Select the  Choose recipients by Geography option. Click the Next button to continue. Select an affiliate. Select a division. Note : The affiliate and division default setting is "All." Select the available state / province. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the  CTRL  key while selecting items. Click the Copy (>>) or Copy All (>>I) button to move the selection(s) to the Selected Fields list. Note: To remove a selection from the Selected Fields list, select the option and click the Remove (<<) button. Click the Next button to continue, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. Select the available eligibility options. Click the Next button to continue, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. Select the available position options. Click the Copy (>>) or Copy All (>>I) button to move the selection(s) to the Selected Fields list. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the  Back button to return to the previous window. To view your recipient selections after you select them, use the View/Print option in the Action menu.

View Overview Information   Service Landing Page Overview Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Define or Modify a Study Workflow Edit or Create Warranty Claim Workflow Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View Customer Pay Reimbursement Analysis Workflow View One Study Result Workflow View the Service Dashboard Workflow Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks View Alerts View Announcements and Other News Perform Common DBS Tasks View Alerts View Announcements and Other News

To print the RDR History Summary: Click the Print Summary button. Note : Depending on the application page, a preview of the content appears or a File Download dialog box appears. If a preview appears, click the Print button, or click Close to close the preview without printing. Note : Continue with the printing procedures applicable for your location. - Or - If a dialog box appears, click the Open or Save buttons, or click the Cancel button to close without opening or saving. Note : Continue with the procedures for viewing or printing PDF files applicable at your location.

The Notifications function is currently disabled per Nissan request. You can create and edit notifications, but they will not be sent unless the functionality is restored. View Overview Information Create or Edit a Notification Page Overview Create or Edit a Notification Workflow Perform Tasks Create or Edit a Notification Perform Common  DBS Tasks Select Dealer Users by Geography Select Dealer Users by Hierarchy Select Dealer Users by Input a Dealer Select Internal Users by Geography Select Internal Users by Hierarchy Create or Edit a Notification Perform Common  DBS Tasks Select Dealer Users by Geography Select Dealer Users by Hierarchy Select Dealer Users by Input a Dealer Select Internal Users by Geography Select Internal Users by Hierarchy

To access My Profile: Click the My Profile link. Your profile contains default settings for language, time zone, date format, and cell phone information. It is important you maintain your cell phone information to ensure you receive SMS (text message) notifications.

Create Study Page Overview Purpose Use the Create Study page to define or modify a study that integrates appointment and repair order (RO) data collected by the  Dealer Business System (DBS)  from dealers. Note : This page is available to internal users only. Description The content area of the Create Study page displays the following sections: Navigation -  Enables you to select study criteria information categories Information -  Displays the following related detailed information categories according to the option selected in the Navigation section Study Basic Information Study Type Dealer Data Vehicle Serial Range Model/Year Model/Series Options/Packages/Accessories Miscellaneous Features Engine Type Engine Code Production Plant Body Type Transmission Type Manufacture Date Geography Climatic Zone States Regions Dealers Other TSB Notifications Report Tasks You can perform the following tasks from or on the Create Study page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Create or Modify a Study Create or Modify a Study   Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Create Study page. Create or Modify a Study Workflow Page Preview

To search for an internal user by user ID: If necessary, select the Internal User radio button. In the User ID field, type the user's identification number. Click the Search icon.

Many dealers find it useful to export their parts return to Microsoft ®  Excel ®  so they can work with the return information while preparing parts for pick-up. To export a parts return: Click the Export button. Save or open the spreadsheet as desired following your browser-specific instructions.

View Overview Information   Change User Report Page Overview Change User in Report Writer Workflow Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks Select a User to Receive Report Definitions Perform Common DBS Tasks Select a User to Receive Report Definitions

To export the standard operation codes summary: Click the  Export button. Select the output format. Save the file to your local drive. If you filter the page before exporting, only those records that meet the filter criteria export. You can filter, sort, and print the data if you export the information to Microsoft ®  Excel ® .

View Overview Information   Standard Operation Category Page Overview  Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Perform Tasks Delete a Standard Operation Category Open the Create Standard Operation Category Page Open the Edit Standard Operation Category Page Perform Common DBS Tasks Search the Standard Operation Category Summary View the Standard Operation Category Summary and Detail Delete a Standard Operation Category Open the Create Standard Operation Category Page Open the Edit Standard Operation Category Page Perform Common DBS Tasks Search the Standard Operation Category Summary View the Standard Operation Category Summary and Detail

View Financial Statement Status Workflow  Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing the financial statement submission status.

To filter the dealer operation code summary: From the Filter by drop down list, select the desired option. As applicable, type or select a secondary filter value. Click the Search icon to view the results or click the Clear icon to clear the fields and enter new criteria. View the updated list that matches your filter criteria.

To  maintain purge rules: Type the number of days or months to store each data type before removing it from the Dealer Business System (DBS) . Note : Most data types are entered in days. If a data type requires an entry in months, the Type of Data to Purge field will include a note that indicates you enter the time in months. Click the  Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm, or click the  No  button to close the window without confirming.

7AE089FD-9D2F-4429-B05F-C8B954AA5BE6\DBS System Administrators Quick Reference Guide - Infiniti 092017.pdf

To complete the Parts section of an express warranty claim: Note : If you search for a repair order and line number, the information in the Parts section is populated with the repair order information. Add additional information as necessary. In the Part No./Part Cat. field, type the part number or a three-digit part category code. In the Req Qty field, type the quantity requested for the repair part. In the Req Amt field, type the monetary amount requested for the part. If necessary, in the Coverage 1 Code field, update the coverage code. Note : The coverage code is automatically populated based on information entered in the Claim Information section. In the Coverage 1 Amt field, enter the amount covered for the part. If the coverage amount is split between or among coverage types, complete the Coverage 2 and Coverage 3 fields as appropriate. Select the PFP checkbox if you entered type "PP" in the Claim Information section to automatically populate the PFP (Primary Failed Part) field. If the primary failed part is a battery, alternator, or starter replacement parts, in the TestCode field, type the test code or GR8 code. As appropriate, click the Plus Sign to add additional parts.

View Overview Information   Edit or Create  Warranty Claim Page Overview Create or Edit a Warranty Claim Workflow Perform Tasks About Warranty Claims: What You Need to Know Add New Claim Line from Edit/Create Warranty Claim Page   Delete a Warranty Claim from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim Page Edit Warranty Claim Complete the Claim Information Section Complete the Comments Section of a Claim Complete the Customer Section of a Claim Complete the Expenses Section of a Claim Complete the Operations Section of a Claim Complete the Parts Section of a Claim Complete the Summary Section of a Claim Look Up Part Look Up Op Code   Perform Common DBS Tasks Print Warranty Claim Submit Warranty Claim Use the Quick Jump Menu Validate Warranty Claim View Dealer Claim Administration Limits View NSH View Repair Order View the Claim Activity Section of a Claim View the History Section of a Claim About Warranty Claims: What You Need to Know Add New Claim Line from Edit/Create Warranty Claim Page   Delete a Warranty Claim from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim Page Edit Warranty Claim Complete the Claim Information Section Complete the Comments Section of a Claim Complete the Customer Section of a Claim Complete the Expenses Section of a Claim Complete the Operations Section of a Claim Complete the Parts Section of a Claim Complete the Summary Section of a Claim View the Claim Activity Section of a Claim View the History Section of a Claim Look Up Part Look Up Op Code   Perform Common DBS Tasks Print Warranty Claim Submit Warranty Claim Use the Quick Jump Menu Validate Warranty Claim View NSH View Repair Order

View Overview Information Returns and Accrual Information Page Overview Perform Tasks Perform Common  DBS  Tasks Print the Returns and Accrual Information Page View Returns and Accrual Information

RDR History Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing Retail Delivery Reporting (RDR) history. Related Workflows The following workflows may have similar tasks in common with the Viewing RDR History Workflow. Report Sale of a Vehicle Workflow

Note : This task applies to internal users only. To grant or remove access to a Star Web Service: Show the Star Web Service section, if collapsed. Note : To show the Star Web Service section, click the  +  icon in the section header. Expand the section(s). Note : To expand all items in the section, click the expand all link in the section header. Select or clear the item(s). Note : When you select or clear a checkbox at a higher hierarchy level, all items under that level are selected or cleared. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm, or click the  No  button to close the window without confirming. The function tree displays permission options in hierarchical order, starting with the menu items at the top and ending with the specific functional items at the bottom.

Note : This task applies to internal users only. To grant or remove access to a Star Web Service: Show the Star Web Service section, if collapsed. Note : To show the Star Web Service section, click the  +  icon in the section header. Expand the section(s). Note : To expand all items in the section, click the expand all link in the section header. Select or clear the item(s). Note : When you select or clear a checkbox at a higher hierarchy level, all items under that level are selected or cleared. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm, or click the  No  button to close the window without confirming. The function tree displays permission options in hierarchical order, starting with the menu items at the top and ending with the specific functional items at the bottom.

Dealer Summary Page Overview Purpose Use the Dealer Summary page to select a dealer for which to set permissions and then open the appropriate page to allow you to view, set up or edit the permissions for the selected dealer. You may also use the Dealer Summary page to open the appropriate page to allow you to view or edit dealer information. Description The content area of the Dealer Summary page displays the following sections: Filter By  - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria  (internal users only)  Show Active Dealer and Inactive Dealer button - Allows you to toggle between active dealers only or active and inactive dealers (internal users only) Page Navigation - Allows you to navigate from page to page, if multiple pages exist   Dealer Summary List  -  Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Dealer Summary page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Filter Dealer Summary Open the Edit Dealer Information Page Open the Edit Dealer Permissions Page Open the User Summary to Search for a User Open the View Dealer Information Page Open the View Dealer Permissions Page View Dealer Summary Filter Dealer Summary Open the Edit Dealer Information Page Open the Edit Dealer Permissions Page Open the User Summary to Search for a User Open the View Dealer Information Page Open the View Dealer Permissions Page View the Dealer Summary Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Dealer Summary page. View Dealer Information or Permissions Workflow Edit Dealer Information Workflow Edit Dealer Permissions Workflow Page Preview

Generate a Report Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow generate a personalized report using Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow View a Host Report Workflow

Generate a Report Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow generate a personalized report using Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow View a Host Report Workflow

Generate a Report Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow generate a personalized report using Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow View a Host Report Workflow

Generate a Report Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow generate a personalized report using Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow View a Host Report Workflow

Generate a Report Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow generate a personalized report using Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow View a Host Report Workflow

To  search the standard operation category summary, from the Service tab, select Standard Operation Category : From the Search by drop-down list, select a filter option. Type or select a secondary filter value, and then click the  Search icon. View the categories that meet the selected criteria. Note: To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the Clear icon.

To view, print, or email Window Sticker from the Inventory Search page: Note : The Window Sticker is also referred to as Vehicle Pricing Sticker by Nissan Canada, Inc. (NCI) . Conduct an inventory search. Select a vehicle. From the Action Menu, select the  Window Sticker  option. View the the Window Sticker. To  print the Window Sticker, click the Print icon. To  email the Window Sticker, click the Email button at the bottom of the Window Sticker. Note : A window opens for you to address the email. Type the recipient's email address in the Receiver Address field. Type a subject in the Subject field. Click the  Send button. You must have Adobe ® Reader ® (.pdf) installed on your computer to view the Window Sticker. Use the standard functionality available in Adobe ® Reader ® (.pdf) to print or email the Window Sticker.

Create or Edit Calendar Event Page Overview Purpose Use the Create or Edit Calendar Event page to create or edit event calendar items. Description The content area of the Create or Edit Calendar Event page displays the following sections: Event Details - Allows you to type and format the event text and determine the event date and time Settings - Allows you to determine the display language for the event Recipient - Allows you to select the internal and dealer users who will be able to view the event Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Create or Edit Calendar Event page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Create or Edit an Event Select Recipients Create or Edit an Event Select Recipients   Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Create or Edit Event page. Create or Edit a Calendar Event Workflow Page Preview

To view the National Service History (NSH) for a vehicle in a study: In the VIN column, click the VIN link for the desired vehicle. Note : You may need to scroll to the right to view the VIN column. View the NSH for the vehicle. Note : To expand a section, click the plus sign beside the name of the section. To collapse a section, click the minus sign. Note : To print the NSH, click the Print button. To close, click the Close button.

To  look up an operation (Op) code: At the end of the  Operation Code field, click the Lookup  icon. Note : An Infiniti Search page opens. The model information from the warranty claim is carried over from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page. Follow the external application instructions for finding the operation code.

To  look up an operation (Op) code: At the end of the  Operation Code field, click the Lookup  icon. Note : An Infiniti Search page opens. The model information from the warranty claim is carried over from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page. Follow the external application instructions for finding the operation code.

To  complete the Vehicle section of an RDR: Select a deal. Note :  If you selected a vehicle that has a status of "Deal Booked" or "Deal Open", the RDR Vehicle page displays with the data fields pre-populated with the information from your DMS. Correct or provide information, as needed. Select the type of sale. In the Sale Date field, use the calendar to select the desired date. Select the salesperson. Select the F&I manager. Indicate the language. Select the state or province of the dealer. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. A  will display for any missing or incorrect data. Correct all errors before submitting the RDR. Complete the Customer section of the RDR. Click  here  for more information. Complete the Finance section of the RDR, if necessary. Click here for more information. It is incredibly important that you verify and correct all RDR data before submission. You cannot modify a submitted RDR.

To  add a part to the VOR Inquiry list: Type the part number. - OR - Perform a part lookup. Note : Click here for information on how to look up a part. Type the quantity. Note : Part quantity must not exceed 25. Click the Add button. Note : The system adds the part to the VOR Inquiry list. Note : Click the Clear button to reset the search criteria. Note : Parts with a  icon indicate that part ordering is restricted for this part. You must place an SVC order to request this part. VOR Inquiry, also referred to as PDC Inquiry, allows you to inquire on part availability at parts distribution centers -- giving you the ability to create cost effective orders. After you perform the inquiry, select the parts to be added to your order. The system displays error messages for the following: invalid part numbers, j code part numbers, superseded part numbers, and duplicate part numbers.

Note :Warning messages are displayed with an   icon. Error messages are displayed with an   icon. These symbols for warning and error messages display on many pages in DBS . To display error or warning messages: Move your cursor over the Warning or Alert/Error icon. Note : Warranty claims with errors cannot be submitted until the errors are corrected. Claims with warnings may still be submitted. Review the information that appears in the alert message window. Note : For warranty claims, if more than 5 errors exist on the claim, "more" displays at the end of the error list.

Reports Introduction    Description The  Dealer Business System (DBS) provides access to Host (system-generated) reports, as well as custom-defined reports created in Report Writer. You can view and print the Host reports at any time. With Report Writer, you can define and generate reports to meet your needs. Report Writer also allows you to modify or copy your report definitions and transfer the definitions to other users. Note : The items you see in the menu tabs and menu links vary based on your permissions. If you need to request changes to your permissions, please contact your dealership's System Administrator. You can find the System Administrator(s) for you dealership by viewing your profile. For more information, click  here . The Reports menu in DBS  help is unique in that it appears in every section of the help system because the Reports menu options are available from each menu tab. When you first begin using DBS  and the DBS  help system, we recommend that you review the help system menu and then view the page overview, workflow, and task information for the tasks you will be performing in DBS .

Reports Introduction    Description The  Dealer Business System (DBS) provides access to Host (system-generated) reports, as well as custom-defined reports created in Report Writer. You can view and print the Host reports at any time. With Report Writer, you can define and generate reports to meet your needs. Report Writer also allows you to modify or copy your report definitions and transfer the definitions to other users. Note : The items you see in the menu tabs and menu links vary based on your permissions. If you need to request changes to your permissions, please contact your dealership's System Administrator. You can find the System Administrator(s) for you dealership by viewing your profile. For more information, click  here . The Reports menu in DBS  help is unique in that it appears in every section of the help system because the Reports menu options are available from each menu tab. When you first begin using DBS  and the DBS  help system, we recommend that you review the help system menu and then view the page overview, workflow, and task information for the tasks you will be performing in DBS .

Reports Introduction    Description The  Dealer Business System (DBS) provides access to Host (system-generated) reports, as well as custom-defined reports created in Report Writer. You can view and print the Host reports at any time. With Report Writer, you can define and generate reports to meet your needs. Report Writer also allows you to modify or copy your report definitions and transfer the definitions to other users. Note : The items you see in the menu tabs and menu links vary based on your permissions. If you need to request changes to your permissions, please contact your dealership's System Administrator. You can find the System Administrator(s) for you dealership by viewing your profile. For more information, click  here . The Reports menu in DBS  help is unique in that it appears in every section of the help system because the Reports menu options are available from each menu tab. When you first begin using DBS  and the DBS  help system, we recommend that you review the help system menu and then view the page overview, workflow, and task information for the tasks you will be performing in DBS .

Reports Introduction    Description The  Dealer Business System (DBS) provides access to Host (system-generated) reports, as well as custom-defined reports created in Report Writer. You can view and print the Host reports at any time. With Report Writer, you can define and generate reports to meet your needs. Report Writer also allows you to modify or copy your report definitions and transfer the definitions to other users. Note : The items you see in the menu tabs and menu links vary based on your permissions. If you need to request changes to your permissions, please contact your dealership's System Administrator. You can find the System Administrator(s) for you dealership by viewing your profile. For more information, click  here . The Reports menu in DBS  help is unique in that it appears in every section of the help system because the Reports menu options are available from each menu tab. When you first begin using DBS  and the DBS  help system, we recommend that you review the help system menu and then view the page overview, workflow, and task information for the tasks you will be performing in DBS .

Reports Introduction    Description The  Dealer Business System (DBS) provides access to Host (system-generated) reports, as well as custom-defined reports created in Report Writer. You can view and print the Host reports at any time. With Report Writer, you can define and generate reports to meet your needs. Report Writer also allows you to modify or copy your report definitions and transfer the definitions to other users. Note : The items you see in the menu tabs and menu links vary based on your permissions. If you need to request changes to your permissions, please contact your dealership's System Administrator. You can find the System Administrator(s) for you dealership by viewing your profile. For more information, click  here . The Reports menu in DBS  help is unique in that it appears in every section of the help system because the Reports menu options are available from each menu tab. When you first begin using DBS  and the DBS  help system, we recommend that you review the help system menu and then view the page overview, workflow, and task information for the tasks you will be performing in DBS .

View Overview Information   Contact Us Page Overview   Perform Tasks Contact the DBS Help Desk by Email Contact the DBS Help Desk by Phone Perform Common DBS Tasks Contact the DBS Help Desk by Email Contact the DBS Help Desk by Phone Perform Common DBS Tasks

To  access the Edit Alerts page: Select an alert. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit  option.

The updated user experience allows users to more quickly accomplish tasks in DBS . Pages will migrate to the new user experience over several months, and announcements will be made as new pages are made available. To use the new features of DBS : The new item entry area represents a shift in the way DBS  functions. You will no longer have to migrate from the summary page to a secondary page to edit or create new items. Instead, you will be able to add or update one or more items in the summary list and then save all of your changes at once. A new drop-down list of pages allows you to quickly navigate directly to the page you need when more than one page is available. Filter content using drop-downs and text entry fields. Note : Click here for more information on how to filter the Manage Host Report page. Click and drag a column header to a new location, then drop it in place to customize the summary area display. Click and drag the line between columns to change the column width.

Alerts Page Overview Purpose Use the Alerts page to review the list of alerts you have the authority to act upon based on your user profile and security settings. The alerts you created and any alerts created by those you have surrogate authority for display in the summary view. Description The content area of the Alerts page displays the following sections: Filter by  - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Summary - Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Alerts page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Change the Status of an Alert Copy an Alert Delete an Alert Filter the Alerts Summary Open the Create Alerts Page Open the Edit Alerts Page View Alerts Summary View or Print Alerts Detail   Change the Status of an Alert Copy an Alert Delete an Alert Filter the Alerts Summary Open the Create Alerts Page Open the Edit Alerts Page View Alerts Summary View or Print Alerts Detail   Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Alerts page. Create or Edit an Alert Workflow Page Preview

Workflows provide an overview of a process related to tasks performed in DBS . Each workflow provides users with a quick way to see how tasks are related to each other, and to easily navigate to each task in the process. To use the DBS  Help workflows: There are two ways to access a workflow in DBS  Help: Click the link for the workflow in the Table of Contents panel on the right side of the help window, or click the Process tab when it appears within a help topic to access the associated workflow(s). Each box on the workflow graphic show a required or optional task that may be performed to complete the process. Each box is linked tot he corresponding help topic where you can find additional information and how to steps. Click the link for the task you want to perform. To return to the workflow, click the Back button in your browser, or click the Back button in the help system.

To export RDR History information: Click the  Export button. Select the Microsoft ® Excel ® output format. Save the file to your local drive. If you filter the page before exporting, only those records that meet the filter criteria export. You can filter, sort, and print the data if you export the RDR History information to Microsoft ® Excel ®

To  inquire on parts availability for the parts in the VOR Inquiry list: Add one or more parts to the VOR Inquiry list. Click the Inquiry button. Note : For each part on the VOR Inquiry list, the system displays the shipped part, available quantity, backorder quantity, and the associated VOR.

To view a report definition: View each section on the View Report page. Note : You cannot change any information on the View Report page. When you have finished viewing the definition, click the Cancel button. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.

View Dealer Permissions Page Overview Purpose Use the View Dealer Permissions page to view permissions for a specific dealer. Description The content area of the View Dealer Permissions page displays the following sections: Quick Jump menu - Appears on the left-hand side of the page. The Quick Jump menu allows you to jump from section to section without scrolling. Permission Function Tree - Appears on the right-hand side of the page. By default, the function tree displays the Menu section. The Quick Jump menu allows you to show or hide more sections, including Host Reports, Report Writer and Star Web Services. Cancel button - Returns you to the Dealer Summary page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the View Dealer Permissions page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Perform Common  DBS Tasks Use the Quick Jump Menu View Dealer Permissions Perform Common DBS Tasks Use the Quick Jump Menu View Dealer Permissions   Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflow are performed on the View Dealer Permissions page. View Dealer Permissions Workflow Page Preview

How to Access Window Stickers Quick Reference Guide The How to Access Window Stickers Quick Reference Guide provides information on how to access the vehicle window sticker from the Vehicle Inventory, Inventory Search, and National Service History pages in DBS . Click here to download the How to Access Window Stickers Quick Reference Guide.

How to Access Window Stickers Quick Reference Guide The How to Access Window Stickers Quick Reference Guide provides information on how to access the vehicle window sticker from the Vehicle Inventory, Inventory Search, and National Service History pages in DBS . Click here to download the How to Access Window Stickers Quick Reference Guide.

How to Access Window Stickers Quick Reference Guide The How to Access Window Stickers Quick Reference Guide provides information on how to access the vehicle window sticker from the Vehicle Inventory, Inventory Search, and National Service History pages in DBS . Click here to download the How to Access Window Stickers Quick Reference Guide.

To view the accrual adjustment history for a dealer: In the Dealer List section, select the row for the dealer you want to view. Click the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View Accrual Adjustment History option. Note : The accrual adjustment history information displays in a new window. Click the Close button to return to the Manage Part Return Schedule page.

To  access the Edit Position Permissions page: Select the position. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Edit Permissions  option. Note : The Edit Position Permissions page appears.

SVC Part Orders Transferred in a Buy/Sell The SVC Part Orders Transferred in a Buy/Sell Quick Reference Guide provides information on how to process pending SVC parts orders during a buy/sell or dealer closing. Click here to download the SVC Part Orders Transferred in a Buy/Sell Quick Reference Guide.

SVC Part Orders Transferred in a Buy/Sell The SVC Part Orders Transferred in a Buy/Sell Quick Reference Guide provides information on how to process pending SVC parts orders during a buy/sell or dealer closing. Click here to download the SVC Part Orders Transferred in a Buy/Sell Quick Reference Guide.

View Overview Information   View Full ASR Data Page Overview View Full Automatic Stock Replenishment Data Workflow Perform Tasks Add Multiple Parts to an ASR Search Request Look Up a Part Perform Common DBS Tasks Print Full ASR Data View Full ASR Data

Note : The Validate Warranty Claim function is available from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and Express Entry Warranty claim pages. To  validate a warranty claim: In the lower-right corner of the page, click the  Validate button. Note : DBS validates if the claim information includes the required fields: VIN, Repair Order, Line Number, Odometer, Open Date, Close Date, and Claim Type. DBS displays warnings or error messages if it detects any warnings or errors in the warranty claim. Note : The Validate action does not save your warranty claim. Correct any errors as needed and validate the claim again. The Submit button is activated after DBS validates a claim without errors. After DBS validates a claim without error, the Submit button is activated.

Note : The Validate Warranty Claim function is available from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and Express Entry Warranty claim pages. To  validate a warranty claim: In the lower-right corner of the page, click the  Validate button. Note : DBS validates if the claim information includes the required fields: VIN, Repair Order, Line Number, Odometer, Open Date, Close Date, and Claim Type. DBS displays warnings or error messages if it detects any warnings or errors in the warranty claim. Note : The Validate action does not save your warranty claim. Correct any errors as needed and validate the claim again. The Submit button is activated after DBS validates a claim without errors. After DBS validates a claim without error, the Submit button is activated.

Note : The Validate Warranty Claim function is available from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and Express Entry Warranty claim pages. To  validate a warranty claim: In the lower-right corner of the page, click the  Validate button. Note : DBS validates if the claim information includes the required fields: VIN, Repair Order, Line Number, Odometer, Open Date, Close Date, and Claim Type. DBS displays warnings or error messages if it detects any warnings or errors in the warranty claim. Note : The Validate action does not save your warranty claim. Correct any errors as needed and validate the claim again. The Submit button is activated after DBS validates a claim without errors. After DBS validates a claim without error, the Submit button is activated.

The Notifications function is currently disabled per Nissan request. You can create and edit notifications, but they will not be sent unless the functionality is restored. To  access the Create Notification page: Click the Create button.

Apply any overall search criteria first. You must accept the usage agreement any time you want to click the Search button, so if you search first and then apply search or filter criteria, you are duplicating effort. For the best results, select only one filter in the header area. To search for information on the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report page: If desired, from the Campaign Type drop-down list, select a campaign type. If desired, from the Campaign Group drop-down list, select a campaign group. If desired, from the Active Safety Recalls drop-down list, select a specific safety recall. In the Agreement section, select the Click this box to accept the Agreement checkbox. Click the Search button. To further limit the results displayed, begin typing in one of the search boxes in the Summary section. Note : The summary results update automatically as you type to display only those results which contained the characters entered.

View Overview Information   Privacy Page Overview   Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks View Privacy Information Perform Common DBS Tasks View Privacy Information

VOR Inquiry Page Overview Purpose VOR Inquiry allows you to inquire on part availability at parts distribution centers -- giving you the ability to create cost effective orders. After you perform the inquiry, select the parts to be added to your order. During the inquiry, you can select part(s) from the inquiry list and transfer the selected parts to create an order. VOR Inquiry, also referred to as PDC Inquiry, allows you to view and filter a list of VOR orders. Access the VOR Inquiry page by clicking the VOR Inquiry button located on the Parts Order Management Page. Description The content area of the VOR Inquiry page displays the following sections: VOR Inquiry - Allows you to specify or search for part numbers to consider before performing a VOR inquiry VOR Inquiry List - Lists the part numbers that meet your search criteria Buttons - Allow you to perform functions, such as inquire on part availability or select parts to place on order Filter by  - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria VOR Orders - Lists the VOR orders that meet your search criteria Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the VOR Inquiry page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Add a Part to the VOR Inquiry List Add a Part by Order Number Delete a Part from the VOR Inquiry List Inquire on Parts Availability Select Parts to Place on Order Filter VOR Orders View VOR Order Detail Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the VOR Inquiry page. VOR Inquiry Workflow View VOR Order Detail Workflow Page Preview

To view the amounts paid on an approved warranty claim: If necessary, display the list of approved claims. Click the hyperlink in the Amount Paid column. When you have finished reviewing the payment details, click the Close button to return to the Manage Warranty Claim page.

To  select parts to place on order: Select the checkbox for each part you want to order. Click the Order button. Note : The system opens the Create Parts Order page and the selected parts appear in the Parts Order Detail section. VOR Inquiry, also referred to as PDC Inquiry, allows you to inquire on part availability at parts distribution centers -- giving you the ability to create cost effective orders. After you perform the inquiry, select the parts to be added to your order.

To  view a submitted parts return: Review the part returns information. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. Click the Close button to close the window.

MRW: R3 Internal user only View Full ASR Data Page Overview Purpose Use the View Full Automatic Stock Replenishment (ASR) Data page to view or print selected data from the full ASR data file for a specified Infiniti dealer. ASR data includes parts activity that affects inventory such as counter ticket sales, work order sales, returns, orders, and adjustments. ASR data is collected daily for each Infiniti dealer to calculate Best Reorder Points (BRP) and Best Stocking Level (BSL). The content area of the View Full ASR Data page displays the following sections: Request criteria - Allows you to specify one or more part numbers to view the full ASR data file information available View Full ASR File Data  - Displays the full ASR data based on the part number(s) + and - icons - Allows you to show or hide part detail Reports button  - Allows you to generate related reports Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the View Full ASR Data page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Add Multiple Parts to an ASR Search Request Look Up a Part Print Parts ASR Data View Full ASR Data Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the View Full ASR Data page. View Full Automatic Stock Replenishment Data Workflow Page Preview

The Notifications function is currently disabled per Nissan request. You can create and edit notifications, but they will not be sent unless the functionality is restored. To view or print the notification detail: Select the notification for which you want to view or print detail. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. Select the  View/Print option. Note : The View Details window appears. To print, click the Print button. To close, click the Close button. Use the View/Print option to view the contents and recipients of a notification you have created.

Note : This task applies to dealer users only. There are two ways to search for a dealer user - by user ID, or by name. See the Step by Step tab in full help for complete information. Searching for a dealer user by user ID is the quickest way to find a user because it produces the fewest and most specific results. To search for a dealer user by user ID: In the User ID field, type a full or partial user ID. Click the  Search  icon. Note : To remove search criteria, click the  Clear  icon.

Vehicle Inventory Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing vehicle inventory data at the dealerships. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Vehicle Inventory workflow. Report the Sale of a Vehicle (RDR) Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow

View Overview Information   Monitor User Status Page Overview Perform Tasks Monitor User Status Perform Common  DBS Tasks Monitor User Status Perform Common  DBS Tasks

Filter the data on the RO Work in Process page before exporting to export only the filtered results. To export RO work in process page information: Click the Export button. Click the Excel option. Open, save, or print the file in  Microsoft ®  Excel ® .

View Overview Information   Administration Landing Page Overview Configure DSP STAR Web Services Workflow Create or Edit an Alert Workflow Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow Create or Edit a Calendar Event Workflow Create or Edit a Notification Workflow Edit Dealer Information Workflow Search for Transactions Workflow Set Up or Edit Position Permissions Workflow Set Up or Edit User Permissions Workflow View Dealer Information or Permissions Workflow View Position Permissions Workflow View User Permissions Workflow Perform Tasks Perform Common  DBS Tasks View Alerts View Announcements and Other News Perform Common  DBS Tasks View Alerts View Announcements and Other News

View Overview Information Create, Modify, or Replicate Report Page Overview Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Workflow Perform Tasks Adjust the Report Column Widths Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Perform Common DBS  Tasks Select the Criteria Operators Select the Fields for a Report Select the Report Fields to be Sorted Select the Report Fields to be Totaled Adjust the Report Column Widths Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Perform Common DBS  Tasks Select the Criteria Operators Select the Fields for a Report Select the Report Fields to be Sorted Select the Report Fields to be Totaled

To delete a part from an order: Select the part you want to delete. Move your cursor over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. If a confirmation message appears, click the Yes button to confirm the deletion, or the No button to cancel the deletion. Note : To prevent the confirmation from appearing in the future, click the  Do not ask me again  checkbox. Click the Save button. To delete a part from a parts order, the order must be in "New" or "Open" status.

To use the breadcrumbs: Click on the portion of the breadcrumb to which you want to return. Every page includes a path of breadcrumbs that begins with a landing page and builds on each subsequent application you access or click on within that functional area. When you select another functional tab, the breadcrumb resets. Internal users who have selected a dealer will have different results using the breadcrumb. When an internal user goes through the dealer selection steps before opening an application page, the breadcrumb takes you back to the dealer selection page. To return to the content page, you may have to click the Cancel button.

Only graphic changed needed - icons for glass and broom To transfer a report definition: In the report summary section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the  Action menu, select the Transfer option. Note : The Transfer Report page appears. From the list of users, select a user.  Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Rename window appears. Type a new report name. Click the  OK button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. If you transfer a report definition, control of the definition is given to the target user. You can transfer report definitions to other users within your dealership. Dealer administrators and authorized internal users can transfer reports to other authorized users.

Only graphic changed needed - icons for glass and broom To transfer a report definition: In the report summary section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the  Action menu, select the Transfer option. Note : The Transfer Report page appears. From the list of users, select a user.  Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Rename window appears. Type a new report name. Click the  OK button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. If you transfer a report definition, control of the definition is given to the target user. You can transfer report definitions to other users within your dealership. Dealer administrators and authorized internal users can transfer reports to other authorized users.

Only graphic changed needed - icons for glass and broom To transfer a report definition: In the report summary section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the  Action menu, select the Transfer option. Note : The Transfer Report page appears. From the list of users, select a user.  Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Rename window appears. Type a new report name. Click the  OK button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. If you transfer a report definition, control of the definition is given to the target user. You can transfer report definitions to other users within your dealership. Dealer administrators and authorized internal users can transfer reports to other authorized users.

Only graphic changed needed - icons for glass and broom To transfer a report definition: In the report summary section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the  Action menu, select the Transfer option. Note : The Transfer Report page appears. From the list of users, select a user.  Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Rename window appears. Type a new report name. Click the  OK button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. If you transfer a report definition, control of the definition is given to the target user. You can transfer report definitions to other users within your dealership. Dealer administrators and authorized internal users can transfer reports to other authorized users.

Only graphic changed needed - icons for glass and broom To transfer a report definition: In the report summary section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the  Action menu, select the Transfer option. Note : The Transfer Report page appears. From the list of users, select a user.  Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Rename window appears. Type a new report name. Click the  OK button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. If you transfer a report definition, control of the definition is given to the target user. You can transfer report definitions to other users within your dealership. Dealer administrators and authorized internal users can transfer reports to other authorized users.

To change the status of an announcement: Select an announcement. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Change Status  option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm, or click the  No  button to close the window without confirming. If the announcement status is "Approved", changing the status updates the announcement status to "Needs Approval." If the announcement status is "Needs Approval", changing the status updates the announcement status to "Approved." An announcement will not display until it is in an approved status AND the scheduled time has passed. You cannot change the status of a published communication item. You must delete the item if you want to remove it from display.

To  filter the position summary: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. View the positions that meet the selected criteria. Note : To remove the filter, click the Clear button and make another selection.

To search for information on the Parts Return Summary page: In one of the search fields, type one or more characters contained within the information you want to find. Note : DBS  automatically updates the summary display as you type to show only those items which contain the characters you entered. When available, use a quick filter to filter a column based on the available options. To sort the data, click the sort icons to sort the information in ascending order. Click the sort icons a second time to sort the data in descending order.

To create an hourly extract of repair order data for a study: In the File Type field, select the checkbox for each output format desired. Note : For best results when exporting large volumes of data, select the "CSV" checkbox. In the Date Range field, select the "Hourly" radio button. From the Start Time drop-down list, select the hour at which the first hourly report will be sent for the selected days. DBS will send data from the previous hour at the selected time on the selected days. From the End Time drop-down list, select the hour at which the last hourly report will be sent for the selected days. DBS will send data from the previous hour at the selected time on the selected days, but will send no further reports until the next report cycle start time. In the Report Days section, select the checkbox for each day where reporting is desired. Use the Available Options list and arrows provided to determine the fields that will appear on the report. Click the Schedule button. To view instructions for completing other report types, open full help, and then click the Details button.

To search the site: Select the Search Site field. Note: To go directly to the Search page, click the Search icon. Type the text for which you want to search. Press the Enter key. Note: The Search Results page appears and lists the results for the criteria you entered. You can view results on this page or go to the Advanced Search function to enter additional criteria. For more information about the Advanced Search function, click here . The search function only searches the following items: menu items, and approved announcements, alerts, calendar events. The criteria you enter searches both the title and content areas of approved alerts, announcements and calendar events. Search results display in the following order: menu links, alerts, announcements, calendar events. 

Note : The fields required in the Claim Information section depend on the claim type selected. To complete the Claim Information section of a claim on either the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page or the Quick Entry Warranty Claim page: In the Open Date field, the calendar to select the date the repair order (RO) was opened at the dealership. In the Close Date field, use the calendar to select the date the work for this RO was completed. From the Line Type drop-down list, select a claim type. Note : See the Step by Step tab in full help for additional detail. From the Coverage drop-down list, select a coverage code. From the Symptom drop-down list, select a symptom code that identifies what the customer said was wrong with the vehicle. From the Diagnosis drop-down list, select a diagnosis code that identifies what the technician found wrong with the vehicle during diagnosis. From the Advisor drop-down list, select a service consultant name. In the Campaign Claim area, in the ID field, type the campaign claim identification number. In the Sales Tax area, in the Requested Amount field, type the requested sales tax amount. If the part is under warranty, select the Part Warranty checkbox. In the Document (Invoice) Number field, type the invoice number as proof of purchase of the replacement part. In the Odometer field, type the odometer reading when the replacement part was purchased. Note : The odometer reading must be within 12,000 miles or 20,000 kilometers of the current odometer reading. Note : The date must be within 12 months of the RO open date.. If the vehicle was purchased in one country but is being serviced in another country, provide information in the  Purchase Country , Model Year ,  Transmission , Trim Level , and In Service fields.   In the Deductible area, from the Requested Code drop-down list, select either "CP" (Customer Pay) or "DI" (Dealer Internal) pay. Note : The deductible is only used on one line per visit of a repair order. In the Requested Amount field, type the requested deductible amount. Click the Plus Sign (+) and continue to add deductible amounts as applicable. Note : DBS displays the list of deductibles. The deductible amount appears in negative. Note : Click here for instructions on how to complete the Parts section. DBS displays errors and warning messages in the Alerts area at the bottom of the Claim Information section.

Note : The fields required in the Claim Information section depend on the claim type selected. To complete the Claim Information section of a claim on either the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page or the Quick Entry Warranty Claim page: In the Open Date field, the calendar to select the date the repair order (RO) was opened at the dealership. In the Close Date field, use the calendar to select the date the work for this RO was completed. From the Line Type drop-down list, select a claim type. Note : See the Step by Step tab in full help for additional detail. From the Coverage drop-down list, select a coverage code. From the Symptom drop-down list, select a symptom code that identifies what the customer said was wrong with the vehicle. From the Diagnosis drop-down list, select a diagnosis code that identifies what the technician found wrong with the vehicle during diagnosis. From the Advisor drop-down list, select a service consultant name. In the Campaign Claim area, in the ID field, type the campaign claim identification number. In the Sales Tax area, in the Requested Amount field, type the requested sales tax amount. If the part is under warranty, select the Part Warranty checkbox. In the Document (Invoice) Number field, type the invoice number as proof of purchase of the replacement part. In the Odometer field, type the odometer reading when the replacement part was purchased. Note : The odometer reading must be within 12,000 miles or 20,000 kilometers of the current odometer reading. Note : The date must be within 12 months of the RO open date.. If the vehicle was purchased in one country but is being serviced in another country, provide information in the  Purchase Country , Model Year ,  Transmission , Trim Level , and In Service fields.   In the Deductible area, from the Requested Code drop-down list, select either "CP" (Customer Pay) or "DI" (Dealer Internal) pay. Note : The deductible is only used on one line per visit of a repair order. In the Requested Amount field, type the requested deductible amount. Click the Plus Sign (+) and continue to add deductible amounts as applicable. Note : DBS displays the list of deductibles. The deductible amount appears in negative. Note : Click here for instructions on how to complete the Parts section. DBS displays errors and warning messages in the Alerts area at the bottom of the Claim Information section.

When the System Error page displays, DBS  has encountered an unrecoverable error, and your transaction has not been processed. You may need to contact the help desk for support, or refresh your browser and try your transaction again. To help the application developers and system administrators to swiftly restore normal service, please follow these steps to report the system error: Click the Show Stack Trace button to display the trace information for the transaction, associated interface calls, and service messages. This information is used to help the Support team determine what went wrong, and how to correct it. In the Steps to reproduce the issue field, type information to help the Support team reproduce the issue and determine exactly what is causing the error. Click the Submit button to report the error to the Support team. If desired, click the Return to the home page link to return to DBS , or log out of DBS . Most users will also need to contact the help desk for assistance in resolving issues related to this transaction. Contact the DBS  help desk by telephone , email , or live chat . Contact the DBS  help desk by telephone , email , or live chat .

Note : This task applies to internal users only. There are three ways to search for internal users: by name, by user ID, and by hierarchy. The steps for searching for an internal user by user ID appear below. The steps for searching for an internal user by name or by hierarchy are outlined on the Step by Step tab in full help. The most direct way to search for an internal user is to search by their user ID, as this produces the fewest and most specific results. To search for an internal user by ID: Click the Internal User radio button. In the User ID field, type the full or partial user ID. Click the Search icon. Note : To remove search criteria, click the Clear icon.

To  access the Summary Page Display Configuration window: Click the Configure icon.

To  access the Summary Page Display Configuration window: Click the Configure icon.

To  access the Summary Page Display Configuration window: Click the Configure icon.

To  access the Summary Page Display Configuration window: Click the Configure icon.

To  access the Summary Page Display Configuration window: Click the Configure icon.

To  access the Summary Page Display Configuration window: Click the Configure icon.

To  access the Summary Page Display Configuration window: Click the Configure icon.

View Overview Information   View Dealer Permissions Page Overview View Dealer Information or Permissions Workflow Perform Tasks Perform Common  DBS Tasks Use the Quick Jump Menu View Dealer Permissions Perform Common  DBS Tasks Use the Quick Jump Menu View Dealer Permissions

Note : This task applies to internal users only. To search for transactions on the Transaction Status page: In the fields provided, select or type search options to limit the summary display.  Click the Search button. To clear the search fields, click the Reset button. In the Transaction Status area, view the transactions that meet the selected criteria. Click here for information on viewing the transactions status. If you do not enter search values, DBS displays the transactions for the current date.

List of Variables: If you write a variable, please add the VARIABLE and add its DEFINITION to this list using the variable itself. ============================ Action icon Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. Active Permissions The active permissions contain a check. Alerts (section) As applicable, alert messages appear at the top of the page. These messages typically provide information that is system-critical. Announcements (section) {00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000} ASP acronym ASP Alternate Shipping Point (ASP) ASP Number Field To ship the order to your alternate shipping point (ASP), in the  ASP Number  field, type your ASP number or click the  Lookup  icon to select the ASP. ASP Number Field note 1 The ASP number may also be referred to as the wholesale code or ship to code.  ASP Number Field note 2 The format of the ASP number is ASPxx, where xx is your assigned ASP code.  Automatic Stock Replenishment (ASR) Automatic Stock Replenishment (ASR) Cancel or Save Click the  Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Cancel or OK Click the  OK button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Clear filter and search To reset the filter criteria to the default options and clear the search criteria, click the  Clear  icon. Clear Search To remove search criteria, click the  Clear  icon. Confirmation message (note). Goes in a note in the step before the confirmation step. A confirmation message appears. Confirmation (step) Click the Save button to confirm, or click the  Cancel button to close the window without confirming. Copy and Copy All Buttons Click the  Copy  button to move the selected options to the Selected box, or click the Copy All  button to move all options. Copy or Cancel (step) Click the Copy button to copy your selection, or click the Cancel button to close without copying. CPO acronyms CPO DBS acronym DBS Dealer Business System (DBS) Dealer Business System (DBS) Dealer Look Up (section) Allows you to look up a dealer code by specifying full or partial information Dealer Portal / NNAnet Dealer Portal / NNAnet.com Delete or Cancel Click the Delete button to delete, or click the Cancel button to close without deleting. Detail (section) Displays specific information for a selected record Display Only Note: You may not modify the information in this field. DMS Dealer Management System (DMS) Done or Cancel Click the  Done button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to cancel without saving. Double window icon {00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000} DSP Dealer Service Provider (DSP) Expand Hierarchy To expand the hierarchy to select specific options, click the plus sign. Expiration date field In the Expiration Date field, use the calendar to select the expiration or end date. Filter by drop-down list (step) From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. Filter by blank field (step) In the text-entry field, type a filter value, and then press the  Enter  key. Filter by (section) Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Filter grayed out If an option is not available, that option is not displayed. Function tree (section) Appears on the right-hand side of the page. The function tree contains three sections: Menu, Host Report, and Report Writer.  Function tree (step) Use the function tree to expand or collapse the nodes, as desired. Inventory Search Closes the Sales page and opens the Inventory Search page to allow the user to search dealer inventory. MAPS Acronym   MSRP Manufacturer's Suggested Retail Price. The price of vehicle including the base price and all options. Next and Back Buttons Click the Next button to continue, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. NCI Acronym NCI Nissan Canada, inc. (NCI) Nissan Canada, Inc. (NCI) Nissan Motor Acceptance Corporation (NMAC) Nissan Motor Acceptance Corporation (NMAC) Nissan North America (NNA) Nissan North America (NNA) NMAC acronym NMAC NNA Acronym NNA Note for external application_RS Note : This application is external to DBS. Note: External application Note: This application is external to DBS . Odometer The odometer reading of the vehicle at the most current inventory event. The odometer reading is reported in miles (MI) for sites in the United States or kilometers (KM) for sites in Canada. OK (button) Click the OK button. OMS Acronym OMS Only eligible vehicles display an active option for this task. Opens an External Application (link) This link opens an external application. Follow the procedures within that application to complete this task. Opens an External Application (menu option) This option opens an external application. Follow the procedures within that application to complete this task. Opens an External Application (multiple) These links open an external application. Follow the procedures within that application to complete this task. Order Backorder (Field) To accept backorders or partial shipments for the order, from the  Backorder Flag  drop-down list, select the  Yes  option. Order Backorder (Note) Changes made in the Parts Order Detail section may override this setting. Order Management System (OMS) Order Management System (OMS) Order Referral (Field) To ship the entire order to your ASP , from the Order Referral drop-down list, select the Yes option. Order Referral (Note) Changes made in the Parts Order Detail section may override this setting. Other News (section) This section displays messages that have a lower priority than messages in the Announcements section. Page navigation (section, clause to second sentence) click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow to navigate from page to page. Page navigation (section, second sentence) To view additional records, click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow to navigate from page to page. Page navigation bar Allows you to navigate from page to page, if multiple pages exist Print button (section) Allows you to print the displayed summary information.  Print button (click) Click the Print button. Print Preview (click print) On the Print Preview window, click the Print button. Printer (select) Select a printer, or set printer options, as desired. Quick Jump menu (section) Appears on the left-hand side of the page. The Quick Jump menu allows you to jump from section to section without scrolling. RDR Acronym RDR Release Date   Last Updated : August 30, 2018 requires approval checkbox If the item does not require approval, clear the Require Approval? checkbox. Reset sort and filter To reset the sort and filter options to the default view, select the Restore Default View checkbox. Results (section) Allows you to view the search result details Retail Delivery Reporting (RDR) Retail Delivery Reporting (RDR) Return to the Dealer Summary (step) To return to the Dealer Summary page, click the Cancel button. Return to the Position Summary (step) To return to the Dealer Summary page, click the Cancel button. Return to the User Summary (step) To return to the User Summary page, click the Cancel button. Save See Cancel or Save Save and Back Buttons Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the  Back button to return to the previous window. Saved Filter and Sort When you close the application, the application saves your current filter and sort selections. When you open the application again, the application automatically filters and sorts the data using the saved selections. scheduled date field In the Scheduled Date field, use the calendar to select a start date. scheduled time field If the announcement or notification must display at or after a specific time, in the Scheduled Time field, type the scheduled start time in HH:MM format.  Search by (section) Allows you to search for records that match your criteria Select model filter note All available vehicles matching the selected model appear in the Results pane. Select or clear permissions (note) When you select or clear an item at a higher hierarchy level, all items under that level are selected or cleared. Select recipient To select dealer users, click the Dealer User button. To select internal users, click the Internal User button. Ship Priority (field) From the Ship Priority drop-down list, select the ship priority, if applicable. sim modes ShowMe Mode: Displays as a movie with no user interaction required. Controls allow you to play, pause, and stop the simulation, as well as providing navigation to the previous and next steps. A progress bar displays below the controls. GuideMe Mode: Requires the user to interact with the simulation. Controls allow you to advance to the first, next, previous, or last step of the simulation. A progress bar displays below the controls. Single window icon {00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000} S Sort by (section) Allows you to sort the displayed information Sort (step) To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. Star icon {00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000} Search (button) Click the  Search  icon. Submit (button) Click the Submit button. Summary (section) Displays general information for all records on the page time Time in  Fred  is written in the 24-hour notation, where HH (00 to 23) is the number of full hours that have passed since midnight. title field In the Title field, type a title for the announcement or notification. type a date or use calendar use the calendar to select a date or type the date using the date format specified in your user profile. Upload Confirmation Note: The page displays a confirmation message when your XML file has uploaded successfully. Vehicle identification numbers (VINs) vehicle identification numbers (VINs) view page overview (PLO) View Overview Information view specific page or Go to Page (step) To view a specific page, in the Go to Page field, type a page number, and then click the Go button. VIN A 17-character code that uniquely identifies a vehicle. Yes (to confirm) or No (to cancel) Click the  Yes  button to confirm, or click the  No  button to close the window without confirming.

To  interpret the application auditing information View the User ID column to determine "who" performed a transaction. View the Application, Module, and Function columns to determine "what" page the transaction occurred on. View the Date, Time column to determine "when" a transaction occurred. View the Reference Number column for additional information about "what" occurred. Note : The Reference ID information changes based on what application, module, and function the transaction occurred in. To help you interpret the Application Auditing page, remember that this page tells you "who did what when".  A transaction is defined as a task that is performed in DBS that changes data. If a user views data but does not change anything, that is not considered a transaction, and does not display on the Application Auditing page. Except for viewing host reports which does display as a transaction on this page.

To view the invoice from the Vehicle Inventory page: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the View Invoice option. Note : The Vehicle Invoice Detail windows appears. View the invoice detail. Note : To print the vehicle inventory detail, click the Print button and follow the prompts. Note : To email the vehicle inventory detail, click the Email button and follow the prompts. To close the invoice detail window, click the Close button.  

To view the invoice from the Vehicle Inventory page: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the View Invoice option. Note : The Vehicle Invoice Detail windows appears. View the invoice detail. Note : To print the vehicle inventory detail, click the Print button and follow the prompts. Note : To email the vehicle inventory detail, click the Email button and follow the prompts. To close the invoice detail window, click the Close button.  

View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow Note: The View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing one dealer's study results that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the  Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow Manage Early Detection Studies Workflow View One Study Result Workflow

To display the warranty claims graph: To minimize the parts return summary claims graph, click the  Minus Sign (-)  at the top-left of the graph. To expand the display, click the Plus Sign (+) . Each bar in the graph identifies the return status and displays the number of claims in that category. Click the desired bar to filter the summary display to show only those returns with the selected status.

The SVC Order Management page allows you to select up to three filters to narrow the results displayed in the summary section. To filter the SVC Order Management summary: From the Filter by drop-down list, select a filter option. If a text-entry field appears, type a filter value. - OR - If a drop-down list appears, select an option from the list. Click the Search icon to search the data, or click the Refresh button if you changed the values in the secondary text entry fields. View the orders that meet the selected criteria. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the  Clear  icon.

View Overview Information Quick Entry RDR Vehicle Page Overview Report or Edit the Sale of a Vehicle Workflow Perform Tasks Delete RDR Perform Common DBS Tasks Report the Sale of a Vehicle in Inventory Using Quick Entry RDR Report the Sale of a Vehicle Not in Your Inventory Using Quick Entry RDR Complete the Vehicle Section of an RDR Complete the Customer Section of an RDR Complete the Driver Section of an RDR Complete the Finance Section of an RDR

The retrieve new user function is designed to quickly highlight those user records that have been added or changed in NNAnet. Records added or changed in NNAnet can then be immediately processed in DBS . To retrieve a list of added or updated user records: Click the Retrieve New User button. The User Summary List updates. New and changed records display a check mark in the Updated user column, and the number or records retrieved displays in blue just above the User Summary List header. Once you have retrieved the list of records, you may need to grant the users DBS  access or grant update the user's DBS  permissions. See the Related Links tab on the right for links to these tasks.

To  complete the Finance section of a used vehicle RDR: From the Finance Type drop-down list, select how the buyer will be paying for the vehicle. If you selected "Loan" or "Lease" from the Finance Type drop-down list, in the  Term (months) field, type the lease term in months.  If applicable, in the Payment Amount field, type the dollar amount of the monthly payment. Note : You may only enter numbers and a decimal point. Do not enter any other characters such as a dollar sign in this field. If applicable, in the Financing Source field, type the name of the bank or lending institution that is providing the financing for this purchase. Save and submit the RDR. Click here for more information.

Parts Aggregate Metrics Page Overview Purpose Use the Parts Aggregate Metrics page to view, print, and export parts metrics data based on search parameters you enter. Note : The Parts Aggregate Metrics page is available to internal users only. Description The content area of the Parts Aggregate Metrics page displays the following sections: Search  - The Search section at the top of the page allows you to specify the time period and locations for the aggregate parts metrics you wish to review. Search Results  - Displays the results of your search and allows you to view the aggregate parts metrics data. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Parts Aggregate Metrics page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Export Parts Aggregate Metrics Data Perform Common DBS Tasks Search for Parts Aggregate Metrics Data Page Preview

Monitor Vehicle Inventory Page Overview Purpose Use the Monitor Vehicle Inventory page to review inventory records that failed proper transmission between DBS and the NNA or NCI Host. Each transaction is expected to contain a code of add, change or delete a vehicle inventory record. DBS  processes the transmission and updates the vehicle inventory data maintained in DBS . Any transaction received that fails during the record update process is displayed on the Manage Vehicle Inventory page. Description The content area of the Manage Vehicle Inventory page displays the following sections: Search / Filter - Allows you to define search criteria to reduce the number of records displayed in the Summary section. Summary - Displays records which match the search criteria entered, and provides a link to view additional detail for an error message. Tasks Filter the Monitor Vehicle Inventory Page Look Up a Dealer from the Monitor Vehicle Inventory Page View Detail on the Monitor Vehicle Inventory Page Page Preview

To use the NSH Quick Jump menu: To move to a specific section of the page, click a section title in the menu. To show or hide all sections, click the expand all or collapse all link. To jump to the top or bottom of the page, click the top or bottom link. To close the NSH details page and return to the VIN search results, click the Exit button. To minimize the Quick Jump menu, click the collapse ( << ) icon. To expand the Quick Jump menu, click the expand  ( >>) icon. To return to the top of the page from any section, click the Top button.

View Overview Information   Parts Return Management Page Overview Manage Parts Return Workflow Perform Tasks Access the Returns and Accrual Information Page Change Warning Message Configuration (Internal Users Only) Approve a Submitted Parts Return (Internal Users Only) Delete a Parts Return Export Parts Return Management Information Filter Parts Return Management Summary Open a Submitted Parts Return Open the Edit Parts Return Page Perform Common DBS Tasks Preview a Parts Return Print Parts Return Detail Reject a Submitted Parts Return (Internal Users Only) Request Cancellation a Parts Return Submit a Parts Return View Parts Return Management Summary and Detail Access Reports Delete a Parts Return Export Parts Return Management Information Filter Parts Return Management Summary Open a Submitted Parts Return Open the Edit Parts Return Page Perform Common DBS Tasks Print Parts Return Detail Submit a Parts Return View Parts Return Management Summary and Detail

This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. DBS maintains repair order information for the body types available during the current model year and five previous model years (ten previous model years for Infiniti), beginning from the 2011 model year for both divisions. If desired, you can select one or more body types to limit the study results. To complete the Body Type section of a study: Select each body type which should be included in the study, and then use the center buttons as necessary to customize the Selected Body Types list. When you have selected all desired climatic zones, click the Save button.

To search the site map: Type all or part of the page name in the Enter Search Criteria field. Click the Search icon. Note : The search results display on a new page. The Site Map is a central location where users can access multiple screens from a single location in the DBS application. Use it as an alternate way to access the pages and application links.

Home Page Overview Purpose The Home page within the Dealer Business System (DBS)  enables you to review alerts, regional and national announcements, and key metrics through the Quick Look feature. Description The content area of the Home page displays the following items: Alerts -   As applicable, alert messages appear at the top of the page. These messages typically provide information that is system-critical. Quick Look -  Displays key metrics for the selected dealership. Announcements -   As applicable, high-priority messages appear in the Regional or National Announcements section.  When the message is no longer considered a high priority, the text automatically moves to the Other News section. Other News -   This section displays messages that have a lower priority than messages in the Announcements section. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Home page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Emulate a Dealership or User View Alerts View Announcements and Other News Emulate a Dealership or User View Alerts View Announcements and Other News Page Preview

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To filter the the Report Writer list of reports: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. Select a secondary filter value. Click the  Search  icon. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the  Clear  icon. View the reports that meet the selected criteria.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To filter the the Report Writer list of reports: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. Select a secondary filter value. Click the  Search  icon. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the  Clear  icon. View the reports that meet the selected criteria.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To filter the the Report Writer list of reports: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. Select a secondary filter value. Click the  Search  icon. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the  Clear  icon. View the reports that meet the selected criteria.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To filter the the Report Writer list of reports: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. Select a secondary filter value. Click the  Search  icon. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the  Clear  icon. View the reports that meet the selected criteria.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To filter the the Report Writer list of reports: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. Select a secondary filter value. Click the  Search  icon. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the  Clear  icon. View the reports that meet the selected criteria.

To search for a specific date: Click in the Search Specific Date field, and then use the calendar to select the desired date. Click the Search icon. Note : The event calendar updates to display the week or month that contains the date you entered.

To  view the standard operation category summary and detail, from the Service tab, select Standard Operation Category : View the list of categories. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. To select a category, click anywhere in the row that contains the category. To show detail, select a category and click the Show Standard Operation Category Detail link near the bottom of the window. Note :  To hide detail, click the Hide Standard Operation Category Detail link.

To complete the Dealer Data section of a study: By default, studies capture information about service appointments and repair orders. To limit the results displayed, in the Data Source field, select the radio button for the type of data to capture. Note : If you select the Service Appointment radio button, some study options will no longer be available, as they capture data pertaining to repair orders. If the data source includes repair orders, you can filter the data collected by warranty claim pay type by selecting one or more of the checkboxes in the Pay Type field. To further limit the data collected, you can use the filter criteria fields to customize the conditions under which data is collected for the study. For example: in the graphic above, a filter has been created to study only those vehicles with a mileage (odometer) reading of less than 50,000. To add additional filters, click the Plus sign. In the Data Source Criteria field, you can type custom query statements to search for specific statements found in the comments section of a repair order. Click the Save button. Open full help and click the Details tab for additional information on constructing custom data source criteria. Open full help and click the Details tab for additional information on constructing custom data source criteria.

To  rename a summary page display definition: Select the page definition name you want to rename. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Rename option. Note : The  Page Definition Name field is now editable. In the Page Definition Name field, type a new name or edit the existing name.   Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Save option. Note : The Page Definition Name  field is no longer editable.

To  rename a summary page display definition: Select the page definition name you want to rename. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Rename option. Note : The  Page Definition Name field is now editable. In the Page Definition Name field, type a new name or edit the existing name.   Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Save option. Note : The Page Definition Name  field is no longer editable.

To  rename a summary page display definition: Select the page definition name you want to rename. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Rename option. Note : The  Page Definition Name field is now editable. In the Page Definition Name field, type a new name or edit the existing name.   Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Save option. Note : The Page Definition Name  field is no longer editable.

To  rename a summary page display definition: Select the page definition name you want to rename. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Rename option. Note : The  Page Definition Name field is now editable. In the Page Definition Name field, type a new name or edit the existing name.   Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Save option. Note : The Page Definition Name  field is no longer editable.

To  rename a summary page display definition: Select the page definition name you want to rename. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Rename option. Note : The  Page Definition Name field is now editable. In the Page Definition Name field, type a new name or edit the existing name.   Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Save option. Note : The Page Definition Name  field is no longer editable.

To  rename a summary page display definition: Select the page definition name you want to rename. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Rename option. Note : The  Page Definition Name field is now editable. In the Page Definition Name field, type a new name or edit the existing name.   Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Save option. Note : The Page Definition Name  field is no longer editable.

To  rename a summary page display definition: Select the page definition name you want to rename. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Rename option. Note : The  Page Definition Name field is now editable. In the Page Definition Name field, type a new name or edit the existing name.   Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Save option. Note : The Page Definition Name  field is no longer editable.

Express Entry Warranty Claim Quick Reference Guide The Express Entry Warranty Claim Quick Reference Guide provides information on how to use the Express Entry Warranty Claim page; including the quick keys you can use to access each section, instructions for completing each claim section, and instructions for validating and submitting completed claims. Click here to download the Express Entry Warranty Claim Quick Reference Guide.

Express Entry Warranty Claim Quick Reference Guide The Express Entry Warranty Claim Quick Reference Guide provides information on how to use the Express Entry Warranty Claim page; including the quick keys you can use to access each section, instructions for completing each claim section, and instructions for validating and submitting completed claims. Click here to download the Express Entry Warranty Claim Quick Reference Guide.

To  grant or remove access to a specific page, action, custom field, or website: Show the Menu section, if collapsed. Note : To show the Menu section, click the  + link icon in the section header. Expand the menu, page, and associated action group, if applicable. Note : To expand all items in the section, click the expand all link in the section header. Select or clear the item(s). Note : When you select or clear a checkbox at a higher hierarchy level, all items under that level are selected or cleared. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm, or click the  No  button to close the window without confirming. The function tree displays permission options in hierarchical order, starting with the menu items at the top and ending with the specific functional items at the bottom.

To  grant or remove access to a specific page, action, custom field, or website: Show the Menu section, if collapsed. Note : To show the Menu section, click the  + link icon in the section header. Expand the menu, page, and associated action group, if applicable. Note : To expand all items in the section, click the expand all link in the section header. Select or clear the item(s). Note : When you select or clear a checkbox at a higher hierarchy level, all items under that level are selected or cleared. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm, or click the  No  button to close the window without confirming. The function tree displays permission options in hierarchical order, starting with the menu items at the top and ending with the specific functional items at the bottom.

View User Permissions Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing user permissions. Related Workflows The following workflow may have one or more tasks in common with the View User Permissions Workflow. Edit User Permissions Workflow

Note : The Submit Warranty Claim function is available from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and Express Entry Warranty Claim pages for validated warranty claims. Note : Validate a warranty claim prior to using the Submit function to ensure the claims is free of any errors that may need to be corrected. To submit a validated warranty claim for processing: Click the Submit button. Click the  Yes button to submit the claim. The Submit button is available for warranty claims that are in New, Open, or Warning status. The Submit button is also available for warranty claims that are in Error, Rejected, or Suspended-Dealer status after they have been modified.

Note : The Submit Warranty Claim function is available from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and Express Entry Warranty Claim pages for validated warranty claims. Note : Validate a warranty claim prior to using the Submit function to ensure the claims is free of any errors that may need to be corrected. To submit a validated warranty claim for processing: Click the Submit button. Click the  Yes button to submit the claim. The Submit button is available for warranty claims that are in New, Open, or Warning status. The Submit button is also available for warranty claims that are in Error, Rejected, or Suspended-Dealer status after they have been modified.

Note : The Submit Warranty Claim function is available from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and Express Entry Warranty Claim pages for validated warranty claims. Note : Validate a warranty claim prior to using the Submit function to ensure the claims is free of any errors that may need to be corrected. To submit a validated warranty claim for processing: Click the Submit button. Click the  Yes button to submit the claim. The Submit button is available for warranty claims that are in New, Open, or Warning status. The Submit button is also available for warranty claims that are in Error, Rejected, or Suspended-Dealer status after they have been modified.

To use the Quick Jump menu on a warranty claim page: To jump to the top or bottom of the page, click the top or bottom link. To move to a specific section of the page, click a section title in the menu. To show or hide all sections, click the expand all or collapse all link. To return to the top of the page from any section, click the Top  button. To collapse the Quick Jump menu, click the collapse ( << ) icon. To expand the Quick Jump menu, click the expand ( >> ) icon. To take action on a claim, click one of the claim action buttons.

To use the Quick Jump menu on a warranty claim page: To jump to the top or bottom of the page, click the top or bottom link. To move to a specific section of the page, click a section title in the menu. To show or hide all sections, click the expand all or collapse all link. To return to the top of the page from any section, click the Top  button. To collapse the Quick Jump menu, click the collapse ( << ) icon. To expand the Quick Jump menu, click the expand ( >> ) icon. To take action on a claim, click one of the claim action buttons.

To use the Quick Jump menu on a warranty claim page: To jump to the top or bottom of the page, click the top or bottom link. To move to a specific section of the page, click a section title in the menu. To show or hide all sections, click the expand all or collapse all link. To return to the top of the page from any section, click the Top  button. To collapse the Quick Jump menu, click the collapse ( << ) icon. To expand the Quick Jump menu, click the expand ( >> ) icon. To take action on a claim, click one of the claim action buttons.

To use the Quick Jump menu on a warranty claim page: To jump to the top or bottom of the page, click the top or bottom link. To move to a specific section of the page, click a section title in the menu. To show or hide all sections, click the expand all or collapse all link. To return to the top of the page from any section, click the Top  button. To collapse the Quick Jump menu, click the collapse ( << ) icon. To expand the Quick Jump menu, click the expand ( >> ) icon. To take action on a claim, click one of the claim action buttons.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To  change a report definition to public or private: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Make Public or Private option. Note : The Report Category Options window appears. Select a report category. Private - report is viewable by the user only Dealership Public - report is viewable by all authorized users in the selected dealership DBS Public - report is viewable by all authorized DBS users  Click the  Change  button to save your changes, or click the  Cancel  button to cancel without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm, or click the  No  button to close the window without confirming.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To  change a report definition to public or private: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Make Public or Private option. Note : The Report Category Options window appears. Select a report category. Private - report is viewable by the user only Dealership Public - report is viewable by all authorized users in the selected dealership DBS Public - report is viewable by all authorized DBS users  Click the  Change  button to save your changes, or click the  Cancel  button to cancel without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm, or click the  No  button to close the window without confirming.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To  change a report definition to public or private: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Make Public or Private option. Note : The Report Category Options window appears. Select a report category. Private - report is viewable by the user only Dealership Public - report is viewable by all authorized users in the selected dealership DBS Public - report is viewable by all authorized DBS users  Click the  Change  button to save your changes, or click the  Cancel  button to cancel without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm, or click the  No  button to close the window without confirming.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To  change a report definition to public or private: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Make Public or Private option. Note : The Report Category Options window appears. Select a report category. Private - report is viewable by the user only Dealership Public - report is viewable by all authorized users in the selected dealership DBS Public - report is viewable by all authorized DBS users  Click the  Change  button to save your changes, or click the  Cancel  button to cancel without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm, or click the  No  button to close the window without confirming.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To  change a report definition to public or private: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Make Public or Private option. Note : The Report Category Options window appears. Select a report category. Private - report is viewable by the user only Dealership Public - report is viewable by all authorized users in the selected dealership DBS Public - report is viewable by all authorized DBS users  Click the  Change  button to save your changes, or click the  Cancel  button to cancel without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm, or click the  No  button to close the window without confirming.

To restart a suspended study: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the suspended study you want to restart. From the Action menu, select the  Restart Study  option. Select the desired restart date option. Click the  Restart button. Suspended studies are highlighted in red.

To view a repair order from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page: At the bottom of the page, click the  RO button. Note : The Repair Order Information window opens. Click the  Print button to print the RO, or click the  Close button to return to the previous screen.  

Support Page Overview Purpose Use the Support page to view the minimum hardware and software configuration required to run DBS . Description The content area of the Support page displays the following sections: System Requirements  - Displays the minimum hardware and software configuration required to run DBS Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Support page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. View DBS System Requirements View DBS System Requirements Page Preview

To select trade dealer recipients for an alert, announcement, notification, or calendar event: Click the  Dealer Users button. Select the Choose Trade Dealers  option. Click the Next button to continue. Select a hierarchy by clicking on the box before the hierarchy. Note : To expand the hierarchy to select specific options, click the plus sign. Note : To de-select a hierarchy, click the box to remove the check mark. Click the Next button to continue, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. By default, the Ignore Dealer Eligibility selection checkbox is selected and all trade dealers will be included in the announcement, alert, event, or notification. To exclude dealers by eligibility, clear the Ignore Dealer Eligibility selection checkbox to activate the criteria selection buttons, then remove selections as desired. Click the Next button to continue, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. From the  Available Fields  box, select the positions. Click the  Copy  button to move the selected options to the Selected box, or click the Copy All  button to move all options. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the  Back button to return to the previous window. To view your recipient selections after you select them, use the View/Print option in the Action menu.

Help This Help page contains information about using  Dealer Business System (DBS)  Help. There are several ways to find the information that you need. Use the following features to navigate  DBS Help. Icon Description ( Page Help ) On a DBS application page, opens a drop-down list offering access to context-sensitive help and to full help. Internet Explorer users can also press the F10 key to open the context-sensitive help.  ( Help ) On a page within full help, displays this Help page.  ( Home ) Displays the "Welcome to the Dealer Business System (DBS) " introduction page.  ( Back )  ( Forward ) Returns to the previously viewed Help topic. Progresses to the next page within your viewing history.   ( Print Page ) Prints a copy of a displayed Help topic. Note : You may need to adjust your printer settings for optimal display of the printed help content.   ( Search ) Searches DBS  full help to find topics that include the searched item. Type a word, phrase, or acronym in the Search  field and click the  Search icon. Topics highlight all occurrences of the searched item.   ( Keywords ) Displays the Help index. Click a letter to view a list of keywords, phrases, or acronyms beginning with that letter. Click an item from the list to display a list of topics that include the indexed item. ( Explorer ) Displays the table of contents.   ( Open all )    ( Close all ) Opens a list of topics displayed in the left-hand pane. Closes a list of topics displayed in the left-hand pane. DBS  Help contains the following menu tabs. Click a tab to view a list of related topics in the left-hand pane. Select a topic from the list to display its content in the right-hand pane. Menu Description Home Provides general information about  DBS , including overviews of the application pages accessed by all users and task instructions for customizing DBS , help and support, and navigation features. Sales Provides information about the vehicle sales application within DBS , including overviews of the application pages in Sales, workflows, task instructions, and information about viewing reports. Service Provides information about the service application within DBS , including overviews of the application pages in Service, workflows, task instructions, and information about viewing reports. Parts Provides information about the parts application within DBS , including overviews of the application pages in Parts, workflows, task instructions, and information about viewing reports. Office Provides information about the business office application within DBS , including overviews of the application pages in Office, workflows, task instructions, and descriptions information about viewing reports. Administration Provides information about the overall DBS application, including instructions for system administration and for maintaining user and dealership information, and information about viewing reports. Help This Help page contains information about using  Dealer Business System (DBS)  Help. There are several ways to find the information that you need. Use the following features to navigate  DBS Help. Icon Description ( Page Help ) On a DBS application page, opens a drop-down list offering access to context-sensitive help and to full help. Internet Explorer users can also press the F10 key to open the context-sensitive help.  ( Help ) On a page within full help, displays this Help page.  ( Home ) Displays the "Welcome to the Dealer Business System (DBS) " introduction page.  ( Back )  ( Forward ) Returns to the previously viewed Help topic. Progresses to the next page within your viewing history.   ( Print Page ) Prints a copy of a displayed Help topic. Note : You may need to adjust your printer settings for optimal display of the printed help content.   ( Search ) Searches DBS  full help to find topics that include the searched item. Type a word, phrase, or acronym in the Search  field and click the  Search icon. Topics highlight all occurrences of the searched item.   ( Keywords ) Displays the Help index. Click a letter to view a list of keywords, phrases, or acronyms beginning with that letter. Click an item from the list to display a list of topics that include the indexed item. ( Explorer ) Displays the table of contents.   ( Open all )    ( Close all ) Opens a list of topics displayed in the left-hand pane. Closes a list of topics displayed in the left-hand pane. DBS  Help contains the following menu tabs. Click a tab to view a list of related topics in the left-hand pane. Select a topic from the list to display its content in the right-hand pane. Menu Description Home Provides general information about  DBS , including overviews of the application pages accessed by all users and task instructions for customizing DBS , help and support, and navigation features. Sales Provides information about the vehicle sales application within DBS , including overviews of the application pages in Sales, workflows, task instructions, and information about viewing reports. Service Provides information about the service application within DBS , including overviews of the application pages in Service, workflows, task instructions, and information about viewing reports. Parts Provides information about the parts application within DBS , including overviews of the application pages in Parts, workflows, task instructions, and information about viewing reports. Office Provides information about the business office application within DBS , including overviews of the application pages in Office, workflows, task instructions, and descriptions information about viewing reports. Administration Provides information about the overall DBS application, including instructions for system administration and for maintaining user and dealership information, and information about viewing reports. Help This Help page contains information about using  Dealer Business System (DBS)  Help. There are several ways to find the information that you need. Use the following features to navigate  DBS Help. Icon Description ( Page Help ) On a DBS application page, opens a drop-down list offering access to context-sensitive help and to full help. Internet Explorer users can also press the F10 key to open the context-sensitive help.  ( Help ) On a page within full help, displays this Help page.  ( Home ) Displays the "Welcome to the Dealer Business System (DBS) " introduction page.  ( Back )  ( Forward ) Returns to the previously viewed Help topic. Progresses to the next page within your viewing history.   ( Print Page ) Prints a copy of a displayed Help topic. Note : You may need to adjust your printer settings for optimal display of the printed help content.   ( Search ) Searches DBS  full help to find topics that include the searched item. Type a word, phrase, or acronym in the Search  field and click the  Search icon. Topics highlight all occurrences of the searched item.   ( Keywords ) Displays the Help index. Click a letter to view a list of keywords, phrases, or acronyms beginning with that letter. Click an item from the list to display a list of topics that include the indexed item. ( Explorer ) Displays the table of contents.   ( Open all )    ( Close all ) Opens a list of topics displayed in the left-hand pane. Closes a list of topics displayed in the left-hand pane. DBS  Help contains the following menu tabs. Click a tab to view a list of related topics in the left-hand pane. Select a topic from the list to display its content in the right-hand pane. Menu Description Home Provides general information about  DBS , including overviews of the application pages accessed by all users and task instructions for customizing DBS , help and support, and navigation features. Sales Provides information about the vehicle sales application within DBS , including overviews of the application pages in Sales, workflows, task instructions, and information about viewing reports. Service Provides information about the service application within DBS , including overviews of the application pages in Service, workflows, task instructions, and information about viewing reports. Parts Provides information about the parts application within DBS , including overviews of the application pages in Parts, workflows, task instructions, and information about viewing reports. Office Provides information about the business office application within DBS , including overviews of the application pages in Office, workflows, task instructions, and descriptions information about viewing reports. Administration Provides information about the overall DBS application, including instructions for system administration and for maintaining user and dealership information, and information about viewing reports. Help This Help page contains information about using  Dealer Business System (DBS)  Help. There are several ways to find the information that you need. Use the following features to navigate  DBS Help. Icon Description ( Page Help ) On a DBS application page, opens a drop-down list offering access to context-sensitive help and to full help. Internet Explorer users can also press the F10 key to open the context-sensitive help.  ( Help ) On a page within full help, displays this Help page.  ( Home ) Displays the "Welcome to the Dealer Business System (DBS) " introduction page.  ( Back )  ( Forward ) Returns to the previously viewed Help topic. Progresses to the next page within your viewing history.   ( Print Page ) Prints a copy of a displayed Help topic. Note : You may need to adjust your printer settings for optimal display of the printed help content.   ( Search ) Searches DBS  full help to find topics that include the searched item. Type a word, phrase, or acronym in the Search  field and click the  Search icon. Topics highlight all occurrences of the searched item.   ( Keywords ) Displays the Help index. Click a letter to view a list of keywords, phrases, or acronyms beginning with that letter. Click an item from the list to display a list of topics that include the indexed item. ( Explorer ) Displays the table of contents.   ( Open all )    ( Close all ) Opens a list of topics displayed in the left-hand pane. Closes a list of topics displayed in the left-hand pane. DBS  Help contains the following menu tabs. Click a tab to view a list of related topics in the left-hand pane. Select a topic from the list to display its content in the right-hand pane. Menu Description Home Provides general information about  DBS , including overviews of the application pages accessed by all users and task instructions for customizing DBS , help and support, and navigation features. Sales Provides information about the vehicle sales application within DBS , including overviews of the application pages in Sales, workflows, task instructions, and information about viewing reports. Service Provides information about the service application within DBS , including overviews of the application pages in Service, workflows, task instructions, and information about viewing reports. Parts Provides information about the parts application within DBS , including overviews of the application pages in Parts, workflows, task instructions, and information about viewing reports. Office Provides information about the business office application within DBS , including overviews of the application pages in Office, workflows, task instructions, and descriptions information about viewing reports. Administration Provides information about the overall DBS application, including instructions for system administration and for maintaining user and dealership information, and information about viewing reports. Help This Help page contains information about using  Dealer Business System (DBS)  Help. There are several ways to find the information that you need. Use the following features to navigate  DBS Help. Icon Description ( Page Help ) On a DBS application page, opens a drop-down list offering access to context-sensitive help and to full help. Internet Explorer users can also press the F10 key to open the context-sensitive help.  ( Help ) On a page within full help, displays this Help page.  ( Home ) Displays the "Welcome to the Dealer Business System (DBS) " introduction page.  ( Back )  ( Forward ) Returns to the previously viewed Help topic. Progresses to the next page within your viewing history.   ( Print Page ) Prints a copy of a displayed Help topic. Note : You may need to adjust your printer settings for optimal display of the printed help content.   ( Search ) Searches DBS  full help to find topics that include the searched item. Type a word, phrase, or acronym in the Search  field and click the  Search icon. Topics highlight all occurrences of the searched item.   ( Keywords ) Displays the Help index. Click a letter to view a list of keywords, phrases, or acronyms beginning with that letter. Click an item from the list to display a list of topics that include the indexed item. ( Explorer ) Displays the table of contents.   ( Open all )    ( Close all ) Opens a list of topics displayed in the left-hand pane. Closes a list of topics displayed in the left-hand pane. DBS  Help contains the following menu tabs. Click a tab to view a list of related topics in the left-hand pane. Select a topic from the list to display its content in the right-hand pane. Menu Description Home Provides general information about  DBS , including overviews of the application pages accessed by all users and task instructions for customizing DBS , help and support, and navigation features. Sales Provides information about the vehicle sales application within DBS , including overviews of the application pages in Sales, workflows, task instructions, and information about viewing reports. Service Provides information about the service application within DBS , including overviews of the application pages in Service, workflows, task instructions, and information about viewing reports. Parts Provides information about the parts application within DBS , including overviews of the application pages in Parts, workflows, task instructions, and information about viewing reports. Office Provides information about the business office application within DBS , including overviews of the application pages in Office, workflows, task instructions, and descriptions information about viewing reports. Administration Provides information about the overall DBS application, including instructions for system administration and for maintaining user and dealership information, and information about viewing reports.

Edit Parts Return Page Overview Purpose Use the Edit Parts Return page to modify an existing parts return that is in "New" or "Open" status. You can edit a parts return from the Parts Return Management page. You must first search for and locate the desired parts return that you want to edit. Use the Action menu to open the Edit Parts Return page. Description The content area of the Edit Parts Return page displays the following sections: Edit Parts Return header  - Allows you to view or add general information about a parts return, including the type of return and the dealer return reference number, as well as any warning or error messages, if they exist Parts Return Detail  - Allows you to add, modify, or delete parts included in the parts return, specify or modify the return quantity, and view any warning or error messages, if they exist Buttons - Allow you to save, submit, delete, or cancel a parts return Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Edit Parts Return page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Add a Part to a Return Add Multiple Parts to a Return Delete a Part from a Return Edit a Parts Return Filter Parts Return Detail Look Up a Part Modify a Detail Line on a Return Preview a Parts Return Request Cancellation of a Parts Return Retrieve Unpacked Parts Show Packed Parts Show Selected Parts Submit a Parts Return View ASR Data for a Part on a Parts Return View Warning or Error Messages Add a Part to a Return Add Multiple Parts to a Return Delete a Part from a Return Delete a Parts Return Edit a Parts Return Filter Parts Return Detail Look Up a Part Modify a Detail Line on a Return Preview a Parts Return Retrieve a List of Unpacked Parts Submit a Parts Return Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Edit Parts Return page. Edit Parts Return Workflow Preview

This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. DBS maintains production plant information for each vehicle produced, beginning from the 2011 model year for both divisions. Production plant information is maintained for the current model year and five previous model years for Nissan, and the current model year and ten previous model years for Infiniti. If desired, you can select one or more production plants to limit the study results to vehicles manufactured at the selected locations. To complete the Production Plant section of a study: Select each production plant which should be included in the study, and then use the center buttons as necessary to customize the Selected Production Plants list. When you have selected all desired production plants, click the Save button.

Manage Warranty Claim Page Overview  Purpose The Manage Warranty Claim page provides a graphical representation of warranty claims summary data, with a variety of filter criteria from which to choose. From this page, you can view, create, edit, and delete warranty claims. Warranty claims on the Manage Warranty Claim page originate either through manual entry or by transferring automatically from a repair order (RO). The page includes claims that have been sent or need to be sent for payment. Description The content area of the Manage Warranty Claim page displays the following sections: Claims Summary -  Allows you to view a visual representation of warranty claims summary data. Page Navigation Bar -  Allows you to navigate from page to page, if multiple pages exist Warranty Claims -  Displays a list of warranty claims that correspond with your selections in the View and Filter by menus You can perform the following tasks from or on the Manage Warranty Claim page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. About Manage Warranty Claims: What You Need to Know Access the Create Warranty Claim Page Access the Edit Warranty Claim Page Batch Validate Claims from the Manage Warranty Claim Page Delete a Warranty Claim Display the Warranty Claims Graph Display Warning or Error Messages Edit a Claim on the Express Entry Page Edit a Claim on the Quick Entry Page Export Warranty Claims List Filter Warranty Claims List   Resubmit Warranty Claim   Submit a Warranty Claim View Amounts Paid on an Approved Warranty Claim View DCAL View Repair Order View Warranty Claim View Warranty Claims Summary About Manage Warranty Claims: What You Need to Know Access the Create Warranty Claim Page Access the Edit Warranty Claim Page Batch Validate Claims from the Manage Warranty Claim Page Delete Warranty Claim Display the Warranty Claims Graph Display Warning or Error Messages Edit a Claim on the Express Entry Page Edit a Claim on the Quick Entry Page Export Warranty Claims List Filter Warranty Claims List  Resubmit Warranty Claim  Submit a Warranty Claim View Amounts Paid on an Approved Warranty Claim View Repair Order View Warranty Claim View Warranty Claims Summary Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Manage Warranty Claim page. Manage Warranty Claim Workflow Page Preview

View Overview Information   One Dealer Study Result Page Overview View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow Perform Tasks Export Dealer Study Results Information Filter Dealer Study Results Perform Common DBS Tasks Release a Vehicle from Dealer Hold Remove a Repair Order Job Line from a Study View Dealer Study Results View NSH for a Vehicle in a Study View Repair Order for Vehicle in a Study Export Dealer Study Results Information Filter Dealer Study Results Perform Common DBS Tasks Release a Vehicle from Dealer Hold Remove a Repair Order Job Line from a Study View Dealer Study Results View NSH for a Vehicle in a Study View Repair Order for Vehicle in a Study

To create or edit an event: Select the display language for the event from the Language drop-down list. Note : The default language for events is English. If the item does not require approval, clear the Require Approval? checkbox. Type a title for the event. Note : The event title will display in the event calendar as a hyperlink that users can click to view the event description.  In the Location field, type room number, building, or address where the event will take place. Select a start date for the event. Type the scheduled start time for the event. Select an end date for the event. Type the scheduled end time for the event. Type a description of the event in the space provided. Select recipients for the event. Click here for instructions on how to select recipients. Click the  Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm, or click the  No  button to close the window without confirming. Note : The event is created in "Needs Approval" status. Time in  Fred  is written in the 24-hour notation, where HH (00 to 23) is the number of full hours that have passed since midnight.

Create Parts Order Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating a parts order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create Parts Order Workflow. Edit Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow

Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing dealer operation codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow

RDR History: What You Need to Know The RDR History screen defaults to display RDRs in descending order by the retail add date (the date on which the RDR was submitted). Therefore, the vehicles with the most recent RDRs appear at the top of the list. The status bar displays a count of your RDR activity for the current month. View historical RDR activity by using the Filter By options. Scroll the RDR History screen to the right to view who submitted the RDR in the RDR Submitted by field The RDR History page includes all RDR records for a period of 13 months. These 13 months includes the current sales month plus the 12 prior months. The RDR History page does not include historical RDRs submitted prior to the implementation of DBS . General Guidelines: When a vehicle is reported as sold (retailed), unwound for any reason, and then reported as sold again, the RDR history shows multiple lines for that vehicle. Dealer fleet sales are included in RDR History since they are sold by the dealer from dealer inventory. National fleet sales are excluded since they are not in the dealer's inventory, reported by the dealer, or credited to the dealer. Unwind RDR Guidelines: All RDR unwinds are processed through an overnight batch. Unwound vehicles are added back into your inventory on the next day. The following unwind results can be expected the next day: If the host accepted the unwind, the RDR History status shows as "Unwound", the vehicle is returned to your vehicle inventory and the vehicle's location status shows as "Dealer Inventory". If the host rejected the unwind, the RDR History status shows as "Unwind Rejected", the Unwind Reason / Date field shows the rejection message, and there is no change to vehicle inventory. Vehicles may only be unwound once within a 24 hour period. The Unwind RDR action will not be available if an unwind request has been submitted from DBS within the last 24 hours. A dealer user can unwind an RDR up to 90 days after the sale date. After 90 days, only the Region or National can unwind an RDR. You cannot unwind an RDR'ed vehicle on month end close. You cannot RDR and unwind on the same day. If you unwind after 10PM, the unwind request will not be processed by the NNA mainframe. Unwinds that are not processed will receive an "Unwind Failed" status. You may re-submit a vehicle in "Unwind Failed" status immediately. Scroll the RDR History screen to the right to view the Unwind Reason and Date field.

To filter the Parts Order Management summary: Select a filter option. Note : If you select the Part Number filter option, the Part Number lookup icon appears. Click here for instructions on using the lookup feature. If a text-entry field appears, type a filter value. - OR - If a drop-down list appears, select an option from the list. -OR - If a calendar tool appears, click in the field, and then use the calendar to select the desired date(s). Note : Depending on your selection, additional filter options may display to narrow the results further. Note : Depending on your selection, the system may automatically filter the list and refresh the display. Click the Search button, as needed. View the orders that meet the selected criteria. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the  Clear  icon.

To view Repair Order (RO) information from the Service Dashboard: In the RO column of the applicable row, click the repair order number link. Note : The Repair Order Information window opens. View the RO details. Note : To print the RO, click the Print button. To close, click the Close button. In DBS , you can view repair order (RO) information in multiple ways.

To  view a Repair Order (RO), from the Service menu, select Customer Pay Reimbursement : Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the RO you want to view. From the Action menu, select the Detail option. Note : The Repair Order Information window opens. View the RO information. When you are through, click the Close button to close the Repair Order Information window.

Sold with Open Campaign Report Page Overview Purpose Just like it sounds, the Sold with Open Campaign Report page allows corporate users to view the details and status of vehicles which were sold with an open campaign. Description The content area of the Sold with Open Campaign Report page displays the following sections: Filter/Search -   Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria . Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Sold with Open Campaign Report page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Export the Sold with Open Campaign Report Page Filter the Sold with Open Campaign Report Page Page Preview

To suspend a study: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the study you want to suspend. From the Action menu, select the  Suspend Study  option. Click the  Suspend button. Active studies are highlighted in green. Suspended studies are highlighted in red.

Manage Parts Order Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing parts orders. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Parts Order Workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow View Parts Order Workflow

Edit User Permissions Page Overview Purpose Use the Edit User Permissions page to set up or edit user permissions. Description The content area of the Edit User Permissions page displays the following sections: Quick Jump menu - Appears on the left-hand side of the page. The Quick Jump menu allows you to show one section at a time, or you can show or hide the default view for all sections. Permission Function Tree - By default, the function tree expands two sections: Menu and User Information. The function tree also includes a Host Report section and a Report Writer section. For internal users, the function tree also includes a Publishing section. Use the + and - icons to show or hide a section. Use the expand all | collapse all features to expand or collapse a section.  Save and Cancel buttons - Allows you to submit or cancel requested changes . Cancel returns you to the Position Summary page. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Edit User Permissions page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Grant or Remove Access to a Host Report Grant or Remove Access to a Page, Action, Custom Field, or Website Grant or Remove Access to a Report Writer View Grant or Remove Full Access to a Menu and Its Contents Grant Publisher Authorization  (internal user only) Remove Publisher Authorization Use the Quick Jump Menu Grant or Remove Access to a Host Report Grant or Remove Access to a Page, Action, Custom Field, or Website Grant or Remove Access to a Report Writer View Grant or Remove Full Access to a Menu and Its Contents Grant Publisher Authorization (internal user only) Remove Publisher Authorization Use the Quick Jump Menu   Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Edit User Permissions page. Edit User Permissions Workflow Page Preview

View Overview Information   DSP STAR Web Service Page Overview Configure DSP STAR Web Service Workflow Perform Tasks Configure DSP STAR Web Service Perform Common  DBS Tasks Configure DSP STAR Web Service Perform Common DBS Tasks

View Overview Information   Search a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number Page Overview Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks Select by Affiliate Select by Dealer Perform Common DBS Tasks Select by Affiliate Select by Dealer

Office Introduction   Description The Office application within the Dealer Business System (DBS)  provides access for dealer users to view the submission status of their financial statements, submit their financial statements to the corporate financial management system, and print the Financial Statements status page. Note : The items you see in the menu tabs and menu links vary based on your permissions. If you need to request changes to your permissions, please contact your dealership's System Administrator. You can find the System Administrator(s) for you dealership by viewing your profile. For more information, click  here . The Office menu in DBS  help shows content listed by application page. For ease of use, content is organized by application page following the DBS  menu when possible. When you first begin using DBS  and the DBS  help system, we recommend that you review the help system menu and then view the page overview, workflow, and task information for the tasks you will be performing in DBS .

To clean the cache: Type the input cache path. Click the Submit button.

View Overview Information   Serviced with Open Campaign Report Page Overview Perform Tasks Export the Serviced with Open Campaign Report Page Filter the Serviced with Open Campaign Report Page Perform Common DBS Tasks

You cannot recover a forfeited parts return period! Note : This task is restricted to authorized PDC users only. Authorized Infiniti PDC users may forfeit an un-submitted dealer parts return, forfeiting the accrual amount and requiring the dealer to begin work on their next parts return. To forfeit a parts return period: In the Dealer List section on the left, select the dealer for which you want to forfeit the return period. In the Return Schedule section on the right, click the Action icon for the parts return you want to forfeit. Note : Only un-submitted returns in "Current" status can be forfeited. Select the Forfeit Return Period menu item. Note : DBS  displays a warning message. Click the OK button to forfeit the return period and accrual, or click the Cancel button to close the message without forfeiting the return period.

To access OMS  to view OMS  vehicle detail: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the OMS Vehicle Detail option. Note : The external OMS application opens. When you are finished viewing the OMS vehicle detail, click the Close button.

Sales Introduction   Description The Sales application in DBS  provides a consolidated view of a dealer's vehicle inventory, including the ability to search for and sell (RDR) vehicles from inventory, review vehicles that have been sold, and quickly determine the campaign status for vehicles in inventory so that service can be provided before the vehicle is made available to a customer. Note : The items you see in the menu tabs and menu links vary based on your permissions. If you need to request changes to your permissions, please contact your dealership's System Administrator. You can find the System Administrator(s) for you dealership by viewing your profile. For more information, click  here . The Sales menu in DBS  help shows content listed by application page. For ease of use, content is organized by application page following the DBS  menu when possible. When you first begin using DBS  and the DBS  help system, we recommend that you review the help system menu and then view the page overview, workflow, and task information for the tasks you will be performing in DBS .

To export Study Dashboard information: Click the  Export button. Select Excel as the output format. Save the file to your local drive. If you filter the page before exporting, only those records that meet the filter criteria will export. You can filter, sort, and print the data if you export the information to Microsoft ®  Excel ® .

To  access the Edit Calendar Event page: Select an event. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit  option. Note : The Edit Calendar Event page appears.

Site Map Page Overview Purpose Use the Site Map page to view a list of the pages within the Dealer Business System (DBS)  applications. Expand the menus and click a hyperlinked page name to navigate to that page.  Description The content area of the Site Map page displays the following sections: Search - Allows you to search for pages that match your criteria System Hierarchy - Allows you to browse the DBS  applications and then select a page to view. Click the hyperlink for the page you want to view. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Site Map page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Browse the Site Map Search the Site Map Browse the Site Map Search the Site Map Page Preview

To  approve an SVC order from the SVC Order Management page: Select an SVC order. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Approve SVC Order  option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm, or click the  No  button to close the window without confirming. SVC orders pending approval already contain parts that are on the Campaign Parts list, as validated by the system during order submission. You can only approve an SVC order in "New" status. You cannot approve an SVC order with errors. Approved SVC orders are sent to the Countermeasure Service Parts Procurement Group every day between 3 and 4 p.m. U.S. Central Time.

View Overview Information Create or Edit an Announcement Page Overview   Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow Perform Tasks Create or Edit an Announcement Perform Common DBS Tasks Select Recipients Create or Edit an Announcement Perform Common DBS Tasks Select Recipients

To  access the View Dealer Information page: Select the dealer. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  View Dealer Information  option. Note : The View Dealer Information page appears.

Administration Introduction Description Your user profile indicates which functional areas and applications you can access. The Administration application within the Dealer Business System (DBS)  enables administrators to manage security, monitor the system and manage communications to dealers, regional and corporate personnel. The Help menu, which appears on the left side of your screen, provides access to more information about the Administration application. For overviews of the Administration application pages and the tasks you can perform on each of them, click  Pages .   For interactive workflows of tasks performed in the Administration application, click Workflows . For instructions on how to perform tasks in the Administration application, click Tasks . For information on how to view and generate reports, click Reports . 

To complete the Claim Information section of an express entry warranty claim: Note : If you search for a repair order and line number, the information in the Claim Information section is populated with the repair order information. Add additional information as necessary. In the Open Date field, the calendar to select the date the repair order was opened. In the Close Date field, use the calendar to select the date the repair order was completed. In the Line Type field, type a claim type. Note : Based on the line type you select, some fields will be dimmed and unavailable. If necessary, in the Coverage 1 Code field, update the coverage code. Note : The coverage code is automatically populated based on information entered in the Claim Information section. In the Symptom field, type a symptom code that identifies what the customer said is wrong with the vehicle. Note : The symptom code is only used for the "PO" and "PP" claim types. In the Diagnosis field, type a diagnosis code that identifies what the technician found during the diagnosis process. Note : The diagnosis code is only used for the "PO" and "PP" claim types. From the Advisor drop-down list, select a service consultant name. If the warranty claim is related to a service campaign, type the campaign number in the ID field. Note : The ID field is only used for "CM" claim types. Campaign claims are submitted at the completion of a service or recall campaign-related repair. If the Campaign ID is invalid, DBS displays an error message. In the Sales Tax area, in the Requested Amount field , type the requested sales tax amount. If the part is under warranty, select the Part Warranty checkbox. If you selected the Part Warranty checkbox, complete the Document Number , Odometer , and Date fields. If the vehicle was purchased in one country but is being serviced in another country, complete the fields in the Foreign Vehicle section. In the Deductible area, in the Requested Amount column, type the requested deductible amount in the CP (Customer Pay) and/or DI (Dealer Internal) pay fields. Note : This area is only available if you selected the "SC" coverage code for the "PP" claim type.

View Overview Information   Search Page Overview Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks View the Search Results Perform Common DBS Tasks View the Search Results

To view a sub-set of selected parts on a parts return: In the Parts Return Detail section, select the checkbox that appears before the part number for each line you want to view. Click the Show Selected button. The Parts Return Detail section updates to display the details for the parts detail lines you selected in step 1. To display the full parts return detail list, click the Show All button.

To edit a warranty claim: Select the claim you want to edit. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit Claim option. Complete the following sections of the claim. Click the links below for instructions on how to complete/view these sections. Summary Claim Information Parts Operations Expenses Comments Customer Claim Activity  (View Only) History  (View Only) Summary Claim Information Parts Operations Expenses Comments Customer Claim Activity  (View Only) History  (View Only) Click the  Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note: You can save a warranty claim with warnings and error messages. Note : DBS updates the claim status when you save the claim.

View Overview Information   Parts Landing Page Overview Create Parts Order Workflow Create Parts Return Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Return Workflow Manage Campaign Parts Workflow Manage Custom Search Group Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Return Workflow Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow View Automatic Stock Replenishment Returns Performance Workflow View Full Automatic Stock Replenishment Data Workflow View Parts Master Information Workflow View Parts Metrics Workflow View Parts Order Workflow View Request for Credit Status Workflow View Service Campaign Order Workflow Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks View Alerts View Announcements and Other News Perform Common DBS Tasks View Alerts View Announcements and Other News

This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. To complete the States/Provinces section of a study: Select each state or province which should be included in the study, and then use the center buttons as necessary to customize the Selected States/Provinces list. Note : The repair orders included in a study with a state or province selection are determined by the address entered in the Customer section of the vehicle's National Service History. When you have selected all desired states and provinces, click the Save button.

To  export Parts Return Management information: Click the Export button. Select the Microsoft ® Excel ® output format. Note : The File Download dialog appears. Click the Save button and save the file to your local drive. You can filter or sort the data if you export the file in the Microsoft® Excel® format.

View Overview Information   System Error Page Overview Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks Report System Errors Show the Stack Trace

Change User Report Page Overview Purpose Use the Change User Report page to select a user when you select the Change User option in Report Writer.  Description The content area of the Change User Report page displays the following sections: List of Users  - Displays the names of users who own report definitions Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Change User Report page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Select a User to Receive Report Definitions Select a User to Receive Report Definitions W orkflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Change User Report page. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview

Change User Report Page Overview Purpose Use the Change User Report page to select a user when you select the Change User option in Report Writer.  Description The content area of the Change User Report page displays the following sections: List of Users  - Displays the names of users who own report definitions Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Change User Report page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Select a User to Receive Report Definitions Select a User to Receive Report Definitions W orkflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Change User Report page. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview

Change User Report Page Overview Purpose Use the Change User Report page to select a user when you select the Change User option in Report Writer.  Description The content area of the Change User Report page displays the following sections: List of Users  - Displays the names of users who own report definitions Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Change User Report page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Select a User to Receive Report Definitions Select a User to Receive Report Definitions W orkflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Change User Report page. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview

Change User Report Page Overview Purpose Use the Change User Report page to select a user when you select the Change User option in Report Writer.  Description The content area of the Change User Report page displays the following sections: List of Users  - Displays the names of users who own report definitions Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Change User Report page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Select a User to Receive Report Definitions Select a User to Receive Report Definitions W orkflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Change User Report page. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview

Change User Report Page Overview Purpose Use the Change User Report page to select a user when you select the Change User option in Report Writer.  Description The content area of the Change User Report page displays the following sections: List of Users  - Displays the names of users who own report definitions Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Change User Report page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Select a User to Receive Report Definitions Select a User to Receive Report Definitions W orkflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Change User Report page. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview

Host Reports Quick Reference Guide The Host Reports Quick Reference Guide provides information for Host report users on how to find and print Host reports, add reports to your favorites list, and print overnight reports. Click here to download the Host Reports Quick Reference Guide.

To view vehicle detail in OMS: Click the  Vehicle Detail button at the bottom of the RDR Vehicle page. Note : The OMS Vehicle Detail option is available only to users who have access to the OMS application. After viewing the vehicle detail, click the Close button to close the Vehicle Detail window and return to DBS .

To  complete the Sort Criteria section: Select the fields to be sorted. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Move button. Note: To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. To indicate the order in which the columns are to be sorted, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons to adjust the sort order. If the report requires the data to be grouped by the values of the first sort field, select the Check here if you would like the report to add grouping levels to your report? checkbox.  Note : The report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. Select the sorting rule for each field. Select the fields to be totaled. Click here  for instructions to select the fields to be totaled. The sort criteria section is optional. You can leave this section blank when you create a report. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.

To  complete the Sort Criteria section: Select the fields to be sorted. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Move button. Note: To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. To indicate the order in which the columns are to be sorted, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons to adjust the sort order. If the report requires the data to be grouped by the values of the first sort field, select the Check here if you would like the report to add grouping levels to your report? checkbox.  Note : The report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. Select the sorting rule for each field. Select the fields to be totaled. Click here  for instructions to select the fields to be totaled. The sort criteria section is optional. You can leave this section blank when you create a report. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.

To  complete the Sort Criteria section: Select the fields to be sorted. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Move button. Note: To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. To indicate the order in which the columns are to be sorted, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons to adjust the sort order. If the report requires the data to be grouped by the values of the first sort field, select the Check here if you would like the report to add grouping levels to your report? checkbox.  Note : The report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. Select the sorting rule for each field. Select the fields to be totaled. Click here  for instructions to select the fields to be totaled. The sort criteria section is optional. You can leave this section blank when you create a report. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.

To  complete the Sort Criteria section: Select the fields to be sorted. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Move button. Note: To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. To indicate the order in which the columns are to be sorted, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons to adjust the sort order. If the report requires the data to be grouped by the values of the first sort field, select the Check here if you would like the report to add grouping levels to your report? checkbox.  Note : The report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. Select the sorting rule for each field. Select the fields to be totaled. Click here  for instructions to select the fields to be totaled. The sort criteria section is optional. You can leave this section blank when you create a report. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.

To  complete the Sort Criteria section: Select the fields to be sorted. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Move button. Note: To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. To indicate the order in which the columns are to be sorted, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons to adjust the sort order. If the report requires the data to be grouped by the values of the first sort field, select the Check here if you would like the report to add grouping levels to your report? checkbox.  Note : The report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. Select the sorting rule for each field. Select the fields to be totaled. Click here  for instructions to select the fields to be totaled. The sort criteria section is optional. You can leave this section blank when you create a report. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.

MRW: Internal user only. Done from the parts metrics page. Note : This task applies to internal users only. To  edit a custom search group: Select the desired group. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the View / Edit option. To add dealers, from the Available Dealers list, select one or more dealers and then click the >> icon. Note : To select multiple individual items, press and hold the CTRL key. To select multiple items, press and hold the SHIFT key while selecting items. Note : If the group you are editing was created using the district or region search range, use the drop-down lists to edit your selection. To remove dealers, from the Selected Dealers list, select one or more dealers and then click the << icon. Click the  Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. You can view the list of dealers by name only or by name and number. To display by dealer name only, click the Dealer Name link. To display by dealer number and dealer name, click the Dealer Code link. You can also view the list of dealers by letter. To display all dealers that start with a specific letter, click the link for the desired letter.

View Overview Information   View Parts Return Page Manage Parts Return Workflow Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks View a Submitted Parts Return Perform Common DBS Tasks View a Submitted Parts Return

To submit a warranty claim from the Manage Warranty Claim page: Select the repair order for which you want to submit a warranty claim. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Submit option.

This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. An engine type pre-defined combination of the model year, channel, line series, and description, e.g. 13-N-Maxima-3.8L. DBS maintains engine type information for the current model year and five previous model years (ten previous model years for Infiniti), beginning from the 2011 model year for both divisions. If desired, you can select one or more engine types to limit the study results. To complete the Engine Type section of a study: Select each engine type which should be included in the study, and then use the center buttons as necessary to customize the Selected Engines list. When you have selected all desired engine types, click the Save button.

To view one study result: As desired, use the Filter By section to filter the list of studies to make it easier to locate the study you want to view. Click here for more information. In the ID column, click the desired study ID link. Note: The One Study Result page opens that contains information about the study.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To delete a report definition: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm and save, or click the  No  button to close the window without saving.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To delete a report definition: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm and save, or click the  No  button to close the window without saving.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To delete a report definition: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm and save, or click the  No  button to close the window without saving.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To delete a report definition: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm and save, or click the  No  button to close the window without saving.

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To delete a report definition: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm and save, or click the  No  button to close the window without saving.

To use the Administration menu: Move your mouse pointer over the Administration tab to display a menu. Move your mouse pointer over the menu option you want to access. Note:  When you move your mouse pointer over a menu option, three icons appear for that option. The single window icon opens the content in a new tab in the current browser. The double window icon opens the selected content in a new tab and in a new browser. The star icon adds the link to your My Links list. Click the menu option or click the applicable icon to open the desired page or application. Note : If you click a menu option, instead of clicking an icon, the content opens in the current tab. What you see on the Administration menu is determined by your user ID and how your user profile is created. Your user profile indicates what functional areas and applications you need to access. Only those you need access to will display on the Administration menu.

To hold a vehicle or ignore a request to hold a vehicle: In the applicable row, move your mouse point over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the  Detail option. Select the study alert you want to view. Note : DBS indicates if the vehicle has already been put on hold. View the alert detail. To place the vehicle on hold, click the Hold button, or click the Ignore button to ignore the request to hold the vehicle. Click Close to close the message without indicating to hold or ignore the request. The study alerts are color-coded. All alerts that include vehicle hold requests are highlighted in red. Alerts concerning informational-only studies or technical service bulletins (TSBs) are highlighted in yellow.

To  access the View User Permissions page: Select the user. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  View Permissions  option. Note : The View Permissions page appears.

SVC Order Management Page Overview Note : The SVC Order Management page applies to internal users only. Access the SVC Order Management page by clicking the SVC Order Management link on the Parts menu. Purpose Use the Service Campaign (SVC) Order Management page to view, approve, and reject parts orders related to service campaigns. SVC orders pending approval contain parts that are on the Campaign Parts list, as validated by the system during order submission.  Note : This page is for internal users only (Countermeasure Service Parts Procurement group). Description The content area of the SVC Order Management page displays the following sections: Filter by - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Page Navigation - Indicates the total number orders in your list and provides navigation to other pages, if multiple pages exist (more than 200 records) Service Campaign Order Summary - Displays general information for all records on the page Service Campaign Order Detail - Displays specific information for a selected record Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the SVC Order Management page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Access Reports Add Comments to an SVC Order Add Comments to Multiple SVC Orders Approve an SVC Order Approve Multiple SVC Orders Export SVC Order Management Information Filter the SVC Order Management Summary Open the View SVC Order Page Reject an SVC Order Reject Multiple SVC Orders View Warning or Error Messages View SVC Order Management Summary and Detail   Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflow are performed on the SVC Order Management page. Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow Page Preview

Monitor Interface Page Overview Purpose Use the Monitor Interface page to view information about the processing of transactions within the  Dealer Business System (DBS) . DBS provides the ability to search for and review transactions including information about the transaction creator, any error codes, and system response time. Description The content area of the Monitor Interface page displays the following sections: Search Criteria - Allows you to specify search criteria to limit the results displayed in the summary area Summary - Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Monitor Interface page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Search for and Monitor Transactions on the Monitor Interface Page Page Preview

To complete the Expenses section of a claim on either the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page or the Quick Entry Warranty Claim page: From the Exp Code-Exp Description drop-down list, select an expense code. Note : Depending on the expense code, DBS displays a window for additional information. Enter the expense details and then click the Add button to add the expense. When you have finished adding expense details, click the Save button. Note : DBS adds the expense to the list area. In the Requested Amount field, type the requested monetary expense amount. Click the Add icon to add the expense to the list of expenses. Note : DBS populates the Coverage 1 Code and Amt fields. By default, the Coverage 1 Code is the coverage code you had selected in the Claim Information section and Coverage 1 Amt is the amount you requested in the Requested Amount field. You can edit these fields as needed. Note : Click  here  for instructions to complete the Comments section of a claim.

To complete the Expenses section of a claim on either the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page or the Quick Entry Warranty Claim page: From the Exp Code-Exp Description drop-down list, select an expense code. Note : Depending on the expense code, DBS displays a window for additional information. Enter the expense details and then click the Add button to add the expense. When you have finished adding expense details, click the Save button. Note : DBS adds the expense to the list area. In the Requested Amount field, type the requested monetary expense amount. Click the Add icon to add the expense to the list of expenses. Note : DBS populates the Coverage 1 Code and Amt fields. By default, the Coverage 1 Code is the coverage code you had selected in the Claim Information section and Coverage 1 Amt is the amount you requested in the Requested Amount field. You can edit these fields as needed. Note : Click  here  for instructions to complete the Comments section of a claim.

To print a Host report: In the Favorites list or in the Reports list, click the report you wish to print. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color, and the Generation section updates to display a list of dates on which the Host generated the report and sent it to DBS . In the Generation section, move your cursor over the Action icon for the desired report date. From the Action  menu, select the  Print option or the Print PDF option. Note : The Print dialog box displays.  Select a printer, or set printer options, as desired.  Click the applicable button to print the report. Add reports to the Favorites list so you can access them quickly.

To print a Host report: In the Favorites list or in the Reports list, click the report you wish to print. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color, and the Generation section updates to display a list of dates on which the Host generated the report and sent it to DBS . In the Generation section, move your cursor over the Action icon for the desired report date. From the Action  menu, select the  Print option or the Print PDF option. Note : The Print dialog box displays.  Select a printer, or set printer options, as desired.  Click the applicable button to print the report. Add reports to the Favorites list so you can access them quickly.

To print a Host report: In the Favorites list or in the Reports list, click the report you wish to print. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color, and the Generation section updates to display a list of dates on which the Host generated the report and sent it to DBS . In the Generation section, move your cursor over the Action icon for the desired report date. From the Action  menu, select the  Print option or the Print PDF option. Note : The Print dialog box displays.  Select a printer, or set printer options, as desired.  Click the applicable button to print the report. Add reports to the Favorites list so you can access them quickly.

To print a Host report: In the Favorites list or in the Reports list, click the report you wish to print. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color, and the Generation section updates to display a list of dates on which the Host generated the report and sent it to DBS . In the Generation section, move your cursor over the Action icon for the desired report date. From the Action  menu, select the  Print option or the Print PDF option. Note : The Print dialog box displays.  Select a printer, or set printer options, as desired.  Click the applicable button to print the report. Add reports to the Favorites list so you can access them quickly.

To print a Host report: In the Favorites list or in the Reports list, click the report you wish to print. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color, and the Generation section updates to display a list of dates on which the Host generated the report and sent it to DBS . In the Generation section, move your cursor over the Action icon for the desired report date. From the Action  menu, select the  Print option or the Print PDF option. Note : The Print dialog box displays.  Select a printer, or set printer options, as desired.  Click the applicable button to print the report. Add reports to the Favorites list so you can access them quickly.

replaced graphic By default, the Host Reports page displays a list of reports for the current month that is specific to the menu tab or application from which you accessed the Host Reports page. To maximize your search results, clear the default selections in the All Applications and Time Period drop-down lists. To filter and search for a Host report: If desired, from the All Applications drop-down list, select an application, or click the "Select" option to search for all reports. If desired, from the All Frequencies drop-down list, select a frequency. Note : Report frequency defines the time period when the Host generates the report and submits it to DBS . To quickly locate a report, in the Enter Report ID or Name field, type a portion of the report name or report ID, such as "Misc" for the Miscellaneous Invoices report, or "HOP" for the Parts Invoice report. If desired, from the Report Status drop-down list, select a report status. Note : "New" status is defined as those reports that have not been viewed or printed; "Accessed" status refers to reports that have been viewed/printed and "All Statuses" means any report regardless of status. If desired, from the Time Period drop-down list, select a time period, or click the "Select" option to search for all time periods. Note : If you select the "Date Range" option, you must select dates in the applicable fields. To search for information within a report such as a VIN, customer name, or campaign number, in the Full Word/Value Search field, type a word or value. Note : Use caution when using this field! Be as precise as possible to find what you're looking for without overtaxing the system. For example: Search for specific content such as QX80, 5N1AZ2MH2FN222780, or DCHRIR05 and avoid common terms such as vehicle, RO, or part. Note : You may use special characters such as the "$" in your search, but only when that character is part of a word. For example: a search of "$200" may produce results, but a search for "$" will not. Click the Search icon or press the Enter key on your keyboard to display a list of all reports generated that meet the specified search criteria, or click the Clear icon to remove the filters.

replaced graphic By default, the Host Reports page displays a list of reports for the current month that is specific to the menu tab or application from which you accessed the Host Reports page. To maximize your search results, clear the default selections in the All Applications and Time Period drop-down lists. To filter and search for a Host report: If desired, from the All Applications drop-down list, select an application, or click the "Select" option to search for all reports. If desired, from the All Frequencies drop-down list, select a frequency. Note : Report frequency defines the time period when the Host generates the report and submits it to DBS . To quickly locate a report, in the Enter Report ID or Name field, type a portion of the report name or report ID, such as "Misc" for the Miscellaneous Invoices report, or "HOP" for the Parts Invoice report. If desired, from the Report Status drop-down list, select a report status. Note : "New" status is defined as those reports that have not been viewed or printed; "Accessed" status refers to reports that have been viewed/printed and "All Statuses" means any report regardless of status. If desired, from the Time Period drop-down list, select a time period, or click the "Select" option to search for all time periods. Note : If you select the "Date Range" option, you must select dates in the applicable fields. To search for information within a report such as a VIN, customer name, or campaign number, in the Full Word/Value Search field, type a word or value. Note : Use caution when using this field! Be as precise as possible to find what you're looking for without overtaxing the system. For example: Search for specific content such as QX80, 5N1AZ2MH2FN222780, or DCHRIR05 and avoid common terms such as vehicle, RO, or part. Note : You may use special characters such as the "$" in your search, but only when that character is part of a word. For example: a search of "$200" may produce results, but a search for "$" will not. Click the Search icon or press the Enter key on your keyboard to display a list of all reports generated that meet the specified search criteria, or click the Clear icon to remove the filters.

replaced graphic By default, the Host Reports page displays a list of reports for the current month that is specific to the menu tab or application from which you accessed the Host Reports page. To maximize your search results, clear the default selections in the All Applications and Time Period drop-down lists. To filter and search for a Host report: If desired, from the All Applications drop-down list, select an application, or click the "Select" option to search for all reports. If desired, from the All Frequencies drop-down list, select a frequency. Note : Report frequency defines the time period when the Host generates the report and submits it to DBS . To quickly locate a report, in the Enter Report ID or Name field, type a portion of the report name or report ID, such as "Misc" for the Miscellaneous Invoices report, or "HOP" for the Parts Invoice report. If desired, from the Report Status drop-down list, select a report status. Note : "New" status is defined as those reports that have not been viewed or printed; "Accessed" status refers to reports that have been viewed/printed and "All Statuses" means any report regardless of status. If desired, from the Time Period drop-down list, select a time period, or click the "Select" option to search for all time periods. Note : If you select the "Date Range" option, you must select dates in the applicable fields. To search for information within a report such as a VIN, customer name, or campaign number, in the Full Word/Value Search field, type a word or value. Note : Use caution when using this field! Be as precise as possible to find what you're looking for without overtaxing the system. For example: Search for specific content such as QX80, 5N1AZ2MH2FN222780, or DCHRIR05 and avoid common terms such as vehicle, RO, or part. Note : You may use special characters such as the "$" in your search, but only when that character is part of a word. For example: a search of "$200" may produce results, but a search for "$" will not. Click the Search icon or press the Enter key on your keyboard to display a list of all reports generated that meet the specified search criteria, or click the Clear icon to remove the filters.

replaced graphic By default, the Host Reports page displays a list of reports for the current month that is specific to the menu tab or application from which you accessed the Host Reports page. To maximize your search results, clear the default selections in the All Applications and Time Period drop-down lists. To filter and search for a Host report: If desired, from the All Applications drop-down list, select an application, or click the "Select" option to search for all reports. If desired, from the All Frequencies drop-down list, select a frequency. Note : Report frequency defines the time period when the Host generates the report and submits it to DBS . To quickly locate a report, in the Enter Report ID or Name field, type a portion of the report name or report ID, such as "Misc" for the Miscellaneous Invoices report, or "HOP" for the Parts Invoice report. If desired, from the Report Status drop-down list, select a report status. Note : "New" status is defined as those reports that have not been viewed or printed; "Accessed" status refers to reports that have been viewed/printed and "All Statuses" means any report regardless of status. If desired, from the Time Period drop-down list, select a time period, or click the "Select" option to search for all time periods. Note : If you select the "Date Range" option, you must select dates in the applicable fields. To search for information within a report such as a VIN, customer name, or campaign number, in the Full Word/Value Search field, type a word or value. Note : Use caution when using this field! Be as precise as possible to find what you're looking for without overtaxing the system. For example: Search for specific content such as QX80, 5N1AZ2MH2FN222780, or DCHRIR05 and avoid common terms such as vehicle, RO, or part. Note : You may use special characters such as the "$" in your search, but only when that character is part of a word. For example: a search of "$200" may produce results, but a search for "$" will not. Click the Search icon or press the Enter key on your keyboard to display a list of all reports generated that meet the specified search criteria, or click the Clear icon to remove the filters.

replaced graphic By default, the Host Reports page displays a list of reports for the current month that is specific to the menu tab or application from which you accessed the Host Reports page. To maximize your search results, clear the default selections in the All Applications and Time Period drop-down lists. To filter and search for a Host report: If desired, from the All Applications drop-down list, select an application, or click the "Select" option to search for all reports. If desired, from the All Frequencies drop-down list, select a frequency. Note : Report frequency defines the time period when the Host generates the report and submits it to DBS . To quickly locate a report, in the Enter Report ID or Name field, type a portion of the report name or report ID, such as "Misc" for the Miscellaneous Invoices report, or "HOP" for the Parts Invoice report. If desired, from the Report Status drop-down list, select a report status. Note : "New" status is defined as those reports that have not been viewed or printed; "Accessed" status refers to reports that have been viewed/printed and "All Statuses" means any report regardless of status. If desired, from the Time Period drop-down list, select a time period, or click the "Select" option to search for all time periods. Note : If you select the "Date Range" option, you must select dates in the applicable fields. To search for information within a report such as a VIN, customer name, or campaign number, in the Full Word/Value Search field, type a word or value. Note : Use caution when using this field! Be as precise as possible to find what you're looking for without overtaxing the system. For example: Search for specific content such as QX80, 5N1AZ2MH2FN222780, or DCHRIR05 and avoid common terms such as vehicle, RO, or part. Note : You may use special characters such as the "$" in your search, but only when that character is part of a word. For example: a search of "$200" may produce results, but a search for "$" will not. Click the Search icon or press the Enter key on your keyboard to display a list of all reports generated that meet the specified search criteria, or click the Clear icon to remove the filters.

To  view NSH (National Service History) from the Express Entry Warranty Claim page: At the bottom of the page, click the NSH button. Note : The National Service History window opens. Click Print to print the NSH report, or click  Close to return to the previous screen. You can view NSH information regardless of the status of a claim.

Perform Tasks Access My Profile Access the NNAnet / Dealer Portal to View My Documents Add a Link to My Links Browse the Site Map Change the Brand Change the Display Language Change the Text Display Size Contact the DBS Help Desk by Email Contact the DBS Help Desk by Phone Create a Summary Page Display Definition Delete a Link from My Links Delete a Summary Page Display Definition Edit a Link in My Links Edit a Summary Page Display Definition Log Out of DBS Navigate Using a Link in My Links Open the Contact Us Page Open the Copyright Open the Event Calendar Open the Privacy Policy Open the Site Map Open the Summary Page Display Configuration Window Print Information Rename a Summary Page Display Definition Search the Site Search the Site Map Select a Dealer Sort Links in My Links Use a Summary Page Display Definition Use Live Chat Use the Breadcrumbs Use the Menu Tabs View Alerts View Announcements and Other News View Context-Sensitive Help View Copyright and Trademark Information View Full Help View Privacy Information View Warning or Error Messages Perform Tasks Access My Profile Access the NNAnet / Dealer Portal to View My Documents Add a Link to My Links Browse the Site Map Change the Brand Change the Display Language Change the Text Display Size Contact the DBS Help Desk by Email Contact the DBS Help Desk by Phone Create a Summary Page Display Definition Delete a Link from My Links Delete a Summary Page Display Definition Edit a Link in My Links Edit a Summary Page Display Definition Log Out of DBS Navigate Using a Link in My Links Open the Contact Us Page Open the Copyright Open the Event Calendar Open the Privacy Policy Open the Site Map Open the Summary Page Display Configuration Window Print Information Rename a Summary Page Display Definition Search the Site Search the Site Map Select a Dealer Sort Links in My Links Use a Summary Page Display Definition Use Live Chat Use the Breadcrumbs Use the Menu Tabs View Alerts View Announcements and Other News View Context-Sensitive Help View Copyright and Trademark Information View Full Help View Privacy Information View Warning or Error Messages

To  copy user permissions: Click the Select checkbox for the user or users to whom you want to copy permissions. Note : If the user you want to copy permissions to is an inactive user, you must reactivate the user before copying permissions. Note : If you are an internal user, you can click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow to navigate from page to page. Click the Copy button. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm, or click the  No  button to close the window without confirming. Note : The application copies all permissions to the selected target user(s), regardless of position.

To  open the Create Announcement page: Click the Create button.

View Overview Information   Search a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number Page Overview Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy Search for a Dealer by Number Perform Common DBS Tasks Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy Search for a Dealer by Number

An advanced search is a way to access information more directly by entering in specific keywords and phrases. There are times when users may need to perform a more detailed search to locate specific information that cannot be easily accessed from a basic search or via the Site Map. To  perform an advanced search: In the Text field, type the text for which you want to search. If desired, in the Author's Name field, type the author for which you want to search. If desired, in the Date Range field, select the date from which you want to begin your search. If desired, in the To field, select the date from which you want to end your search. Note : Menu links do not have authors or a date range associated with them. If desired, select either the Menu Link , Alerts , Announcements , or Calendar Events categories checkbox. Note : If you do not select a category, search results will display all categories that match your criteria. Click the  Search icon. Note : To clear all criteria, you click the Clear icon. To return to the basic search page, click the Basic Search button. The search function searches for the following items: approved announcements, approved alerts, approved calendar events, and menu items (names of applications, functions, and links that appear on the DBS site map).

The Notifications function is currently disabled per Nissan request. You can create and edit notifications, but they will not be sent unless the functionality is restored. To  resend a notification: Select a notification. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. Select the  Resend menu option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. The resend menu option is only available for notifications that have a "Sent" status.

To create or edit a standard operation group: In the Standard Operation Group field, type the name of the group. In the Start Date field, type or use the calendar to select a beginning date for the group. In the End Date field, type or use the calendar to select an ending date for the group. Select the  Re-Run Flag  checkbox, as needed. Note : Do not set the re-run flag if you are making other changes to the code. The system automatically sets the re-run flag whenever you create or edit a standard operation code. Add key words. Click here for more information. Add part number codes (PNCs), as needed. Click here for more information. Add standard operation codes, as needed. Click here for more information. Click the Save button, or click the Cancel button to close the window without saving. Note : The new or edited code appears on the Standard Operation Code Summary page.

To create or edit a standard operation group: In the Standard Operation Group field, type the name of the group. In the Start Date field, type or use the calendar to select a beginning date for the group. In the End Date field, type or use the calendar to select an ending date for the group. Select the  Re-Run Flag  checkbox, as needed. Note : Do not set the re-run flag if you are making other changes to the code. The system automatically sets the re-run flag whenever you create or edit a standard operation code. Add key words. Click here for more information. Add part number codes (PNCs), as needed. Click here for more information. Add standard operation codes, as needed. Click here for more information. Click the Save button, or click the Cancel button to close the window without saving. Note : The new or edited code appears on the Standard Operation Code Summary page.

00DCA468-DE9D-4A77-813D-0B3D091D39FB\Campaign SVC Parts Orders BUY SELLS Quick Reference INFINITI 062017.pdf

Search Results Page Overview Purpose Use the Search Results page to search for specific text in approved announcements, alerts, calendar events, and menu items. Enter criteria in the Search Site field, then click the Search icon next to the Search Site field to access the Search Results page. From this page you can review search results or conduct an advance search query. The Advanced Search function takes you to a screen where you can enter additional criteria to search for the author who created announcements, alerts and calendar events as well as dates when they were approved. Menu links do not have an author or date range associated with them. Description The content area of the Search Results page displays the following sections: Criteria - Allows you to enter the text for which you want to search Results - Displays the results for the criteria you entered Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Search Results page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Perform an Advanced Search View Search Results Perform an Advanced Search View Search Results Page Preview

Search a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number Page Overview Purpose Use the Search a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page to search for a dealer by hierarchy or number. Description The content area of the Search a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page displays the Choose one from the available two options below section. This section allows you to search for a dealer based on the hierarchy (affiliate, division, region, area, district, and dealer) or dealer number. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Search a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy Search for a Dealer by Number Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy Search for a Dealer by Number Page Preview

To  create a summary page display definition: In the Please input new custom page definition name for creation field, type a name. Click the Add button. From the Available Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button.  If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If desired, in the Sortable Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button.  Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If necessary, select a sorting rule for each field. Click the  Save button. Note : A confirmation message displays. Note : To clear all selections, click the Reset button. Note : To close the window without saving, click the  Cancel button. Click Close .

To  create a summary page display definition: In the Please input new custom page definition name for creation field, type a name. Click the Add button. From the Available Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button.  If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If desired, in the Sortable Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button.  Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If necessary, select a sorting rule for each field. Click the  Save button. Note : A confirmation message displays. Note : To clear all selections, click the Reset button. Note : To close the window without saving, click the  Cancel button. Click Close .

To  create a summary page display definition: In the Please input new custom page definition name for creation field, type a name. Click the Add button. From the Available Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button.  If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If desired, in the Sortable Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button.  Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If necessary, select a sorting rule for each field. Click the  Save button. Note : A confirmation message displays. Note : To clear all selections, click the Reset button. Note : To close the window without saving, click the  Cancel button. Click Close .

To  create a summary page display definition: In the Please input new custom page definition name for creation field, type a name. Click the Add button. From the Available Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button.  If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If desired, in the Sortable Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button.  Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If necessary, select a sorting rule for each field. Click the  Save button. Note : A confirmation message displays. Note : To clear all selections, click the Reset button. Note : To close the window without saving, click the  Cancel button. Click Close .

To  create a summary page display definition: In the Please input new custom page definition name for creation field, type a name. Click the Add button. From the Available Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button.  If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If desired, in the Sortable Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button.  Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If necessary, select a sorting rule for each field. Click the  Save button. Note : A confirmation message displays. Note : To clear all selections, click the Reset button. Note : To close the window without saving, click the  Cancel button. Click Close .

To  create a summary page display definition: In the Please input new custom page definition name for creation field, type a name. Click the Add button. From the Available Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button.  If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If desired, in the Sortable Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button.  Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If necessary, select a sorting rule for each field. Click the  Save button. Note : A confirmation message displays. Note : To clear all selections, click the Reset button. Note : To close the window without saving, click the  Cancel button. Click Close .

To  create a summary page display definition: In the Please input new custom page definition name for creation field, type a name. Click the Add button. From the Available Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button.  If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If desired, in the Sortable Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button.  Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If necessary, select a sorting rule for each field. Click the  Save button. Note : A confirmation message displays. Note : To clear all selections, click the Reset button. Note : To close the window without saving, click the  Cancel button. Click Close .

To view the event calendar summary and details: To change the calendar display, click the Weekly Format or Monthly Format button, if desired. To display the details for a specific event, click the event title. To print the calendar display or the details of a specific event, click the Print button. To close the event details, click the  Close button. The calendar only displays those events related to your permissions.

The Notifications function is currently disabled per Nissan request. You can create and edit notifications, but they will not be sent unless the functionality is restored. View Overview Information Notifications Page Overview Create or Edit a Notification Workflow Perform Tasks Change the Status of a Notification Copy a Notification Delete a Notification Filter the Notifications Summary Open the Create Notification Page Open the Edit Notification Page Perform Common  DBS Tasks Resend a Notification View or Print Notification Detail View Notifications Summary Change the Status of a Notification Copy a Notification Delete a Notification Filter the Notifications Summary Open the Create Notification Page Open the Edit Notification Page Perform Common  DBS Tasks Resend a Notification View or Print Notification Detail View Notifications Summary

About RDR: What You Need to Know If a salesperson or F&I Manager does not display in the RDR drop-down lists, your system administrator needs to confirm that the user's Dealer Employee Number in your DMS EXACTLY matches the Dealer Employee Number in NNAnet.com and the Dealer Employee Number in Virtual Academy. If these numbers are not the same; surveys, incentives, system data, and other information will be affected. Note : Updates to NNAnet.com are processed in a nightly batch. Updates to Virtual Academy and their sync to NNAnet.com can take up to 72 hours; therefore, changes made in NNAnet will show in DBS no earlier than the following business day. Vehicle trades are done using OMS and the results are immediately reflected in OMS, but inventory updates into DBS only occur every 30 minutes. If you have completed a vehicle trade in OMS, this vehicle may not display in your vehicle inventory for up to 30 minutes; however, you can still RDR a vehicle that has been recently traded even if your DBS inventory does not yet show the vehicle. Please see the topic " RDR a Vehicle Not in Your Inventory Using Quick Entry RDR ". RDR's cannot be submitted to the Nissan Host after 10 PM Central time (except on Sales Close which extends the time to midnight Central time). RDRs submitted after 10 PM Central time will not be processed and you will need to resubmit them the following day. The Nissan Host will be back on line at 5 AM Central time for RDR submissions.

To  grant or remove full access to a menu (tab) and its contents: Show the Menu section, if collapsed. Note :  To show the Menu section, click the  +  icon in the section header. Select or clear the checkbox for the applicable menu. Note : When you select or clear a menu checkbox, all items under that menu are selected or cleared, including its pages, actions, and custom fields, if applicable. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm, or click the  No  button to close the window without confirming. The function tree displays permission options in hierarchical order, starting with the menu items at the top and ending with the specific functional items at the bottom.

To  grant or remove full access to a menu (tab) and its contents: Show the Menu section, if collapsed. Note :  To show the Menu section, click the  +  icon in the section header. Select or clear the checkbox for the applicable menu. Note : When you select or clear a menu checkbox, all items under that menu are selected or cleared, including its pages, actions, and custom fields, if applicable. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm, or click the  No  button to close the window without confirming. The function tree displays permission options in hierarchical order, starting with the menu items at the top and ending with the specific functional items at the bottom.

To access  Dealer Portal / NNAnet.com to view your documents: Click the My Documents link. Note : Clicking this link opens the  Dealer Portal / NNAnet.com site in a new window. This link opens an external application. Follow the procedures within that application to complete this task.

To delete a part from a return: Select the part you want to delete. Move your cursor over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message may appear. Note : To prevent the confirmation from appearing in the future, click the  Do not ask me again  checkbox. If a confirmation message appears, click the Yes button to confirm the deletion, or the No button to cancel the deletion. Click the Save button. To delete a part from a parts return, the return must be in "New" or "Open" status.

The information in the vehicle detail varies depending on whether the customer view or the dealer view is selected. The dealer view contains information that is not intended for customer access. To print detail: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the Print Vehicle Detail option. Note : The File Download dialog box appears. Click the Open or Save button, or click the Cancel button to close without opening or saving. Note : Continue with the procedures for viewing or printing PDF files applicable for your location.

The type of sale selected can impact the information required in the Buyer section. See the Step by Step tab in Full Help for complete details. To  complete the Buyer section of a used vehicle RDR: From the Title drop-down list, select a title. Enter or update the customer name, address, and contact information. Note : If you select "Commercial Account" from the Title drop-down list, you must enter the company name and details instead of the customer details.  Note : Type all 9s in the Daytime or Evening field if the customer does not have a phone. In the Email field, type the customer email address. Note : Type three asterisks (*) if the customer does not have an email address. Complete the Driver section of the RDR. Click  here  for more information.

Note : You can only delete warranty claims in New, Open, Error, Warning, Suspended-dealer, or Rejected status. Proceed with caution - you cannot recover a deleted warranty claim. To delete a warranty claim from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page: Click the Delete button. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion. Note : DBS  deletes the warranty claim from the system and displays the Manage Warranty Claim page.

Note : You can only delete warranty claims in New, Open, Error, Warning, Suspended-dealer, or Rejected status. Proceed with caution - you cannot recover a deleted warranty claim. To delete a warranty claim from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page: Click the Delete button. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion. Note : DBS  deletes the warranty claim from the system and displays the Manage Warranty Claim page.

To complete the Comments section of an express entry warranty claim: In the Advisor Comments field, type comments from the service advisor. In the Technician Comments field, type comments from the service technician.

View Overview Information Vehicle Inventory Page Overview Manage Vehicle Inventory Workflow Report or Edit the Sale of a Vehicle (RDR) Workflow Perform Tasks About the Vehicle Inventory Page About Vehicle Inventory: What You Need to Know Access OMS to Locate a Vehicle Access OMS to Trade a Vehicle Access OMS to View OMS Vehicle Detail Access the Inventory Search Page from Vehicle Inventory Access the RDR Vehicle Page from Vehicle Inventory Edit Vehicle Stock Number Export Vehicle Inventory Information Filter Vehicle Inventory Filter Vehicle Inventory Using an Advanced Filter Manage Vehicle Notes Perform Common DBS Tasks Print RDR Detail Print Vehicle Detail View Campaign Information for a Vehicle in Inventory View the Campaign Report View Invoice View, Print, or Email Window Sticker About the Vehicle Inventory Page Access the Inventory Search Page from Vehicle Inventory Edit Vehicle Stock Number Export Vehicle Inventory Information Filter Vehicle Inventory Filter Vehicle Inventory Using an Advanced Filter Manage Vehicle Notes Perform Common DBS Tasks Place Vehicle in Demo Service Print Vehicle Detail View Invoice View, Print, or Email Window Sticker

NNA internal users only To delete a campaign part: Select the part you want to delete. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Delete Part  option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm, or click the  No  button to close the window without confirming.

To set a custom search group: Click the Customize icon to open the Configure Inventory Search page. Type a search group name in the Search Group name field. Note : You can create up to 10 custom search group names. Click the + button to add the group name to the Search Group name box. From the  Action menu, click on the desired group name. Select View/Edit to view or change the group name, or select  Delete to remove the group. From the Available Dealers list, select the dealers to include in your custom search group. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the  Add button to add the available dealer to the Selected Dealers list. To remove a selected dealer, highlight the dealer and click the  Remove button to remove the dealer from the Selected Dealers list.  In the Enter Dealer Number for quick entry field, type the desired dealer number, and then click the  Add button to add a dealer directly to the Selected Dealers list.  Click the  Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : You can add a maximum of 20 dealers to the custom search group. You can add a maximum of 20 dealers to the custom search group. The option to change the search radius is available only after you have performed an inventory search.

To view the Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) or campaign information for a vehicle on the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report page: In the Campaign Description column, click the hyperlinked description. Note : Campaign details are not available for all vehicles. The TSB or campaign details display in a new window. Close the window when you have finished reviewing the content.

View Overview Information   User Summary Page Overview Edit User Permissions Workflow View User Permissions Workflow Perform Tasks Deactivate or Reactivate a User Grant or Remove Access to DBS Open the Copy User Permissions Page Open the Edit User Permissions Page Open the View User Permissions Page Perform Common DBS Tasks Retrieve a List of New or Updated Users Search for a Dealer User Search for an Internal User View User Summary Deactivate or Reactivate a User Grant or Remove Access to DBS Open the Copy User Permissions Page Open the Edit User Permissions Page Open the View User Permissions Page Perform Common DBS Tasks Retrieve a List of New or Updated Users Search for a Dealer User by Dealer Code Search for a Dealer User by Hierarchy Search for a Dealer User by Name Search for an Internal User by Hierarchy Search for an Internal User by Name Search for an Internal User by User ID View User Summary

To export the dealer operation code summary: Click the  Export button. Select the output format. Note : The File Download window opens. Save the file to your local drive. If you filter the page before exporting, only those records that meet the filter criteria export. You can filter, sort, and print the data if you export the information to Microsoft ®  Excel ® .

1/6 - confirmed in issue log that Clean Cache will be removed for deployment. View Overview Information   Clean Cache Page Overview   Perform Tasks Clean the Cache Perform Common DBS  Tasks Clean the Cache Perform Common DBS Tasks

View Overview Information   Application Auditing Page Overview Perform Tasks Interpret Application Audit Information Perform Common DBS Tasks Search Application Audit Information Interpret Application Audit Information Perform Common DBS Tasks Search Application Audit Information

To export the custom VIN campaign report information: Filter or sort the table data as desired, and then click the Export button. Note : The campaignReport.xlsx dialog box appears. Follow your browser-specific instructions to open or save the file.

Note : By default, the Dealer List section displays all parts return status information for the current calendar year sorted first by dealer name and then by return due date. Only those dealerships for which you have PDC permissions display in the list. There are three common ways to manipulate the data displayed on the View Parts Return Status page: by dealer number, by PDC, or by hierarchy. Each method produces significantly different results, so instructions for each method are provided on the Step by Step tab. Since the View Parts Return Status page is primarily used by PDC team members, the instructions for filtering the data by PDC appear below. To filter the View Parts Return Status page by PDC: If desired, from the Return Year drop-down list, select a new return year. From the Available PDC List drop-down, select the PDC for which you want to view parts return status information. Click the Search icon to execute the search. If the Dealer List has more results than can be displayed on a single page, use the page navigation icons or the Go to Page field to navigate to additional data pages.

Search for Transactions Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for searching and viewing transactions.

To view the reports list: View the list of reports. Note : A purple "N" appears beside the name of reports owned by you. In order to sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. You can generate, replicate, or view any report in your list. You must be the owner of a report, indicated by a purple "N," in order to delete, transfer, copy, modify, or make public.

Note : This task applies to internal users only. To add a custom search group: In the Search Range section, select a search range. Type the desired name, and then click the  + icon. Note : The new custom group name appears in the list. From the Available Dealers list, select one or more dealers and then click the >> icon. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the  CTRL  key while selecting items. Note : If you selected either District or Region in the Search Range section, select a district or region from the drop-down lists. Click the Save button. If you know the dealer code, you can type the dealer code in the Enter Dealer Code for quick entry field and then click the Add button. You can view the list of dealers by name only or by name and number. To display by dealer name only, click the Dealer Name link. To display by dealer number and dealer name, click the Dealer Code link. You can also narrow the list of dealers by letter. To display all dealers that start with a specific letter, click the link for the desired letter. You can have no more than 20 dealers in a custom group.

To  view the IASR summary: Review the list of IASR tasks. To view additional pages, click a page number or click the < or > icons. To go to a specific page, type the page number in the Go to Page field, and then click Go . To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title.

View Overview Information   Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report Page Overview  Perform Tasks About the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report Page Edit Information on the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report Page Export Information from the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report Page Perform Common DBS Tasks Search for Information on the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report View NSH for a Vehicle on the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report Page View TSB for a Vehicle on the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report Page

Only reason to update it the Search (magnifying glass) and Clear (broom) icon has changed To  access the View Report page: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the  Action menu, select the  View option. Note : The View Report page appears.

To  look up a part from the View Part Master Information page:  At the end of the Part Number field, click the Lookup icon. Note : The Part Lookup page appears. In the fields provided, type full or partial information. Note : You must include an asterisk (*) when typing partial information. Note : To remove search criteria, click the  Clear  icon. Click the  Search  icon. Note : DBS displays a list of records matching the search criteria in the Parts section.  Select the desired part. Note : DBS displays part detail in the Part Detail section. To determine if the part is superseded, scroll down in the Part Detail section. Note : If a " Y " appears in the Supersession Flag field, the part is superseded.  Note : The new part number appears in the New Part field above the Supersession Flag field. If the part is superseded, copy the value in the New Part field, paste it into the Part Number field, and repeat steps 3-6. To select the part, click the Select button. Note : To cancel the lookup, click the  Cancel button.

To  view search results: Click a link in a category. Note : If you click a link to an alert, announcement, or calendar event, a window appears that contains the content of the item you selected. To close the window, click the Close button. If you click a menu link, you will go to that part of DBS . Note : If multiple pages display, click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow to navigate from page to page.

To select recipients for dealer user by input a dealer number option: Click the  Dealer Users button. Select the Input a Dealer option. Click the Next button to continue. Type a dealer number. Click the Next button to continue, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. Select either the Position or User option. Note: The appropriate options display based on your selection. Select either the available positions or available users. Note: To select multiple items, press and hold the  CTRL  key while selecting items. Click the Copy (>>) or Copy All (>>I) button to move the selection(s) to the Selected Fields list. Note: To remove a selection from the Selected Fields list, select the option and click the Remove (<<) button. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the  Back button to return to the previous window. To view your recipient selections after you select them, use the View/Print option in the Action menu.

Use the Monitor Interface page to view the status of transactions that interact with interfaces outside of DBS . Note : This task is performed by internal users only. To  search for and monitor transactions on the Monitor Interface page: In the fields provided, select or type search options to limit the summary display.  Click the Search button. Note : Click the Reset button to clear the search criteria entered. View the transactions that meet the selected criteria. To prevent an excessive number of search results, provide a date or time range to limit the search results.

View Overview Information   My Profile Page Overview   Perform Tasks Manage My Profile Perform Common DBS Tasks Manage My Profile Perform Common DBS Tasks

Need to verify tasks for Request Labor Time Guide and Request Full Flat Rate Manual. Service Landing Page Overview Purpose Use the Service Landing page to view alerts, announcements, and other news related to service. Description The content area of the Service landing page displays the following sections: Alerts - As applicable, alert messages appear at the top of the page. These messages typically provide information that is system-critical. Announcements -  As applicable, high-priority messages appear in the Regional or National Announcements section.  When the message is no longer considered a high priority, the text automatically moves to the Other News section. Other News -  This section displays messages that have a lower priority than messages in the Announcements section. Tasks You can perform the following tasks from or on the Service Landing page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. View Alerts View Announcements and Other News View Alerts View Announcements and Other News Page Preview

DSP STAR Web Service Overview Purpose DSP STAR refers to Dealer Service Provider (DSP)   Standards for Technology in Automotive Retail (STAR) . Use the DSP STAR Web Service page to select or update the transactions such as parts orders, repair orders, financial statements, and so on that a  Dealer Management System (DMS)  vendor can access. Description The content area of the  DSP STAR Web Service page displays the following sections: DSP List - Allows you to select a DMS vendor for whom you desire to configure the STAR Web service Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the DSP STAR Web Service page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Configure DSP STAR Web Service Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Configure DSP STAR Web Service page. Configure DSP STAR Web Service Workflow Page Preview

 To print the information: Click the Print icon. Note : Depending on the application page, a preview of the content appears or a File Download dialog box opens. If a preview appears, click the Print button, or click Close to close the preview without printing. Note : Continue with the printing procedures applicable for your location. - OR - If a dialog box appears, click the Open or Save button, or click the Cancel button to close without opening or saving. Note : Continue with the procedures for viewing or printing PDF files as applicable for your location. If you are on a summary page, the Print icon prints all the information in the summary list. To print details, use the applicable button or Action menu option.

View Page Overview or Field Definitions RDR Vehicle Page Overview Report or Edit the Sale of a Vehicle Workflow Perform Tasks About RDR: What You Need to Know Access OMS to View Vehicle Detail Access the RDR Vehicle Page from Vehicle Inventory Delete an RDR Perform Common DBS Tasks Report or Edit the Sale of a Vehicle Complete the Vehicle Section of an RDR Complete the Buyer Section of an RDR Complete the Co-Buyer Section of an RDR Complete the Driver Section of an RDR Complete the Legal Owner Section of an RDR Complete the Finance Section of an RDR Submit an RDR

Edit Position Permissions Page Overview Note : The Edit Position Permissions Page applies to internal users only. Purpose Use the Edit Position Permissions page to view, set up, or modify the default permissions for a specific position. Description The content area of the Edit Position Permissions page displays the following sections: Quick Jump menu  - Appears on the left-hand side of the page. The Quick Jump menu allows you to show one section at a time, or you can show or hide the default view for all sections. Permission Function Tree - By default, the function tree expands two sections: Menu and User Information. The function tree also includes a Host Report section and a Report Writer section. Use the + and - icons to show or hide a section. Use the expand all | collapse all features to expand or collapse a section. Save and Cancel buttons - Allows you to submit or cancel requested changes . Cancel returns you to the Position Summary page. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Edit Position Permissions page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Grant or Remove Access to a Host Report Grant or Remove Access to a Page, Action, Custom Field, or Website Grant or Remove Access to a Report Writer View Grant or Remove Full Access to a Menu and Its Contents Use the Quick Jump Menu Grant or Remove Access to a Host Report Grant or Remove Access to a Page, Action, Custom Field, or Website Grant or Remove Access to a Report Writer View Grant or Remove Full Access to a Menu and Its Contents Use the Quick Jump Menu Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Edit Position Permissions page. Edit Position Permissions Workflow Page Preview

View Overview Information   RO Work in Progress Page Overview Perform Tasks Export RO Work in Process Information Filter the RO Work in Process Page Hold Vehicle or Ignore Request Perform Common DBS  Tasks View NSH View Repair Order Information View Technical Service Bulletin (TSB)

View Overview Information   Dealer Information Page Overview Edit Dealer Information Workflow View Dealer Information or Permissions Workflow Perform Tasks Edit Dealer Information Perform Common DBS Tasks Edit Dealer Information Perform Common DBS Tasks

Contact Us Page Overview Purpose Use the Contact Us page to view phone and email contact information for the Dealer Business System (DBS)  help desk. Description The content area of the Contact Us page displays the following sections: DBS  Help Desk -  Provides the email address for the help desk as a hyperlink which opens your default mail program Toll-Free Phone Number -  Displays the toll-free phone number(s) established for the help desk Support Hours -  Provides information about the support hours for the help desk and live chat Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Contact Us page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Contact the  DBS Help Desk by Email Contact the  DBS Help Desk by Phone Contact the  DBS Help Desk by Email Contact the  DBS Help Desk by Phone Page Preview

To access the Hold Study Result page: At the bottom of the Early Detection System pane, click the Hold Status Summary link. Note : The Hold Study Result page opens with a list of vehicles that are included in Hold studies.

View Overview Information   Create Study Page Overview Create or Edit a Study Workflow Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks Complete the Basic Information Section of a Study Complete the Body Type Section of a Study Complete the Climatic Zone Section of a Study Complete the Dealer Data Section of a Study Complete the Dealers Section of a Study Complete the Engine Code Section of a Study Complete the Engine Type Section of a Study Complete the Manufacture Date Section of a Study Complete the Miscellaneous Features Section of a Study Complete the Model Series Section of a Study Complete the Model Year Section of a Study Complete the Notifications Section of a Study Complete the Options Section of a Study Complete the Production Plant Section of a Study Complete the Regions Section of a Study Complete the Reports Section of a Study Complete the Serial Range Section of a Study Complete the States Section of a Study Complete the Study Type Section of a Study Complete the Transmission Type Section of a Study Complete the TSB Section of a Study Perform Common DBS Tasks Complete the Basic Information Section of a Study Complete the Body Type Section of a Study Complete the Climatic Zone Section of a Study Complete the Dealer Data Section of a Study Complete the Dealers Section of a Study Complete the Engine Code Section of a Study Complete the Engine Type Section of a Study Complete the Manufacture Date Section of a Study Complete the Miscellaneous Features Section of a Study Complete the Model Series Section of a Study Complete the Model Year Section of a Study Complete the Notifications Section of a Study Complete the Options Section of a Study Complete the Production Plant Section of a Study Complete the Regions Section of a Study Complete the Reports Section of a Study Complete the Serial Range Section of a Study Complete the States Section of a Study Complete the Study Type Section of a Study Complete the Transmission Type Section of a Study Complete the TSB Section of a Study

The Batch Validate function is available from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, and Quick Entry Warranty claim pages. This function sends the claim to the DBS batch-validate queue and validates the claim in the background; allowing you to proceed to the next claim. To perform a batch validation on a warranty claim: Access the desired warranty claim. Note : See the Step by Step tab in full help to view the steps for accessing a warranty claim. Once you have finished entering in all the information for a claim, click the Batch Validate button at the bottom of the screen from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, or the Quick Entry Warranty claim page. Note : DBS sends this claim to the batch-validate queue and validates the claim in the background. The cursor automatically goes back to the Repair Order field at the top of the page for you to begin entering the next RO.

The Batch Validate function is available from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, and Quick Entry Warranty claim pages. This function sends the claim to the DBS batch-validate queue and validates the claim in the background; allowing you to proceed to the next claim. To perform a batch validation on a warranty claim: Access the desired warranty claim. Note : See the Step by Step tab in full help to view the steps for accessing a warranty claim. Once you have finished entering in all the information for a claim, click the Batch Validate button at the bottom of the screen from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, or the Quick Entry Warranty claim page. Note : DBS sends this claim to the batch-validate queue and validates the claim in the background. The cursor automatically goes back to the Repair Order field at the top of the page for you to begin entering the next RO.

The Batch Validate function is available from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, and Quick Entry Warranty claim pages. This function sends the claim to the DBS batch-validate queue and validates the claim in the background; allowing you to proceed to the next claim. To perform a batch validation on a warranty claim: Access the desired warranty claim. Note : See the Step by Step tab in full help to view the steps for accessing a warranty claim. Once you have finished entering in all the information for a claim, click the Batch Validate button at the bottom of the screen from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, or the Quick Entry Warranty claim page. Note : DBS sends this claim to the batch-validate queue and validates the claim in the background. The cursor automatically goes back to the Repair Order field at the top of the page for you to begin entering the next RO.

Click the Step by Step tab for additional information on constructing searches. Note : To use the Search feature, you must be viewing Full Help. To search the DBS  help system: Click in the Search field and type your search term or phrase. Note : See the Search Tips section on the Step by Step tab for additional information. Press the Enter key on your keyboard, or click the Search icon. The search results display in the Table of Contents panel organized by major topic area. Individual topics display in the center list. Topics that appear in the list include those that contain the search term in the topic title, topics that have the search term as a keyword, and topics that have a "Related Topics" link with the search term. Click a topic name in the Table of Contents panel or the center list to display the topic contents.  

Note : Only those alerts highlighted with a red background have a hold request. To hold a vehicle or ignore a vehicle hold request on the RO Work in Process page: In the Alerts section, move your cursor over the Action icon for the row for which you want to hold the vehicle or deny a hold request. From the Action menu, select the Detail option. Note : The Alert window appears. To hold the vehicle as requested, click the Hold button. To ignore the vehicle hold request, click the Ignore button. To close the window without holding or ignoring the hold request, click the Close button.

To view a repair order (RO) from the View Warranty Claim page: At the bottom of the page, click the  RO button. Note : The Repair Order Information window opens. Click the  Print button to print the RO, or click the Close button to return to the previous screen.  

Manage Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing parts returns. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Parts Return Workflow. Modify Parts Return Workflow

Edit User Permissions Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only.   Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for editing user permissions. Related Workflows The following workflow may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit User Permissions Workflow. View User Permissions Workflow

To create an advanced inventory filter: Click the Advanced Filter icon. From the first drop-down list, select a filter criteria. From the second drop-down list, select a filter option. If a field appears, type a filter value. Click the Plus sign to add the criteria to the filter list. Note : Add additional search criteria as desired. Click the Search button to apply the filter.

Use the Support page (available from the footer) to perform this task. Note : The footer is a short menu that appears at the bottom of every page in the DBS application. To  access the Support page from any DBS  application page: Click the Support link.

Note : You can view National Service History (NSH) from the Alerts section of the RO Work in Process page and the Open ROs section. To view NSH from the RO Work in Process page: In the Alerts section or Open ROs section, move your cursor over the Action icon for the repair order or alert you wish to view. From the Action menu, select the  NSH option. Note : The National Service History window appears. Expand or collapse each section to view the service history details. If available, click the View Detail hyperlink in the Vehicle Detail selection to view the window sticker. To print the window contents, click the Print button. Note : A PDF file of the National Service History appears. Click the Printer icon to print the detail. To close the National Service History and return to the RO Work in Process page, click the Close button.

To  filter the alert summary list: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. If a text-entry field appears, type a filter value and then click the Search button. If a drop-down list appears, select an option from the list. Note : The page refreshes to display only those alerts that match your selection. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options and clear the search criteria, click the  Clear  icon.

To approve multiple SVC (service campaign) orders: Select the check box next to each campaign order you want to approve. Click the Approve Selected button. Click the Yes button to approve the selected orders. Note : To close the message and return to the SVC Order Management page without approving the orders, click the No button.

To  delete a summary page display configuration: Select the page definition you want to delete. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion, or the No button to cancel the deletion. Click the Close button.

To  delete a summary page display configuration: Select the page definition you want to delete. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion, or the No button to cancel the deletion. Click the Close button.

To  delete a summary page display configuration: Select the page definition you want to delete. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion, or the No button to cancel the deletion. Click the Close button.

To  delete a summary page display configuration: Select the page definition you want to delete. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion, or the No button to cancel the deletion. Click the Close button.

To  delete a summary page display configuration: Select the page definition you want to delete. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion, or the No button to cancel the deletion. Click the Close button.

To  delete a summary page display configuration: Select the page definition you want to delete. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion, or the No button to cancel the deletion. Click the Close button.

To  delete a summary page display configuration: Select the page definition you want to delete. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion, or the No button to cancel the deletion. Click the Close button.

View Overview Information   Parts Aggregate Metrics Page Overview   Perform Tasks Export Parts Aggregate Metrics Data Perform Common DBS Tasks Search for Parts Aggregate Metrics Data

Note : You can view technical service bulletins (TSBs) from the Alerts section of the RO Work in Process page and the Open ROs section. To view a TSB from the RO Work in Process page: In the Alerts section or Open ROs section, move your cursor over the Action icon for the repair order or alert you wish to view. From the Action menu, select the TSB option. Note : The TSB Detail window appears. TSBs that specifically match a job line in the RO display in the Job Line Match section. Other TSBs that may be applicable to the vehicle or RO display in the May Be Applicable section. To view the details of the TSB, click the hyperlinked TSB number. Note : The TSB detail PDF file displays in a new window. Review the TSB detail, then click the Close button to return to the TSB Detail window. Click the Close button on the TSB Detail window to return to the RO Work in Process page.

View Overview Information   Site Map Page Overview Perform Tasks Browse the Site Map Perform Common DBS Tasks Search the Site Map Browse the Site Map Perform Common DBS Tasks Search the Site Map

Site Map Search Results Page Overview Purpose Use the Site Map Search Results page to review the links that match the search criteria you entered on the Site Map page. Description The content area of the Site Map Search Results page displays the following sections: Search Results  - The Search Results section allows you to quickly navigate to any hyperlinked page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Site Map Search Results page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Open an Application Page Open an Application Page Page Preview

The steps for adding a key word are the same for the Create Standard Operating Category and Create Standard Operation Code pages. To add a key word: In the Key Words field, type a key word or phrase. Click the Add icon. Note : The key word or phrase appears in the list of key words. 

The steps for adding a key word are the same for the Create Standard Operating Category and Create Standard Operation Code pages. To add a key word: In the Key Words field, type a key word or phrase. Click the Add icon. Note : The key word or phrase appears in the list of key words. 

The steps for adding a key word are the same for the Create Standard Operating Category and Create Standard Operation Code pages. To add a key word: In the Key Words field, type a key word or phrase. Click the Add icon. Note : The key word or phrase appears in the list of key words. 

To use the Parts menu: Move your mouse pointer over the Parts tab to display a menu. Move your mouse pointer over the menu option you want to access. Note :   When you move your mouse pointer over a menu option, three icons appear for that option. The single window icon opens the content in a new tab in the current browser. The double window icon opens the selected content in a new tab and in a new browser. The star icon adds the link to your My Links list. Click the menu option or click the applicable icon to open the desired page or application. Note : If you click a menu option, instead of clicking an icon, the content opens in the current tab. What you see on the Parts menu is determined by your user ID and how your user profile is created. Your user profile indicates what functional areas and applications you need to access. Only those you need access to will display on the Parts menu.

View Overview Information Manage ICV Exceptions Page Overview Perform Tasks Add an ICV Exception Edit or Disable an ICV Exception

To create an express warranty claim: Complete each section of the warranty claim. Click the links below for instructions on how to complete/view these sections: Summary Claim Information Parts Operations Expenses Comments Customer Summary Claim Information Parts Operations Expenses Comments Customer Click the Save button to save your changes. Note : To validate the information in the claim, click the Validate button. Any errors that exist will be identified in red text. Errors must be corrected in order for the Submit button to be active. To submit a claim with no errors, click the Submit button.   You can save a warranty claim with warnings and error messages, and update the claim at a later time.

View Overview Information   Report Writer Copy or Transfer Report Page Overview Change User, Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Workflow Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks Select a User to Receive Report Definitions Perform Common DBS Tasks Select a User to Receive Report Definitions

To  access the View Dealer Permissions page: Select the dealer. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the View Dealer Permissions option. Note : The application displays a function tree. The tree lists the items that are assigned to the specific dealer.

To use the Office menu: Move your mouse pointer over the  Office tab to display the corresponding menu. To open content in the current tab, select the desired menu link. -OR- For more display choices, move your mouse pointer over the menu link to view the following three icons, and select the desired option: Single Window:  Opens the selected content in a new tab in the current browser window. Double Window: Opens the selected content in a new tab and in a new browser window. Star: Adds the link to your My Links list. Internal Links Submit Financial Statements Reports Report Writer Host Reports What you see on the Office page menu is determined by your user ID and how your user profile is created. Your user profile indicates the functional areas and applications you can access.

View Overview Information   View Parts Order Page Overview View Parts Order Workflow Perform Tasks Cancel a Backorder Perform Common DBS Tasks Perform CSC Upgrade for a VOR or TOS Order in Backorder Status View Parts Order View Related Order Detail for a CSC Order Perform Common DBS Tasks View Parts Order

To use the quick jump menu: To open the quick jump menu, click the expand  (>>) icon. Click one of the options in the menu. To display a specific section of the page, click a section title in the menu. To show or hide all sections, click the expand all or collapse all link. To jump to the top or bottom of the page, click the top or bottom link. To return to the top of the page from any section, click the Top  button. To close the quick jump menu, click the collapse (<<) icon.

To select a user to view the user's report list: From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : The selected user's list of reports appears.  

To select a user to view the user's report list: From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : The selected user's list of reports appears.  

To select a user to view the user's report list: From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : The selected user's list of reports appears.  

To select a user to view the user's report list: From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : The selected user's list of reports appears.  

To select a user to view the user's report list: From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : The selected user's list of reports appears.  

The View Processing Results link only displays for a statement if the statement was submitted to the corporate financial management system and a response was received. Only the latest statement received has the link available. To view processing results: In the Results Link column, click the View Processing Results link. Note : You see the processing results of the financial statement in a new window.

Note : The Print Warranty Claim function is available from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, View Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, and Quick Entry Warranty Claim pages. To  print a warranty claim: Click the Print button in the upper-right of the page. Note : The Print Confirmation window appears. If the repair order has more than one line, select whether you want to print the displayed line only, or all claim lines; and then click the Print button. Follow your browser-specific instructions to open or save the print file. Use the Printer icon available in the PDF application toolbar and proceed as you normally would to print a file.

Note : The Print Warranty Claim function is available from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, View Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, and Quick Entry Warranty Claim pages. To  print a warranty claim: Click the Print button in the upper-right of the page. Note : The Print Confirmation window appears. If the repair order has more than one line, select whether you want to print the displayed line only, or all claim lines; and then click the Print button. Follow your browser-specific instructions to open or save the print file. Use the Printer icon available in the PDF application toolbar and proceed as you normally would to print a file.

Note : The Print Warranty Claim function is available from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, View Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, and Quick Entry Warranty Claim pages. To  print a warranty claim: Click the Print button in the upper-right of the page. Note : The Print Confirmation window appears. If the repair order has more than one line, select whether you want to print the displayed line only, or all claim lines; and then click the Print button. Follow your browser-specific instructions to open or save the print file. Use the Printer icon available in the PDF application toolbar and proceed as you normally would to print a file.

View Overview Information   Request Full Parts Master Page Overview Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks Request a Full Parts Master Perform Common DBS Tasks Request a Full Parts Master

System Monitoring Pages The table below provides a brief description of the system monitoring pages in the Dealer Business System (DBS) . Page Name Description Application Auditing Displays the information collected by the logging function in DBS . The type of information collected for each record varies based on the logging level selected at the time the information was logged. Monitor System Displays information about the overall health of DBS  and the host environment. Monitors response time and system availability for each application. Monitor User Status Displays the transaction and system access information for an individual DBS  user. Monitor Transaction Displays transaction errors and response time information for individual transactions in DBS . Transaction Status Displays information about the status of individual transactions within DBS  and provides a hyperlink to individual transaction details.

To  access the Edit Parts Order page: Select the parts order you want to edit. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit Order  option. Note : The Edit Parts Order page displays. The Edit option is available only if the order status is "New" or "Open."  For all other statuses, use the View option. To modify a parts order, the order must be in "New" or "Open" status.

To  access the Edit Parts Order page: Select the parts order you want to edit. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit Order  option. Note : The Edit Parts Order page displays. The Edit option is available only if the order status is "New" or "Open."  For all other statuses, use the View option. To modify a parts order, the order must be in "New" or "Open" status.

To release a vehicle from dealer hold, from the Service tab, select EDS: Study Dashboard : At the bottom of the  Early Detection System pane, click the Hold Status Summary link. Note : The Hold Study Result page opens with a list of vehicles that are included in Hold Studies. For the vehicle you want to release, move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Release  option. Note:  The Release window opens. Click the Release button to confirm. Note: The vehicle is released from the dealer hold. The Release Vehicle option is only available for vehicles that have been confirmed as held by the servicing dealer.

MRW: Internal user only MRW: 2/27/13 - When filtering by Part Number, the part lookup icon does not appear. Submitted issue. Also, if you use the asterisk, the parts appear in the list, for example H* Note : This task applies to internal users only. To look up a part from the Campaign Part Management page: At the end of the Part Number field, click the Lookup icon. Note : The Part Lookup page appears. In the fields provided, type full or partial information. Note : You must include an asterisk (*) when typing partial information. Note : To remove search criteria, click the  Clear  icon. Click the  Search  icon. Note : DBS displays a list of records matching the search criteria in the Parts section.  Select the part. Note : DBS displays part detail in the Part Detail section. To determine if the part is superseded, scroll down in the Part Detail section. Note : If a " Y " appears in the Supersession Flag field, the part is superseded.  Note : The new part number appears in the New Part field above the Supersession Flag field. If the part is superseded, copy the value in the New Part field, paste it into the Part Number field, and repeat steps 3-6. To select the part, click the Select button. Note : To cancel the lookup, click the  Cancel button.

View Overview Information   Parts Metrics Page Overview View Parts Metrics Workflow Perform Tasks Export Parts Metrics Information Look Up a Dealer from the Parts Metrics Page Open the Custom Search Group Dialog to Add, Delete, or Edit a Custom Group Perform Common DBS Tasks Request Parts Metrics View Parts Metrics Export Parts Metrics Information Look Up a Dealer from the Parts Metrics Page Open the Custom Search Group Dialog to Add, Delete, or Edit a Custom Group Perform Common DBS Tasks Request Parts Metrics View Parts Metrics

To  complete the Vehicle section of a used vehicle RDR: Locate existing information for the VIN by selecting an option from the Filter by drop-down list. Note : The default search is VIN number. In the filter criteria field, enter the criteria for which you want to search. Press the Enter key on your keyboard or click the Search icon to view information that matches the filter criteria. Note : If found, DBS  populates the vehicle data in the VIN, Stock Number, Model Description, and Model Year fields. You may modify this information if necessary. From the Type of Sale drop-down list, select the type of sale. From the Deal drop-down list, select a deal type. Note : If you select a deal, the sale date, salesperson, and most customer information is provided for you. Click in the Sale Date field, and then use the calendar to select the desired date. From the Salesperson drop-down list, select the salesperson. From the F&I Manager drop-down list, select the F&I manager. From the Spanish Language drop-down list, indicate if this is a Spanish language sale. From the State/Province  drop-down list, select the state or province of the dealer. Scroll to the bottom of the page and click the Save button to save your changes, or click the  Cancel button to close without saving. A  will display for any missing or incorrect data. Complete the Customer section of the RDR. Click  here  for more information. It is incredibly important that you verify and correct all RDR data before submission. You cannot modify a submitted RDR.

To select recipients by dealer user for hierarchy option: Click the  Dealer Users button. Select the Choose recipients by Hierarchy option. Click the Next button to continue. Select a hierarchy by clicking on the box before the hierarchy.  Note : To expand the hierarchy to select specific options, click the plus sign. Note : To de-select a hierarchy, click the box to remove the check mark. Click the Next button to continue, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. Select the available eligibility options. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the  CTRL  key while selecting items. Click the Copy (>>) or Copy All (>>I) button to move the selection(s) to the Selected Fields box. Note: To remove a selection from the Selected Fields box, select the option and click the Remove (<<) button. Click the Next button to continue, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. Select the available position options. Click the  Copy  button to move the selected options to the Selected box, or click the Copy All  button to move all options. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the  Back button to return to the previous window. To view your recipient selections after you select them, use the View/Print option in the Action menu.

View Overview Information RDR History Page Overview View RDR History Workflow About RDR History: What You Need to Know Perform Tasks About the RDR History Page Access OMS Vehicle Detail from RDR History Access Reports Export RDR History Information Filter RDR History Filter RDR History by Sales Type Open the RDR Detail Report Page from RDR History Perform Common DBS Tasks Print RDR History Summary Print Vehicle Detail from RDR History View OMS Vehicle Detail from RDR History View Vehicle Detail from RDR History View Vehicle Invoice from RDR History Unwind RDR About RDR History: What You Need to Know About the RDR History Page Access Reports Export RDR History Information Filter RDR History Open the RDR Detail Report Page from RDR History Perform Common  DBS Tasks Print Vehicle Detail from RDR History View Vehicle Detail from RDR History View Vehicle Invoice from RDR History Unwind RDR

Configure DSP STAR Web Services Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for configuring DSP STAR Web Services.

To change the parts return schedule for multiple dealers: In the Dealer List section, select the checkbox for each dealer which will be included in the parts return due date change. Click the Change Return Due Date button. If necessary, from the Return Period drop-down list, select the desired return period. Note : By default, the Return Period list displays all returns from the start of the return period specified through the end of the return year. If you select a new return period, only that period and the return periods that follow will be modified.  From the Return Week drop-down list, select the desired return week. From the Return Day drop-down list, select the day of the return week on which the parts return will be due. Note : Once you select a return week and day, the Return Due Date field in the display section updates to display the targeted return dates. If desired, make further corrections to the return date by using the calendars in the Return Due Date field to select a specific date. When you have adjusted all return week and day information, click the Save button.

To view or print the calendar event detail: Select the calendar event for which you want to view or print detail. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. Select the  View/Print option. Note : The View Details window appears. To print, click the Print button. To close, click the Close button. Use the View/Print option to view the contents and recipients of a calendar event.

To edit a claim on the Quick Entry Warranty Claim page: Select the claim you want to edit. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the  Action  menu, select  the Edit Claim in Quick Entry Screen option.

To view the announcements summary: Review the list of announcements. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title.

Edit Dealer Permissions Page Overview Note : The Edit Dealer Permissions Page applies to internal users only. Purpose Use the Edit Dealer Permissions page to view or modify permissions for a specific dealer. Description The content area of the Edit Dealer Permissions page displays the following sections: Quick Jump menu - Appears on the left-hand side of the page. The Quick Jump menu allows you to show one section at a time, or you can show or hide the default view for all sections. Permission Function Tree -  By default, the function tree expands two sections: Menu and User Information. The function tree also includes a Host Report section and a Report Writer section. For internal users, the function tree also includes a Star Web Services section. Use the + and - icons to show or hide a section. Use the expand all | collapse all features to expand or collapse a section. Save and Cancel - Allows you to submit or cancel requested changes . Cancel returns you to the Dealer Summary page. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Edit Dealer Permissions page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Grant or Remove Access to a Host Report Grant or Remove Access to a Page, Action, Custom Field, or Website Grant or Remove Access to a Report Writer View Grant or Remove Access to a Star Web Service Grant or Remove Full Access to a Menu and Its Contents Use the Quick Jump Menu Grant or Remove Access to a Host Report Grant or Remove Access to a Page, Action, Custom Field, or Website Grant or Remove Access to a Report Writer View Grant or Remove Access to a Star Web Service Grant or Remove Full Access to a Menu and Its Contents Use the Quick Jump Menu   Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Edit Dealer Permissions page. Edit Dealer Permissions Workflow Page Preview

To  view dealer permissions: Show the section, if collapsed. Note : To show a section, click the + icon in the section header. Use the function tree to expand or collapse the nodes, as desired. Note : To expand all items in the section, click the expand all link in the section header. Note : The active permissions contain a check. To return to the Dealer Summary page, click the Cancel button. The function tree displays permission options in hierarchical order, starting with the menu items at the top and ending with the specific functional items at the bottom.

To  access the Create Alerts page: Click the Create button.

About Warranty Claims: What You Need to Know When a repair order (RO) is closed in the Dealer Management System (DMS), the Manage Warranty Claims Warranty page updates in real time with all the information that was entered in the RO. When a warranty claim is submitted from DBS , it is sent to the HOST and processed in a nightly batch. The following day you must check the status of your claims to determine if any were suspended or rejected so you can make the necessary corrections. Your submitted claims may have any of the following statuses: Approved - The claim was successfully processed and will be paid. Denied - The claim was processed and will not be paid. Rejected - The claim was unable to be processed, e.g., key data was missing or data invalid Suspended - The NNA Host found an error that needs to be corrected on the claim, e.g., replacement part / operation When manually creating a warranty claim or editing an existing claim, the following conditions MUST exist for technicians to display on the Create or Edit Warranty Claim page: The technician's employee ID in your DMS MUST be identical to the one entered in NNAnet.com. The technician must be registered in Virtual Academy. This is done by clicking the Register link in NNAnet on the Admin > Search User screen. Note : In some cases, it may be necessary for a technician to log into Virtual Academy to activate their account. Changes made in NNAnet are processed in a nightly batch. Any changes made may not be reflected in the Technician drop-down list for up to 48 hours. General Guidelines: Any field that displays a red asterisk indicates that this information is required. Any field with a red circle   icon indicates that an error exists. To view error messages, hover over the icon to display what errors need to be corrected on the claim. Claims cannot be submitted with errors Any field with an orange circle  icon indicates a warning message. To view warning messages, hover over the  icon to display the messages. Claims can be submitted with warnings.

View Overview Information   Create or Edit Standard Operation Group Page Overview Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Perform Tasks Create or Edit Standard Operation Group Add a Key Word Add a PNC Add a Standard Operation Code  Delete a Key Word Delete a PNC Delete Standard Operation Code Assignment Edit a Key Word Edit a PNC Edit a Standard Operation Code Assignment Look Up a PNC from the Standard Operation Group Page Perform Common DBS Tasks Create or Edit Standard Operation Group Add a Key Word Add a Standard Operation Code  Delete a Key Word Delete Standard Operation Code Assignment Edit a Key Word Edit a Standard Operation Code Assignment Perform Common DBS Tasks

To access the Create Study page to create a study: Click the New button. Note : The Create Study page opens. Create the study. Click here for more information.

Campaign Vehicle Quick Reference Guide The Vehicle Inventory page now allows you quickly and easily identify those vehicles in your inventory which are associated with an open campaign. Color-coded highlighting has been applied to campaign vehicles for quick identification of vehicles with open campaigns that have not been serviced, and those with campaigns where service has been completed. You can also filter your inventory display to view a list of those campaign vehicles at your dealership. 2E03BBAC-6B6E-4EEB-BAF5-C2389A96CDF0\Campaign Visibility Vehicle Inventory Quick Reference Guide Infiniti v6.pdf

Parts Return and Accrual Information Quick Reference Guide Parts Return and Accrual Information quick reference guide provides instructions for dealers on how to access and review their parts return schedule and accrual information. Click here to view the Parts Return and Accrual Information quick reference guide.

Could change the Filter task on the workflow to indicate it is optional, not required. Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating, modifying, or replicating a personalized report definition in Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create, Modify, or Replicate Report Definition Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make a Report Definition Public Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow

Could change the Filter task on the workflow to indicate it is optional, not required. Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating, modifying, or replicating a personalized report definition in Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create, Modify, or Replicate Report Definition Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make a Report Definition Public Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow

Could change the Filter task on the workflow to indicate it is optional, not required. Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating, modifying, or replicating a personalized report definition in Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create, Modify, or Replicate Report Definition Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make a Report Definition Public Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow

Could change the Filter task on the workflow to indicate it is optional, not required. Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating, modifying, or replicating a personalized report definition in Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create, Modify, or Replicate Report Definition Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make a Report Definition Public Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow

Could change the Filter task on the workflow to indicate it is optional, not required. Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating, modifying, or replicating a personalized report definition in Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create, Modify, or Replicate Report Definition Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make a Report Definition Public Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow

To change the logging level: Type the logger name. From the Logging Level drop-down list, select the appropriate option. Listed below is a description of what each logging level logs. Debug - Information when failure or success of significant steps occurs in processing. Info - Application life-cycle events such as application startup, initialization and shutdown. Error - The cause stack when an exception occurs. Fatal - The event that causes an unexpected termination of an application such as the failure to connect to the host. Click the  Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note: A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm and save, or click the  No  button to close the window without saving.

View SVC Order Page Overview Note : The SVC Order page applies to internal users only. You can view SVC Order from the SVC Order Management page. You must first search for and locate the desired SVC order that you want to view. Use the Action menu to open the View SVC Order page. Purpose Use the View SVC Order page to view, approve, or reject a service campaign (SVC) order, and modify the quantity, if needed. Description The content area of the View SVC Order page displays the following sections: SVC Order header - Appears at the top of the page and allows you to view general information about an SVC order including the order status, order total, campaign ID, and backorder or cross ship preferences SVC Order Detail - Allows you to view the parts on the SVC order Buttons - Allow you to approve or reject an SVC order Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the View SVC Order page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Approve an SVC Order Modify SVC Order Quantity Perform Common DBS Tasks Reject an SVC Order   Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflow are performed on the View SVC Order page. View Service Campaign Order Workflow Page Preview

View Overview Information   Monitor Vehicle Inventory Page Overview Perform Tasks Filter the Monitor Vehicle Inventory Page Look Up a Dealer from the Monitor Vehicle Inventory Page Perform Common DBS Tasks View Detail on the Monitor Vehicle Inventory Page Filter the Monitor Vehicle Inventory Page Look Up a Dealer from the Monitor Vehicle Inventory Page Perform Common DBS Tasks View Detail on the Monitor Vehicle Inventory Page

To  filter the announcements summary list: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. If a text-entry field appears, type a filter value and then click the Search button. If a drop-down list appears, select an option from the list. Note : The page refreshes to display only those items that match your selection. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options and clear the search criteria, click the  Clear  icon.

How to RDR Infiniti Courtesy Vehicles (ICV) Quick Reference Guide The How to RDR Infiniti Courtesy Vehicles Quick Reference Guide provides information for dealer users on how to RDR service loaners/courtesy vehicles. Click here to download the How to RDR Infiniti Courtesy Vehicles Quick Reference Guide.

How to RDR Infiniti Courtesy Vehicles (ICV) Quick Reference Guide The How to RDR Infiniti Courtesy Vehicles Quick Reference Guide provides information for dealer users on how to RDR service loaners/courtesy vehicles. Click here to download the How to RDR Infiniti Courtesy Vehicles Quick Reference Guide.

How to RDR Infiniti Courtesy Vehicles (ICV) Quick Reference Guide The How to RDR Infiniti Courtesy Vehicles Quick Reference Guide provides information for dealer users on how to RDR service loaners/courtesy vehicles. Click here to download the How to RDR Infiniti Courtesy Vehicles Quick Reference Guide.

This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. To complete the Miscellaneous Features section of a study: DBS maintains miscellaneous features information for the current model year and five previous model years (ten previous model years for Infiniti), beginning from the 2011 model year for both divisions. If desired, you can select one or more features to limit the study results. Select each feature which should be included in the study, and then use the center buttons as necessary to customize the Selected Miscellaneous Features list. When you have selected all desired engine types, click the Save button.

To  filter the User Summary page by DBS  role: From the  Role Rights  drop-down list, select a DBS  role assigned to the user. Note : The user's role rights do not necessarily match the user's position at the dealership. Users may be granted a different role rights in DBS  when they require more extensive access than their dealership position would normally allow. Note : The page refreshes to display only those records that match your selection.

To view the alerts summary: Review the list of alerts. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. Note : If multiple pages display, click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow to navigate from page to page.

To  remove a Host report from the Favorites list: Select the report you wish to remove in the Favorites list. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Remove from favorites option. Note : The report name disappears from the Favorites list.

To  remove a Host report from the Favorites list: Select the report you wish to remove in the Favorites list. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Remove from favorites option. Note : The report name disappears from the Favorites list.

To  remove a Host report from the Favorites list: Select the report you wish to remove in the Favorites list. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Remove from favorites option. Note : The report name disappears from the Favorites list.

To  remove a Host report from the Favorites list: Select the report you wish to remove in the Favorites list. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Remove from favorites option. Note : The report name disappears from the Favorites list.

To  remove a Host report from the Favorites list: Select the report you wish to remove in the Favorites list. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Remove from favorites option. Note : The report name disappears from the Favorites list.

To view a repair order from the Express Entry Warranty Claim page: At the bottom of the page, click the  RO button. Note : The Repair Order Information window opens. Click the  Print button to print the RO, or click the  Close button to return to the previous screen.

Note : This task is performed by internal users only. To monitor user status: Type a dealer code in the Dealer field. To limit the results displayed to a specific date range, click in the System Usage From field, and then use the calendar to select the desired date. Click the  Search button.  Note : The system displays the user records that match the search criteria entered.

To change the status of an event: Select an event. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Change Status option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm, or click the  No  button to close the window without confirming. If the event status is "Approved", changing the status updates the event status to "Needs Approval." If the event status is "Needs Approval", changing the status updates the event status to "Approved." An event will not display until it is in an approved status AND the scheduled time has passed.

To add an ICV (Infiniti Courtesy Vehicle) exception or base eligibility: In the Dealer ID field, type the dealer number for which you want to add an exception or base eligibility. Note : DBS  automatically populates the Dealer Name field based on the dealer ID entered. In the Exception Value field, type the number of vehicles from the dealership's vehicle inventory that are expected to be used for courtesy vehicle service during the time period entered. In the Effective Start Date and Effective End Date fields, use the calendars provided to select the start and end date for the exception or base eligibility. From the Base Eligibility / Exception drop-down list, select "Base Eligibility" to record an estimate of the number of vehicles which may be needed for courtesy vehicle service, or select "Exception" to record the number of vehicles the dealership has placed into courtesy vehicle service. From the Active? drop-down list, select whether or not this ICV exception is active. Click the Plus sign to add the eligibility/exception to the summary list. Click the Save button to save the changes you have made on the Manage ICV Exceptions page. Click the  Yes  button to confirm, or click the  No  button to close the window without confirming.

To  search inventory: Select a model year. Select a model. Note : All available vehicles matching the selected model appear in the Results pane. Select optional filters, if desired: Model Description Distance Range and Search Radius Location Status Colors Options, Packages and Accessories To sort the results, select an option from the desired row, using the chevron.. Click the CV button to display the customer view. Click the DV button to display the dealer view. Note : To view vehicle detail, select a vehicle, then from the Action menu, select  View Vehicle Detail If an option is not available, that option is not displayed.

To view the claim history of a warranty claim, expand the History section: View the historical activity of the claim, listed by status date. Note : The Status column shows warnings and errors associated with the claim. Note : The Details column shows actions performed against the claim. Note : The User column shows the name of the user who entered, edited, or submitted the warranty claim in DBS . You can view claim history on any of the following pages: Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and View Warranty Claim.

To view the claim history of a warranty claim, expand the History section: View the historical activity of the claim, listed by status date. Note : The Status column shows warnings and errors associated with the claim. Note : The Details column shows actions performed against the claim. Note : The User column shows the name of the user who entered, edited, or submitted the warranty claim in DBS . You can view claim history on any of the following pages: Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and View Warranty Claim.

To view the claim history of a warranty claim, expand the History section: View the historical activity of the claim, listed by status date. Note : The Status column shows warnings and errors associated with the claim. Note : The Details column shows actions performed against the claim. Note : The User column shows the name of the user who entered, edited, or submitted the warranty claim in DBS . You can view claim history on any of the following pages: Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and View Warranty Claim.

View Overview Information ASR Return Performance Page Overview   View Automatic Stock Replenishment Return Performance Workflow Perform Tasks Access Reports Export ASR Return Performance Information Look Up a Dealer Perform Common DBS Tasks View ASR Return Performance Summary

This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. DBS maintains options, packages, and accessories information for the current model year and five previous model years (ten previous model years for Infiniti), beginning from the 2011 model year for both divisions. If desired, you can select one or more available options to limit the study results. To complete the Options section of a study: Select each option, package, or accessory which should be included in the study, and then use the center buttons as necessary to customize the Selected Options list. When you have selected all desired options, click the Save button.

To look up a dealer from the Monitor Vehicle Inventory page: At the end of the Dealer field, click the Lookup icon. Note : The Dealer Lookup page appears. In the fields provided, type full or partial information, then click the Search icon. Note : You must include an asterisk (*) when typing partial information. Note : The application displays a list of matching dealers. Note : To clear your entries, click the Clear Fields icon. Select the radio button for the desired dealer. Click the Select button. Note : To cancel the lookup, click the Cancel button and close the dialog. Note : The application displays the dealer number in the field.

You have the option to print overnight reports from the Favorites section (only those reports that are listed in this section will be printed) or the Reports section (only those reports matching the existing search selections will be printed). Only those reports generated by the NNA Host during the applicable time period will be printed: By default, clicking the Print Overnight Reports button compiles a listing of all Host Reports generated by the NNA Host from 10:00 PM on the previous date to 6:00 AM EST on the current date) On Mondays, this option includes all reports generated from Friday at 10:00 PM EST through Monday at 6:00 AM EST. During holidays or vacations, this option allows you to select a date range to include all reports for a specific time period (up to the previous 15 days) To print overnight host reports: Click the Print Overnight Reports button in the Favorites section or the Reports section. Note : The Print Overnight Host Report window appears. From the Report Date drop-down list, accept the default selection "Overnight" to print those reports generated within the last 24 hours, or select "Date Range" to specify a date range. Reports are archived for 15 days.  If you selected "Date Range" from the Report Date drop-down list, in the date fields provided, use the calendars to select the start and end date for the report series. Click the Search icon to display available reports. Select the reports you wish to print. Note : If you want to print all of the displayed reports, select the Select All check box.  Click the  Print Selected button, and then click Open to view the reports in Adobe Acrobat Reader. Note : Click the Close button to close without printing any reports. The reports display in Adobe Acrobat as a single concatenated PDF file in landscape format.Click the Print icon in Adobe Acrobat or select additional printing options.

You have the option to print overnight reports from the Favorites section (only those reports that are listed in this section will be printed) or the Reports section (only those reports matching the existing search selections will be printed). Only those reports generated by the NNA Host during the applicable time period will be printed: By default, clicking the Print Overnight Reports button compiles a listing of all Host Reports generated by the NNA Host from 10:00 PM on the previous date to 6:00 AM EST on the current date) On Mondays, this option includes all reports generated from Friday at 10:00 PM EST through Monday at 6:00 AM EST. During holidays or vacations, this option allows you to select a date range to include all reports for a specific time period (up to the previous 15 days) To print overnight host reports: Click the Print Overnight Reports button in the Favorites section or the Reports section. Note : The Print Overnight Host Report window appears. From the Report Date drop-down list, accept the default selection "Overnight" to print those reports generated within the last 24 hours, or select "Date Range" to specify a date range. Reports are archived for 15 days.  If you selected "Date Range" from the Report Date drop-down list, in the date fields provided, use the calendars to select the start and end date for the report series. Click the Search icon to display available reports. Select the reports you wish to print. Note : If you want to print all of the displayed reports, select the Select All check box.  Click the  Print Selected button, and then click Open to view the reports in Adobe Acrobat Reader. Note : Click the Close button to close without printing any reports. The reports display in Adobe Acrobat as a single concatenated PDF file in landscape format.Click the Print icon in Adobe Acrobat or select additional printing options.

You have the option to print overnight reports from the Favorites section (only those reports that are listed in this section will be printed) or the Reports section (only those reports matching the existing search selections will be printed). Only those reports generated by the NNA Host during the applicable time period will be printed: By default, clicking the Print Overnight Reports button compiles a listing of all Host Reports generated by the NNA Host from 10:00 PM on the previous date to 6:00 AM EST on the current date) On Mondays, this option includes all reports generated from Friday at 10:00 PM EST through Monday at 6:00 AM EST. During holidays or vacations, this option allows you to select a date range to include all reports for a specific time period (up to the previous 15 days) To print overnight host reports: Click the Print Overnight Reports button in the Favorites section or the Reports section. Note : The Print Overnight Host Report window appears. From the Report Date drop-down list, accept the default selection "Overnight" to print those reports generated within the last 24 hours, or select "Date Range" to specify a date range. Reports are archived for 15 days.  If you selected "Date Range" from the Report Date drop-down list, in the date fields provided, use the calendars to select the start and end date for the report series. Click the Search icon to display available reports. Select the reports you wish to print. Note : If you want to print all of the displayed reports, select the Select All check box.  Click the  Print Selected button, and then click Open to view the reports in Adobe Acrobat Reader. Note : Click the Close button to close without printing any reports. The reports display in Adobe Acrobat as a single concatenated PDF file in landscape format.Click the Print icon in Adobe Acrobat or select additional printing options.

You have the option to print overnight reports from the Favorites section (only those reports that are listed in this section will be printed) or the Reports section (only those reports matching the existing search selections will be printed). Only those reports generated by the NNA Host during the applicable time period will be printed: By default, clicking the Print Overnight Reports button compiles a listing of all Host Reports generated by the NNA Host from 10:00 PM on the previous date to 6:00 AM EST on the current date) On Mondays, this option includes all reports generated from Friday at 10:00 PM EST through Monday at 6:00 AM EST. During holidays or vacations, this option allows you to select a date range to include all reports for a specific time period (up to the previous 15 days) To print overnight host reports: Click the Print Overnight Reports button in the Favorites section or the Reports section. Note : The Print Overnight Host Report window appears. From the Report Date drop-down list, accept the default selection "Overnight" to print those reports generated within the last 24 hours, or select "Date Range" to specify a date range. Reports are archived for 15 days.  If you selected "Date Range" from the Report Date drop-down list, in the date fields provided, use the calendars to select the start and end date for the report series. Click the Search icon to display available reports. Select the reports you wish to print. Note : If you want to print all of the displayed reports, select the Select All check box.  Click the  Print Selected button, and then click Open to view the reports in Adobe Acrobat Reader. Note : Click the Close button to close without printing any reports. The reports display in Adobe Acrobat as a single concatenated PDF file in landscape format.Click the Print icon in Adobe Acrobat or select additional printing options.

You have the option to print overnight reports from the Favorites section (only those reports that are listed in this section will be printed) or the Reports section (only those reports matching the existing search selections will be printed). Only those reports generated by the NNA Host during the applicable time period will be printed: By default, clicking the Print Overnight Reports button compiles a listing of all Host Reports generated by the NNA Host from 10:00 PM on the previous date to 6:00 AM EST on the current date) On Mondays, this option includes all reports generated from Friday at 10:00 PM EST through Monday at 6:00 AM EST. During holidays or vacations, this option allows you to select a date range to include all reports for a specific time period (up to the previous 15 days) To print overnight host reports: Click the Print Overnight Reports button in the Favorites section or the Reports section. Note : The Print Overnight Host Report window appears. From the Report Date drop-down list, accept the default selection "Overnight" to print those reports generated within the last 24 hours, or select "Date Range" to specify a date range. Reports are archived for 15 days.  If you selected "Date Range" from the Report Date drop-down list, in the date fields provided, use the calendars to select the start and end date for the report series. Click the Search icon to display available reports. Select the reports you wish to print. Note : If you want to print all of the displayed reports, select the Select All check box.  Click the  Print Selected button, and then click Open to view the reports in Adobe Acrobat Reader. Note : Click the Close button to close without printing any reports. The reports display in Adobe Acrobat as a single concatenated PDF file in landscape format.Click the Print icon in Adobe Acrobat or select additional printing options.

About Host Reports: What You Need to Know You have the option to print overnight reports from the Favorites section (only those reports that are listed in this section will be printed) or the Reports section (only those reports matching the existing search selections will be printed). Only those reports generated by the Host during the applicable time period will be printed: By default, clicking the Print Overnight Reports button compiles a listing of all Host Reports generated by the Host from 10:00 PM EST on the previous date to 6:00 AM EST on the current date. On Mondays, this option includes all reports generated from Friday at 10:00 PM EST through Monday at 6:00 AM EST.  During holidays or vacations, this option allows you to select a date range to include all reports for a specific time period (up to the previous 15 days) If you select more than one report to print, all of your reports will be joined into one PDF file with the information for each report printed on a separate page. Hints & Tips: The default search criteria is to display all reports in all statuses for the current month based on the menu tab or application page from which you accessed the Host Reports page. For the best results when searching for a host report, broaden your search criteria: From the All Applications drop-down list, select the "Select" option.  From the Report Status drop-down list, select the "All Statuses" option, if not already selected. From the Time Period drop-down list, select the "Date Range" option, then use the calendars provided to choose the start and end dates for your search. If known, in the Enter Report ID or Name field, type all or a portion of the report ID or name. Click the Search icon. Add the reports you use most to the Favorites section provides a quick and easy way to print all of your Host reports each morning by using the Print Overnight Reports button. If you need to re-print a report, click on the report name until the row turns a dark turquoise. In the Generation pane, click the Action icon for the desired date, and then click Print. Host reports are presented in the PDF file format, and are designed to be printed using the landscape format.

About Host Reports: What You Need to Know You have the option to print overnight reports from the Favorites section (only those reports that are listed in this section will be printed) or the Reports section (only those reports matching the existing search selections will be printed). Only those reports generated by the Host during the applicable time period will be printed: By default, clicking the Print Overnight Reports button compiles a listing of all Host Reports generated by the Host from 10:00 PM EST on the previous date to 6:00 AM EST on the current date. On Mondays, this option includes all reports generated from Friday at 10:00 PM EST through Monday at 6:00 AM EST.  During holidays or vacations, this option allows you to select a date range to include all reports for a specific time period (up to the previous 15 days) If you select more than one report to print, all of your reports will be joined into one PDF file with the information for each report printed on a separate page. Hints & Tips: The default search criteria is to display all reports in all statuses for the current month based on the menu tab or application page from which you accessed the Host Reports page. For the best results when searching for a host report, broaden your search criteria: From the All Applications drop-down list, select the "Select" option.  From the Report Status drop-down list, select the "All Statuses" option, if not already selected. From the Time Period drop-down list, select the "Date Range" option, then use the calendars provided to choose the start and end dates for your search. If known, in the Enter Report ID or Name field, type all or a portion of the report ID or name. Click the Search icon. Add the reports you use most to the Favorites section provides a quick and easy way to print all of your Host reports each morning by using the Print Overnight Reports button. If you need to re-print a report, click on the report name until the row turns a dark turquoise. In the Generation pane, click the Action icon for the desired date, and then click Print. Host reports are presented in the PDF file format, and are designed to be printed using the landscape format.

About Host Reports: What You Need to Know You have the option to print overnight reports from the Favorites section (only those reports that are listed in this section will be printed) or the Reports section (only those reports matching the existing search selections will be printed). Only those reports generated by the Host during the applicable time period will be printed: By default, clicking the Print Overnight Reports button compiles a listing of all Host Reports generated by the Host from 10:00 PM EST on the previous date to 6:00 AM EST on the current date. On Mondays, this option includes all reports generated from Friday at 10:00 PM EST through Monday at 6:00 AM EST.  During holidays or vacations, this option allows you to select a date range to include all reports for a specific time period (up to the previous 15 days) If you select more than one report to print, all of your reports will be joined into one PDF file with the information for each report printed on a separate page. Hints & Tips: The default search criteria is to display all reports in all statuses for the current month based on the menu tab or application page from which you accessed the Host Reports page. For the best results when searching for a host report, broaden your search criteria: From the All Applications drop-down list, select the "Select" option.  From the Report Status drop-down list, select the "All Statuses" option, if not already selected. From the Time Period drop-down list, select the "Date Range" option, then use the calendars provided to choose the start and end dates for your search. If known, in the Enter Report ID or Name field, type all or a portion of the report ID or name. Click the Search icon. Add the reports you use most to the Favorites section provides a quick and easy way to print all of your Host reports each morning by using the Print Overnight Reports button. If you need to re-print a report, click on the report name until the row turns a dark turquoise. In the Generation pane, click the Action icon for the desired date, and then click Print. Host reports are presented in the PDF file format, and are designed to be printed using the landscape format.

About Host Reports: What You Need to Know You have the option to print overnight reports from the Favorites section (only those reports that are listed in this section will be printed) or the Reports section (only those reports matching the existing search selections will be printed). Only those reports generated by the Host during the applicable time period will be printed: By default, clicking the Print Overnight Reports button compiles a listing of all Host Reports generated by the Host from 10:00 PM EST on the previous date to 6:00 AM EST on the current date. On Mondays, this option includes all reports generated from Friday at 10:00 PM EST through Monday at 6:00 AM EST.  During holidays or vacations, this option allows you to select a date range to include all reports for a specific time period (up to the previous 15 days) If you select more than one report to print, all of your reports will be joined into one PDF file with the information for each report printed on a separate page. Hints & Tips: The default search criteria is to display all reports in all statuses for the current month based on the menu tab or application page from which you accessed the Host Reports page. For the best results when searching for a host report, broaden your search criteria: From the All Applications drop-down list, select the "Select" option.  From the Report Status drop-down list, select the "All Statuses" option, if not already selected. From the Time Period drop-down list, select the "Date Range" option, then use the calendars provided to choose the start and end dates for your search. If known, in the Enter Report ID or Name field, type all or a portion of the report ID or name. Click the Search icon. Add the reports you use most to the Favorites section provides a quick and easy way to print all of your Host reports each morning by using the Print Overnight Reports button. If you need to re-print a report, click on the report name until the row turns a dark turquoise. In the Generation pane, click the Action icon for the desired date, and then click Print. Host reports are presented in the PDF file format, and are designed to be printed using the landscape format.

About Host Reports: What You Need to Know You have the option to print overnight reports from the Favorites section (only those reports that are listed in this section will be printed) or the Reports section (only those reports matching the existing search selections will be printed). Only those reports generated by the Host during the applicable time period will be printed: By default, clicking the Print Overnight Reports button compiles a listing of all Host Reports generated by the Host from 10:00 PM EST on the previous date to 6:00 AM EST on the current date. On Mondays, this option includes all reports generated from Friday at 10:00 PM EST through Monday at 6:00 AM EST.  During holidays or vacations, this option allows you to select a date range to include all reports for a specific time period (up to the previous 15 days) If you select more than one report to print, all of your reports will be joined into one PDF file with the information for each report printed on a separate page. Hints & Tips: The default search criteria is to display all reports in all statuses for the current month based on the menu tab or application page from which you accessed the Host Reports page. For the best results when searching for a host report, broaden your search criteria: From the All Applications drop-down list, select the "Select" option.  From the Report Status drop-down list, select the "All Statuses" option, if not already selected. From the Time Period drop-down list, select the "Date Range" option, then use the calendars provided to choose the start and end dates for your search. If known, in the Enter Report ID or Name field, type all or a portion of the report ID or name. Click the Search icon. Add the reports you use most to the Favorites section provides a quick and easy way to print all of your Host reports each morning by using the Print Overnight Reports button. If you need to re-print a report, click on the report name until the row turns a dark turquoise. In the Generation pane, click the Action icon for the desired date, and then click Print. Host reports are presented in the PDF file format, and are designed to be printed using the landscape format.

To  grant publisher authorization: Show the Publishing section, if collapsed. Note : To show the Publishing section, click the  +  icon in the section header. In the Affiliate Division Region section, expand the function tree to the view the divisions and regions for the desired affiliate(s). Select the checkboxes for the desired region(s). Note : To select all regions for a desired division, select the checkbox for the division. Note : To remove a region, clear the checkbox. In the Select Surrogate Publisher section, from the Available Surrogates box, select the desired surrogate(s). Note : You can select up to three users from the list of users who are publishers within the same hierarchy. Click the  Copy or Copy All button to move the selection(s) to the Selected Surrogates box. Note : To remove a surrogate from the Selected Surrogates box, select the surrogate and click the  Remove button. In the Approver section, click the Select button. Note : The Designate Approver page appears. To filter by user ID, from the User Id field, type the approver's user ID. To filter by last name or first name, from the Last Name field, type the approver's last name and optionally type the approver's first name in the First Name field. To filter by business hierarchy, from the Affiliate , Division , and Region drop-down lists, select the desired values. From the filter results, select the desired user. Note : To navigate through the list of user, click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow to navigate from page to page. Click the Select button. Note : Use the page navigation bar to navigate from page to page, if applicable. From the list of communication items, select or clear the items applicable to the publisher. If the publisher has authority to create announcements, select or deselect the level of announcements that the publisher is authorized to create. Click the  Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm, or click the  No  button to close the window without confirming. Note : The publisher now has authority to create, modify, copy, and delete the applicable communication items.

View Overview Information   Manage Part Return Due Date Page Overview Perform Tasks Adjust the Accrual Amount for a Parts Return Change the Due Date for a Single Parts Return Change the Infiniti Rollover Rate Change the Parts Return Schedule for Multiple Dealers Filter the Manage Part Return Schedule Page Manage Parts Return Cancellation Reasons Manage Parts Return Schedule Adjustment Reasons Perform Common DBS  Tasks View the Accrual Adjustment History for a Dealer

View Overview Information   Quick Entry Warranty Claim Page Overview Edit or Create a Warranty Claim Workflow Perform Tasks Batch Validate Complete the Claim Information Section Complete the Comments Section of a Claim Complete the Customer Section of a Claim Complete the Expenses Section of a Claim Complete the Operations Section of a Claim Complete the Parts Section of a Claim Complete the Summary Section of a Claim Look Up a Part Look Up an Operation Code   Perform Common DBS Tasks Print Warranty Claim Submit Warranty Claim Use the Quick Jump Menu Validate Warranty Claim View Dealer Claim Administration Limits View NSH View Repair Order View the Claim Activity Section of a Claim View the History Section of a Claim Batch Validate Complete the Claim Information Section of a Claim Complete the Comments Section of a Claim Complete the Customer Section of a Claim Complete the Expenses Section of a Claim Complete the Operations Section of a Claim Complete the Parts Section of a Claim Complete the Summary Section of a Claim Look Up a Part Look Up an Operation Code Perform Common DBS Tasks Print Warranty Claim Submit Warranty Claim Use the Quick Jump Menu Validate Warranty Claim View NSH View Repair Order View the Claim Activity Section of a Claim View the Claim History Section of a Claim

Create or Edit a Notification Workflow The Notifications function is currently disabled per Nissan request. You can create and edit notifications, but they will not be sent unless the functionality is restored. Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing a notification. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit a Notification Workflow. Create or Edit an Alert Workflow Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow Create or Edit a Calendar Event Workflow

View Overview Information   Batch RDR Page Overview Perform Tasks Perform Common  DBS Tasks Submit an RDR Batch

To  view dealer information: Review the dealer information. To expand or collapse a section, click the + or - icon. -OR- To expand or collapse all sections, click the expand all or collapse all link. To return to the Dealer Summary page, click the Cancel button.

93D689EE-830C-4A91-930A-DA6E3C1A5510\NPSB17-183 PDI Dealer Letter NIS Autopay.pdf

Monitor System Page Overview Purpose Use the Monitor System page to view information about the Dealer Business System (DBS)  The  DBS Monitor System page provides a summary of the health of the major environments including transaction response time, transaction errors, and communication with the DBS network host. Description The content area of the Monitor System page displays the following sections: Environment Status - Displays the current environment status or the status based on the date entered. The status includes transaction volume and average response time. Host Availability - If selected, the Host Availability section displays information about the availability of each functional area or application within DBS . Application Status - If selected, the Application Status section displays information about the DBS  functional areas such as Sales, Service, Parts, or Administration. Monitor Host Socket Listener - If selected, the Monitor Host Socket Listener section displays information about the IP, Status and related status messages. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Monitor System page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Monitor Environment Status Monitor the Host Socket Listener View Application or Transaction Status Information View Current Host Availability View NCI Host Availability View System Transaction Status Information Page Preview

To print the detail for a parts order on the Parts Order Management page: Select the parts order. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Print Detail option. Note : The File Download dialog opens. Click the  Open button. Note : A PDF file opens. From the toolbar, click the Printer icon to print the report.

Create or Edit an Alert Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or editing an alert. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit an Alert Workflow. Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow Create or Edit a Calendar Event Workflow Create or Edit a Notification Workflow

R3 Internal user only Note : This task applies to internal users only. To view full ASR data: In the Dealer Number field, type the dealer number or click the Lookup  icon to search for a dealer. Note : Click here for more information on how to lookup a part. In the  Part Number field, type a part number or click the Lookup  icon to search for a part. Note : Click here for information on how to lookup a part. Click the Move Right ( >> ) icon to move the part number into the Part Number list box. Note : Repeat steps 2-3 to add additional parts to the list, as needed. Click in the first Date Range field to open the calendar. Click on the desired from and to dates to populate the fields. Note : If you enter an unacceptable date range, DBS displays a red Error icon next to the Date Range field. Change your entries as needed. Click the Search icon. Note : A Search Confirmation window opens.  Click Yes to confirm or No to cancel the search. Note : DBS populates the View Full ASR Data section of the page.  Note : To expand or collapse a part number, click the appropriate icon. To expand or collapse all part numbers, click the expand all or collapse all link.

The Manage Host Report page allows you to add and edit information on the page as desired, and then save all changes you have made to the page. Additional features in this new user interface allow you to customize your experience on this page. Please see the  About the Manage Host Report Page topic for additional information. Click the Edit icon for the row you wish to edit. Note : The fields you are allowed to update are activated. If desired, from the Frequency drop-down list, select the schedule for when the report will be generated. If desired, from the Division drop-down list, select whether the report is intended for Nissan or Infiniti users. If desired, in the Report # field, type the unique report number assigned to this report. Note : the report number should match the ID assigned to the report in the Host system. If desired, from the Orientation drop-down list, select whether the report should display and print in portrait orientation or landscape orientation. Note : To review a discussion of portrait vs landscape orientation, please see the Glossary (keyword Orientation). In the Name in English , Name in French , or Name in Spanish fields, update the report titles as necessary. Note : The French and Spanish report titles only display to those users who have selected a different display language in the DBS  header. Click the Save icon for the row to save the row changes, or click the Cancel icon to cancel the row changes and close the row edit. Note : An error message will display at the top of the page and the Save and Cancel icons will change to red if there are any errors in the row. Correct all errors and click the Save icon again. Note : Clicking the Save or Cancel icon for a row impacts only that row, and does not save or cancel any other pending changes. Click the Save button to process all of changes that you have made on the Manage Host Report page since the last Save action, or click the Cancel button to cancel all changes you have made since the last Save action. Note : A confirmation window appears. Click the Yes button to save all of your changes, or click the No button to close the confirmation window and return to the Manage Host Report page where you can make additional changes.

To view the Manage Warranty Claims page: Review the claim status information in the Claims Summary pane. Note : The Claims Summary pane displays a count of the number of claims by claim status within the time period that you specify using the filter drop-down fields. Note : Click here for instructions on filtering the Warranty Claims summary. To view additional claims, click a page number or click the Previous or Next icons. To view a specific page, in the Go to Page field, type a page number, and then click the Go button. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. To view error or warning information, move your cursor over the  or   icons. A  icon indicates that the claim has one or more errors and the claim cannot be submitted until the errors are corrected.  A  icon indicates that the claim has one or more warnings but the claim may still be submitted.  A red circle icon on a row indicates that the warranty claim has an error associated with it. An orange circle icon on a row indicates that the warranty claim has a warning associated with it.

Study Dashboard Page Overview Purpose Use the Study Dashboard page to view the various studies that have been created. From the Study Dashboard, you can open studies to view repair order (RO) and dealership-level data to get more information. You can also use the Study Dashboard to track holds on vehicles. The information can help you work with the dealerships to provide more specific instructions on what to do with the vehicles. Note : The Study Dashboard is available to internal users only. Description The content area of the Study Dashboard page displays the following sections: Component Navigation - Allows you to select the type of study by component group to display in the Study Dashboard summary Filter by - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Page Navigation Bar - Allows you to navigate from page to page, if multiple pages exist Summary - Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Study Dashboard page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Delete a Study Export Study Dashboard Information Filter the Study Summary List Open a Study to View Results Open Hold Study Result Page Open the Create Study Page to Create a Study Open the Create Study Page to Modify a Study Print Study Criteria Print Study Results Restart a Study Suspend a Study View the Study Dashboard Delete a Study Export Study Dashboard Information Filter the Study Summary List Open a Study to View Results Open Hold Study Result Page Open the Create Study Page to Create a Study Open the Create Study Page to Modify a Study Print Study Criteria Print Study Results Restart a Study Suspend a Study View the Study Dashboard View Study Dashboard  Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Study Dashboard page. Create or Modify a Study Workflow Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View One Study Result Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow Page Preview

View Overview Information   Manage Dealer Operation Code Page Overview Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Perform Tasks Change a Dealer Operation Code Export the Dealer Operation Code Summary Filter the Dealer Operation Code Summary Perform Common DBS Tasks Re-Run Translation Process - Dealer Operation Code View the Dealer Operation Code Summary Change a Dealer Operation Code Export the Dealer Operation Code Summary Filter the Dealer Operation Code Summary Perform Common DBS Tasks Re-Run Translation Process - Dealer Operation Code View the Dealer Operation Code Summary

To export information from the Serviced with Open Campaign Report Page: Use the search and filter fields to customize the Vehicle Campaign List. Note : At a minimum, you must select an affiliate, region, area, district, and campaign. Click the Export button. Follow your browser-specific instructions to open or save the Microsoft ®  Excel ®  file.

View User Permissions Page Overview Purpose Use the View User Permissions page to view permissions for a specific user. Description The content area of the View User Permissions page displays the following sections: Quick Jump menu - Appears on the left-hand side of the page. The Quick Jump menu allows you to show one section at a time, or show or hide the default view for all sections. Permission Function Tree - By default, the function tree expands two sections: Menu and User Information. The function tree also includes a Host Report section and a Report Writer section. For internal users, the function tree also includes a Publishing section. Use the + and - icons to show or hide a section. Use the expand all | collapse all features to expand or collapse a section. Cancel button - Returns you to the User Summary page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the View User Permissions page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Use the Quick Jump Menu View User Permissions Use the Quick Jump Menu View User Permissions   Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflow are performed on the View User Permissions page. View User Permissions Workflow Page Preview

Create or Edit a Calendar Event Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or modifying a calendar event. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit a Calendar Event workflow. Create or Edit an Alert Workflow Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow Create or Edit a Notification Workflow

The parts return warning messages display when a dealer access the Parts Return Management page for the first time after one of the warning messages is triggered. Note : This task applies to internal users only. To change the parts return warning message configuration: Click the Change Warning Configuration button. Note : The Change Warning Configuration window appears. In the Warning Message 1 field, modify the warning message that will display to users each time they access the Parts Return Management page after the warning message is triggered. Note : The text in the warning message should match the information in the warning day count field. In the Warning Message 2 field, modify the warning message that will display to users on the last day of the parts return period. In the Warning Day Count field, type the number of days before the parts return due date that the first warning message should be displayed to dealers. Click the  Save  button to save your changes, or click the  Cancel  button to close without saving.

User Summary Page Overview Purpose Use the User Summary page to search for and view the list of users for whom you can set permissions. You can also designate a system administrator, specify primary and secondary contacts, deactivate or reactivate a user, or open pages that allow you to view, copy, set up, or edit permissions for a selected user. Description The content area of the User Summary page displays the following sections: Search and filter criteria - Allows you to search for records that match your criteria Show Active User and Inactive User button - Allows you to toggle between active users only or active and inactive users Save and Cancel buttons  - Allows you to submit or cancel requested changes   User Summary List  -  Displays general information for all records on the page Page Navigation - Allows you to navigate from page to page, if multiple pages exist Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the User Summary page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Deactivate or Reactivate a User Designate Dealer Administrator and Contacts Filter the User Summary by Position    Grant or Remove Access to DBS Open the Copy User Permissions Page Open the Edit User Permissions Page Open the View User Permissions Page Retrieve a List of New or Updated Users Search for a Dealer User  (Dealer Users) Search for a Dealer User  (Internal Users) Search for an Internal User (Internal Users) View User Summary Deactivate or Reactivate a User Designate Dealer Administrator and Contacts Filter the User Summary by Position Grant or Remove Access to DBS Open the Copy User Permissions Page Open the Edit User Permissions Page Open the View User Permissions Page Retrieve a List of New or Updated Users Search for a Dealer User by Dealer Code Search for a Dealer User by Hierarchy Search for a Dealer User by Name Search for an Internal User by Hierarchy Search for an Internal User by Name Search for an Internal User by User ID View User Summary Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the User Summary page. View User Permissions Workflow Edit User Permissions Workflow Page Preview

View Overview Information   Customer Pay Reimbursement Page Overview   View Customer Pay Reimbursement Workflow Perform Tasks Exclude a Job Line Export Customer Pay Results Filter and View Customer Pay Reimbursement Results Perform Common DBS Tasks Print Customer Pay Reimbursement Results View Repair Order Exclude a Job Line Export Customer Pay Results Filter and View Customer Pay Reimbursement Results Perform Common DBS  Tasks Print Customer Pay Reimbursement Results View Repair Order

Hold Study Result Page Overview Purpose Use the Hold Study Result page to view a list of all vehicles, and the associated repair orders, that meet the criteria for Hold studies. Note : The Hold Study Result page is available to internal users only. Description The content area of the Hold Study Result page displays the following sections: Component Navigation -  Allows you to select the type of study by component group to display Filter By -  Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Hold Status -  Allows you to narrow your results further by showing either "Confirmed" or "Requested" hold statuses Results -  Allows you to view the results of the selected criteria Tasks You can perform the following tasks from or on the Hold Study Result page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Export Hold Status Summary Information Filter Hold Status Summary Open a Study to View Results Open One Dealer Study Results Release a Vehicle from Dealer Hold View Dealer Study Results View NSH for a Vehicle in a Study View One Study Result View Repair Order for Vehicle in a Study Export Hold Status Summary Information Filter Hold Status Summary Open a Study to View Results Open One Dealer Study Results Release a Vehicle from Dealer Hold View Dealer Study Results View NSH for a Vehicle in a Study View One Study Result View Repair Order for Vehicle in a Study View Hold Status Summary Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Hold Study Result page. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View One Study Result Workflow Page Preview

To  view part master information: In the Part Number field, type the part number. - OR - Perform a part lookup.  Note : Click here for information on how to look up a part. Note : If you are an internal user, select the desired division. Click the  Search  icon. Note : To remove search criteria, click the Clear icon. Review the information in the Price Book Flag field. If the field displays a "Y", orders may be placed for this part. If the field displays an "N" or is empty, no parts orders will be accepted for this part. To  view a description of a code, move your mouse pointer over the field label. Review the information in the Wholesale Type Code field. If the field displays code "P" (Mechanical) or "Z" (Collision), the part may qualify for an incentive as determined by the Parts Business Team. Note : Not all parts will qualify for incentives. If the value in the  Supersession field is "Y", in the Supersession Info section, click the new part link to open and view the current part number. If a part is superseded, you must view the current part number. If a part is superseded, you must view the current part number.

Internal user only Note : This task applies to internal users only. To export Parts Metrics information: Click the  Export button. Select the output format. Save the file to your local drive. You can filter or sort the data in Microsoft ® Excel ®

View One Study Result Workflow Note: The View One Study Result Workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the  Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View One Study Result Workflow. Define or Modify Study Workflow Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow

To delete a parts order from the Parts Order Management page: Select the parts order you want to delete. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete Order  option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm, or click the  No  button to close the window without confirming. To delete a parts order, the order must be in "New" or "Open" status.

To view NSH (National Service History) from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page: At the bottom of the page, click the NSH button. Note : The National Service History window opens. Click Print to print the NSH report, or click  Close to return to the previous screen.   You can view NSH information regardless of the status of a claim.

To view NSH (National Service History) from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page: At the bottom of the page, click the NSH button. Note : The National Service History window opens. Click Print to print the NSH report, or click  Close to return to the previous screen.   You can view NSH information regardless of the status of a claim.

Filtering the page filters the data in the Alerts section and the Open ROs section. To filter the RO (repair order)  Work in Process page: To filter by the technicians assigned to complete the work, from the First Technician and Second Technician drop-down lists, select the technician(s) assigned. Note : You can only second a second technician if you select a first technician. To filter by the service advisor for the repair order, from the Service Advisor drop-down list, select a service advisor. To filter by other criteria, from the Filter By drop-down list, select one of the options provided. When you select an option from the Filter By drop-down list, a second field, list, or selection box displays. Enter text, select dates, or select an option from the drop-down lists as appropriate. Click the Search icon to display the alerts and open ROs which match the filter criteria you entered. Note : Click the Clear icon to reset the filters.

One Study Result Page Overview Purpose Use the One Study Result page to view a summary of a selected study and a listing of vehicles that satisfy the conditions of the study. Description The content area of the One Study Result page displays the following sections: Filter by -  Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Study Information -  Allows you to view the criteria for inclusion in the study Result -  Allows you to view the results of the selected study Tasks You can perform the following tasks from or on the One Study Result page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Open One Dealer's Study Results View NSH for a Vehicle in a Study View One Study Result View Repair Order Open One Dealer's Study Results View NSH for a Vehicle in a Study View One Study Result View Repair Order View Study Summary  Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the One Study Result page. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View One Study Result Workflow Page Preview

31CB3964-E3AE-423C-8D56-96DA16D884CB\Access Window Stickers in DCS R1-2 v 1.0 2015.pdf

To filter the One Study Result page to display a dealer's results: From the Filter By drop-down list, select "Dealer". In the text box, type the appropriate dealer number. Click the Search icon.

To export the results of customer pay analysis: After you have run the customer pay analysis as desired, click the Export button. Note : Click here for instructions on how to run the customer pay analysis. Select the Excel option. Save the file to your local drive. You can filter, sort, and print the data if you export the customer pay results information to Microsoft ®  Excel ®

MRW: 11/1: Need order that has related order information. Related to CSC - after a part's order has been upgraded to csc order, the new CSC order will have the related order number, which is the original order upgraded to CSC. so TOS or VOR order? MRW: 1/7/13: Related order number is now on the detail line all the way to the right (scroll). Cannot find a CSC order with a related part number - so I manually mocked it up. To view related order detail for a CSC order: In the Parts Order Detail section, scroll right. Click the Related Order Number link. Note : The detail for the related order appears. To view related order detail, the order must a CSC order that was previously a VOR or TOS order. The related order number is the original VOR or TOS order number.

This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. A climatic zone is a pre-defined set of zip codes which match a geographic climate. For example: cities such as Las Vegas, Phoenix, and Death Valley might be included in the "Dry" climatic zone as they each receive minimal rainfall throughout the year; while cities such as Seattle, New Orleans, and Miami might be included in the "Rain" climatic zone as they receive an above-average amount of rainfall. The repair orders included in a study with a climatic zone selection are determined by the address entered in the Customer section of the vehicle's National Service History. To complete the Climatic Zone section of a study: Select each climatic zone which should be included in the study, and then use the center buttons as necessary to customize the Selected Climatic Zones list. When you have selected all desired climatic zones, click the Save button.

To reject all selected parts returns: Select the checkbox for each part return you want to reject. To select all returns in "Submitted" status, select the checkbox in the navigation header. Click the Reject All button. Note : The Reject All button is only enabled when you have selected one or more returns. Note : The Reject Part Return dialog box appears. To reject the selected parts returns and reset the part return status to "Open", click the Yes button. To close the dialog box without rejecting the selected returns, click the No button.

Parts Order Management Page Overview Purpose Use the Parts Order Management page to view open, new, allocated, and backordered part orders. Access the Parts Order Management page by clicking the Parts Order Management link from the Parts menu. Description The content area of the Parts Order Management page displays the following sections: Filter by - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Page navigation bar  - Allows you to navigate from page to page, if multiple pages exist   Parts Orders summary  - Displays general information for all records on the page Parts Orders Detail - Displays specific information for a selected record Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Parts Order Management page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Access Reports Access the Create Parts Order Page Delete a Parts Order Export Parts Order Management Information Filter Parts Order Management Summary Look Up a Part Open the Edit Parts Order Page to Modify a Parts Order Open the VOR Inquiry Page to View Part Availability Open the View Parts Order Page to View Detail Print Parts Order Detail Submit a Parts Order View Parts Order Management Summary and Detail Access Reports Access the Create Parts Order Page Delete a Parts Order Export Parts Order Management Information Filter Parts Order Management Summary Look Up a Part Open the Edit Parts Order Page to Modify a Parts Order Open the Parts Locator Page Open the View Parts Order Page to View Detail Open the VOR Inquiry Page to View Part Availability Print Parts Order Detail Submit a Parts Order View Parts Order Management Summary and Detail Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Parts Order Management page. Edit Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow Page Preview

Michelle: After Release 2, add a link in the Task section to the Access VIMS from RDR History to View Incentives LO. 7/24: Defect: RDR History Screen. Currently, the RDR History page includes the "R2 Report" action. A new action "RDR Detail Report" will replace the R2 Report action and the Print Detail action. 3/15-KB-Defect may have been resolved. Looking at DLRS to verify, but new wording appears in system. . RDR History Page Overview Purpose Use the Retail Delivery Reporting (RDR) History page to view historical reported sales activity and to unwind completed and reported RDRs. RDR history includes all RDR records for a period of 13 months which includes the current sales month plus the 12 prior months. RDR displays on the RDR History page immediately after RDRs are submitted and accepted. Note : When a vehicle is reported as sold, unwound for any reason, and then reported as sold again, the RDR History page shows multiple lines for that single vehicle. Description The content area of the RDR History page displays the following sections: Filter - Allows you to list either fleet or retail records and filter the list by selecting a Filter By category and entering specific criteria. RDR History summary list  - Displays the RDR records that match your selections in the Filter section. Totals - Provides a statistical breakdown of the RDR records matching the filter criteria, for a period of 13 months. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the RDR History page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. About RDR History: What You Need to Know About the RDR History Page Access OMS Vehicle Detail from RDR History Access Reports Export RDR History Information Filter RDR History Filter RDR History by Sales Type Open the RDR Detail Report Page from RDR History Perform Common DBS Tasks Print RDR History Summary Print Vehicle Detail from RDR History View OMS Vehicle Detail from RDR History View Vehicle Detail from RDR History View Vehicle Invoice from RDR History Unwind RDR About RDR History: What You Need to Know About the RDR History Page Access Reports Export RDR History Information Filter RDR History Open the RDR Detail Report Page from RDR History Perform Common  DBS Tasks Print Vehicle Detail from RDR History View Vehicle Detail from RDR History View Vehicle Invoice from RDR History Unwind RDR Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflow are performed on the RDR History page. View RDR History Workflow Page Preview

To filter the Sold with Open Campaign Report page: From the Affiliate drop-down list, select whether you wish to view data from Nissan North America or Nissan Canada. Note : The Division drop-down list updates automatically based on the affiliate selected. From the Region drop-down list, select the region you wish to review. From the Area drop-down list, select the area you wish to review. From the District drop-down list, select the district you wish to review. If desired, enter information to further narrow the details displayed by dealer, VIN, model code, model line, or model year. In the Campaign ID field, type the unique campaign identification number you wish to review. To view a list of current campaigns, review the Campaign Master Table page. If desired, in the  Sale Date from and to fields, use the calendars to select a date range to limit the results displayed by the date on which the vehicle was sold. If desired, in the  RDR Date from and to fields, use the calendars to select a date range to limit the results displayed by the date on which the vehicle RDR was submitted. When you have finished entering your search and filter criteria, click the Search icon. Note : The Vehicle Campaign List section updates to display only those records found which match the criteria you entered.

To view vehicle detail: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the Window Sticker option. View the window sticker. Select the desired language from the drop-down list. Click the Printer icon to print the window sticker if required. To email the window sticker, click the Email button at the lower-right corner of the window sticker. Note: A window opens for you to address the email. Type the sender's email address in the From Address and in the Receiver Address type the recipients' email addresses. In the Subject field, type a subject for the email. Click the Send button.

Report Writer Generate Page Overview (Internal User) Purpose Use the Report Writer Generate page to generate reports. Description The content area of the Report Writer Generate page displays the following sections: Nissan North America (NNA) Hierarchy - Allows you to select the level, region, or dealer to include in the report (Internal users only) Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Report Writer Generate page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Generate a Report (Internal Users) Generate a Report (Internal Users) Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Generate Report page. Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview

Report Writer Generate Page Overview (Internal User) Purpose Use the Report Writer Generate page to generate reports. Description The content area of the Report Writer Generate page displays the following sections: Nissan North America (NNA) Hierarchy - Allows you to select the level, region, or dealer to include in the report (Internal users only) Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Report Writer Generate page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Generate a Report (Internal Users) Generate a Report (Internal Users) Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Generate Report page. Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview

Report Writer Generate Page Overview (Internal User) Purpose Use the Report Writer Generate page to generate reports. Description The content area of the Report Writer Generate page displays the following sections: Nissan North America (NNA) Hierarchy - Allows you to select the level, region, or dealer to include in the report (Internal users only) Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Report Writer Generate page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Generate a Report (Internal Users) Generate a Report (Internal Users) Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Generate Report page. Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview

Report Writer Generate Page Overview (Internal User) Purpose Use the Report Writer Generate page to generate reports. Description The content area of the Report Writer Generate page displays the following sections: Nissan North America (NNA) Hierarchy - Allows you to select the level, region, or dealer to include in the report (Internal users only) Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Report Writer Generate page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Generate a Report (Internal Users) Generate a Report (Internal Users) Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Generate Report page. Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview

Report Writer Generate Page Overview (Internal User) Purpose Use the Report Writer Generate page to generate reports. Description The content area of the Report Writer Generate page displays the following sections: Nissan North America (NNA) Hierarchy - Allows you to select the level, region, or dealer to include in the report (Internal users only) Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Report Writer Generate page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Generate a Report (Internal Users) Generate a Report (Internal Users) Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Generate Report page. Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview

To  submit a parts return from the Parts Return Management page: Select the parts return. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Submit option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to submit the parts return or the  No button to cancel. Note : You cannot submit a parts return if there is a previous parts return for the return period that is not in "Canceled"  Note : If you cancel the submission, edit the parts return to resolve any errors and resubmit. To submit a parts return, the return must be in "New" or "Open" status. You cannot submit a parts return to the host more than five days prior to the return due date.

View Overview Information   View Dealer Information Page Overview View Dealer Information or Permissions Workflow   Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks Use the Quick Jump Menu View Dealer Information Perform Common DBS Tasks Use the Quick Jump Menu View Dealer Information

View Full Automatic Stock Replenishment Data Workflow Note: This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing full Automatic Stock Replenishment (ASR) data.

To delete an RDR: Click the Delete button at the bottom of the page. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes button to delete, or click the  No button to close without deleting.

To delete an RDR: Click the Delete button at the bottom of the page. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes button to delete, or click the  No button to close without deleting.

To  print RFC Detail: Select the desired RFC claim. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Print RFC Detail option. Note: A File Download dialog opens. Click the  Open button. Note: A PDF file opens. From the toolbar, click the Printer icon to print the report.

To report or edit the sale of a vehicle using the Quick Entry RDR page: From the Filter By drop-down list, select the attribute by which to search for the vehicle. In the Filter By data entry field, enter the number by which to search for the vehicle. Click the Search icon to search for the vehicle. Complete or edit each section of the RDR. Complete the Vehicle Section of the RDR. Click here for more information. Complete the Customer Section of the RDR. Click here for more information. Complete the Driver section of the RDR. Click here for more information. Complete the Finance section of the RDR. Click here for more information. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : Any field that displays a   circle indicates the information is required and needs to be completed or corrected before submitting the RDR. Note : If the RDR contains errors, an error message displays. Click the Yes button to save the RDR with errors, or click the No button to close the error message and return to the Quick Entry RDR page. To print the RDR confirmation after submission, select the Automatically print RDR confirmation after submission? checkbox. Click the Submit button to submit the RDR to the NNA Host. Note : When you submit the RDR, a message displays stating that the submission of the RDR to the NNA Host is in process. This may take a few seconds to complete. When DBS  receives acknowledgement from the NNA Host, a response displays in the Summary section, and  DBS  changes the vehicle status to "Retailed" or "RDR Rejected". Note : After the host responds, the cursor returns to the Filter By data entry field to allow you to enter the next RDR.

Internal user only Note : This task applies to internal users only. To  view a custom search group: Select the group you want to view. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the View / Edit option. Note : The Selected Dealers list displays all the dealers for the selected group. You can view the list of dealers by name only or by name and number. To display by dealer name only, click the Dealer Name link. To display by dealer number and dealer name, click the Dealer Code link. You can also view the list of dealers by letter. To display all dealers that start with a specific letter, click the link for the desired letter.

Service Dashboard Page Overview Purpose The Service Dashboard allows you to view service alerts and open repair orders (ROs) in one, user-friendly interface. DBS automatically updates the Service Dashboard page each time a vehicle alert or RO is created or modified. All entries in the Alerts section match keywords from an EDS study. Note : An EDS study is created by DBS Internal users to track information related to vehicle performance or construction. The main study categories are General, Hold, and Informational. Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) are part of informational studies. It is very important to look at the Alerts section regularly so you can respond appropriately to service alerts, especially to vehicle holds. Each dealership may have different procedures for responding to vehicle holds. For example, a dealership might respond by telling customers about the issue and then communicating with the Engineering department for items to be addressed. At times, vehicles may also need to be recalled. Tip : In addition to checking the Service Dashboard page regularly, you may also receive notifications when EDS studies are created. Typically, Service Managers are part of the DBS notification process in which they receive an email when one or more study types are created. Description The content area of the Service Dashboard page displays the following sections: Filter -  Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Alerts -  Displays job lines from ROs that have alerts associated with them. DBS places a repair order job line in the Alerts section when the job line matches any of the following criteria: Active Hold Study Active Informational Study Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) keywords defined in one or more EDS studies Open ROs -  Displays all open repair orders without alerts Color-Coding in Alerts Section Color-coding in the Alerts section is designed to help you quickly identify the type of alert being issued by NNA/NCI, as described in the following table. Matched Study Type Color Highlight Vehicle Hold Only Red Vehicle Hold and Informational Red Informational Only Yellow Linked TSB with matching keywords Yellow Tasks You can perform the following tasks from or on the Service Dashboard page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Filter the Service Dashboard Hold Vehicle or Ignore Request View NSH from the Service Dashboard View Repair Order Information View Study Alert Detail View Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) View the Service Dashboard Filter the Service Dashboard Hold Vehicle or Ignore Request View NSH from the Service Dashboard View Repair Order Information View Study Alert Detail View Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) View the Service Dashboard   Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Service Dashboard page. View the Service Dashboard Workflow Page Preview

To  add a part to a parts return: Type a valid part number or perform a part lookup. Note : Click here for more information on how to look up a part. Type a valid return quantity. Note : If an error icon appears, move your mouse over the icon to view any errors associated with the part or any remaining required detail and correct the error, as needed. Click the Add button. Note : If an error icon appears, move your mouse over the icon to view and correct any errors. Click the Save button. To add a part to a parts return, the return must be in "New" or "Open" status.

View Overview Information   Monitor System Page Overview    Perform Tasks Monitor Environment Status Monitor the Host Socket Listener Perform Common  DBS Tasks View Application or Transaction Status Information View Current Host Availability View NCI Host Availability Monitor Environment Status Monitor the Host Socket Listener Perform Common DBS Tasks View NCI Host Availability

To view a warranty claim from the Manage Warranty Claim page: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the warranty claim you want to view. From the Action menu, select the  View Claim  option. Note : DBS displays the selected warranty claim. The View Claim option is available for warranty claims with the following status types: Submitted, Suspended-Region, Suspended-National, Denied, Approved, and Approved-Adjusted.

To  complete the Comments section of a warranty claim: If you are the advisor or service consultant, in the Advisor Comments field, type the desired comments. If you are the technician, in the Technician Comments field, type the desired comments. Note : Click  here  for instructions on how to complete the Customer section of a claim. DBS displays errors and warning messages in the Alerts area at the bottom of the Comments section.

To  complete the Comments section of a warranty claim: If you are the advisor or service consultant, in the Advisor Comments field, type the desired comments. If you are the technician, in the Technician Comments field, type the desired comments. Note : Click  here  for instructions on how to complete the Customer section of a claim. DBS displays errors and warning messages in the Alerts area at the bottom of the Comments section.

To add a part by using an order number: In the  Dealer Reference Number field, type the part order number, or click the Part # Lookup button to search for a part. Click the Add By Order button. Note : Click the Clear icon to reset the search criteria. Click the OK button to continue. Click the Inquiry button to view part availability. Note : Parts with a  icon indicate that part ordering is restricted for this part. You must place an SVC order to request this part. Information is only available for existing part orders with less than 40 part lines that have no warning messages and no duplicate parts.

Automated PDI Payments Quick Reference Guide As of February 1, 2018 - dealers will no longer need to submit warranty claims for PDI fuel and labor charges. All PDI charges will automatically be paid when the vehicle is invoiced to the retailer. Dealers should review the attached quick reference guide and/or contact the PDI help desk at 615-725-0588 with any questions or concerns. Note : Any warranty claims submitted for PDI charges after February 1 st will be automatically suspended. Click  here to download the Automated PDI Payments Reference Guide.

Automated PDI Payments Quick Reference Guide As of February 1, 2018 - dealers will no longer need to submit warranty claims for PDI fuel and labor charges. All PDI charges will automatically be paid when the vehicle is invoiced to the retailer. Dealers should review the attached quick reference guide and/or contact the PDI help desk at 615-725-0588 with any questions or concerns. Note : Any warranty claims submitted for PDI charges after February 1 st will be automatically suspended. Click  here to download the Automated PDI Payments Reference Guide.

Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing a Service Campaign (SVC) order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow. Manage Campaign Parts Workflow View Service Campaign Order Workflow

To use the quick jump menu: Click the expand  (>>) icon. Click one of the options in the menu. To move to a specific section of the page, click a section title in the menu. To show or hide all sections, click the expand all or collapse all link. To jump to the top or bottom of the page, click the top or bottom link. To return to the top of the page from any section, click the Top  button. To close the quick jump menu, click the collapse (<<) icon.

To use the quick jump menu: Click the expand  (>>) icon. Click one of the options in the menu. To move to a specific section of the page, click a section title in the menu. To show or hide all sections, click the expand all or collapse all link. To jump to the top or bottom of the page, click the top or bottom link. To return to the top of the page from any section, click the Top  button. To close the quick jump menu, click the collapse (<<) icon.

To use the quick jump menu: Click the expand  (>>) icon. Click one of the options in the menu. To move to a specific section of the page, click a section title in the menu. To show or hide all sections, click the expand all or collapse all link. To jump to the top or bottom of the page, click the top or bottom link. To return to the top of the page from any section, click the Top  button. To close the quick jump menu, click the collapse (<<) icon.

To use the quick jump menu: Click the expand  (>>) icon. Click one of the options in the menu. To move to a specific section of the page, click a section title in the menu. To show or hide all sections, click the expand all or collapse all link. To jump to the top or bottom of the page, click the top or bottom link. To return to the top of the page from any section, click the Top  button. To close the quick jump menu, click the collapse (<<) icon.

To use the quick jump menu: Click the expand  (>>) icon. Click one of the options in the menu. To move to a specific section of the page, click a section title in the menu. To show or hide all sections, click the expand all or collapse all link. To jump to the top or bottom of the page, click the top or bottom link. To return to the top of the page from any section, click the Top  button. To close the quick jump menu, click the collapse (<<) icon.

To delete a parts return from the Parts Return Management page: Select the parts return you want to delete. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the  Yes  button to confirm, or click the  No  button to close the window without confirming.   To delete a parts return, the return must be in "New" or "Open" status.

To search for Campaign Master Table information: To search for information for a specific campaign, in the Campaign ID field, enter the campaign's unique ID. To search for information based on text within the campaign description field, in the Description field, type the desired search text. To search for information based on the location where repairs will be performed, from the Repair By drop-down list, select the desired location. To search for information based on when the campaign information was entered into DBS , in the Internal Effective Date From and To fields, enter the campaign's internal information. To search for information based on the campaign's effective date, in the CA Effective Date From and To fields, enter the campaign dates. From the Stop Sale drop-down list, select whether or not sales of vehicles impacted by this campaign should be halted until repairs are performed. From the Parts Restriction drop-down list, select whether or not the parts required to complete the campaign are on the list of restricted parts. Note : The Parts Restriction flag is set to "Yes" for a campaign when the parts required to repair the vehicle are required for two different campaigns. Click the Search icon to display the results which match the criteria you entered. After you have completed your search, use the summary display features to sort or navigate your displayed results.

10/22/15: Due to QC 10846, title is now filter parts on the edit parts return page since Infiniti NNA can no longer create parts returns. To filter parts return detail: To filter the part return detail by part number, in the  Filter By field, type the part number you wish to locate. To filter the part return detail by part type (ASR or MOQ), select the view option from the View By drop-down list. Click the Search icon. Note : The Parts Return Detail section updates to display the part details that match the criteria you entered.

To add multiple parts to an ASR search request: Click the Add Multi button. In the Part Number fields provided, enter each part number for which you want to view ASR data. When you have added all desired part numbers, click the Add All button. If desired, select a part number and then use the sort buttons to select a display order for the data. Click the Search icon. Click the Expand or Collapse icons as necessary to display the desired data.

To  open an application page from the Site Map : On the page footer, click the  Site Map  link. Click the Expand (+) icon to display the application page names of a section. Click the application page link you want to access. Note: The application page will open on a separate window.

Manage Custom Search Group Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing custom search groups. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Custom Search Group (Parts Metrics) Workflow. View Parts Metrics Workflow

Note : This task is performed by internal users only. To view current host availability: Click the View Current Host Availability button. Note : The host availability for each DBS  application appears.

Note : This task is performed by internal users only. To  view system transaction status information: Click the View Application Information button. Click the Action icon for the application you want to review. From the Action menu, select the Drill Down menu option. View the status information displayed for the selected application.

To  open a submitted parts return: Select the parts return you want to view. Note : The parts return must not be in "New" or "Open" status. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the View Return  option. Note : The View Parts Return page appears.

To  complete the Buyer section of an RDR: From the Title drop-down list, select a title. Enter or update the customer name, address, and contact information. Note : If you select "Commercial Account" from the Title drop-down list, you must enter the company name and details instead of the customer details.  Note : Type all 9s in the Daytime or Evening field if the customer does not have a phone. In the Email field, type the customer email address. Note : Type three asterisks (*) if the customer does not have an email address. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. A  will display for any missing or incorrect data. Correct all errors before submitting the RDR. Note : If you are ready to submit the RDR, click here for more information. It is incredibly important that you verify and correct all RDR data before submission. You cannot modify a submitted RDR.

To print the criteria for a study: Select the study for which you want to print the study criteria. Click the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Print Study Criteria menu option. Select the option to save or open the document. Click the OK button.

View Overview Information   National Service History Page Overview View National Service History Workflow Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks Search for a Customer or Vehicle Perform Common DBS Tasks Search for a Customer or Vehicle

To exclude a job line from the analysis results: In the Parts Markup or Labor Rate results area, move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the job line you want to exclude. From the  Action  menu, select  the Exclude option. Note : The Exclude Repair Order Job Line window opens. Click the  OK button to confirm exclusion of the job line from the analysis results. Note : The RO job line is excluded from the analysis results and the total amounts are automatically recalculated. When you access the Customer Pay Reimbursement page, no filters are set and no results are visible.

To complete the Customer section of a warranty claim: From the Owner Type drop-down list, select an owner type. Type the customer name, address, email address, and telephone numbers to add or change the default customer information. Note: Click  here for instructions to view the Claim Activity section. DBS displays errors and warning messages in the Alerts area at the bottom of the Customer section.

To complete the Customer section of a warranty claim: From the Owner Type drop-down list, select an owner type. Type the customer name, address, email address, and telephone numbers to add or change the default customer information. Note: Click  here for instructions to view the Claim Activity section. DBS displays errors and warning messages in the Alerts area at the bottom of the Customer section.

To view the reports list: View the list of reports. Note : A purple "N" appears beside the name of reports owned by you. In order to sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. You can generate, replicate, or view any report in your list. You must be the owner of a report, indicated by a purple "N," in order to delete, transfer, copy, modify, or make public.

To view the reports list: View the list of reports. Note : A purple "N" appears beside the name of reports owned by you. In order to sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. You can generate, replicate, or view any report in your list. You must be the owner of a report, indicated by a purple "N," in order to delete, transfer, copy, modify, or make public.

To view the reports list: View the list of reports. Note : A purple "N" appears beside the name of reports owned by you. In order to sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. You can generate, replicate, or view any report in your list. You must be the owner of a report, indicated by a purple "N," in order to delete, transfer, copy, modify, or make public.

To view the reports list: View the list of reports. Note : A purple "N" appears beside the name of reports owned by you. In order to sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. You can generate, replicate, or view any report in your list. You must be the owner of a report, indicated by a purple "N," in order to delete, transfer, copy, modify, or make public.

To view the reports list: View the list of reports. Note : A purple "N" appears beside the name of reports owned by you. In order to sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. You can generate, replicate, or view any report in your list. You must be the owner of a report, indicated by a purple "N," in order to delete, transfer, copy, modify, or make public.

View Parts Order Page Overview Purpose Use the View Parts Order page to view part orders that cannot be modified, including parts orders that are manually created by NNA due to special circumstances, or Part Orders that are in backorder status that you want to cancel. Examples of manually created parts orders include manual (MAN), employee (EMP), special (SPC), and transfer (TRN). You can view a Parts Order from the Parts Order Management page. You must first search for and locate the desired parts order that you want to view. Use the Action context menu to open the View Parts Order page. Description The content area of the View Parts Order page displays the following sections: View Parts Order header - Appears at the top of the page and allows you to view general information about the part order including the order status, order type, shipping information, and backorder or cross ship preferences Parts Order Detail - Allows you to view the parts on the order and, if the original order was upgraded to a CSC order, you can also scroll right to view the related order number Buttons - Allow you to cancel, upgrade, or close View Parts Order header - Appears at the top of the page and allows you to view general information about the part order. Parts Order Detail - Allows you to view the parts on the order and, if the original order was upgraded to a CSC order, you can also scroll right to view the related order number Buttons - Allow you to close Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the View Parts Order page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Cancel a Backorder Perform CSC Upgrade for a VOR or TOS Order in Backorder Status View Parts Order View Related Order Detail for a CSC Order View Parts Order Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the View Parts Order page. View Parts Order Workflow Page Preview

To export vehicle inventory information: Click the  Export button. Select the Microsoft ®  Excel ® output format Save the file to your local drive. If you filter the page before exporting, only those records that meet the filter criteria export. You can filter, sort, and print the data if you export the vehicle summary information to Microsoft ® Excel ® .

View Overview Information   RDR Detail Report Page Overview Perform Tasks Batch RDR Perform Common DBS Tasks

To filter the Monitor Vehicle Inventory page: If desired, type filter criteria in the fields provided. Click the Search icon. In the Monitor Vehicle Inventory section, view the records which match the search criteria you entered. To sort the inventory data by a specific field, click the column header. If multiple pages exist, do one of the following to navigate from page to page: Click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow. - OR - In the Go to Page field, type a page number, and then click the Go button.

To access the Create Standard Operation Group page: Click the Create button. Note : The Create Standard Operation Group page opens.

The Manage Host Report page presents a new user interface for DBS  that makes it quicker and easier to get things done. For example, in this page, the summary list and create functions have been combined into one page. See the  About the Manage Host Report Page  topic for additional details. It is worth noting that the upper section of the page is NOT where you apply filter criteria, the new user interface includes the ability to add new reports in the upper section. The gray bar at the top of the Summary section is where filter criteria is applied. To filter the Manage Host Report page: From the drop-down lists below the header for a column, select one or more filter criteria. To use a text filter, simply begin typing the text you wish to view (in this case the report number). DBS  updates with each letter you type to automatically display those report numbers which contain the typed text. Note : The text filter is a simple filter that searches for the letters typed in any order. For example: if you begin by typing the letter "F", all report numbers which contain an "F" such as FAR0165-R1 and HRF0150-R1 will display as results. Continue typing additional characters in the report number to further limit the results displayed.

Note : This task applies to internal users only. To  view the SVC Order Management summary and detail: Review the list of orders. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title.   To select an order, click anywhere in the row that contains the order. To show detail or hide detail, select an order and then click the  Show Detail  or Hide Detail link. Note : The Service Campaign Order Detail pane appears. If error or warning icons appear, move your mouse over the icons to view a description.

Note: This task applies to internal users only. To  import changes to position permissions: Click the Import button. Note : The Select files to upload dialog appears. Locate the Microsoft Excel file on your computer and then click the Open button. Note : The system updates the permissions for the positions in the spreadsheet. To import position permission changes, you must have the file that contains the changes on your computer.

To view alerts: View alerts as they scroll at the top of the page. Note: If you move your cursor over an alert it will stop scrolling until you move the cursor away. Alerts display system critical information such as when a system is down. Different alerts can appear for each landing page because alerts are specific to a functional area. 

To  perform a CSC upgrade for a VOR or TOS order: Select the order you want to upgrade. Click the CSC Upgrade button. Note : The Infinitinet/INET Backorder/Customer Care Upgrade page appears. Note : Proceed with the upgrade in Infinitinet/INET and then exit Infinitinet/INET. Note : DBS creates the new CSC order overnight and makes it available for viewing the next day. Note : If the order has a related order number, a link to the related order appears on the CSC order, which is the original order upgraded to CSC. To perform a CSC upgrade, the VOR or TOS order must be in "Backorder" status.

To  access the site map from any DBS  application page: Click the Site Map link.

View Overview Information View Parts Return Status Page Overview Perform Tasks Export Information from the View Parts Return Status Page Filter the View Parts Return Status Page Perform Common DBS  Tasks

To  access the View RFC Detail page: Select the desired RFC claim. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  View RFC option. Note : The View RFC Detail page appears. Note : To  return to the Request For Credit (RFC) Status page, click the Close button. -OR- Click the RFC Number hyperlink for the desired RFC claim.

To  access the Edit Standard Operation Category page: Select a category. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the  Edit Category option. Note : The Edit Standard Operation Category page opens.

Note : By default, the Vehicle Inventory page displays a list of all non-fleet vehicles in dealer inventory. To filter vehicle inventory: From the Fleet Filter drop-down list, select a fleet option. Note : Each time you make a selection from a drop-down list, DBS applies the filter and refreshes the list of vehicles. From the Vehicle Type drop-down list, select a vehicle type. From the Model drop-down list, select one or more models.  From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option and then complete additional filter values, as needed. Note : When filtering by serial number, you are only allowed to enter six digits for the serial number, full VINs or additional characters are not allowed. Type or select a secondary filter value, as needed. Note : For more customized filter control, click the Advanced Filter icon to create a custom filter. View the vehicles that meet the selected criteria. To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the Clear icon. If an option is not available, that option is not displayed.

View Overview Information   Event Calendar Page Overview Field, Button, and Link Definitions Perform Tasks Perform Common  DBS Tasks Search for a Specific Date View the Event Calendar Summary and Detail Perform Common  DBS Tasks Search for a Specific Date View the Event Calendar Summary and Detail

To  access the Edit Dealer Permissions page: Select the dealer. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit Dealer Permissions option. Note : The Edit Permissions page appears.

To view a Host report:  In the Favorites list or in the Reports list, select the report you wish to view. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. In the Generation section, move your cursor over the Action icon for the report you want to view. From the Action  menu, select the View option. Note : If desired, click the Print button at the bottom of the page to print the report, or click the Close button to return to the Host Reports page. Add reports to the Favorites list so you can access them quickly.

To view a Host report:  In the Favorites list or in the Reports list, select the report you wish to view. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. In the Generation section, move your cursor over the Action icon for the report you want to view. From the Action  menu, select the View option. Note : If desired, click the Print button at the bottom of the page to print the report, or click the Close button to return to the Host Reports page. Add reports to the Favorites list so you can access them quickly.

To view a Host report:  In the Favorites list or in the Reports list, select the report you wish to view. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. In the Generation section, move your cursor over the Action icon for the report you want to view. From the Action  menu, select the View option. Note : If desired, click the Print button at the bottom of the page to print the report, or click the Close button to return to the Host Reports page. Add reports to the Favorites list so you can access them quickly.

To view a Host report:  In the Favorites list or in the Reports list, select the report you wish to view. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. In the Generation section, move your cursor over the Action icon for the report you want to view. From the Action  menu, select the View option. Note : If desired, click the Print button at the bottom of the page to print the report, or click the Close button to return to the Host Reports page. Add reports to the Favorites list so you can access them quickly.

To view a Host report:  In the Favorites list or in the Reports list, select the report you wish to view. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. In the Generation section, move your cursor over the Action icon for the report you want to view. From the Action  menu, select the View option. Note : If desired, click the Print button at the bottom of the page to print the report, or click the Close button to return to the Host Reports page. Add reports to the Favorites list so you can access them quickly.

By default, the RDR History page displays RDRs by RDR submit date for new retail vehicles and the current month. To display any other information, you must filter the RDR History page. To  filter the RDR History page by sales type: If desired, use the  Sale Type , Vehicle Type , and Filter By drop-down lists to customize the display. At the top of the page, select the By Sales Type radio button. Note : The information in the RDR History area updates to display RDR history information by sales type for the vehicle type, sale type, and month displayed in the drop-down lists. In the Sale Type selection pane on the left, click a sale type to further limit the RDR History display. The information in the RDR History section of the page automatically updates to display RDR records which meet the filter criteria. To reset the filter criteria and page view to the default display, click the Clear icon. Clicking the Clear icon resets the page display to the default display and filter criteria selections. The page updates to display new vehicles for the current sales month listed by the RDR submission date.

To  view position permissions: Show the section, if collapsed. Note : To show a section, click the + icon in the section header. Use the function tree to expand or collapse the nodes, as desired. Note : To expand all items in the section, click the expand all link in the section header. Note : The active permissions contain a check. To return to the Positions Summary page, click the Cancel button. The function tree displays permission options in hierarchical order, starting with the menu items at the top and ending with the specific functional items at the bottom.

To  search application audit information: To limit the summary display, select or type search options in the fields provided.  Click the Search icon. View the audit information that meets the selected criteria. Note : To reset the search criteria to the default options and remove any search criteria, click the  Clear icon. Note : Click the arrow to the right of any column name to sort the summary information. The search selection fields at the top of the content area will vary based on your user role. Due to the number of transactions logged for auditing in DBS , it is important that you reduce the strain on the application resources by conducting targeted searches.

To print the Returns and Accrual Information page: Click the Print button. Follow the instructions for your browser and/or printer to print the page information.

Announcements Page Overview Purpose Use the Announcements page to review the list of announcements you have the authority to act upon based on your user profile and security settings. The announcements you created and any announcements created by those you have surrogate authority for display in the summary view. Description The content area of the Announcements page displays the following sections: Filter By - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Summary - Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Announcements page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Change the Status of an Announcement Copy an Announcement Delete an Announcement Filter the Announcements Summary Open the Create Announcement Page   Open the Edit Announcement Page View Announcements Summary View or Print Announcement Detail Change the Status of an Announcement Copy an Announcement Delete an Announcement Filter the Announcements Summary Open the Create Announcement Page   Open the Edit Announcement Page View Announcements Summary View or Print Announcement Detail   Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Announcements page. Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow Page Preview

Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating, modifying, and approving an announcement.  Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow. Create or Edit an Alert Workflow Create or Edit a Calendar Event Workflow Create or Edit a Notification Workflow

To copy an announcement: Select the announcement you want to copy. Move your mouse pointer over the  Action  icon. From the Action menu, select the Copy  option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Copy button to confirm, or click the Cancel button to close the window without confirming. The default status of a copied announcement is "Needs Approval".

To use a summary page display definition: From the Select Definition drop-down list, select a definition. Click the Go button. Note : The summary display updates according to the configuration of the selected definition.

To use a summary page display definition: From the Select Definition drop-down list, select a definition. Click the Go button. Note : The summary display updates according to the configuration of the selected definition.

To use a summary page display definition: From the Select Definition drop-down list, select a definition. Click the Go button. Note : The summary display updates according to the configuration of the selected definition.

To use a summary page display definition: From the Select Definition drop-down list, select a definition. Click the Go button. Note : The summary display updates according to the configuration of the selected definition.

To use a summary page display definition: From the Select Definition drop-down list, select a definition. Click the Go button. Note : The summary display updates according to the configuration of the selected definition.

To use a summary page display definition: From the Select Definition drop-down list, select a definition. Click the Go button. Note : The summary display updates according to the configuration of the selected definition.

To use a summary page display definition: From the Select Definition drop-down list, select a definition. Click the Go button. Note : The summary display updates according to the configuration of the selected definition.

Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing standard operation codes. Related Workflows ( Note to developer : List the related workflows and link to them.) The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow

Copy User Permissions Page Overview Purpose Use the Copy User Permissions page to designate the user or users to whom you want to copy permissions. Description The content area of the Copy User Permissions page displays the following sections: Copy User Permissions of First Name Last Name  - Shows you the selected user for whom you want to copy permissions Filter By - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria   Page Navigation - Allows you to navigate from page to page, if multiple pages exist  (internal user only) Buttons  - Allow you to proceed with the request to copy or cancel the request. User List - Allows you to select a user or users to whom you want to copy permissions Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Copy User Permissions page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Copy User Permissions Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflow is performed on the Copy User Permissions page. Edit User Permissions Workflow Page Preview

To select a user to receive report definitions: From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Report Name window appears. Type a new report name. Click the  OK button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : Report Writer adds the report(s) to the target user's list.    If you are transferring reports, Report Writer removes the reports from the user's list and adds the reports to the target user's list. If you are copying reports, Report Writer retains the reports on your list and adds the reports to the target user's list.

To select a user to receive report definitions: From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Report Name window appears. Type a new report name. Click the  OK button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : Report Writer adds the report(s) to the target user's list.    If you are transferring reports, Report Writer removes the reports from the user's list and adds the reports to the target user's list. If you are copying reports, Report Writer retains the reports on your list and adds the reports to the target user's list.

To select a user to receive report definitions: From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Report Name window appears. Type a new report name. Click the  OK button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : Report Writer adds the report(s) to the target user's list.    If you are transferring reports, Report Writer removes the reports from the user's list and adds the reports to the target user's list. If you are copying reports, Report Writer retains the reports on your list and adds the reports to the target user's list.

To select a user to receive report definitions: From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Report Name window appears. Type a new report name. Click the  OK button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : Report Writer adds the report(s) to the target user's list.    If you are transferring reports, Report Writer removes the reports from the user's list and adds the reports to the target user's list. If you are copying reports, Report Writer retains the reports on your list and adds the reports to the target user's list.

To select a user to receive report definitions: From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Report Name window appears. Type a new report name. Click the  OK button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : Report Writer adds the report(s) to the target user's list.    If you are transferring reports, Report Writer removes the reports from the user's list and adds the reports to the target user's list. If you are copying reports, Report Writer retains the reports on your list and adds the reports to the target user's list.